Home

Cabletron Systems SPECTRUM 1800 User's Manual

1. ine Kee Configuring X 25 Address doxehben Templates Geet Translation Template Parameters nies E E T ene Replacing GeT m Address or ve Data Dil Diep a mi Protocol ID eu ce arcane esti kae ae ERE Replacing ON C asc iss asec 8 31 Translation Penile ni aiccnnwa creda o radici beflrg cmd Sd Tesmbe a Translation Tempe carens Cu Onna nie 525 105 25 PWORS a od empta P EE HR FUDEPRER GERI UER Baad AO EV TOR E euis abc qus u locu tboreatored daciba oe Chapter9 Configuring SNA TPAC TIONG TM 9 1 Required 1 5 1s MEN A MULA CLE Mee 9 3 Configuring an SNA Port M SNA Port Parameters E E oca Etat Su Configuring Subscriber Addpesem HP Subscriber Parameters C Le Configuring a Hunt Bion jor SNA Subiedben n Configuring sn LLC2 Virtual LAN ID uus asceiettreurethucusce Mal viii SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Coan ens LU BOSIS enea ELCS Host Paremieletsnoaodo soap ol Er CM RR ER CO be dep Conan ELE S Intet tabes eapropter REDI aba cR scraa bespbuer Yd LLC Ge PRISON airia kT aa uad A REED VEMM RR ER 9 28 Chapter 10 Configuring BSC Interactive Introduction 10 1 Required Configuration 10 1 Configuring BSC Interactive Poit Kecondo 102 BSC Interactive Port Parameters ELLE Configuring Subscriber PEA 10 8 aubsenber Parame eT iea DR Haag vu EH ERU LR A 10 8 Conhmmng BSC Interactive Dex1668 sien
2. O Configuring Bridge Filter Appolonie UN 1O10 Bridge Filter Application Parameters esses 16 11 or eMe uM HOMER DANAUM 16 12 Hndse Port PERCHE uoo ceca a e uicce ducis area natin pie bna eas EIU Tad 16 13 Chapter 17 Configuring SNMP Configuring SNMP System Defaults esses 17 1 System Derguits Parameters a do secu ccn uec s dr eeue D Pt Configuring a Community Table eerte eee las Community Table Parameter Ricca cussed tee ccs ancres Fad Configuring Trap Routing siccsiccsiwisaccwnensrmiessesvesioreucswrimvsnswescccm lA Trap Routing Paramete Senescence UPA SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Section Ill Operation Chapter 18 Introduction to System Operation Chapter 19 On line Operations Bde CORO Lauro HERR EEA HORS A Remote Control from the SmartS witch 1800 Remote Control from an Async PAD Port Transferring Files and Updating Software csetera Remote File VEIBSTGE saroien Pen oed RO AR EH HEAR RARA Remote Software Update Backing Up and Restoring Fils Backing Up and Restoring a Database Copying a SmartSwitch 1800 Directory dien a i PC Backing Up and Restoring Local Files eese Enable Disable Operations Disabling and Enabling Ports Quiescing and Unquiescing Ports Tests IP Ping Connectivity Test CSU DSU Tests m eats Reloading Auxiliary Console initi din
3. OA PgDn v OB SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Setting the Date and Time Various operations and reports record the current date and time as recognized by the originating device This operation allows changing one or both to assure that all devices in a network are synchronized Press B at the Node Configuration Menu or A A B from the Main Menu The date and time as currently recognized by the SmartSwitch will be displayed and you will be asked Do you want to change the date Press Y to change the date or Enter to leave it as is If changing the date enter the correct information noting the values in Table 2 3 After the date change or leave the time in the same way as the date Table 2 3 Date and Time Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Y N Date N Year 1980 2099 Changing the Login Password Getting Started The login password is used to gain access to menu operations When software is shipped to the customer the password is NETLINK Note the upper case all pass words are case sensitive To change the password press A at the Node Configuration Menu or A A A from the Main Menu When prompted 1 Enter the old pass word 2 Enter the new password up to 14 characters A Z a z 0 9 3 Enter the new password again for verification If this password is not the same as the entry in step 2 the system will reject the new password and the old one w
4. MTL Linkup The necessary level 1 modem signals are present and the level 2 link is up NA Some state other than those above has been entered Database and System Memory Values Two sets of values exist for Port parameters Database values exist in the software and are recorded as System Memory values when the node is booted Ifthe port type is the same in both sets of values both sets will be displayed Any change you make will be recorded as a Database value and will be copied to the System Memory side only if you press F7 Note that changes will not be actually be saved to the database until you press F3 to exit the record Pressing F7 will display On line changes disable link are you sure you want to If you press Y the link will be disabled parameters copied and the link re enabled If you press N you will be prompted Do you want to change port parameters partially without disable Pressing Y will propagate any changes to those parameters that do not require disabling the link Pressing N will return you to the first screen in the Port record Configuring the Port Parameters To configure the port with the parameter values necessary for your application go to the appropriate chapter e Frame relay Chapter 7 Configure the protocol that e X 25 Chapter 8 m will run over the physical port e SNA Chapter 9 e BSC Interactive Chapter 10 e BSC Batch Chapter 11 e Async Chapter 12 e Voice Cha
5. RCV Invalid Event Format from Net Severity 4 Meaning The node has received an event with an invalid format Action None Database Error Access Restricted Severity 1 Meaning The database is inconsistent with what the software expects Action Contact Cabletron Systems Technical Support See page 22 4 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 System Events 440 441 442 443 445 446 447 448 Abrev Addr File Upd ABVSUB DAT Severity 4 Meaning The Abbreviated Address file has been updated Action None Async Init File Upd ASYSETUP DAT Severity 4 Meaning The Async Console file has been updated Action None BSC Device File Upd BSCDSP DAT Severity 4 Meaning The BSC Interactive Devices file has been updated Action None RLP Config File Upd RLPTYPE DAT Severity 4 Meaning The RLP configuration file has been updated Action None Port Config File Upd PRTPAR DAT Severity 4 Meaning The Port configuration file has been updated Action None Pad Profile File Upd PROFILE DAT Severity 4 Meaning The Async PAD Profile file has been updated Action None PVC Config File Upd PVCSUB DAT Severity 4 Meaning The PVC Subscriber file has been updated Action None Rmt Subscriber File Upd RSNSVC DAT Severity 4 Meaning The Remote Subscriber file has been updated Action None 22 13 22 14 449 450 451 452 453 454 455
6. The SmartSwitch 1800 shares much functionality and compatibility with Cabletron s FR X4000 FRX6000 and the Frame Relay Module FRM for the SmartSwitch 9000 A SmartSwitch 1800 with a video interfaces features an intuitive menu based man agement structure that allows complete local and remote control of other SmartSwitch 1800s as well as other Cabletron frame relay access devices FRX6000 with monitor amp printer Frame Relay SmartSwitch 180 0 Figure 1 1 Network Example Some typical SmartSwitch 1800 applications are SDLC to LLC2 and LLC2 to QLLC conversion over frame relay SNA and TCP IP LAN WAN integration with or without routers Banking applications LAN SNA TCP IP async Traffic aggregation and concentration to public frame relay services Front end network to larger frame relay switches X 25 to frame relay gateway applications Transmission of voice and fax over existing frame relay links The SmartSwitch 1800 supports these routing and access protocols Frame Relay X 25 SNA SDLC SNA LLC2 Bridging IP IPX BSC Async The SmartS witch 1800 supports these management functions Local SNMP agent with Sets from network manager on some MIB variables Manageable via Cabletron s Spectrum and SPEL NetView Service Point function Control via local monitor remote S martSwitch 1800 FRX FRM or local remote async terminal File transfer database backup restore and software updat
7. e The addresses that must be specified in various port and interface records Each SVC subscriber must be assigned an ID described on page 8 21 that willbe used as a called or calling address in call setup packets IP IPX LLC2 and SNMP also require addresses for identification of networks and devices e Passwords You must enter apassword to remotely control another SmartSwitch 1800 or some other Cabletron frame relay access device to perform software updates and file transfers and to configure alarm routing Most parameters can be specified and or changed using the operations CH described throughout the configuration portion of this manual others such ATJ L as port number are defined by the hardware or specified during software installation Configuration Examples Serial Protocols over Frame Relay via Logical Ports Below is a sample configuration and guidelines for configuring Logical Ports for Annex G or RFC 1490 transmission over frame relay SDLC Logical Ports SDLC Async Async y BSCI S1800 S81800 BSCI X 25 X25 Sync passthru Sync passthru Figure 3 1 Configuration Example 1 Make sure the following are configured in each SmartSwitch 1800 e Protocols Chapter 5 to load the serial protocols e Physical Port Chapter 6 plus Chapter 7 Frame Relay Chapter 8 X 25 Chapter 9 SNA Chapter 10 BSC Interactive Chapter 11 BSC Batch Chapter 12 Async and Chapter 13 Voice e Logical Port Chap
8. 22 5 22 6 305 306 307 308 309 311 RLP Msg Queued exceeded T n C n Severity 4 Meaning The RLP statistic Number of Queued Messages has exceeded the threshold T n that was set by the user C n is the current value Action If this happens frequently you may need to reroute some traffic RLP Rev Frm Sec exceeded T n C n Severity 4 Meaning The RLP statistic Received Frames Sec 100 has exceeded the threshold T n that was set by the user C n is the current value Action If this happens frequently you may need to reroute some traffic RLP Trn Frm Sec exceeded T n C n Severity 4 Meaning The RLP statistic Transmitted Frames Sec 100 has exceeded the threshold T n that was set by the user C n is the current value Action If this happens frequently you may need to reroute some traffic RLP Rej Frm Sec exceeded T n C n Severity 4 Meaning The RLP statistic Rejected Frames Sec 100 has exceeded the threshold T n that was set by the user C n is the current value Action If this happens frequently check the line for noise and check for configuration errors on both the port and the connected device RLP Rtrn Frm S exceeded T n C n Severity 4 Meaning The RLP statistic Retransmitted Frames Sec 100 has exceeded the threshold T n that was set by the user C n is
9. C from the Main Menu BSCI Invalid queue operations Severity 3 Meaning An invalid operation has occured and has disabled the port Action Re enable the port B A C from the Main Menu BSCI Invalid protocol operations Severity 3 Meaning An invalid operation has occured and has disabled the port Action Re enable the port B A C from the Main Menu BSCI Invalid CUA DUA operations Severity 3 Meaning An invalid operation has occured and has disabled the port Action Re enable the port B A C from the Main Menu Invalid Line Speed Port n Severity 3 Meaning Self explanatory Action Correct the line speed in the Port record I FRM Blocked Remote Busy Timeout Severity 2 Meaning An RNR Receive Not Ready condition on the port has been cleared by expiration of the Remote Busy Timer which caused the port to be reset Action Check the user device for a problem that caused the RNR I FRM Blocked No Acks from Remote Severity 2 Meaning The remote user device is not accepting transmission from the local device and the local port has been reset Action Check the remote device for a problem Enter Service Affecting Condition Severity 2 22 21 22 22 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 Meaning The DTE and DCE exchange messages regularly so that each knows the other is running and ready If one end does not respond this event message is sent and
10. Configuring Default Node Wide Bridging Parameters If one or more Bridge ports interfaces will be established in the local node certain parameters must be configured to define bridge operation Press B at the Configure IP LLC2 B RIDGE IPX Default Parameters Menu or A A E B from the Main Menu When prompted enter e Virtual LAN ID if alsoconfiguring LLC2 or Bridging in the node enter a value of 0 fff hex Otherwise press Enter accepting the default of 000 LAN IDs can also be configured in LLC2 Interface Bridge Port records later in this chapter Each LAN ID must be unique within the network on which this node will operate CAUTILN e Any remaining requested information referring to Table 16 1 Node Name nod e_xyz Configure Bridge LLC 2 N ode Defaults Virtual LAN ID Bridge Enabled Bridge Hello Time Bridge Max Age Bridge ForwardDday Bridge A ging Timer Geconds 3 Bridge Priority Max Siz Bridge Forwarding Table IP Bridging Enabled IPX Bridging Enabled SRB ID Default Ethernet Frame Type Option Figure 16 1 Bridge Node Defaults Configuration Screen A A E B from Main Menu Configuring Bridging 16 3 Bridge Node Default Parameters 16 4 Table 16 1 Bridge Node Default Parameters Parameter Virtual LAN ID Bridge Enabled Bridge Hello Time Bridge Max Age Bridge Forward Delay Bridge Aging Timer Bridge Priority Max Size Bridge Forwarding Table IP Bridging Enabled IPX Bri
11. Logical Port Screen 1 A C D from Main Menu SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 After making any changes be sure to press F7 to update the system memory Otherwise the changes will not take effect until the next re boot of the SmartSwitch 1800 CLAUTICN There are four Logical Port screens Selecting the entry X 25 Logical Port Screen n at each of the first three screens will display the next screen and pressing F3 will display the previous screen Any menu items preceded by asterisks instead of letters cannot be changed These are displayed only because the software code for the menu is shared with physical port configuration If you want to configure one or more closed user groups CUGs for the port press N at the third screen Otherwise you do not need to configure anything on the fourth screen Logical Port Parameters Table 8 2 Logical Port Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Blocked Port Flag Y N Priority 0 9 Bandwidth Allocation Group 1 16 0 Encapsulation Method RFC1490 AnnexG RFC1490 Modulo 0 8 or 1 128 0 Modulo 8 Maximum LAPB Window Size 1 7 or 1 127 N2 Retransmit Count 0 20 20 T1 Retransmit Period msec 2000 1 5 000 T2 Wait Ack Period msec 0 5000 T3 Link Alive Period sec 1 60 5 Logical DCE Y N Y Lowest Highest Incoming Channel 0 4095 see explanation Lowest Highest Two Way Channel 0 4095 3 see explanation Lowest Highest Outgoing Channel 0 4095 see e
12. Rev Clock TT from DTE 45 Y N N CSU DSU Operating Mode 6 Normal LDM Normal Qo D 5 2 9 D c Q o 9 x 4 RTS Control 6 Constant External Constant Link Layer Management None LMI ANNEXD None N1 Polling Count 7 1 6 6 2 if LMI 3 if Annex D N2 Error Threshold 1 10 5 N3 Monitored Events Count 1 10 8 4 T1 Link Integrity Timer sec 7 5 30 0 10 T2 Polling Verification Timer sec 5 30 10 Enable Outgoing Rate Control N Enable Bandwidth Allocation Y N For Backup Use Only Y N Y N 1 Ifset to Y no backup DLCIs on this port will be used even if the port is enabled via on line port enable 2 Ifone physical frame relay port will connectto several remote sites be sure the line speed is adequately higher that the speeds configured on the remote sites 3 If this port will connect to a frame relay network set Logical DCE to N Also note that one end of a frame relay backup connection must be configured as logical DCE 4 Not applicable to CSU DSU ports 5 This parameter is relevant only if Physical PortInterface is something other than RS 232 and Generate Clockis Y 6 Applicable only to CSU DSU ports 7 Theseparameters are relevant only if Link Layer Management is LMI or ANNEXD and Logical DCE is N 8 N3 should be greater than or equal to N2 9 If Link Layer Management is none this parameter is irrelevant If Link Layer Man agement is changed to none from some other value the default for N2 will be leftas it
13. SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Ports 4 7 are on an optional expansion card WAN 4 WAN 5 WAN6 WAN7 Salina LAN Port WAN 0 WAN 1 WAN 2 WAN 3 ptiona CSU DSU Port Console Port Figure 2 2 Physical Port Locations on Data Only Models Table 2 2 lists all possible physical ports on data only models of SmartSwitch 1800 Table 2 2 Port Assignments for Data Only Models iy sue os Rees s Protocol Connected Device C em 1 Physical interface as described below Port 01s RS232 Port 1 must be either RS 232 or DSU Ports 2 and 3 are determined by the attached cable V 35 RS 232 or RS 449 Ports 4 5 exist only if an optional expansion card is installed and are determined by the type of card V 35 RS 232 or RS 422 which supports RS 449 interfaces and X 21 by special order Each cable is physical DTE male connector or DCE female connector Add aT or C to the interface type to record this information This does not apply to a DSU or LAN port 2 The protocols that can be assigned to ports depend on the model of SmartSwitch 1800 and the options that were purchased All possible protocols are listed below Ports 0 7 Frame relay X 25 SDLC BSC Interactive BSC Batch A sync LAN Port IP IPX Bridge LLC2 Note that the LAN protocols IP IPX Bridge LLC2 are also assigned to physical frame relay ports via interface records that map the protocols to the physical ports 3 Only if the optional expansion
14. A A from the Main Menu of the controlling node When prompted enter a Remote Control ID and Remote Control Password configured in Node Defaults A A from the Main Menu on the node you want to control When prompted to press any key to continue press Enter The remote ID Node Name is displayed as wait during Call Request processing If a Call Acceptis not received in the time specified by the X 25 parameter T21 Incoming Call Timer the remote ID is displayed as the Node Name configured in Node Defaults on the local node Once the connection is successful the displayed remote ID becomes the Remote Control ID specified for the controlled node When asked Are you a PAD user type n Enter 5 When prompted enter the password of the controlled node The display at the controlled node will say Under remote control Keyboard blocked by id n The Main Menu at the controlling node will act as the Main Menu of the controlled node and the displayed remote ID is the ID of the controlled node Rebooting the Remote Node Before rebooting notify all users of this node since all connec tions on all ports will be cleared CAUTICN To reboota node under remote control follow this procedure at the controlling node 1 Press F10 2 When asked Remote reboot the node press Y 3 Press F9 to return to local control Exiting Remote Control Press F9 to stop remote control When asked Stop remote cont
15. C E D from Main Menu This example shows an Ethernet configuration A Token Ring configu ration screen is similar Note that for either type the entry LAN Card is irrel evant Node Name nodexyz Bridge Port LLC 2 Interface Configuration Bridge Port LLC2 Interface Number 3 Interface Type Blocked Port Flag Port Priority Path Cost Priority 1 RLP 0 Port 1 DLCI 31 Format Native LLC2 Band width Allocation Group 1 lt Host MAC Address 400000000001 Terminated PAS ROBB SCaeS Figure 9 11 Bridge Port LLC2 Interface Record Frame Relay CS NOUe Configuring SNA A C E D from Main Menu The above is anexample of a frame relay record when Formatis the default value of Native LLC2 If Formatis 8025 SRB Source Route Bridge item K is LANID and there is noitem L If Format 158023 TB Transparent B ridge there is no item K or L For any format the entry RLP is irrelevant 9 27 LLC2 Interface Parameters The following table lists parameters for all interface types Explanations of some parameters follow the table Table 9 5 Bridge Port LLC2 Interface Parameters Parameter Interface Type Blocked Port Flag Port Priority Native LLC2 format 8025_SRB 8023_TB format Path Cost Native LLC2 format 8025 SRB 8023 TB format Priority LAN Card Port DLCI Format Bandwidth Allocation Group Valid Values Default Value Ethernet TokenRing FRL FRL frame relay E 55 n
16. D A from Main Menu This information will be included in IPL messages to the SNMP agent and will be stored for access via the MIB System Defaults Parameters Table 17 1 SNMP System Defaults Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value System Name 0 250 characters none System Location 0 250 characters none System Contact 0 250 characters none 1 Although the SNMP standard for these fields is 256 characters a SmartSwitch 1800 file length restriction limits the fields to 250 characters each System Name identifies the local SmartSwitch 1800 to the SNMP manager System Location is generally the geographical address of the local node System Contact identifies someone at the node site who can be contacted if there are issues Configuring a Community Table Up to 16 SNMP manager devices can gain access to the agent running in a Smart Switch 1800 Each manager device has an associated community name configured atthat device that identifies it to agents and other managers That name is included in each SNMP request that comes into a node The request will be accepted only if the community name is in the Community Table Press B at the SNMP Configuration Menu to display the table 172 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Node Name node_xyz Community Table B Name CAccesD Dd namel Read_write name2 Read write name3 Read write name4 Read write name5 Read write name6 Read write name7 Read write
17. Displays on UEM UNO DENM m wwe 21 14 21 14 IP Statistics Pn dl IP Statistics ICMP Seia E A AREA E TE MU M IP Interfice Statisti e ier caecdevwascantorensndis eesacsaleendstbiewoasadaeboases IPA Sranshcs Mp aes aeuo eis uec ech ata epe ia i E FU ep bla nde Chapter 22 System Events Boni rU T Polisi BU Pesanan qu Uie M eem Apa ERU Rn DU M RR UR Ui Event Generation Displaying Events Severity Levels for SNMP Trap Routing Event Messages Section IV Appendices Appendix A Async Terminal Operations Command and Data Transfer Modes eene Async Terminal Commands Placing a Call from an Async Terminal Async PAD Service Signals se Error Codes Sent to Async PAD Port Appendix B Cause and Diagnostic Codes GE E OU Lu aver arvana DUREE THEODOR ERR Cad ORO ERO E A n Ceme COS ies T m E cse QUESO o vei a RIDERE EROR EM AR FEE RC UR VR DESPITE TT Dias nostic Codes eicere replet eire Rob i rcu ble X 25 Codes SNA Codes Appendix C Voice Configuration Reference Information Voice Port Operation Store and Forward Dialing 7 Map Table Store and Forward Digits User Dialed Store and Forward Duis VERUM ee N ariable Length Dialing oi tret ttn Using Wildcards in Speed Dial Numbers eee 21 1 21 2 21 4 21 11 21 15 21 18 21 19 B 2 B 2 Cullenondipscilic foes
18. G A from the Main Menu Information in this Display e Destination Destination IP address e Gateway IP address of router that provides access to the destination device This corresponds to the Router parameter in static IP Routes See page 14 15 e Ref Reference Internal count of the number of places the route is currently being used in the SmartSwitch 1800 software The route cannot be removed if this count is greater than zero e Use Number of times the route was used to send a packet e Flags C Route is ona LAN interface G Route is via a remote gateway hop count is greater than zero H Route is a Host route S Route is a static route U Route is operational e Intf Interface Identifier used in the IP Route Display Each entry is the interface number preceded by the interface type which is one of these fr Frame relay x X25 en Ethernet tr Token Ring lo Loopback e Netmask Network mask used during routing to determine the portion of the address associated with the network CS Point to point frame relay IP connections will display a Netmask of 255 255 255 255 which is the default Destination Mask value see AIL page 14 15 for Host IP routes The Netmask configured on the IP interface see page 14 9 is used by RIP for route summarization CS Each entry is two lines on the screen with the Netmaskon the second line under the associated Destination NTE ARP Table To display
19. To display existing translation templates press A at the X 25 Address Translation Templates Menu P Dir Translation ID Calling Called Protocol ID Fadlities Node N ame nodexyz Translation Name User Data 0 Incoming 3110 U P L1234 P P temp examp 1 X123 0 Incoming 1233751 L200C011009 P 01000000 P temp examp 2 P PgUp PeDn F3 Exit F9 Stop Remote F10 Abort Figure 8 9 Address Translation Templates Display A C C A from Main Menu The data between lines is structured to match the headings at the top of the S reen NUL To add or change a translation template press B at the X 25 Address Translation Templates Menu and enter e Port The default is 0 Valid port numbers depend on the model of SmartSwitch 1800 see port locations on page 6 1 e Direction I for incoming packets or O for outgoing packets The default is 1 e Template ID up to 31 characters including the G and U separators described below in the format aaaaaaaaaaaaaGbbbbbb bb bb bb bb Ud dd dd dd dd dd dd dd where aaaaaaaaaaaaaa 1s up to 15 digits of called address G is the letter G which precedes any calling address bbbbbbbbbbbbbb is up to 15 digits of calling address U is the letter U which precedes any user data and dddd dd ddddd is a user data field of up to 12 numeric characters 8 27 The fields must match the equivalent fields in the Call Request packet bu
20. agrams which are sent by other entities in the IP network as a means of con firming that communication is possible In Echo Reply is the number of incoming ICMP echo responses sent by other entities in the IP network in response to echorequests see Out Echo fromthis node Out In Dest Unrech is the number of outgoing datagrams that could not be delivered because the destination device network was not reachable a nec essary protocol was not running or fragmentation was necessary but disallowed due to the don t frag flag being set The message text says Outgoing if this node is a point in the path of the datagram and Incoming if the datagram origi nated at this node Out In Pkt Lost is the number of datagrams transmitted by this node that sub sequently were lost The message text says Outgoingif this node is a point in the path of the datagram and Incoming if the datagram originated at this node Out In Redirect is the number of datagrams transmitted by this node that sub sequently were redirected within the same network The message text says Out going if this node is a point in the path of the datagram and Incoming if the datagram originated at this node Out Echo is the number of requests to other entities in the IP network to respond as a means of confirming that communication is possible In Echo is the number of requests from other entities in the IP network to respond to those entities as a
21. from the Main Menu When prompted for a Port Number enter 4 or 5 Voice 2 Port 5 Voice 1 Port 4 Figure 13 4 Voice Ports The display for an existing port will show the configured parameter values while the display for a new port will show default database values See Table 13 4 The fol lowing figure is an example of an existing port Node Name nod e_xyz Voice Port Configuration Parameters screen 1 of 2 Port 4 Link State Linkup IM VOICE Datab ase System Memory PortType VOICE Physical Port Interface RJ45 Blocked Port Flag N Rate 8 DTMF Detection 1 Timed E Timer 3 Input Level 0 Output Level i In Hunt Group No emnmomnmgouwp t t MBZLCUH AZ SLT Time out 30 Link Down Busy Y Additional Parameters Option Figure 13 5 Voice Port Screen 1 A F D from Main Menu After making any changes be sure to press F7 to update the system memory Otherwise the changes will not take effect until the next re boot of the SmartSwitch 1800 CAUTION Pressing J will display a second screen from which two more screens can be dis played The parameters for all screens are listed in Table 13 4 13 8 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Voice Port Parameters Configuring Voice Table 13 4 Voice Port Parameters Parameter Blocked Port Flag Rate DTMF Detection Timed E Timer Input Level Output Level In Hunt Group SLT Time out Link Down Busy Fax Supported Telephony Interface Type Int
22. 0 65535 0 Permit Determines whether the traffic defined by the Filter n entries will be permitted or denied passage across the interface Filter n corresponds to the Filter IDs in the IPX Filter Definitions file See page 15 3 Configuring IPX Interfaces An IPX interface allows a SmartSwitch 1800 to connectto a Novell IPX network Press E at the IP LLC2 BRIDGE IPX Interfaces Configuration Menu or A C E E from the Main Menu to display configured IPX interfaces To configure an interface press F at the IP LLC2 BRIDGE IPX Interfaces Configu ration Menu When prompted enter an Interface Number 0 63 This is merely a sequential number to identify the interface The display depends on the interface the following figure shows an example and Table 15 7 through Table 15 9 list the parameters for all interface types IPX Interface Configuration Interface Number 2 Blocked Port Fag N Interface Type Ethemet Frame Type TYPE II Maximum Trans mission Unit 4096 IPX Network Add ress 00000001 Priority Band width Allocation Group Port Diagnostics Enabled NetBIOS Enabled NetBIOS Hops Periodic RIP Enabled Periodic RIP Timer sec Periodic SA P Enabled Periodic SA P Timer sec Ad ditional IPX Parameters OZzzCmW 7 moumocgow t 0 1 Y N 8 Y 60 x 60 Option Figure 15 4 IPX Interface Record Example A C EL F from Main Menu Configuring IP X 15 9 IPX Interface Parameters Table
23. 14 1 14 2 14 3 14 4 15 1 15 2 15 3 15 4 15 5 16 1 16 2 16 3 16 4 16 5 17 1 17 2 17 3 19 1 19 2 19 3 19 4 20 1 20 2 20 3 20 4 20 5 20 6 20 7 20 8 20 9 20 10 20 11 20 12 20 13 21 1 21 2 21 3 21 4 Front Panel S witches E Voice Interface Confi goaien Mem Nod Derowiis DUIGBU oi laici ebrei EA IP Interface Record Frame Relay Example ssss LAN IP Interface Secondary Address Confi guration IP Routing Record seco teen tenido cR HERR Ele Dead IPX Node Defaults Menu IPX SAP Filter Record Typical IPX Filter seins Bed IPX Interface Record BAINES aneian IX RIP Route BOcolila cts cncicecileseenicmenaw ead amonmeut Bridge Node Defaults Configuration Screen Bridge MAC Filter Configuration Screen Typical Bridge Filter Applications Record essss Bridge Ports Display iiec prre hr te pP t Cement ir Ea ied Bruges Port Record Examples etic earn denis AERE DE ERA CHE NEM Kd SNMP System Defaults Menu uuu ei rui err rct Ra tec bk CE CR SNMP Community Table Wien etes SNMP Trap Roving V SRU uico uiua dy FEE ekle RICE renee E peers horum o n e E E On Line Port Operations WGN asses t mo e s EL era iet 19 13 On Line SDLC PU Operations Menu IP Ping Connectivity Test Mem uuo seever rape i Pe HR ELE EIE Pius PED ci eu or utu ainda UC DR Axe Ec bM ac Aa e loq DE Node Status Display
24. Disable X 121 User Calls Autocall Options Autocall Autocall Delay sec Called Address Retry Count Retry Interval sec User Data ASCII Facilities hex Modem Signal Options DTR RTS Active When VC Up Input Signal Detection RTS CTS H W Flow Control Disconnect Options Disconnect Timer min Disconnect Duration sec Timeout if No Login Timeout if No Call Timeout if No Data Disconnect if Clear Recvd Disconnect if Clear Sent continued on next page Valid Values Default Value see explanation X 25 see explanation Y N see explanation see explanation 0 10 characters Y N 0 3 Y N Y N Y N 3 valid Subscriber ID 4 Y N 0 255 valid subscriber ID none 0 10 0 retry indefinitely 5 0 255 0 12 characters 0 28 characters N 0 5 1 DSR Y N 0 60 0 disable timer 0 300 Y N Y N Y N Y N Y N 12 9 12 10 Table 12 3 Async Port Parameters continued Parameter Valid Values Default Value Async PAD Options Async PAD Type 0 2 0 X3 Devices Connected PAD Type 0 2 1 PAD Type 1 1 16 1 Assemble Full Message YIN Y Data Forwarding Criteria 0 use PAD profile Special Forwarding Char not currently used n a Dynamic Signaling Action 0 none 0 none 1 At line speeds of 38 4K bps or higher RTS CTS H W Flow Control should be Y 2 If1 Transparent Polled Async HPAD or 2 Transparent Polled Async TPAD con figure this async port as one end of an HPAD TPAD PVC 3 IfAssembl
25. Multi Cast In 0 0 MultiCastOut 0 Errors In Errors Out 0 0 Q Dropped In 0 Unkwn Protocol 0 Collisions 0 F4 Clear Cumu htive Statistics Others Exit Figure21 13 IP Interface Statistics Display E E from Main Menu CE CURRis the current value and CUMULATIVE is the total since the last IPL of the node NCHL Information in this Display e Packets In Out is the number of packets received trans mitted over the interface e Bytes In Out is the number of bytes received transmitted over the interface e Multi Cast In Out is the number of packets received trans mitted via a multicast address over the interface e Errors In is the number of errors received over the interface e Errors Out is the number of errors transmitted over the interface e G Dropped In is the number of incoming Q packets that were dropped e Unknwn Protocol is the number of frames that were not accepted because they contained an unknown protocol e Collisions 1s the number of transmitted frames that were involved in collisions 21 18 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 IPX Statistics Displays Statistics Displays IPX statistics track IPX traffic through a node Press F at the Statistics Menu and when prompted enter Interface Number 0 63 Default is 0 Report Interval 5 65535 Default is 5 Node Name node_xyz IPX StatisticsDis play Page 1 of 3 Interface 0 Current Time 06 15 97 10 32 45 Rep
26. NCXL specified in the template ID T Text valid for replacement of user data only Type T followed with no spaces by the text that will replace the user data Replacing Protocol ID Press E at the Translation Template Maintenance Menu When prompted enter a string of up to four hex bytes If fewer than four bytes are entered the remaining field is filled with zeroes Replacing Facilities Press F at the Translation Template Maintenance Menu When prompted enter a string of up to 109 hex bytes Translation Examples Example 1 Replacing the first four digits of the called address with digits from the user data field Assume the Template ID is 3110 U and the called address field in the template is U1234X5 A packet with called address 31101234567890 and user data 5678 is received The packet matches Template ID 3110 U therefore a translation occurs as follows U1234 of U1234X5 indicates that positions 1 2 3 and 4 of the user data of the received packet 5678 will replace the first four digits of the called address 3110 X5 of U1234X5takes the fifth position of the template and searches for a match in the part of the original called address not yet translated 1234567890 The match is found in the entire string 1234567890 The translated called address is 56781234567890 Example 2 Appending the subaddress from the user data to the called address Assume the Template ID is 3110 U and
27. Node 3 ofLeading Digits to Delete 0 Forward Delay 4 25 sec intervals Forwarded Digit Type DTMF Forwarded Output Digits Ext Source of Extended Digits USER e System Level Parameters Voice Node Number 3 Speed Map Dial Digits 2 User Dialed Extended Dial Digits 4 e Speed Dial Map Table Speed Dial Abbreviated Digits 44 Long Dial Digit Mapping 000414 4 node number 4 Voice port number e Voice Port 5 Configuration Node 4 Source of Extended Digits USER ofLeading Digits to Delete 0 Forward Delay 4 25 sec intervals Forwarded Digit Type DTMF Forwarded Output Digits Ext e System Level Parameters C4 Voice Node Number 4 User Dialed Extended Dial Digits 4 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 e Voice Port 4 Configuration of Leading Digits to Delete 0 Forward Delay 4 25 sec intervals Forwarded Digit Type DTMF Forwarded Output Digits Ext Source of Extended Digits USER The sequence of steps in placing a call are as follows 1 The caller dials 59111 2 PBX A connects to Node 1 Port 4 and the caller hears a dial tone 3 The caller dials 2559333 4 Node 1 translates speed dial number 25 to long digits 000215 connects to PBX B through Node 2 Port 5 and sends along the user dialed extended digits 59333 after a 1 second delay 5 PBX B connects with Node 3 and the caller hea
28. Port Status Display Virtual Connections Disglay on n Frame Relay Forts Virtual Connections Display on Non Frame Relay Port Port rale Tep IY errr en PAAS beh ue EP Eo Mab E donates AS Line Monitor DP s c rp BS CHILE M La UEN CUN a eria U Frame Relay Line Monitor Display iius eec erecti rade LAN Capture Status and Control Mt inscitia LAN ane DIEDAN A ree er pct Ha ture E pepE CS DERE Lipa bbc SDLC PU Staus DRP aded Eee RP CEMRbHcD ib elite ax CR DUE Voice Inteiaces Display uuiceicsecei e teri ciem ee bnt Ser RR d e Bridge Port Status Display esee sud reir ULL EA RE pora cei d Bridge Forwarding Table Display 5er nene RLP Statistics Display RLP Statistics Confignon Mens Port Statistics Display ES Port Statistics Configuration Mein du 13 11 13 16 14 3 14 5 14 6 14 14 we 152 wn BA 15 8 15 9 15 17 16 3 16 7 16 11 16 12 16 13 17 1 17 3 17 4 19 11 19 14 19 15 s 20 1 wi 20 2 204 20 5 20 6 20 9 20 12 20 17 20 18 20 20 20 21 20 22 20 24 usa 2lel sme 21 2 5 E 214 XV 21 5 Prame level Stasies Display icsccscsencdcracnisarakioninnananmen 2168 21 6 Frame Relay Utilization Statistics Display 21 6 21 7 VoxeConnecton Statistics Display usce dacecxte ck pen 21 21 8 Voice Connection Statistics Display sienne 21 8 21 9 B dsePosd stas DISPUR soe cctdcncniaue a P0 21 10 LAN Interface Statistics Display een nnd 21 11 OUD IP StsDos Drs Uy ss is
29. Re enable the port B A C from the Main Menu BSCI Invalid parameters Severity 3 Meaning One or more parameters specified in the Port record for this port is invalid This error disables the port Action Correct the Port record then reenable the port B A C from the Main Menu BSCI Invalid port number or type Severity 3 Meaning The port number and or type specified inthe Port record is not valid for BSC Interactive Action Check the Port record BSCI Invalid message transfer Severity 3 Meaning Self explanatory This error disables the port Action Re enable the port B A C from the Main Menu BSCI Invalid circuit operations Severity 3 Meaning An invalid operation has occured and has disabled the port Action Re enable the port B A C from the Main Menu BSCI Invalid state event action Severity 3 Meaning An invalid operation has occured and has disabled the port Action Re enable the port B A C from the Main Menu BSCI Invalid buffer operations Severity 3 Meaning An invalid operation has occured and has disabled the port Action Re enable the port B A C from the Main Menu SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 System Events 520 521 522 523 524 530 531 532 BSCI Invalid CRC operations Severity 3 Meaning An invalid operation has occured and has disabled the port Action Re enable the port B A
30. Subscriber Name 0 31 characters none Routing Algorithm 0 3 0 Systematic Redirection Y N N SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Table 10 3 SVC Subscriber Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Redirect on Out of Order Y N Connection Priority 0 9 1st 2nd etc Path Configured Y RLP n a Port Physical port 0 3 Logical port 8 63 Redirection Address O 1 etc valid address Thesoftware does not verify that aspecified port exists Make sure all specified ports are configured in the database Subscriber Name identifies the subscriber to the console operator Routing Algorithm allows creation of a hunt group of ports see example on page 8 22 for the purpose of routing per a pre selected algorithm 0 Round Robin selects ports specified cyclicly in numerical order according to the list of Redirection Addresses If the selected port is unreachable or con gested the Call Request will be sent to the next port If the port becomes available again it will be included in its assigned position 1 Altemate Route on Line Failure selects the first port that is notin a failed state Ifthe selected port does not makea connection the call will be cleared even if other ports are available 2 Alternate Route on Line Busy selects the first port that has LCNs available is not busy If the port has failed the next available port will be selected 3 Least LCN with Throughput selects
31. This is useful for transmitting binary data machine language computer programs etc without special coding Data link control character sequences transmitted during transparent mode must be preceded by character 1 0 DLE in order to be recognized as control characters Printer specifies whether the device has an attached printer Disable Status Response determines how the BSC port will report the status of the attached device 0 Normal Status The port will report what the device reports 1 No Status The port will report status only if the device is active 2 Always Active Status The port will always report the device as active 10 12 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Introduction Chapter 11 Configuring BSC Batch The SmartSwitch 1800 supports ports configured for BSC binary synchronous com munication Batch which interconnects IBM 2780 3780 devices over frame relay or X 25 Required Configuration To run BSC Batch in a SmartSwitch 1800 make sure the following are properly con figured Node parameters Chapter 4 This is general configuration that must be done no matter which protocols will be run in the node Loaded protocols Chapter 5 BSC Batch as wellas frame relay or X 25if BSC will be transported over one of those Frame relay Chapter 7 or X 25 Chapter 8 port s that will connect to a network or frame relay PVC Logical X 25 Chapter 8 if BSC will be encapsulated for transmission
32. Use this if you dont care or are not sure which type to select B 2780 C 3780 D 3740 E 2770 F 3770 Full Duplex specifies full duplex transmission both directions at once Currently this must be configured as Y of Beginning Sync Chars specifies the number of synchronization characters that will be added to the beginning of each frame of Trailing Pad Chars specifies the number of padding characters that will be added to the end of each frame to ensure that the last significant character is sent before the data transmitter switches off No Response Timer is activated after transmission of a general poll or a data frame On expiry a NAK EOT General Poll sequence is trans mitted and the No Response Retry Count is incre mented The timer will be de activated on reception of any valid frame from the line during Link Down No Response Retry Count specifies how many times the user device will be polled if itis not responding before control is passed on the next cluster accompanied by other condition checks Delay Timer is activated when the application queue is empty i e when data from the network is pending On expiry a TTD Temporary Text Delay is sent and the timer is restarted After the final retry an EOT is sent to the line and a Clear Request is sent to the network Delay Retry Count specifies the number of times the node will retransmit a TTD when there is no data pending from the network Once the count
33. Valid port numbers depend on the model of SmartSwitch 1 800 see port locations on page 6 1 The display for an existing port will show the configured parameter values while the display for a new port will show default database values listed in Table 8 1 on page 8 6 The following figure is an example of an existing port Node Name nodexyz X 25 Port Parameters screen 1 of 6 Port 5 Link State Linkup JO UNIVERSAL Datab ase System Memory Port Type X25 X25 Physical Port Interface s V 35 Blocked Port Hag N N Line Speed 64k bps Modulo 0 Modulo 8 0 Modulo 8 Maximum LAPB Wind ow Size 7 N2 Retransmit Count 20 20 T1 Retrans mit Period msec 2000 2000 T2 Wait A ck Period msec 1000 1000 T3 Link Alive Period sec 10 10 K Logical DCE Y Y L Generate Clock Y Y M Rev Clock TT fromDTE N N N X 25Levd 3 Screen2 A B c D E F G H I J Option Figure 6 1 X 25 Port Screen 1 ALICI A from Main Menu If Physical Port Interface item B is DSU item L will be CSU DSU Operating Mode and item M will be RTS Control Naar After making any changes be sure to press F7 to update the system memory Otherwise the changes will not take effect until the next re boot of the SmartSwitch 1800 CAUTICN Pressing N atthe screen in Figure 8 1 will display a second screen and pressing N atthe second screen will display a third screen The parameters onall three screens are listed in Table 8 1 on page 8 6 8 2 SmartSwi
34. automatic settings can be overridden via Frame Relay Backup Operations B J from the Main Menu From the Frame Relay Backup Operations Menu e To switch from a primary to one of its backups press A e To switch from a backup to a primary press B In either case enter as prompted the requested information to identify the primary and backup SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Chapter 20 Status Displays Displaying Node Status Press A at the Status Displays Menu to display the overall performance of this node as well as most of the data shown on the Port Status Display See page 20 2 Node Name node xyz Node Status Display Performance Summary Total Packets Sec 1024 Total Connections 26 Boot Time 1 45 98 13 26 32 Link State Summary Status Status Operational Linkup Disconnect Restart Diable Failed Dil Ready Quiesced Voice Loading Voi Failed Cal Ready Call Active F2 Remote Refresh F9 Stop Remote F10 A bort Others Exit Figure 20 1 Node Status Display C A from Main Menu Information in this Display Total Packets Sec is the sum of current packets per second through all physical ports in this node divided by two This is alsoreflected by the bar graph on the screen Total Connections is the number of virtual connections SVCs and PVC s cur rently in use in this node divided by two Boot Time is the date time the SmartSwitch 1800 software was last starte
35. sec N35 Tw N25 Priority Bandwidth Allocation Group Suppress XIDs Valid Values up to 10 characters 0 15 characters 0 15 characters 25 4105 Y N 15 255 0 255 Active Inactive 0 255 Y N Two way Alternate Two way Simultaneous 0 fce hex 0 tfifitffffif O_fff O_fffff 0 250 100 5000 1 50 1 127 1 127 0 255 0 9 0 16 1 Set Autocallto Y for TPADs and N for HPADs 2 Ifthe PU will beused for SDLC LLC2 conversion at thelocal node orat aremote node via a logical or physical X 25 port this must be Y 3 Inmultiples of 4 4 InToken Ring format Default Value none none none 265 0 indefinite Active N Two way Alternate 04 000000000000 000 5 Willoverride the value configured for thesame parameter in the Node Defaults file with two exceptions if 0 is configured in Port Configuration for Priority or Bandwidth Allo cation Group the value in Node Defaults will apply 6 Mustbeless thanthe value for T1 to ensure that the remote link station will receive the delayed acknowledgment before T1 expires Port Type specifies the protocol the port will support Selectingthis parameter will display a list of all serial protocols loaded in the device Name is used to identify the port to some manager devices Configuring SNA 9 7 Physical Port Interface must be configured as follows For reference port locations are shown on page 6 1 e Port 0 is always RS 232 e P
36. stands for destination service access point which is the address of the link service access point LSAP to which a link protocol data unit LPDU is sent DSU stands for Data Service Unit which interfaces between Data Terminal Equipment and a digital data service glo 3 glo 4 DTE stands for data terminal equipment which is the device at either end of a user to network communications path Physical DTE refers to the hardware confi guration and Logical DTE refers to the software configuration Notethat physical and logical DTE are independent of each other however for each if one end of the connection is DCE the other must be DTE and vice versa DTMF stands for Dual Tone Multi Frequency signaling which is the method commonly used to send tones using push buttons on touch tone phones as opposed to pulse dialing E amp M is the type of interface used for PBX tie trunk connections When configured for this option the SmartSwitch 1800 acts like the trunk side of a PBX Encapsulation is the process whereby one protocol layer recei ves a message from a higher layer and attached a header to the message for transmission to the next lower layer or out over the network Ethernet is aLAN technology defined by IEEE standard 802 3 which supports CSMA CD carrier sense multiple access collision detection protocol Event is a change in status in software or hardware operation e g configuration func
37. the default value of Network Maskwill be taken from the numbered interface that is assigned If a Source IP Address is specified changed the Network Mask will automatically change toa default value appro priate for the new address For this reason configure the CAUIILN Source IP Address first then the Network Mask 14 7 Table 14 3 X 25 IP Interface Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Maximum Transmission Unit 1 4096 4096 Routing Metric Count 0 255 0 ICMP Redirects Y N Y RIP Support 0 Enabled 1 Rcv only 2 Disabled 0 Enabled RIP Flash Updates sec 5 300 RIP Full Updates sec 10 300 Priority Bandwidth Allocation Group 1 16 E eo i oy co tei N a l Interface Type Destination IP Address 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Unnumbered Interface Y N Source IP Address 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Network Mask 255 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 Source Subscriber valid subscriber address Destination Subscriber valid subscriber address SVC Retry Timer sec SVC Idle Timer min Max VCs to Establish PVC Connection T 1 Y for new interfaces N for interfaces already configured when the current release of SmartSwitch 1800 software is installed 2 255 255 255 255 is valid only on a point to point interface 3 The default value of Network Mask will be configured automatically to reflect the appropriate address class after the Source IP Address is specified If the interface is co
38. the attached I O cable is DCE If this port is a physical DTE specify the line speed that matches as closely as possible that of the device connected directly to the port Selecting this parameter for a CSU DSU port will toggle bet ween the two valid values of 56K bps and 64K Clear Channel Selecting this parameter for any other physical interface type will display a list of ranges Press the letter corresponding to a range to display the valid speeds within that range All possible speeds are 75 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 14 4K 19 2K 24K 28 8K 38 4K 48K 56K 64K 72K 112K 128K 168K 192K 224K 256K 280K 320K 336K 384K 392K 448K 504K 512K 560K 576K 616K 640K 672K 704K 728K 768K 784K 832K 840K 896K 952K 960K 1 008M 1 024M 1 064M 1 088M 1 12M 1 152M 1 176M 1 216M 1 232M 1 28M 1 288M 1 344M 1 4M 1 408M 1 456M 1 472M 1 512M 1 536M 1 568M 1 6M 1 624M 1 664M 1 668M 1 728M 1 792M 1 856M 1 92M 1 984M 2 048M If an RS 232 DCE port is directly connected to the DTE via the standard Cabletron cable the maximum supported speed is 64K If longer cabling is NC IL used the maximum speed is 19 2K The EIA standard for RS 232 addresses speeds up to 19 2 Kbps Maximum Bytes per Frame specifies the maximum size of any I frame Information frame that can be transmitted or received on the port Logical DCE defines the port as if Y logical DCE or if N DTE The port must be configured as the opposite of the device at the other end of t
39. two delays e the delay before extended digits are forwarded and e the length of a pause that can be inserted in an extended dial string thatis being forwarded Each time a comma is encountered in an extended string the Smart Switch 1800 will pause for the length of time configured for Forward Delay before additional extended digits are forwarded See the Store and Forward Dialing examples on page C 1 for more information about how this parameter is used Forwarded Digit Type specifies only if Forwarded Output Digitsis Allor Ext how the dial digits will be for warded See the Store and Forward Dialing examples on page C 1 for more information about how this parameter is used Forwarded Output Digits specifies which dial digits if any to forward 1 e to output at the remote voice fax card e If None dial digits are not forwarded to the destination device whena call is ini tiated on this port e If All the speed dial number and associated extended digits are forwarded to the destination device e If Ext only the extended digit string is forwarded The source of extended digits i e from the map table or dialed by the user is specified by Source of Extended Digits See the Store and Forward Dialing examples on page C 1 for more information about how this parameter is used Make Break Ratio specifies if Forwarded Output Digitsis All or Ext and Forwarded Digit Type is Pulse the make break ratio of each digit pul
40. you are copying the file e SourceFile Name the existing name of the file you want to transfer e Destination File Name The transfer process is as follows 1 The originating node will send a message that includes a request for the file name and size 2 Theremote node will check to make sure there is enough disk space to accept the file if not the connection will be cleared and a corresponding message displayed 3 If there is enough disk space the file will be transferred and stored in the remote node under a temporary file name until the node verifies that the file is the expected size If not the temporary file will be deleted As a file transfer progresses you can press F4 at any time to abort the transfer and clear the connection 4 Ifthe temporary file is the expected size any existing file with the same name will be deleted and the temporary one will be renamed the destination file name that was specified 5 Once the transfer is complete the sending node will clear the connection 194 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Remote Software Update This operation allows an operator to send a complete software update from one Smart Switch 1800 to another or from a SmartSwitch 1800 to an FRX4000 You cannot remotely update a SmartS witch 1800 from an FRX4000 The file UPDATE TXT con tains a list of the files that will be transferred Before an update is performed make sure a File Transfer ID is specified
41. 0 Token Ring Figure 3 5 Remote SmartSwitch 1800 in Configuration Example 3 Key Points MAC Addresses When entering a host MAC address in an LLC2 Host or Interface record enter the address in non canonical form unless the attached device is on an 802 3 LAN and the remote device is on an 802 5 LAN orthe attached device is on an 802 5 LAN and the remote device is on an 802 3 LAN In these cases the incoming address will be bit swapped by the transmitting host and you must re swap the bits before transmission to the remote device Bit swapping is described on page 9 22 Introduction to Database Configuration 3 5 For reference the following table describes what happens to a MAC address at the SmartSwitch 1800 if the sending and receiving formats are different Table 3 1 MAC Address Conversion Received from Forwarded to Action taken Converts MAC header to LAN header including cached RIF and bit swaps address 802 3 Native LLC2 Drops MAC header 802 5 802 3 Coverts LAN header to MAC header and bit swaps address 802 5 Native LLC2 Drops LAN header Native LLC2 802 3 Adds MAC header Native LLC2 802 5 Adds LAN header including cached RIF LAN IDs LAN IDs can be configured in two places e LLC2 node defaults to identify a virtual bridge that connects the LLC2 function to LAN interfaces e LLC2 frame telay interfaces using 802 5 Source Route Bridge format to identify the ring number used by a source route bridge at
42. 1 port 21 3 Statistics thresholds configuring 21 2 21 4 Status display Bridge ports 20 22 21 9 frame relay backup 20 19 LLC2 20 22 node 20 1 port 20 2 port signals 20 6 SDLC PU 20 20 virtual connections 20 3 Stop Remote F9 2 6 Subnet addressing 14 2 Subnet mask 14 2 Subscriber addressing 8 22 Subscriber ID configuring 8 21 9 14 10 8 11 8 21 18 12 15 Subscriber Name 8 25 8 34 9 15 10 9 11 9 12 16 12 19 Suppression 13 13 SVC Idle Timer 14 12 15 16 SVC Retry Timer 14 12 15 15 Switchback Timer 7 19 Switchover Timer 7 19 System Contact 17 2 Index System Defaults SNMP 17 1 System Location 17 2 System memory values 4 2 6 3 System Name 17 2 Systematic Redirection 8 25 9 16 10 9 11 9 12 16 T T1 4 7 9 12 9 23 T1 Link Integrity Timer 7 17 T1 Retransmit Period 8 9 8 17 T2 4 8 9 12 9 23 T2 Polling Verification Timer 7 17 T2 Wait Ack Period 8 9 8 17 T20 Restart Timer 8 11 8 19 T21 Incoming Call Timer 8 11 8 19 T22 Reset Timer 8 11 8 19 T23 Clear Timer 8 12 8 19 T3 Link Alive Period 8 9 8 17 Telephony Interface Type 13 11 Terminal operations async A 1 Thresholds statistics configuring 21 2 21 4 Throughput Class Negotiation 8 10 8 17 Ti 4 8 9 13 9 23 Time to Hold Data While Waiting 7 20 Time changing 2 8 Timed E Timer 13 10 Timeout if No Call 12 13 Timeout if No Data 12 13 Timeout if No Login 12 13 Tone Type 13 16 Traffic Monitor 20 7 Traffic monitor 20 7 Translatio
43. 1 LAN Card Parameters 2st e br em FR Ln ERI Ep E FR Spe Eb DR eaa 6 4 7 1 Bandwidth Allocation Group Parameters eseessseees 7 7 7 2 Bandwidth Allocauon Example nccsccnccniniuoomanaiarecnamenn 2 65 7 3 Frame Relay Port Parime tef iccnnsracnmmianacmmmrsnenncnenswrm FL 74 Frame Relay DLCI Parameters Ec 7 5 Frame Relay PVC Parameters ee M 7 6 Frame Relay Backup Group Parmeter piar UE 8 1 Physical X23 Port Panineiei oscsumeciiai naea DO xvi SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 8 2 Loc Oat Paranie OES ciui ache xcv uomo temi teeta 8 14 8 3 Subscriber Pstati lore ioeceeca seeker REC REOE BR be PER ER ERR reb Wd O 8 4 Translation Template Pateineteis rte oe 8 5 X25 PVC Parameters ENTE E E 9 1 SNA Port A T MNMDMMMEE 9 6 9 2 SNA Port PU Patamele erenn BoE 9 3 SVC Subscriber Parameter a o wicccciv viedscssmastecssissarmissenaesecnwaceasn D TO 9 4 LLC2 Host Parameters ican ees Se 9 5 Bridge Port LLC2 bier Pods iia ven E T NO 10 1 BSC Interactive Port Parameters irai Marcum md qlrdvatacutiprs MT 10 2 BSC Interactive Port Subscriber Pasaiisiari E RT M 10 5 10 3 SVC Subscriber Parameters mL 10 4 Control and Device Unit Addressing E E Amis LUI 10 5 BSC Interactive Device Parameters Vribxrpibtuberbscoen d nba LOL 11 1 BSC Batch Port Parameters 15 eacus tom rre tbe ttes rne ninm dd 11 2 SVC Subscriber Parameters uu sa ce tbe er ex pare ci dede Rn pe QUE 12 1 Async PAD Profile Parameters 1 usen etie s
44. 11 LAN interfaces configuring 6 4 Learned DLCIs viewing 7 13 Line Delete 12 6 Line Display 12 6 Idx 4 Line Folding 12 5 Line Idle Timer 4 5 Line monitor 20 7 Line Setup Timer 8 13 Line Speed 7 16 8 8 9 8 10 5 11 4 LinkDownBusy 13 11 Link Layer Management 7 17 Link State 6 3 LLC2 Connection 9 11 LLC2 host configuring 9 18 LLC2 Interfaces configuring 9 26 LLC2 session status displaying 20 22 LLC2 configuring 9 2 Local Charging Prevention 8 10 8 18 Local File Backup 19 8 Local MAC Address 4 7 9 11 Local SAP Address 4 7 9 11 Local Sub 10 7 11 7 Local SubscriberID 4 6 9 10 9 25 Locally Admin MAC Addr 6 4 Logging in 2 3 Logging out 2 9 Logical Channel 8 34 12 19 Logical DCE 7 16 8 9 8 17 Logical port configuring 8 1 Login Password 12 7 Login Required 12 11 Long Dial Digit Mapping 13 7 Long Dial Prefix 13 13 Lowest Incoming Channel 8 10 8 17 Lowest Outgoing Channel 8 10 8 17 Lowest Two Way Channel 8 10 8 17 LP statistics displaying 21 1 LPDA Resource ID 9 11 LPDA Support 9 10 M MainMenu 2 3 Make Break Ratio 13 15 Mapped DLCI Number 8 15 Mask Link Alarms 8 11 12 11 Max Congestion 4 5 Max Size Bridge Forwarding Table 16 5 Max VCsto Establish 14 12 15 16 Maxdata 9 11 9 25 Maximum Bytes per Frame 4 7 7 16 10 6 11 5 Maximum LAPB Window Size 8 9 8 16 Maximum Packet Size 8 11 8 18 Maximum Retransmissions 9 9 10 6 11 5 Maximum Throughput Class 8 11 8 18 Maximum
45. 13 enabling 19 13 status displaying 20 20 Sec IP Addr 14 13 Secondary Alarm Output ID 4 5 Secondary Alarm Output Pwd password 4 5 Secondary DLCI 7 21 Secondary Name 7 21 Secondary Port 7 21 Seq 14 13 Serialization Enabled 15 15 ServerName 15 6 15 18 Server Network Address 15 18 Server Node Address 15 18 Server Socket Number 15 18 Service signals async terminal A 3 Service Type 15 18 Service Type Value 15 6 Session status LLC2 displaying 20 22 Session Type 9 22 9 30 16 15 Severity traps 17 5 Severity levels for events 22 4 Single User Virtual Circuit 10 12 Slow Poll Retry Frequency 10 6 SLT Time out 13 11 SNA port configuring 9 4 SNA Type 9 9 SNA configuring 9 1 SNMP configuring 17 1 Socket Address Value 15 6 Software updates 19 5 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Source Card 14 11 15 15 Source DLCI 14 11 15 15 Source IP Address 14 11 14 12 14 13 Source MAC Address Mask 9 24 Source MAC Address Value 16 9 Source NetBIOS Name 16 10 Source Network Value 15 7 Source Node Value 15 7 Source of Extended Digits 13 14 Source Port 14 11 15 15 Source Socket Value 15 7 Source Subscriber 14 12 Special Forwarding Char 12 14 Speed in async PAD profile 12 5 Speed Map Dial Digits 13 5 Sq 9 25 10 7 11 7 16 8 SRBID 16 5 SSAP Value 16 9 Static routes IPX 15 16 Statistics frame relay utilization 21 6 frame level 21 5 ICMP 21 15 IP 21 14 IP interface IPX 21 19 LAN card 21 11 LAN interface 21 11 LP 21
46. 15 Frame Relay Port 0 Frame Relay DLCI 16 991 1 Notused if the peer node is a SmartSwitch 1800 Interface Peer Node Type specifies whether the node at the remote end of the frame relay connection is a Smart Switch 1800 or another decice Peer Node Number Default 1s the Switch number of the remote device Peer Node Port Default 1s the Port number on the remote device Configuring Voice 13 17 Local Node Number Default is the Voice Node Number see Configuring Voice System Level Parameters of the local SmartSwitch 1800 Local Node Port Default is the Voice portin the local SmartSwitch 1800 Frame Relay Port is the local frame relay port over which Voice will be trans mitted Frame Relay DLCI is the local frame relay DLCI over which Voice will be transmitted 13 18 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Introduction IP Addressing Chapter 14 Configuring IP Routing The IP functions in the SmartSwitch 1800 support routing of IP internet protocol traffic among IP devices on LANs and routed subnetworks via frame relay or X 25 Routing can be dynamic RIP versions 1 and 2 are supported and static routes can be configured A SmartSwitch 1800 can also be configured to act as a gateway forwarding IP packets it receives IP functionality also allows support of an SNMP agent in a SmartS witch 1800 SNMP configuration is described in Chapter 17 IP devices are identified by IP addresses An I
47. 1800 The DLCIS are defined in the PVC record if rate control CIR BC BE will be enforced be sure to configure those parameters in the frame relay Port record m Make sure each DLCI is supported on the attached device NOH LLC2 PUs over Frame Relay to AS 400 Remote SS 1800 Figure 3 3 Configuration Example 3 Make sure the following are configured in each SmartS witch 1800 e Protocols Chapter 5 to load frame relay LLC2 and Bridging required for LLC2 e LAN Interface parameters Chapter 6 to configure the Ethernet interface onthe SmartS witch e Physical Port parameters Chapter 6 and Chapter 7 to define the frame relay port e Virtual LAN ID Chapter 9 which identifies a virtual bridge that connects the internal LLC2 function to the Ethernet interface Introduction to Database Configuration 3 3 e Originated LLC2 Host Chapter 9 which maps connectivity at the LLC level between the SmartSwitch 1800 and the AS 400 The SmartSwitch 1800 ini tiates LLC sessions with the host For this example assume the host number is 0 It can be 0 128 but identification can be easier if the host on the LAN side has the same number as the LAN interface number which is always 0 e Terminated LLC2 Host Chapter 9 whose address must match the frame relay interface to which the 5494 device will transmit Note thatthe remote Smart Switch 1800 must have a corresponding originated LLC2 host For this example assume the ho
48. 4 press D at Figure 7 4and when prompted enter a DLCI ID 16 991 The default is 16 This will display a screen similar to Figure 7 6 Node Name node_xyz Frame Rehy DLCI Configuration screen 1 of 2 RLP 0 Port T DLCI 16 Committed In formation Rate In Committed Burst Size In Excess Burst Size In Committed In formation Rate Out Committed Burst Size Out Excess Burst Size Out BECN Recovery Count Outgoing DLCI Priority DLCI Backup Configuration A B C D E F G H I Option Figure 7 6 Frame Relay DLCI Configuration Screen 1 Pressing F4 at this or the subsequent screen Figure 7 7 will delete the DLCI rate control and backup configuration The port will not be deleted AC 1 unless F4 is pressed at one of the higher level port screens Figure 7 3 and Figure 7 4 Note that the DLCI is not yet deleted If it was created solely for frame relay backup it will remain in existence until the node is rebooted If the DLCI was created when configuring an IP IPX or LLC2 interface it will remain until that interface is deleted and the node is rebooted If a primary DLCI is brought down then deleted from the database while the backup is operational end to end connec tivity over the backup will fail For this reason a primary DLCI CAUIILN should never be deleted If there is a need to delete the DLCI it should first bere configured so that it is not part of a frame relay backup situatio
49. 8 23 for the purpose of routing per a pre selected algorithm 0 Round Robin selects ports specified cyclicly in numerical order according to the list of Redirection Addresses If the selected port is unreachable or con gested the Call Request will be sent to the next port If the port becomes available again it will be included in its assigned position 1 Alternate Route on Line Failure selects the first port that is not in a failed state If the selected port does not make a connection the call will be cleared even if other ports are available 2 Alternate Route on Line Busy selects the first port that has LCNs available is not bus y If the port has failed the next available port will be selected 3 Least LCN with Throughput selects the line with the minumum loading cal culated by weight and number of LCNs in use on that line Each line is assigned a weight proportional to its throughput within the routing path If use ofa routing algorithm is not desired simply accept the default and specify only one routing path Systematic Redirection will redirect if Y all calls to Redirection Address 0 Ifthat address cannot be reached and Redirect on Busy and or Redirect on Out of Orderare set to Y a call will be placed to Redirection Address 1 then if necessary Redirection Address 2 and so on 8 24 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Configuring X 25 Redirect on Busy will redirect calls if
50. 90 1000000000 InTime Rsp 90 1000000000 Out Info Req 90 1000000000 InInfo Req 90 1000000000 Out Info Rsp 90 1000000000 InInfo Rsp 90 1000000000 Out Mask Req 90 1000000000 InMask Req 90 1000000000 Out Mask Rsp 90 1000000000 InMask Rsp 90 1000000000 F4 Clear Cumulative Statistics Others Exit Figure 21 12 ICMP Statistics Display EL D from Main Menu Statistics Displays 21 15 21 16 CE CURRis the current value and CUMULATIVE is the total since the last IPL of the node NL Information in this Display ICMP Errors is the number of ICMP packets generated by this node Pkt Too Short is the number of datagrams received with a length shorter than that specified in the header or shorter than the ICMP minimum length Old Too Short is the number of old version ICMP datagrams that were too short Bad Checksums is the number of ICMP messages received with a bad checksum Old ICMP is the number of old version ICMP datagrams received Bad Pkt Length is the number of ICMP datagrams received with a length too short for the given ICMP message type Bad ICMP Code is the number of ICMP datagrams received with a bad code which identifies parameters for the control message Responses Cnt is the total number of responses from this node to echoes and requests for timestamps information and address masks all described later Out Echo Reply is the number of outgoing responses to ICMP echo request dat
51. 984M 2 048M If an RS 232 DCE port is directly connected to the DTE via the standard Cabletron cable the maximum supported speed is 64K If longer cabling is ASTE used the maximum speed is 19 2K The EIA standard for RS 232 addresses speeds up to 19 2 Kbps No Data Poll Period is the time between polls by this TPAD port of its PU physical unit when the PU has no data to send This parameter has no relevance on an HPAD port No Resp Poll Period is the time between polls by this TPAD port of its PU when the PU is not responding The TPAD will continue to poll at this interval up to the number of times specified by Maximum Retransmissions This parameter has no relevance on an HPAD port SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Maximum Retransmissions is the maximum number of times the port will attempt to send a frame if the PU is not responding A larger value increases the probability of an eventual correct transfer between DTE and DCE buta smaller value permits faster detection of a permanent error condition Outstanding Frames also called level 2 window size is the maximum number of sequentially numbered frames that can be waiting for acknowledgment If this number is exceeded no more frames will be transmitted until an acknowledgment is received A larger value allows faster throughput Note that this parameter can be changed without disabling the link except if the existing value is within the range 0 7 and the new value
52. Ack Period msec T3 Link Alive Period sec Logical DCE continued onnextpage Valid Values X 25 see explanation YIN see explanation 8 or 128 1 7 or 1 127 0 20 2000 15000 0 5000 1 60 YIN Default Value X 25 see explanation N 56K 8 7 5 1000 10 Y 8 5 Table 8 1 Physical X 25 Port Parameters continued Parameter Valid Values Default Value Generate Clock Y N Y Rcv Clock TT from DTE Y N N CSU DSU Operating Mode Normal LDM Nor mal RTS Control Constant External Constant Lowest Highest Incoming Channel 0 4095 see explanation Lowest Highest Two Way Channel 0 4095 see explanation Lowest Highest O utgoing Channel 0 4095 see explanation z z Flow Control Negotiation 2 o c Q z o 5 amp z amp o ce g 23 ES zZz 2 E z z Local Charging Prevention x 2 z Reverse Charge Acceptance Fast Select Acceptance E z a z 213 f lo o 3 Sis aja Ojo Sig ojo vj w pio m i lt lt z z z z Mask Link Alarms Y N Maximum Packet Size 128 4096 Default Packet Size 16 4096 Maximum Window Size S A TIT N N Default Window Size 7 Maximum Throughput Class see explanation Default Calling Address 0 15 characters 1 600 T21 Incoming Call Timer sec 1 600 T22 Reset Timer sec 1 600 imer sec 1 600 DTE Restart Retry Count 0 99 DTE Reset Retry Count 0 99 DTE Clear Retry Count 0 99 CUG Parameters Prefere
53. Auto Poll 13 14 Auto Poll Timer 13 14 12 17 Index Autocall 9 11 12 11 BSC Batch 11 7 BSC Interactive 10 7 Autocall Delay 12 12 Autocall Retry Count 9 11 Autocall Retry Time 9 11 B Backup Group Number 7 19 Backup status frame relay 20 19 Bandwidth Allocation Group 4 9 8 16 9 13 9 24 9 29 14 10 15 13 16 15 Bandwidth Allocation Groups configuring 7 6 Beast Addr 14 13 BECN Recovery Count 7 18 Bitswapping 9 22 Blocked Port Flag 7 16 8 8 8 15 9 8 9 28 10 5 11 4 12 10 13 10 15 13 16 14 BOOTBAK TXT 2 4 BOOTRPT TXT 2 4 Boot up information displaying 2 4 Bridge Enabled 16 4 Bridge Filter Applications configuring 16 10 Bridge Filter Definitions configuring 16 6 Bridge forwarding table displaying 20 24 Bridge Hello Time 16 4 Bridge Max Age 16 4 Bridge node defaults 16 3 Bridge port status displaying 20 22 21 9 Bridge ports configuring 16 12 Bridge configuring 16 1 Broadcast Address 14 13 BSC Batch port configuring 11 2 BSC Interactive Devices configuring 10 10 BSC Interactive port configuring 10 2 BSC Type 10 4 C Call Info in Call Request Packet 10 4 Call Timer 13 13 Called Address 12 12 Cause codes B 1 Character Change Field 2 7 Select Option 2 7 Character Delete 12 5 Clear Max Stats 2 6 Clear VC on Last Device Down 10 6 Clearing causes B 1 async A 5 Collecting Node 4 5 Collecting Node ID 4 4 Collecting Node Pwd password 4 4 Command mode async termi
54. Compatible with QLLC NPSI HPAD PU 2 1 4 0 TPAD PU 1 0 2 0 2 1 NPAD and XPAD transparent modes Point to point and multipoint configurations SDLC to LLC2 and LLC2 to SDLC conversion Autocall Request to Send RTS support LLC2 support includes Supports both ends of PU2 to PU2 PU2 1 to PU2 1 and PU4 to PU4 connec tions End to end compatibility with SNA APPN devices over LANs Compatibility over frame relay network with IBM FEP with NCP 7 1 and above MAC evel virtual addres sing Token ring Ethernet or frame relay interface SDLC to LLC2 and LLC2 to SDLC conversion RFC1490 encapsulation in native LLC2 802 3 or 802 5 format QLLC NPSI compatibility 9 2 Each SNA port can be configured to support SNA hosts PU 2 1 4 0 HPAD NPAD or terminals PU 1 0 2 0 2 1 TPAD A port can also be configured for a transparent mode XPAD which supports HDLC and any of its subset protocols such as SDLC IBM LAPB ISO and BSC bisync LLC2 Logical Link Control type 2 support in the SmartSwitch 1800 provides a local or remote connection over frame relay via RFC 1490 or X 25 via QLLC between two SNA devices one attached toa LAN and the other attached to either another LAN or a frame relay compliant SNA APPN device Each SNA host and terminal accessing the SmartSwitch via SDLC LLC2 frame relay or X 25 will appear to a local LLC2 attached terminal or host as if it is directly connected to the local LAN LLC2 sup
55. Configure Protocols A Review Protocol Configuration B Configure Protocols C Display Memory Status C Configure Ports A Configure RLP Ports B Configure LAN Port UOoOuU moov gt cC c omnmmoou r F2 C X25 Address Translation Templates A Review X 25 Address Translation Templates B Configure X 25 Address Translation Templates C Test X 25 Address Translation Templates Configure Logical Ports Configure IP LLC2 BRIDGE IPX Interfaces Review IP Interfaces Configure IP Interfaces Review Bridge Ports LLC2 Interfaces Configure Bridge Ports LLC2 Interfaces Review IPX Interfaces Configure IPX Interfaces F Configure BSC Devices A Review BSC Device Configuration B Configure BSC Devices Configure Connections and Routing Paths A Review Subscriber IDs B Configure Subscriber IDs C D E mug mmocou Review Abbreviated Addresses Configure Abbreviated Addresses PVC Configuration frame relay X 25 async A Review PVC Configuration B Configure PVCs F Review IP Routing G Configure IP Routing H Review IPX Routing Configure IPX Routing E Configure Frame Relay Backup Groups A Review Frame Relay Backup Groups B Configure Frame Relay Backup Groups F Configure Voice Application Voice System Configuration Review Voice Speed Dial Map Configure Voice Speed Dial Map Configure Physical Ports Review Voice Interfaces Configure Voice Interfaces moov D gt B Operations A On Line Node Operations A Remote Control B Remote
56. Connection Priority 0 Connection Between As ync Port Subs criber Name Logical Channel RLP Port Packet Size Wind owSize 25 Port Subs criber Name Logical Channel RLP Port Packet Size Wind owSize and Zeer eos ynon Figure 12 4 Async to X 25 PVC Record A D E B from Main Menu gr The same parameters are displayed for an async to async PVC NOTE SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Async PVC Parameters Table 12 5 Async PVC Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Connection Priority 0 9 Subscriber Name 0 31 characters Logical Channel 1 RLP n a Port 0 3 Packet Size 128 4096 Window S ize 1 7 1 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 or 4096 Cannot be greater than the smaller Maximum Packet Size specified in the port records for both ends of the connection 2 Cannot be greater than the smaller Maximum Window Size specified in the Port records for both ends of the connection Connection Priority prioritizes this connection for intra nodal traffic the higherthe number the higher the priority This priority has no effect on traffic exiting a node Priorities are configured on all logical interfaces that use a physical frame relay port The device processor in the node uses these priorities to help determine the order in which it will process protocols When configuring priorities be careful to consider the types of traffic being routed on other connections in the node CA
57. DCE Hex Dec 00 00 01 01 03 03 05 05 07 07 09 09 OF 15 11 17 1D 29 Restart Causes From DTE Hex Dec Description 80 128 DTE originated 81 129 Out of order PVC only 83 131 Remote procedure error 85 133 Local procedure error 87 135 Network congestion 89 137 Remote DTE operational PVC only 8F 143 Network operational PVC only 91 145 Incompatible destinati on 9D 157 Network out of order PVC only When a portis restarted all active SVCs and PVCs through the port are cleared The restart cause sentin a Restart packet provides a high level indication of why the port was restarted From DCE Hex Dec 00 00 03 03 07 07 7F 127 Diagnostic Codes X 25 Codes From DTE Hex Dec 80 128 Description Local procedure error 83 131 Network congestion 87 135 Network operational FF 255 Regis tration cancellation confirmed These diagnostic codes are generated by the X 25 networkin Clear Reset and Restart Indication packets as well as Registration Confirmation and diagnostic packets Hex 00 01 02 10 11 12 13 14 15 B 2 Dec 00 01 02 16 17 18 19 20 21 Description No additional Information Invalid P s Invalid P x Packet Type Invalid Restart Transfer Phase Packet type Invalid for State r1 Packet type Invalid for State r2 Packet type Invalid for State 13 Call Setup Phase Packet type Invalid for State p1 Packet type Invalid for State p2 Packet Leve
58. Down Y N O 2 5 z o 5 o S g c o E V o o A g z lt lt lt ma leave at default End to End Acknowledgement n a leave at default Full Duplex n a leave at default Multidrop z s D 2 2 D X o 5 3 fa amp E z z z 10 150 1 200 2 10 o o p e D g 3 9 c a 8 o o D a D g 3 lt T 2 E fo 23 o lt 8 SRE o g 2 z amp U amp D 9 o g H 7 L o o Te Ts gt Q o lt 2 o Oo I 2 N apap 8 7 Poll Interval Timer msec 100 1 000 No Response Timer sec 2 10 No Response Retry Count 1 255 Error Retransmit Count 1 255 NAK Retry Count 1 255 1 75 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 14 4K 19 2K 2 Relevantonly if Physical Port Interface is other than RS 232 and Generate Clock is Y 3 See note underFigure 10 1 104 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Table 10 2 BSC Interactive Port Subscriber Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Sq Sequence 1 16 none Local Sub 0 15 characters none Remote Sub 0 15 characters none Atcl Autocall Y N used onlyon TPAD N Rtytm Retry Timer sec 15 255 60 Rty Retry Number 0 255 0 indefinite Conn ID 00 ff none 1 Ifthe TPAD is connecting to a logical X 25 port in the SmartSwitch Atcl must be Y Explanations of Port Parameters Port Type specifies the protocol the port will support Selecting this param
59. Each TPAD supports up to 32 CUs per multidrop line Required Configuration To run BSC Interactive in a SmartS witch 1800 make sure the following are properly configured e Node parameters Chapter 4 This is general configuration that must be done no matter which protocols will be run in the node e Loaded protocols Chapter 5 BSC Interactive as well as frame relay or X 25 if BSC will be transported over one of those e Frame relay Chapter 7 or X 25 Chapter 8 port s that will connect to a network or frame relay PVC e Logical X 25 Chapter 8 if BSC will be encapsulated for transmission over frame relay e BSC Interactive port s page 10 2 that will connect to the user devices e Subscriber IDs page 10 8 which identifiy user devices to each other and the SmartS witch Configuring BSC Interactive Port Records Once the necessary Node Chapter 4 and protocol Chapter 5 parameters have been configured press A at the Port Configuration Menu or A C A from the Main Menu When prompted enter a port number or press Enter to accept the default of 0 Valid port numbers depend on the model of SmartSwitch 1800 see port locations on page 6 1 The display for an existing port will show the configured parameter values while the display for a new port will show default database values See Table 10 1 on page 10 4 The following figure is an example of an existing port NOTE Cal HN BSC Interactive
60. IP Interface Record Frame Relay Example AL CL E B from Main Menu Destination IP Address is displayed only if Enable Inverse ARP is N Source IP Address is displayed only if Unnumbered Interface is N Some changes to IP Interfaces and Static Routes described later require an extra step to update the SmartS witch software Changing certain param eters will generate the message Dynamic Routing Parameters have changed Do you wish to update them at this time Y N N This must be done but if you are making several changes to IP Interfaces and Static Routes you can save time by specifying N for each change until the final one Entering Y after the final change will update all changes made to both IP Interfaces and Static Routes If you forget to specify Y after the last change you can still update the SmartSwitch 1800 via Ondine Update Dynamic Routing Parameters G at the IP LLC2 BRIDGE IPX Defaults Configuration menu or A A E G from the Main Menu If the Interface Type is Ethernet 802 3 or 802 5 there will be a menu item called Con figure Secondary Addresses Selecting this item will display a screen similar to the following 14 5 Node Name nod exyz IP Interface Configuration Screen 2 Interface Number 0 Secondary IP Address Configuration A B Cc D E F G Seq Sec IP Addr Net Mask Beast Addr RMetric RIPSupport Del 0 1 10 10 10 10 55 55 55 0 10 10 10 255 0 Option Figure 14 3 LA
61. IPX stands for Internetwork Packet Exchange which is a Novell NetWare connec tionless protocol that defines intemetwork and intranode addressing schemes LAN stands for local area network which is a network operating over short distances at high speeds LCN stands for logical channel number which is used as an identifier for a virtual circuit between a DTE and a DCE Level 2 is the link layer in the ISO International Standards Organization 7 layer OSI Open Systems Interconnect reference model Level 3 is the packet layer in the OSI reference model Line Interface Card is a daughter card mounted in a SmartSwitch 1800 and containing the components that support the two Voice ports LLC stands for logical link control which is the third layer in the three layer ISO LAN protocol hierarchy The first two layers are Physical and MAC MAC is described in this glossary LLC is responsible for addressing and data link control LLC2 isa type of LLC that requires establishment of a connection before information can be exchanged The other type of LLC is LLCI which does not require a connection Logical Channel is a logical link between node and subscriber on which calls are sent or received The physical line between devices may have a number of logical channels also called LCNs Logical DCE DTE see DCE and DTE LPDU stands for LLC protocol data unit which is the unit of in
62. LLC2 Host Connections Screen LLC2 Interfaces Display Bridge Port LLC2 Interface Reor Brheuict BSC Interactive Port Record BSC Interactive Port Record Sees 3 pondus cL d ud Typical SVC Subscriber Seteen uiuciee rere esie BSC Interactive Devices SOIBEEL ccu ska edd ER ERE ROLE mes RO CR BSC Batch Port Record BSC Batch Port Record Seren 4 eRe heels Typical SVC Subscriber AA erisa annA i Async PAD Login Parameters SCtObDL aces prre Dui rr EE eres 12 8 Asvnc to X 25 PVC Bebord ue aucem rre nid e evi Async PAD Port Screen Typical SVC Subscriber CH Voice Configuration Menu Voice System Level Koubsumd Menu TRR Speed Dial Map Configuration Menu eee yore POU UTR WOE POLE SECON MM m su FOLD 2 7 10 wu PAZ Frame Relay PVC Confia acciaio ttis icta 7 20 8 2 soisblessaauands 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 13 821 8 22 8 27 8 28 8 29 8 32 8 33 cave M 2 9 4 Typical SVC Subscriber HAE QD ONUNUMAPU MANO RHMM LLCZ Defaults Configuration Screen eui eco avancansausensareciunn ice LLC2 Originated Host Configuration Screen eese LLC2 Terminated Host b EAE QUIDEM o dba Xa aa DU rA 9 14 9 18 9 19 9 19 uus S20 arse OO Bridge Port LLC2 Interface Record Frame CO incise 9 27 10 2 10 3 10 8 10 11 11 2 11 3 11 8 12 7 12 18 mus dm 13 3 13 6 13 8 13 8 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 13 6 13 7
63. Main Menu Ga Pressing F displays a list of configured devices NOTE Table 10 4 Control and Device Unit Addressing EBCDIC hex Ctrl Unit or Device No AJ ofj N 9 of N oJ a 0 0 0091 090 ofj N oJ a A 8 5 S amp 8 N N a a a aja COIN oO ay A A mh ae o ae ASCII hex Device No hex ninl ojoj Oo N 23 amp N N O oaj gt Q e Ctrl Unit or EBCDIC ASCII hex Aj A A e AJN oe ojoj jo o o aj aj ala a N o r A A AJ ofj N o Aj A ojoo N a olo N N e S S N A DIRS wo rm n ojojo g g s O N N a oOo Configuring BSC Interactive 10 11 BSC Interactive Device Parameters Explanations of some parameters follow the table Table 10 5 BSC Interactive Device Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Connection ID 0 255 0 Single User Virtual Circuit Y N N Transparent Text Supported Y N N Printer Y N N Disable Status Response 0 2 0 Normal Status Connection ID is an internal identifier that must match a Connection ID in the BSC Interactive Port record described earlier in this chapter Single User Virtual Circuit specifies if N that each end of the connection is within a different Control Unit Device Type pair Currently this must be configured as N Transparent Text Supported causes if Y all characters transmitted including control character sequences to be treated as data
64. None SDLC Stn rcvd FRMR Nr invalid Severity 2 Meaning The remote device received a frame with an invalid N r and responded with a Frame Reject Action None SDLC Stn rcvd FRMR Ifid too long Seventy 2 Meaning The remote device received an I frame that was too long and responded with a Frame Reject Action None 22 25 22 26 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 SDLC Rem Stn sent Invalid Command Severity 2 Meaning The remote device received an invalid or unsupported command Action None SDLC Rem Stn sent unexpected IFLD Severity 2 Meaning The remote device sent an unpermitted I frame Action None SDLC Rem Stn sent invalid Nr Severity 2 Meaning The remote device sent a frame with an invalid N r Action None SDLC Rem Stn Exceeded window size Severity 2 Meaning The number of frames sent by the remote device has exceeded the window size Action None SDLC Station Inactivity timer exp Severity 2 Meaning The timerdefined by the parameters No Resp Response Poll Period and Maximum Retransmissionsin the SNA Port record has expired Action Check the PU to make sure it is operational SDLC XID Retries exhausted Severity 2 Meaning The retry limit for XID has been exceeded and link establishment has failed Action None SDLC Rem Stn sent FRMR no reason Severity 2 Meaning The remote station senta Frame Reject with no reason Action No
65. O RS 232 Database Port Type Async PAD Physical PortInterface RS 232 Blocked Port Hag N X 3Line S peed autobaud Initial Profile Name 90 Login Required N Parity 0 none DCE Cabk A ttached N Mask Link Alarms N X 25 Parameter Options Systen Memory Async PAD RS 232 autob aud 90 N 0 none N Autocall Options Browse Profile Modem Signal Options Disconnect Options O Async PAD Options A B C D E F G H I J K L M N Option Figure 12 2 Async PAD Port Screen A C A from Main Menu Profile Name the letter U will be displayed preceding the name in the AM OGTE Database column If a record does not exist for the async PAD profile identified by Initial After making any changes be sure to press F7 to update the system memory Otherwise the changes will not take effect until the next re boot of the SmartS witch 1800 12 8 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Pressing J K M N or O will display more parameters listed in Table 12 3 Pressing L will display the async PAD profile parameters listed earlier in this chapter that are resident in the SmartS witch software Async PAD Port Parameters Configuring Async Ports Table 12 3 Async Port Parameters Parameter Port Type Physical PortInterface Blocked Port Flag X 3 Line Speed Initial Profile Name Login Required Parity DCE Cable Attached Mask Link Alarms X 25 Parameter Options Default Calling Address
66. OPX and SLT refer to two wire circuits Two wire loop start circuits are the most common and are used by PSTNs PBXs or KSUs throughout the world A typical home telephone connection to the telephone company is an example of atwo wire loop start circuit The E amp M interface can use a two or four wire circuit AC15 isa four wire signaling system used by PB Xs to communicate with each other and other PB X like communications equipment The following paragraphs describe the OPX SLT E amp M and AC 15 interfaces OPX Connections OPX Off Premise Exchange is a two wire telephone communication mode In this mode the SmartSwitch 1800 presents a telco PTT interface similar to a Central Office interface When configured in this mode a SmartSwitch 1800 can interface to a con ventional two wire telephone pulse dial or touch tone A SmartSwitch 1800 in OPX mode can also be connected to a two wire CO trunk of a PBX or KSU In OPX the SmartSwitch 1800 provides loop current and ring voltage similar to a telephone company s Central Office It also detects off hook and on hook states and generates ring voltage Voice Configuration Reference Information C 9 SLT Connections SLT Single Line Telephone is a two wire telephone communication mode In this mode the SmartSwitch 1800 presents a telco PTT interface which looks like a standard telephone set The SmartSwitch 1800 can be connected to analog station ports extensions of aPBX The SLT option
67. Port Parameters screen 1 of 2 Port 1 Link State Linkup 1 O U NIV ERSAL Port Type Physical Port Interface Blocked Port Hag Line Speed Retransmission Period ms Maximum Retransmissions 3 Maximum Bytesper Frame Generate Clock Rev Clock TT from DTE BSC Type Activate Connection w o poll Interactive Parameters Screen 2 M Subscriber Information Screen3 Option Database BSCInter V35 N 9600 bps 2000 5 4105 Y N 1 tpad Y Node Name n odexyz System Memory BSC Inter V 35 N 9600 bps 2000 5 4105 Y N 1 tpad Y Figure 10 1 BSC Interactive Port Record A C Alfrom Main Menu If BSC Type item J is 2 HPAD item K will be Answer Non Configured After making any changes be sure to press F7 to update the system memory Otherwise the changes will not take effect until the next re boot of the SmartSwitch 1800 Pressing L lists more parameters and pressing M displays a screen similar to the fol lowing All BSC Interactive parameters are listed in Table 10 1 and Table 10 2 10 2 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Configuring BSC Interactive BSC Interactive S ubscriber Information Por 1 LinkState Linkup YO UNIVERSAL A B Sq Local Sub 01 100101000000000 02 100101000000001 03 100101000000002 04 100101000000003 05 100101000000004 Figure 10 2 BSC Interactive Port Record Screen 3 c D Remote Su b Atd 200201000000000N 211020100000000N 2122020100000
68. RR OMA Oo 4 1 Node Defaults Configuration Seren 1 eet del 5 1 Protocol Configuration Menu eene riores eere OAL 6 1 Physical Ports sis Ol 6 2 Deilt Configutatio Soret for New Port Geia eee 6 3 LAN Card Conhguraton Becord ccncntcenchmedcrneioncmosiannian DA 7 1 Prame Relay Backup Examples noninar A 7 2 Bandwidth Allocation Group Menu iiiiuaeescuce secas nene unen Pot 7 3 Frome Relay PON Soret Liao detur ba melna diu detur d xiii xiv 74 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 8 1 9 1 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 9 7 9 8 9 9 9 10 9 11 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 11 1 11 2 11 3 12 1 12 2 12 3 12 4 13 1 13 2 13 3 13 4 13 5 Frame Relay Port Screen 2 DLCI Configuration Review Sesta Frame Relay DLCI Configuration Serean Ys Frame Relay DLCI Configuration Screen 2 X 25 Port Screen 1 X 25 Port CUG Pusinetest T R P ET X 25 Port Trank Parainelers oso eecuss retra E Ri cts ree e tilesp a RR X 25 Dial Port Parameters Logical Port Screen 1 Typical SVC ities Sepia eT er ee Wildcard Addressing E oocisnenon sasincinaniasaaionweaionan Backup Using Address Transl atoms cruinniu Address Translation Templates Display eee Address Translation Template Ser en iussus nace kot e kia iet cle Address Translation Test Screeths uu icon in er rra edu a agite hs Mou E i o MES SDLC LLC2 Examples SNA Port Screen 1 SDLC PU Subst usin Seren
69. Relay Port Parameters screen 1 of 2 Port 0 Link State Linkup VO UNIVERSAL Datab ase System Memory Port Type Frame Rday FrameRday Physical Port Interface V 35 V 35 Blocked Port Hag N N Line Speed 64K bps 64K bps Maximum Bytes per Frame 1600 1600 Logical DCE 3 Generate Clock Rev Clock TT from DTE Link Management N1 Polling Count N2Error Threshold N3 Monitored Events Count T1 Link Integrity Timer T2 Polling Verification Timer Additional Parameters A B Cc D E F G H I J K L M N o Option Figure 7 3 Frame Relay Port Screen 1 A C A from Main Menu If Physical Port Interface item B is configured as DSU items G and H will be different NCHL After making any changes be sure to press F7 to update the system memory Otherwise the changes will not take effect until the next re boot of the SmartSwitch 1800 CAUTICN Pressing O will display a screen similar to the following figure FRM Configuring Frame Relay 7 9 Node Name node_xyz Frame Relay Port Parameters screen 2 of 2 Port 0 Link State Linkup JO UNIVERSAL Database System Memory Enable Outgoing Rate Control Y Y Enable Bandwidth A llocation Y Y Review DLCI Configuration Configu re DLCI Parameters View Learned DLCIs For Backup Use Only Automatic DCE Option Figure 7 4 Frame Relay Port Screen 2 Reviewing DLCI Configuration Figure 7 4 Item C To display the current configured DLCIs on the port press C
70. SDLC IP SNMP Bridging LLC2 Voice Frame Relay SDLC IP SNMP Voice Frame Relay SDLC IP SNMP Bridging LLC2 Voice Frame Relay SDLC IP SNMP LLC2 RIP IPX Voice Frame Relay X 25 SDLC IP SNMP Bridging LLC2 RIP IPX Voice BSC Async NVSP Each model of SmartSwitch 1800 includes e One V35 DTE male connector cable for WAN port 2 or 3 e Voice models only Two RJ 45 14 feet 8 wire cross pinned cables for the Voice ports e Cabling for connection to ASCII terminal modem and or PC e Installation and User Guides Options include e V35 DCE RS 232 DTE RS 232 DCE RS 449 DCE RS449 DTE cables e Integral CSU DSU interface replaces one serial port e Rackmount kit 19 in e Maintenance Guide User Interfaces A SmartSwitch 1800 contains four serial ports in the Voice Data models and up to eight in the data only models Each serial port supports any of the protocols that are installed see Table 1 1 with the exception of Voice which is supported on two Voice ports and can be transported over any serial port configured for frame relay Each device also includes one LAN port Ethernet or Token Ring depending on the model Operator Interfaces After it has been installed and configured a SmartSwitch 1800 can function with no keyboard or video device Therefore such devices are not standard equipment However configuration file copy backup restore transfer etc and monitoring operati
71. Signal 12 4 Padding After 12 5 Padding after If 12 5 Page Wait 12 6 Parity 12 6 12 11 Password login 2 8 Path Cost 9 29 16 14 Periodic RIP Enabled 15 14 Periodic RIP Timer 15 14 Periodic SAP Timer 15 14 Periodic Status Timer 4 5 Permit 15 9 16 11 Physical Port Interface 7 15 8 8 9 8 10 5 11 4 12 10 Physical port configuring 6 2 Ping IP connectivity test 19 14 Poll Interval Timer 10 7 Port disabling 19 11 enabling 19 11 locations 6 1 quiescing 19 12 signals displaying 20 6 statistics displaying 21 3 status displaying 20 2 unquiescing 19 12 Port Diagnostics Enabled 15 13 Port monitor 20 7 Port Priority 9 28 16 14 Port Type 7 15 8 8 9 7 10 5 11 4 12 10 Preferential CUG 8 12 8 20 Preferential CUG Flag 8 12 8 20 Primary Alarm OutputID 4 4 Primary Alarm Output Pwd password 4 4 Primary Alarm Reporting Error 4 2 Primary DLCI 7 21 Primary Name 7 21 Primary NOT Configured 4 2 Primary Port 7 21 Printer BSC Interactive Devices 10 12 Priority 4 9 7 21 8 16 8 26 8 34 9 13 9 16 9 24 9 29 10 10 11 10 12 17 12 19 14 10 15 13 16 14 Group n Excess 7 8 Outgoing DLCI 7 19 Idx 5 Profile Description 12 3 ProfileName 12 8 Profile async PAD 12 2 ProtEnab 7 23 Protocol ID Value 16 9 Proxy ARP Enabled 14 13 PU SDLC disabling 19 13 enabling 19 13 PU SDLC status displaying 20 20 PU Name 9 10 PVC Connection PVC configuring async 12 18 X25 toX 25 8 33 14 13 15 16 R Rate 13 10 R
72. This is general configuration that must be done no matter which protocols will be run in the node Loaded protocols Chapter 5 SNA as well as the transport protocol frame relay or X 25 and LLC2 if connecting to LLC2 devices or if if the trans port pro tocol will be frame relay If LLC2 will be used Bridging must also be loaded If LLC2 is being configured LAN port page 6 5 that will connect to the LAN s Frame relay Chapter 7 or X 25 Chapter 8 port s that will connect to a network or frame relay PVC SNA port s page 9 4 that will connect to the user devices if the connection will be SDLC SNA HPADs and TPADs page 9 5 which identify any SDLC devices that will communicate with SNA host and terminal devices Subscriber IDs page 9 14 to identify the user devices If LLC2 is being configured Virtual LAN ID page 9 17 Since an Smart Switchis seen to LLC2 asa virtual LAN anID must be specified to identify the node to LLC2 LLC2 hosts page 9 18 and interfaces page 9 26 if the SDLC device s will be connected to the node viaa LAN or if SDLC will be transported over frame relay per RFC 1490 9 3 Configuring an SNA Port 9 4 Once the necessary Node Chapter 4 and RLP Chapter 5 parameters have been con figured press A at the Port Configuration Menu or A C A from the Main Menu When prompted enter a port number or press Enter to accept the default of 0 Valid port numbers depend on the
73. a 1 1000 FR port line speed 15625 0 7 16 991 Native LLC2 8025 SRB 8023 TB 1 16 Native LLC2 Host MAC Address valid host address 4 400000000001 Session Type Originated Terminated Originated LAN ID 000 fff hex 5 Make sure the port is not configured for backup use only Seepage 7 18 2 Make sure the DLCI is not part of a frame relay DLCI backup group or part of a frame relay PVC both described in Chapter 7 3 See cautionat explanation 4 Configuredin LLC2 Host file described on page 9 18 If the address was bit swapped in the Host record it must also be bit swapped here 5 The LANID onan originated LLC2 interface must match the LAN ID on the corre sponding terminated interface Also other than the exception of originated terminated pairs each LAN ID must be unique among all LAN IDs throughout the network on which this node will operate Interface Type identifies whether the interface is on a LAN or a frame relay network Blocked Port Flag will cause the portto be enabled N or disabled Y at node IPL The interface will remain in that state until this parameter is changed or frame relay interface only an on line enable B B C from the Main Menu or disable B B A from the Main Menu is performed Port Priority will become the first octet ofthe Port ID field in Spanning Tree Protocol messages The lower the number the higher the priority that the interface will be given among
74. a list of active ARP Address Resolution Protocol table entries press B at the IP Status Displays Menu or C F G B from the Main Menu Information in this Display e IP Address Address of corresponding IP Interface e MAC Address MAC address to which each IP address maps e AgeOut Timer Time in seconds until the address will be removed from the table if no traffic is received from that address The address is added to the table after the S martSwitch sends an ARP request for an IP address and receives a MAC address in response The timer is reset if an IP frame is received from the either the IP or MAC address 20 26 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 If the screen is filled with information you will be asked whether you want to display more CS The ARP table does not include entries for devices that have no LAN inter faces NOL IP Interfaces Status Displays To display a list of active IP interfaces press C at the IP Status Displays Menu or C F G C from the Main Menu Information in this Display Name identifier used in the IP Route Display Each name is the interface number preceded by the interface type which is one of these fr Frame relay x X25 en Ethernet tr Token Ring lo Loopback The loopback interface is added by the SmartSwitch 1800 andhasa CS number one greater than the highest configurable interface number Nell to avoid aconflict MTU Maximum
75. a specific component for example physical ports subscriber IDs or IP interfaces Before the SmartSwitch 1800 can properly operate all necessary database parameters must be configured The necessary configuration depends on the installed hardware the routing and access protocols that will be used and the devices that will be con nected to ports in the SmartSwitch Database Setup Recommendations Many database parameters are configured with default values many of which may not need to be changed for your configuration Other parameters however define the spe cific configuration For example each device must have unique identifiers if the device will be used in remote control fi le transfer or alarm reporting operations Also each device will most likely differ in which ports will run which protocols and what the physical interfaces on those ports will be Before proceeding with yourconfiguration you should be aware of all the parameters that must be or can be specified You should first note the default values since many may be correct as is Tables of parameters including their valid and default values can be found throughout Section II The Table of Contents contains a list of all tables You should also be familiar with all devices that will connect to the SmartS witch 1800 some have requirements or restrictions Some things you must know before configuring the database are e The information in Table 2 1 on page 2 2
76. a value of 0 allows indefinite retries Del lets you delete the remote subscriber that is currently highlighted You will be prompted Delete n where n is the sequence number Pressing Y will delete that line and move all entries below it up one sequence number Configuring BSC Batch 11 7 Configuring Subscriber Addresses This operation configures the called and calling addresses that will be used in call setup To complete the connection the software must recognize where the call is coming from calling address and where it is going called address To display alist of current Subscriber IDs addresses press A at the Connections and Routing Paths Menu or A D A from the Main Menu To add or change a Subscriber ID press B at the Connections and Routing Paths Menu When prompted enter a Subscriber ID of up to 15 digits ID conventions are described on page 8 21 Node Name nodexyz SVC Subscriber Maintenance Subscriber ID 0100012345 Subscriber Name subl Routing Algorithm 0 Round Robin Systematic Redirection Redirect on Busy Redirect on Out of Order Connection Priority Routing Paths Redirection A ddresses A B Cc D E F G H Option Figure 11 3 Typical SVC Subscriber Screen A D B from Main Menu Pressing G will display routing paths which link the subscriber with one or more ports Pressing H will display the addresses used for call redirection These addresses ar
77. also be configured in Voice Application Configuration A C D from the Main Menu Also remember that Voice port 1 is con NOIL figured in the database as port 4 and Voice port 2 is configured as port 5 The display for an existing record will show the configured parameter values while the display for a new record will show values stored in a default database record The following figure is an example of a new record Rmtid nod exyz X 25 Port Parameters screen 1 of 6 Port 0 Link State Link disable Configuring Physical Ports LO UNIVERSAL Port Type Physical Port Interface Blocked Port Flag Line Speed Modulo Maximum LA PB Window Size N2Retransmit Count T1 Retransmit Period msec T2 Wait Ack Period msec T3 Link Alive Period sec Logical DCE Generate Clock M Rw Clock TT from DTE A B C D E F G H I J K L Option Database X 25 V 35 N 9600 b ps 8 1 5 10 N N N Figure 6 3 Default Configuration Screen for New Port Al C A from Main Menu 6 3 CE On a Port Parameters screen I O is always UNIVERSAL for ports 0 3 Link State will be one of these Link_disable The link was shut down by an on line command is undergoing re IPL or has not yet been established Failed Some or all modem controls are missing This state is passed through while a port is becoming enabled Link_down The link was up but has gone down Disconnect Level 2 cannot be established
78. and only if the remote device is a Cabletron frame relay access device with the backup protocol enabled on the remote DLCI connected to this backup group entry The remote node must be the same one to which the primary DLCI was connected Also ifthe remote nodeis an FR X6000 or FRM its backup DLCI must be on the same RLP as its primary DLCI or a PVC must be configured between the two DLCIs The primary DLC1 in the initiating node must have the remote node s primary RLP port DLCI configured in its DLCI parameters Delete deletes the entry When asked to confirm press Y Any entries with higher sequence numbers will move up one to fill the gap FRM Configuring Frame Relay 7 23 Introduction Chapter 8 Configuring X 25 A SmartSwitch 1800 X 25 port can connect toan X 25 DTE or an X 25 network This allows the node to transmit X 25 traffic as well as IP and IPX encapsulated per RFC 1356 and SNA per QLLC X 25 support in the SmartSwitch 1800 includes e Full compliance with CCITT Recommendation X 25 e Line speeds up to 2 048 Mbps e Full X 121 addressing capability e Address translation e RFC 1356 for IP over X 25 e RFC 1490 encapsulation HDLC The SmartSwitch 1800 also supports logical X 25 ports which allow multiple legacy protocols SDLC async bisync etc to be encapsulated via X 25 and transmitted over a single physical frame relay port A SmartSwitch 1800 can contain up to 56 logical ports all on one phy
79. and Primary Alarm Output Pwd Pass word to match the Collecting Node ID and Collecting Node Pwd Password of the col lecting node In the Port record for the physical or logical X 25 port that will be used for inter node connections configure Maximum LAPB Window Size to match the same parameter in the collecting node The following shows an example of a two node event routing configuration Network Mgmt Station with Address 12345 Collecting Node ID 222 Primary Alarm Output ID 12345 Secondary Alarm Output ID C1 Node 1 Collecting Node Alarms from Node 2 Optional Monitor Optional Async Terminal L Figure 22 1 Event Reporting Configuration Example Alarm Buffer Each node has a buffer where events are stored while waiting for transmission When a buffer reaches the percentage of full capacity specified by the parameter Max Con gestion further events originating at that node are lost until the percentage of capacity specified by the parameter Min Congestion is reached When the buffer reaches Max Congestion the node adds the event message Beginning of congestion to the buffer No more events are put into the buffer until it has reached Min Congestion at which time another message End of congestion n events lost is putinto the buffer and all events are again put into the buffer When the collecting node s event buffer reaches Max Congestion events are held in the originating nodes b
80. and Routing Paths A H Review Subscriber IDs misc chapters displays information on any subscriber IDs see below configured in the SmartSwitch Configure Subscriber IDs Chapter 8 and misc chapters identifies end users of the S martSwitch and specifies parameters for redirecting traffic to other ports Review Abbreviated Addresses Chapter 12 displays information on any abbreviated addresses see below configured in the SmartSwitch Configure Abbreviated Addresses Chapter 12 specifies short versions of subscriber IDs that can be used in place of the full addresses for async PAD subscribers PVC Configuration Chapter 7 frame relay Chapter 8 X 25 Chapter 12 async displays specifies permanent connections between SmartSwitch 1800 ports A Review PVC Configuration B Configure PVCs Review IP Routing Chapter 14 displays information on any IP routes see below configured in the SmartSwitch Configure IP Routing Chapter 14 defines routes for IP traffic through the SmartSwitch 1800 Review IPX Routing Chapter 15 displays information on any IPX routes see below configured in the SmartSwitch Configure IPX Routing Chapter 15 defines routes for IPX traffic through the SmartSwitch E Configure Frame Relay Backup Groups Chapter 7 allows creation of A B one or more frame relay ports DLCIs that will act as backup s for a port Review Frame Relay Backup Groups Conf
81. any SNA host or terminal device Public Data Network see PDN PVC stands for permanent virtual circuit which is a permanent logical connection between two subscribers analogous to a leased line Transmission of packets on a PVC needs no call setup or call clearing QLLC is Qualified Logical Link Control which is a method of encapsulating SNA traffic for transmission over X 25 RIP stands for routing information protocol which provides for dynamic routing in a TCP IP implementation Root isthe bridge determined by implementation of the spanning tree algorithm to be the lowest cost path between points in a bridged link SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Glossary Router is a device that receives data and routes it based on decisions made concerning the most desirable path Routing is the process that selects the path taken by packets as they traverse the network between nodes Routing algorithm is the precise specification of the procedure used by the nodes to determine which of several possible paths through the network will be taken by a packet RS 232C often called simply RS 232 is an EJA standard defining a physical and electrical interface for DCE DTE connections RS 422 is an EIA standard that operates in conjunction with RS 499 to specify electrical char acteristics for balanced circuits circuits with their own ground leads RS 449 is an EIA standard defining a physica
82. are logical ports unless RLP is 253 in which case 66 Remote control 67 File transfer 68 Alarm con nection Node Name node xyz Connection Status Dis play Menu Page 1 RLP 0 Port 0 To LCN State Subscriber RLP P LCN State Subscriber 4095 Data trans 100000100 0 0 4095 Data trans120000110 500 Data trans 1100001000 0 5 10 Data trans111000120 255 Port down 0 3 0 Not conect 10 Data trans 110010000 253 3 6 Data trans33333 Figure 20 4 Virtual Connections Display on Non Frame Relay Port C C from Main Menu Information in this Display e Seq is a sequence number used to identify the connection 1 is the logical interface P PVC S SVC e D is the direction of the connection Incoming O Outgoing e LCN is the logical channel number State Data trans means that call processing was successful and the con nection is in the data transmission state Call setup means that the attached device is waiting for Call Accept Clearing means thatthe attached device is in Call Clear state waiting for Clear Confirmation Resetting means that a Reset has been sent to the remote device and the attached device is waiting for a Reset Confirmation Port down is self explanatory Connected means that a connection has been established Not conect means that a connection has not been established or has been broken Undefined means that the port is in some unknown state e Subscrib
83. as follows F1 refreshes the screen with any changes that were made to items A F F7 starts a capture F2 stops the capture F3 retums to the next higher menu A capture in progress will remain active F4 purges the buffer Displaying Capture Data To display captured LAN data press C at the Traffic Monitor Menu The display will be similar to the following Node Name node_xyz Event 2 of 1 6 00001 000 00 10 IP FFFFFFFFFFFF 0000CODCBE28 0806 HDOHDHDNJJJFEFELMFFOFKOEKFOEKFO EKFOEKFOKEWFOKEFOKMFEMFOKF EWKFEWKFFLELF 00002 002 40 O0 IP 0100 FFFFFFFFFFFF 0000CODCBE28 0806 HDOHDHDNJJJFEFELMFFOFKOEKFOEKFO EKFOEKFOKEWFOKEFOKMFEMFOKF EWKFEWKFFLELF 00003 004 30 I0 IP 0100 FFFFFFFFFFFF 0000CODCBE28 0806 HDOHDHDNJJJFEFELMFFOFKOEKFOEK FO EKFOEKFOKEWFOKEFOKMFEMFOKF EWKFEWKFFLELF PgUpPgDn F3 Exit F4 Purge Capture F7 Goto ev Figure 20 9 LAN Capture Display C E C from Main Menu 20 18 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 The three numbers near the upper right identify from left to right the currently selected frame the lowest sequence number Num see below in the current buffer and the highest sequence number in the current buffer Information in this Display Num a five digit sequence number Time the time to the hundredth of a second since the first event in the current buffer D the data direction incoming or O outgoing On monitors capable of dis playing reve
84. associated broadcast address will automatically change to default values appropriate CAUTICN for the new address For this reason configure the IP address first then the mask then the broadcast address 14 9 Descriptions of Parameters Common to all Interface Types Maximum Transmission Unit is the maximum size in bytes of the data field that can be used to encapsulate an IP datagram for transmission overthe interface Any datagrams larger than the Maximum Transmission Unit will be fragmented resulting in additional processing on any inter mediate routers or gateways as well as the destination host If the Maximum Trans mission Unit value is less than the size of a minimal IP datagram the value will automatically change to the minimal datagram size Routing Metric Count is the number of network hops network gateways in the overall path over the internet associated with this interface usually zero During routing the interface with the lowest count will be selected ICMP Redirects specifies whether IP may add routes obtained by ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol whose error and control function is used to send re direction options back to the source if problems are discovered RIP Support specifies the level of RIP support on the interface 0 Enabled All RIP messages will be accepted and RIP messages of the version configured in IP Node Defaults A A E A from the Main Menu see page 14 3 will be tran
85. before the timer expires e Inactive Backup DLCI only The DLCI is available e ACK Wait Hold The initiating node has issued a switchover or switchback commandand is waiting for an ACK acknowledgment from the remote node Received data traffic will be held pending the ACK e ACK Wait Discard The ACK see ACK Wait Hold has not been received within a pre determined number of transmissions of the switchover s witchback command Any recei ved or held traffic will be discarded 20 19 e Backup Pend Hold Primary DLCI only A backup DLCI is attempting to be located Received data will be queued on the primary DLCT s queue e Backup Pend Discard Primary DLCI only A backup DLCI is attempting to belocated Received data will be discarded Displaying SDLC PU Status To display the status of all PUs on an SNA port press C at the Protocol Status Dis plays Menu When prompted enter e RLP Press Enter accepting the dafault and only valid value of 0 e Port 0 7 for physical ports 8 63 for logical ports Valid numbers for physical ports depend on the model of SmartS witch 1800 see port locations on page 6 1 Node Name nod e_xyz SDLCPU StatusDisplay for RLP 0 Port 2 Station Add ress Name State Pudl Never Activated D2 Pud2 Active Figure 20 10 SDLC PU Status Display C F C from Main Menu Information in this Display e Station Address specified when configuring the SNA port ident
86. between two subscribers connected to anetwork analogous to connection by a dial up line TCP stands for transmission control protocol which is the Internet standard transport layer protocol Throughput Class sometimes abbreviated thruput class reflects the line speed in bits per second Token Ring is a MAC see that entry technique for data transmission that uses a ring configu ration of stations and a token that is passed around the ring until taken by a station which inserts a packet then retransmits the token TPAD is an integral to a SmartSwitch 1800 SNA or BSC PAD connected to a terminal Trunk is a physical or logical link between nodes Two wire is a circuit that uses the same two wires for both inbound and outbound signals V 35 is a CCITT standard defining a physical and electrical interface that is typically used by high speed digital carriers Virtual circuit is an independent logical path between two subscribers of a packet switching network established for the purpose of exchanging data VTAM stands for IBM s virtual telecommunications access method SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 X 21 is a CCITT recommendation that species the DTE DCE interface for synchronous operation on public data networks X 25 is a CCITT recommendation that specifies the DTE DCE interface for packet mode operation on public data networks X 3 is a CCITT recommendation tha
87. change a Subscriber ID press B at the Connections and Routing Paths Menu When prompted enter a Subscriber ID of up to 15 digits ID conventions are described on page 8 21 Node Name nodexyz SVC Subscriber Maintenance Subscriber ID 0100012345 Subscrib er Name subl Routing Algorithm 0 Round Robin Systematic Redirection Redirect on Busy Redirect on Out of Order Connection Priority Routing Paths Redirection A ddresses A B e D E F G H Option Figure 9 4 Typical SVC Subscriber Screen A IDI BIfrom Main Menu Pressing G will display routing paths which link the subscriber with one or more ports Pressing H will display the addresses used for call redirection These addresses are valid only if Y is specified for one or more of items C D and E on the first screen Parameters for all three screens are described following Table 9 3 9 14 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Subscriber Parameters Table 9 3 SVC Subscriber Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Routing Algorithm 0 3 Systematic Redirection Y N Redirect on Busy Y N Redirect on Out of Order Y N Connection Priority 0 9 1st 2nd etc Path Configured Y N RLP n a Port Physical port 0 3 Logical port 8 63 Redirection Address 0 1 etc valid address The software does not verify thatthe specified port exists Make sure the specified ports are configured inthe database and that they actually exist Subscriber
88. configurable network management e g status enquiries to the port will be used none LMI Local Management Interface or ANSI T1 617 Annex D an ANSE standard LMI N1 Polling Count specifies the number of polling cycles between requests for Full Status reports which include status of all PVCs on the physical link Every T1 seconds see T1 Link Integrity Timer on page 7 17 the logical DTE will send a Status Enquiry to the network requesting status of the network link Each exchange ofone enquiry and one message response is a polling cycle After every N1 cycles an enquiry for a Full Status report will be sent If this port is configured as logical DCE status enquiries will be initiated at the DTE and the local node will respond with status messages N2 Error Threshold is the number of link reliability and or protocol errors that can occur during the period defined by N3 Monitored Events Count before the logical DCE will be declared inactive N3 Monitored Events Count is the number of error free polling cycles after which the DCE will be declared active if the first poll resulted in an error If the first poll was error free the DCE will be declared active after that poll If the N2 Error Threshold is exceeded during theN3 count the DCE will be declared inactive and the N3 count will be restarted T1 Link Integrity Timer determines how often the logical DTE will initiate a Status Enquiry message to the DCE T2 Pol
89. dial string when Source of Extended Digits ina port s Voice Port record is set to User Speed dial numbers and extended digits can be output by remote voice fax ports Extended digits will be forwarded to the remote end of the frame relay connection if all of these conditions are met e Extended dial digits are configured in the speed dial map e The parameter Forwarded Output Digits in the Voice Port record is set to All to Ext e The parameter Source of Extended Digits in the Voice Port record is set to Map If the first two conditions are met but Source of Extended Digits is set to User the operator must enter the extended dial digits to be forwarded Setting the number of extended digits to a value greater than zero reduces the number of allowable entries in the speed dial map table When Extended Dial Digits is 0 up to 512 map table entries can be defined When Extended Dial Digits is greater than 0 only 256 entries can be defined See the Store and Forward Dialing examples on page C 1 for more information about how this parameter is used 13 5 Reviewing and Configuring the Speed Dial Map Table The speed dial map table contains dial numbers similar to telephone numbers that can be used tocall remote devices The table associates each of these numbers called long dial numbers with a shorter usually speed dial number that can be used to call the device as well as any configured extended dial digits that will be forw
90. diosa E ee ae sepa c A ree PN gens B 4 xii SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Telephony Interface M S Telephone Interfaces cis Uinta Lo PTT Telco Connectors and Cabling PE ed E amp M Siging Types Hiei niece meee a A E amp M Grounding Considerations ee ud tabe G TE ec is rio eT mm C 17 Application Examples eenc rtt ser Rn thee RR tto LU oaa C 17 Appendix D NetView Management Locsl Net View AGGE E cenin ne nis Bicbsda R rbi ac ert acd duae eda Mau Supported Commands 1225 torre riter ies oieensdceres DA Display Comman dS cs eiu ce erancemren a RUE xS E RACER GE ean des D 3 Vary COOIMANE M D4 Medi Eom mibtieo a aiueco exec id EGER RD EROR ROUARESE RU ee Gree ue Med nes D4 Appendix E ASCII Character Table Appendix F Menu Structure Glossary Index List of Figures 1 1 Nowak BARING uctor pui iain Rag eU ad ir a Led 2 1 Physical Port Locations 4ieeenc ett peo ttbi FREU e ica RR epp ai is 2 2 Pont status USD eo caiusck sen eot lure e MORD 2 3 Man r i at 3 1 Lonflientauon Example 1 cierto t erede erdeipeecithus e eh 3 2 onis Don EXORDIO Zespri rii n LATO Rav E bo ibi Flap ad i 3 3 Configuration Example 3 o EREE Misi 3 4 Local SmartSwitch 1800 in Clgfiguration Example Daci ud qud 3 5 Remote SmartSwitch 1800 in Configuration Example 3 3 5 3 6 Cong nen Example Aaa sca depep Fieri rene b PUR Y bx HOO EH
91. for a host on another subnet This lets the device that sentthe ARP request think the SmartSwitch is the destination host If an ARP request is received the IP function in the SmartSwitch 1800 checks the address against the Source IP Address configured on the IP interface Then e If the addresses match a reply will be sent e If the addresses do not match and Proxy ARP is not enabled no response will be sent e If the addresses do not match and Proxy ARP is enabled the IP function will check to see if the SmartS witch has a route to the host or the host s network If there is a route and the route is reachable and the route is not on the same interface on which the ARP request was received an ARP response will be sent Secondary Address Parameters Seq is simply a sequence number to identify the entry Sec IP Addr specifies a secondary IP address The valid range of values guarantees that you cannot configure all Os or all 1s for anetwork ID node ID or subnet ID Seepage 14 1 NetMask is the sub network mask for the secondary IP address The mask is used during routing to determine the portion of the address associated with the sub network All network bits are set to 1 and must be contiguous Bcast Addr is the broadcast address associated with the secondary IP address This address is used to send to all LAN hosts on the sub network Configuring IP Routing 1443 RMetric isthe routing metric count associated
92. fragments dropped because of dupli cation or lack of space e Frag Created is the number of outgoing datagram fragments created e Pkts Forwarded is the number of datagrams forwarded e Can t Frag is the number of times fragmentation of an datagram was disal lowed because the flag field did not allow fragmentation ICMP Statistics ICMP statistics track traffic of Internet Control Message Protocol messages through the node ICMP messages are encapsulated with IP headers and transmitted with the IP traffic Press D at the Statistics menu and when prompted enter a Report Interval 5 65535 seconds Default is 5 Node Name node_xyz ICMP Statistics Dis play Report Interval sec 5 Current Time 6 17 1997 14 23 45 STATIS TIC CURR CUMULA TIVE STATIS TIC CURR CUMULATIVE ICMP Errors 90 1000000000 Pkt Too Short 90 1000000000 Old Too Short 90 1000000000 Bad Checksum 90 1000000000 Old ICMP 90 1000000000 Bad Pkt length 90 1000000000 Bad ICMP Code 90 1000000000 Responses Cnt 90 1000000000 Out Echo Reply 90 1000000000 InEcho Reply 90 1000000000 Out Dest Unrech 90 1000000000 InDest Unrech 90 1000000000 Out Pkt Lost 90 1000000000 InPkt Lost 90 1000000000 Out Redirect 90 1000000000 InRedirect 90 1000000000 Out Echo 90 1000000000 InEcho 90 1000000000 Out Time Exceed 90 1000000000 InTime Exceed 90 1000000000 Out Bad IP Hdr 90 1000000000 InBad IP Hdr 90 1000000000 Out Time Req 90 1000000000 InTime Req 90 1000000000 Out Time Rsp
93. frame relay X 25 Ethernet or Token Ring interface To display all IP interfaces configured on the node press A at the Configure IP LLC2 BRIDGE IPX Interfaces Menu or A C E A from the Main Menu To configure an interface press B at the Configure IP LLC2 BRIDGE IPX Inter faces Menu When prompted enter an interface number 0 256 This is merely a sequential number to identify the interface It is a good ideato configure the LAN IP interface as interface 0 This CS ensures that the default IP address used for un numbered interfaces will ACC always be the same See Unnumbered Interface on page 14 11 The display depends on the interface the following figure shows an example and Table 14 2 through Table 14 4 list the parameters for all interface types 144 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Configuring IP Routing CS NOs CS NON IP Interface Configuration Interface Number 10 Maximum Transmission Unit Routing Metric Count ICMP Redirects RIP Support RIP Hash Up dates sec RIP Full U pdates sec Priority Bandwidth Allocation Group Interface Type Source Card Source Port Source DLCI Enable Inverse ARP Destination IP Address Unnumbered Interface Source IP A ddress Network Mask A B Cc D E F G H I J K L M N o P Q Node Name n odexyz 0 Enabled 60 120 5 1 FRL 0 0 16 N 100 100 2 1 N 100 100 2 2 255 0 0 0 Option Figure 14 2
94. in Node Defaults NCHL Packet switching is reduced when multiple file transfers occur because of Ee the data I O However there should be no other side effects NCHL 1 Press C at the On Line Node Operations menu or B A C from the Main Menu 2 When prompted enter the File Transfer ID and File Transfer Pwd password of the node you are updating 3 When asked Initiate File Transfer press Y or N 4 If asked Are you sure you want to do a remote software update press Y The old and new release numbers of the database will be displayed along with the new release number of the SmartS witch 1800 operating software The transfer process is as follows and is repeated for each file except where noted in step 1 To assure that there is enough disk space for a multiple file transfer the largest file will be sent first It will be transferred only if there is enough disk space for the new file and the file it is replacing Once the transfer is complete the old file will be deleted providing enough disk space to accommodate the next file 1 The originating node will send a message that includes a request for the remote node s release number the file name and size The request for release number will be sent only with the first file name If the release numbers of the sending and receiving nodes are incompatible the transfer will not occur and an error message will be displayed If this happens contact your se
95. in the SmartSwitch 1800 checks the node number addressed in the call against a list maintained by the Voice software If the number is that of the remote node called the peer node the call is forwarded out the frame relay port To display the existing Voice interfaces and parameter values press E at the Voice Configuration Menu or A F E from the Main Menu To configure an interface press F at the Voice Configuration Menu When prompted for an Interface Number type a number 0 128 then press Enter A screen similar to the following will be displayed SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Node Name node_xyz Voice Interface Configuration Parameters Interface Number 1 Interface Peer Node Type SmartSw itch 1800 Peer Node Number D efau It Peer Node Port Default Local Node Number Default Local Node Port D fault Frame Rday Port Frame Rday DLCI Enable Fragmentation A B Cc D E F G H Option Figure 13 7 Voice Interface Configuration Menu A F F from Main Menu Voice Interface Parameters The parameters that can be configured are listed in the following table Explanations follow the table Table 13 6 Voice Interface Configuration Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Interface Peer Node Type Default SmartS witch 1800 Default Peer Node Number Default 1 61 1 Peer Node Port Default 0 15 Local Node Number Default 1 61 Local Node Port Default 0
96. interface n IPadr err Severity 3 Meaning Self explanatory Action Double check the configured addresses Error adding interface n Severity 3 Meaning Self explanatory Action Contact Cabletron Systems Technical Support See page 22 4 Error modifying interface n Severity 3 Meaning Self explanatory Action Check the database record Interface n deleted successfully Severity 4 Meaning Self explanatory Interface n added successfully Severity 4 Meaning Self explanatory Interface n modified successfully Severity 4 Meaning Self explanatory Error deleting route with destination n mask n router n Severity 3 Meaning Self explanatory Action Contact Cabletron Systems Technical Support See page 22 4 Route with destination n mask n router n deleted successfully Severity 4 Meaning Self explanatory Error adding route with destination n mask n router n Severity 3 Meaning Self explanatory Action Contact Cabletron Systems Technical Support See page 22 4 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 System Events 491 492 493 494 501 502 503 504 Route with destination n mask n router n added successfully Severity 4 Meaning Self explanatory BAG n capped at n but trunk MAXDPS n Severity 3 Meaning The datapacket size MAXDPS on the trunk caused a greater traff
97. is greater than 7 0 7 is modulus 8 or 128 anything greater is only modulus 128 Changing the modulus will disable the link Generate Clock specifies whether the port will generate the clock necessary to synchronize traffic over the link If the port is a physical DCE determi ned by the port s I O cable interface configure Generate Clock as Y since the physical DCE generates clock If the port is DTE configure Generate Clock as N Rev Clock TT from DTE allows the clock to be looped back from the DTE using the TT Terminal Timing signal which can be helpful on high speed lines Generally if the local interface is physical DCE and the line speed is above 256 Kbps this parameter should be set to Y Make sure the remote DTE is configured to provide the terminal timing SNA Type 0 XPAD 1 TPAD 2 HPAD 3 NPAD Pressing L at the Port screen changes the value to the next one in the list The most common SNA networking requirement is for communication between an SNA host computer PU type 4 and control units PU type 2 This is accomplished via an HPAD Host PAD and TPAD Terminal PAD The host computer FEP is con nected to the HPAD and the cluster controller is connected to aTPAD The XPAD is particularly useful for networking of statistical multiplexers and other bit sync devices NRZ determines the level of data encoding Y NRZ Non Return to Zero on which means that 1 represents high level encoding and0 i
98. is pulled to 48 Vdc as biased by the PBX Attached Device Initiated Disconnect The attached device initiates the disconnect by opening the E lead The E lead is pulled to 48 Vdc as biased by the PBX In response the PBX opens the M lead which is pulled to 48 Vdc as biased by the attached device E amp M Type V Idle Condition The E leadis biased by the PBX at 48 Vdc The M lead is biased at 48 Vdc by the attached device SmartS witch 1800 PB X Initiated Call The PB X grounds the M lead signaling to the attached device that it wants a connection The attached device grounds the E lead signaling the response Attached Device Initiated Call The attached device grounds the E lead signaling to the PB X that it wants a connection The PBX grounds the M lead signaling the response PB X Initiated Disconnect The PBX initiates disconnection by opening the M lead The M lead is pulled to 48 Vdc as biased by the attached device In response the attached device opens the E lead which is pulled to 48 Vdc as biased by the PBX Attached Device Initiated Disconnect The attached device initiates the disconnect by opening the E lead The E lead is pulled to 48 Vdc as biased by the PBX In response the PBX opens the M lead which is pulled to 48 Vdc as biased by the attached device SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Telephone Company Rights and Responsibilities If your equipment c
99. is sent it must be sent as soon as possible SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Configuring SNA Ti N3 Tw N2 is the Inactivity Timer used by the link station to detect an inoperative condition in either the remote link station or the transmission medium The timer will be started if T1 has been reset for one of the reasons listed under Ti and additional LPDUs have been sent by the remote link station and there are no outstanding acknowledgments or responses from the local link station If the local station does not receive an LPDU before Ti expires the station must send an LPDU with the P bit set to B 1 to solicit the remote station s status Recovery then proceeds as described under Ti is the number of Information LPDUs that will be received before an acknowledgment is sent N3 is used in conjunction with T2to allow stations to reduce traffic A counter is initialized to N3 and will be decremented by one each time a valid sequential Infor mation LPDU is received When the counter reaches 0 an acknowledgment is sent N3 is reset whenever an Information or Supervisory acknowledgment LPDU is sent by the local station is the maximum number of sequentially numbered Information LPDUs that the link station can have outstanding is the maximum number of times that an LPDU including Information LPDUs resent after a checkpoint operation will be sent following expiration of T1 Priority prioritizes intra nodal
100. is the maximum number of times the node will attempt to send an I frame after a Retransmission Period expiration A larger value forthis parameter increases the prob ability of an eventual successful transmission but a smaller value permits faster detection of a permanent error condition Maximum Bytes per Frame is the maximum frame size that will be transmitted on the port Generate Clock specifies whether the port will generate the clock necessary to synchronize traffic over the link If the port is a physical DCE determined by the port s I O cable interface set this parameter to Y since the physical DCE generates clock If the port is DTE set the parameter to N Rev Clock TT from DTE allows the clock to be looped back from the DTE using the TT Terminal Timing signal which can be helpful on high speed lines Generally if the local interface is physical DCE and the line speed is above 256 Kbps this parameter should be set to Y Make sure the remote DTE is configured to provide the terminal timing Activate Connection w o poll will if enabled activate the TPAD connection without a poll of the connected device Answer Non Configured will if Y allow the HPAD to respond to all devices on the line If N the HPAD will respond only to those devices that are configured on the node Clear VC on Last Device Down if Y causes the virtual circuitto be cleared when no terminals are using it Multidrop specifies whether tra
101. issuing the command and command is the text of command sent to the SmartSwitch 1800 The command part of the RUNCMD is the only part that needs to be entered by a Smart Switch 1800 operator performing local access operations Supported commands are described over the next few pages CS Most of the commands include linename n n n puname in the format linename is the Name from the first screen of the SNA Port record n n n NCL are options that can be specified if a line name was entered and puname is the PU Name from the PU Parameters screen of the SNA Port record Display Commands DISPL AY ID Function Displays the active inactive status of specified PUs Command D NET ID linename A E I N puname Options A all active PUs on the line E all PUson the line l allinactive PUs on the line N only the line status no PUs This is the default if no option is entered DISPLAY LINES Function Displays the active inactive status of specified lines Command D NET LINES A EII Options A all active lines E all lines This is the default if no option is entered l all inactive lines DISPLAY CONFIG Function Displays the configuration parameters for specified PUs Command D NET CONFIG ID linename A E I ouname Options A all active PUs on the line E all PUs on the line l all inactive PUs on the line Net View Management D 3 Vary Commands VARY ACT Function Changes the desired status of
102. lines Generally if the local interface is physical DCE and the line speedis above 256 Kbps this parameter should be set to Y Make sure the remote DTE is configured to provide the terminal timing EBCDIC stands for Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code Specifying Y requires that all devices on a line use the same character set for successive session polls It is activated after a session is over i e an EOT End of Transmission is suc cessfully transmitted down the line On expiry a General Poll is transmitted except under certain special conditions The timer is deactivated at Link Down Transparent Text Supported causes if Y all characters transmitted including control character sequences to be treated as data This is useful for transmitting binary data machine language computer programs etc without special coding Data link control character sequences transmitted during transparent mode must be preceded by character 1 0 DLE in order to be recognized as control characters Ack specifies which methods of acknowledgement will be used A ETB oc ETX end local acknowledgement of transmission blocks end to end acknowledgement of text B ETB end ETX end end to end acknowledgement of trans mission blocks and text C ETB loc ETX loc local acknowledgement of transmission blocks and text Ce ETB End of transmission block ETX End of text NOTE Configuring BSC Batch 11 5 Controller Type A
103. name8 Read write name9 Read write namel10 Read write namell Read write name12 Read write name13 Read write namel4 Read write name15 Read write namel6 Read_write Seq 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Figure 17 2 SNMP Community Table Menu A A D B from Main Menu To configure an entry press the corresponding Seq sequence number To delete an entry select it then press D and Y when asked to confirm All entries below a deleted one will move up one in the list Community Table Parameters Table 17 2 Community Table Parameter Parameter Valid Values Default Value 0 24 characters none Access Read only Read write Read only Name is a community name assigned by a network manager Access determines what kind of access community members will have to SNMP messages Configuring SNMP 17 3 Configuring Trap Routing The trap task allows the SNMP manager to specify one or more IP addresses up to sixteen to which the node s events alarms will be sent as SNMP traps To con figure trap routing press C at the SNMP Configuration Menu Node Name node xyz Trap Routing B Address C Enabled D Severity E Delete 255255 255255 123 123 123 123 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BRRRRRRAE RRR REE Option Figure 17 3 SNMP Trap Routing Menu A A D C from Main Menu To configure an entry press the corresp
104. on the node s Console port IP Ping Connectivity Test Chapter 19 Uses the Ping function to determine whether an IP host is reachable On Line SDLC PU Operations Chapter 9 A Disable an SDLC PU Takes any SDLC PU in the node off line B Disable a Range of SDLC PUs Takes a group of PUs off line C Enablean SDLC PU Brings any SDLC in the node on line D Enablea Range of SDLC PUs Brings a group of PUs on line NetView Access Appendix D allows a NetView manager to obtain information on the node via NMVT commands or from files in the node database CSU DSU Tests Chapter 19 valid only if the intemal CSU DSU port is installed A Self Test transmits a test pattern to the analog portion of the circuitry and loop the pattern back to itself B Pattern Generation Test transmits a PRBS pseudo random bit sequence test pattern to the remote device which will loop the signals back Frame Relay Backup Operations Chapter 19 allows manual switching from a primary frame relay DLCI toits backup orfrom the backupto the primary A Initiate Switching Primary DLCI Over to its Backup B Initiate Switching DLCI Back to the Primary oQmnmmoou r Status Displays Chapter 20 A B C Node Status displays performance and link status for the node Port Status displays port type operational status and link states for all ports on the node Virtual Connections displays DLCIs LCNs link states subscrib
105. operator at device A should first ping interface 1 If a response is received the operator at A should then ping interface 3 then if aresponse is received device B 3 SS 1800 4 2 Figure 19 4 Ping Example CSU DSU Tests To test the optional CSU DSU port the port must first be disabled If necessary press A at the Operations Menu or B A from the Main Menu to disable the port To run a CSU DSU test press I at the Operations Menu then press the letter corre sponding to the desired test A Self Test transmits a test pattern to the analog portion of the circuitry and loop the pattern back to itself B Pattern Generation Test transmits a PRBS pseudo random bit sequence test pattern to the remote device which will loop the signals back Reloading Auxiliary Console Initialization This operation reloads the terminal settings defined for an async terminal connected to the SmartSwitch 1800 s Console port Press E at the Operations Menu or B E from the Main Menu If an async terminal is connected the Console port the initialization data will be sent Ondine Operations 19 15 Initiating Frame Relay Backup Switchover Switchback 19 16 Frame Relay backup DLCIs can be configured as described in Chapter 7 to automat ically become operational a set time after failure of a primary DLCI and to switch back to the primary a set time after the primary becomes operational again These
106. other interfaces in the spanning tree 9 28 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Path Cost will be added together with all other path costs on a link between bridges The total will then be compared to other total path costs to determine the least expensive end to end path Priority prioritizes intra nodal traffic the higher the number the higher the priority This pri ority has no effect on traffic exiting a node Priorities are configured on all logical interfaces that use a physical frame relay port The device processor in the node uses these priorities to help determine the order in which it will process protocols When configuring priorities be careful to consider the types of traffic being routed on other connections in the node CAUTICN Port identifies the physical port containing the interface Make sure the physical frame relay port is not reserved for backup DLCIS as determined by the For Backup Use Only parameter in the port record CAUIILN DLCI matches the connection with an interface at the remote end of the link Make sure the DLCI is not part of a frame relay DLCI backup group or frame relay PVC CAUTICN Format is the RFC1490 encapsulation method used for LLC2 traffic Avoid configuring parallel Bridge LLC2 frame relay links between two SmartSwitches if one path is in nativeLLC2 format and the other in some other format Since the same interfaces are CAUTICN used for both protocols and
107. over frame relay BSC Batch port s page 11 2 that will connectto the user devices Subscriber IDs page 11 8 which identifiy user devices to each other and the SmartS witch Configuring BSC Batch Ports Once the necessary Node Chapter 4 and protocol Chapter 5 parameters have been configured press A at the Port Configuration Menu or A C A from the Main Menu When prompted enter a port number or press Enter to accept the default of 0 Valid port numbers depend on the model of SmartSwitch 1 800 see port locations on page 6 1 The display for an existing port will show the configured parameter values while the display for a new port will show default database values See Table 11 1 on page 11 3 The following figure is an example of an existing port Node Name n odexyz BSC Batch Port Parameters screen 1 of 2 Port 1 Link State Linkup VO V35 Datab ase System Memory Port Type BSC Batch BSC Batch Physical Port Interface V 35 V 35 Blocked Port Hag N N Line Speed 9600 bps 9600 bps Retransmission Period ms 2000 2000 Maximum Retransmissions 5 5 Maximum Bytesper Frame 4105 4105 Generate Clock Y Y Rev Clock TT from DTE N N Batch Parameters Screen 2 K Subscriber Information Screen3 A B C D E F G H I J Option Figure 11 1 BSC Batch Port Record A C Alfrom Main Menu system memory Otherwise the changes will not take effect until After making any changes be sure to
108. part of an SDLC LLC2 connection you do not have to configure those parameters 9 5 SNA Port Parameters Table 9 1 SNA Port Parameters Physical Port Interface Blocked Port Flag Line Speed No Data Poll Period ms No Resp Poll Period ms Maximum Retransmissions Outstanding Frames 2 Generate Clock Rev Clock TT from DTE SNA Type NRZ Packet Size Disable Request Disconnect LPDA Support Idle Fill Character Inactivity Timer sec 4 L1 Duplex Valid Values SNA up to 8 characters see explanation Y N see explanation 1 500 40 9999 0 99 1 128 Y N Y N 0 3 Y N 16 4096 bytes Y N 2 OxFF Ox7E 15 250 Full Half Default Value not valid here none see explanation 1 Although 10 characters can be entered only the first 8 will be recognized by some remote manager devices 2 Can sometimes be changed without disabling the link see explanation 3 This parameter is relevant only if Physical Port Interface is something other than RS 232 and Generate Clock is Y 4 This parameter is relevant only ifSNA Type is 2 HPAD SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Table 9 2 SNA Port PU Parameters Parameter PU Name Local Subscriber ID Remote Subscriber ID Maxdata Max I Frm bytes frame Autocall Autocall Retry Time sec Istatus LPDA Resource ID LLC2 Connection L2DatMode LLC2 Parameters Local SAP Address Local MAC Address IDBLK IDNUM T1 100 msec T2 msec Ti
109. point X 25 connections The valid range of values guarantees that you cannot configure all Os or all 1s fora network ID node ID or subnet ID See page 14 1 Unnumbered Interface allows the point to point frame relay interface to be configured without specifying a source IP address If Y the address of the lowest IP interface number not the lowest address but the number in the range 0 256 that identifies the interface in the S mart Switch is used as a default source IP address It does not matter what type that interface is All un numbered interfaces on the SmartSwitch use the same default address If a new interface with a lower number is added that interface s address will become the new default source IP address butonly after the next IPL of the SmartS witch Naturally this feature works only if there is at least one numbered interface in the device If there are none all un numbered interfaces remain disabled Once a num bered interface is added all un numbered interfaces will become active Source IP Address is the IP address of the end to end sender The valid range of values guarantees that youcannot configure all 0s or all 1s for a network ID node ID or subnet ID See page 14 1 Network Mask is used during routing to determine the portion of the address associated with the network and subnetwork if any All bits associated with the network subnet should be set to 1 and must be contiguous Source Subs
110. press F oth erwise make another selection or press F3 to exit the menu SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 If sending database files and operating software files send all of one type then be sure to repeat step 3 to change the directory to which the remaining file s will be sent CAUTILN Enable Disable Operations Disabling and Enabling Ports Press B at the Operations Menu to display the On Line Port Operations Menu Node Name n ode_xyz On Line Port Operations Disable a Port Disable a Range of Ports Enable a Port Enable a Range of Ports Quiesce a Port Quiesce a Range of Ports gt Unquiesce a Port H Unquiesce a Range of Ports Option Figure 19 1 On Line Port Operations Menu BL B from Main Menu Operations A D disable or enable a single port or a sequential range of same type ports e g all SNA ports from port 1 to port 3 The operations can be useful for per forming maintenance on ports without shutting down the node They are also used to activate a PVC by disabling then enabling both ports after the PVC record has been created Select an operation from the menu Figure 19 1 items A D When prompted e If enabling or disabling a single port enter RLP Port 0 7 for physical ports 8 63 for logical ports Valid numbers for physical ports depend on the model of SmartSwitch 1800 see port loca tions on page 6 1 e If enabling or disabling a range of ports enter Port Type 1 X
111. provides the appearance of a two wire telephone in a loop start circuit An SLT configured voice port on a SmartSwitch 1800 detects ring voltage and closes the loop during off hook and opens the loop in an on hook condition E amp M Connections E amp M is acommunication mode used in PBX to PBX communications as shown in the following illustration cc TRUNK TUN FTN PTN Figure C 5 Inter PBX Trunking This type of interface uses a two wire or four wire voice circuit plus up to four wires for E amp M signaling In this mode the SmartSwitch 1800 offers an interconnection path between two PB Xs PBX E amp M tie line connections usually require multi conductor dedicated circuits to support full duplex voice and separate signaling lines Typically eight wires are required four for voice two wires in each direction and four for E amp M signaling A few PBXs use two wires one pair for bi directional voice The SmartSwitch 1800 can interface with either of these circuits The E amp M interfaceis designed to connect with that ofa PB X tie line port and provide appropriate end to end signaling support fora variety of applications The system generates the E signal to the PB X inresponse to an inbound signal at the remote unit That signal depends onthe application of the remote unit The local unit will generate the E signal in the following applications e The remote unit is configured for E amp M signaling and detects an activ
112. reaches the specified value the node will issue an EOT and clear the virtual circuit NAK Retry Count specifies the number of times the node will send a frame whenthe receiving device is unable to acknowledge that is returns a NAK to the node VC to be Cleared After Disc specifies whether the virtual circuit will be cleared after completion of a file transfer Idle Timer is activated on reception ofan EOT from the li ne On expiry an EOT is sent to the line and a Clear Request is sent if VC to Be Cleared After Disc is Y 114 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Subscriber Parameters Sq is a sequence number which eases selection of a line on the screen to change To move to another line press A and enter the sequence number Local Sub is the calling address used by the local device A Subscriber ID see page 11 8 must also be configured for this address Remote Sub is the called address used for calls by the local device A Subscriber ID see page 11 8 must also be configured for this address If the BSC port is one end of a connection to a logical X 25 port in the SmartSwitch this address must match a Subscriber ID configured for the logical port Atcl Autocall causes a BSC device to automatically the remote end when it becomes active Rtytm is the Retry Timer which is the time between autocall retries Rty is the Retry Number which determines the maximum number of times an autocall will be sent Note that
113. return the display to Figure 21 9 21 9 Information on the Status Display the screen shown in Figure 21 9 is described on page 20 23 NL Information on the Bridge Port Statistics Display 21 10 Type Format identifies the interface type Ethernet Token Ring or frame relay and if framerelay frame format Native LLC2 8025_SRB or8023_TB as configured in the Port record Designated Root is the bridge selected as Root in the spanning tree The selection of rootis determined by the bridge with the lowest Bridge ID which consists of a Bridge Priority described on page 16 5 and MAC address Designated Bridge is the bridge connecting to the least cost path to the root bridge DlyExceeded is the number of frames discarded because of excessive delay OutFrames is the number of transmitted frames InCfgShort is the number of received Configuration BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units that were dropped because they were too short OutCfgBPDU is the number of transmitted Configuration BPDUs MTUExceeded is the number of frames discarded because of excessive size InDiscards is the number of incoming frames that were discarded because they did not match a filter InTcnShort is the number of received TCN Topology Change Notification BPDUs that were dropped because they were too short OutTcnBPDU is the number of transmitted TCN BPDUs FwdTrans is the number of times the Bridge port
114. see Figure 13 6 as shown in Table 13 5 to select an E amp M type 8765 4321 o o Figure 13 6 Front Panel Switches Remember that the Voice port labeled as 1 is configured in the database as port 4 and Voice port 21s configured as port 5 Nor Configuring Voice 1341 Table 13 5 E amp M Switch Settings E amp M Voice Port 2 Voice Port 1 Type Sw 8 Sw 7 Sw 6 Sw5 Sw4 Sw 3 Sw 2 Sw1 l Up Up Down Down Up Up Down Down Il Down Up Up Down Down Up Up Down V Up Down Up Up Up Down Up Up CS The E amp M types are described in Appendix C NOH Interface specifies in conjunction with Telephony Interface Type the type of interface that will be used by the Voice channel Valid selections are listed below Telephony Interface Type Interface OPX FXO Loop Start SLT FXS Loop Start E amp M 4W E amp M 4W E amp M TE 2W E amp M 2W E amp M TE AC15 AC15A or AC15C Loop Start and OPX operating modes provide characteristics similar to those of a central office Loop Start and SLT operating modes provide characteristics similar to those of a standard telephone set 4W E amp M is the normal setting for a PBX E amp M tie line interface that uses one pair of wires for the incoming voice signal and another pair of wires for the outgoing voice signal 2W E amp M is for an E amp M tie line that uses a single pair of wires for both the incoming and outgoing voice signal AC15A or AC15C are 4 wire signaling systems used by PBXs to commu
115. set to B 1 If this LPDU is sent while the timer is already running the link station will reset and restart it The link station will reset T1 when it receives one of these e AREJ Reject LPDU provided a Command LPDU with P bit set to B 1 is not outstanding e A Response LPDU with the F bit set to B 1 4 7 4 8 T2 Ti N3 Tw N2 e An Information or Supervisory LPDU with an NQ greater than the last N R received and less than or equal to the line station s V provided a Command LPDU with P bit set to B 1 is not outstanding If additional LPDUs are set from the remote link station after the local station has reset T1 the timer will be restarted if acknowledgments of orresponses to those LPDUS are outstanding If no acknowledgments responses are outstanding the link station will start the inactivity timer See Ti later If T1 expires and acknowledgments responses are still outstanding the link station will send one of the following then restart T1 e A Supervisory LPDU with the P bit set to B 1 to solicit remote link station status e Any Unnumbered LPDUS that were not responded to the first time they were sent If acknowledgments responses are still outstanding after N2 tries see N2 the link station will declare the link inoperative The value specified for T1 should allow for any delays introduced by the MAC sub layer e g queuing is the Receiver Acknowledgment Timer used by the
116. that contains the interface Router Addr address of the router that will forward a packet when this route is used Hops number of routers in a packet s path to the destination network TTime Transport Time time in 55 millisecond units that it will normally take a packetto reach the destination network if this route is used DNA Do Not Age identifies whetheraging is enabled Aging allows deletion of entries from the table after a specified period Routes configured as static see Configuring Static IPX Routes on page 15 16 will not age DNA TRUE Interfaces with 0 specified intheir IPX Interface records for the RIP Age Timer will also be TRUE All others will be FALSE Intf Interface IP interface CS The IPX RIP table displays data verbatim Non ASCII data might be dis played on some server types NTE To display the contents of the SAP Table press B at the Protocol Status Displays Menu or C F B from the Main Menu Each entry will contain the following Name includes the name assigned to the server the node identifier and the address socket Router Addr is the address of the router that will forward a packet when this route is used Type is a SAP Service Type code displayed in hex format Some common codes are 0003 print queue 0004 file server and 0007 print server IntNw Intervening Networks is the number of routers that a packet must pass through to
117. the line with the minumum loading cal culated by weight and number of LCNs in use on that line Each line is assigned a weight proportional to its throughput within the routing path If use of a routing algorithm is not desired simply accept the default and specify only one routing path Systematic Redirection will redirect if Y all calls to the altemate subscribers specified by the Redirection Addresses Consecutive attempts at call redirection will be made to each alternate sub scriber in the list until the call is completed Redirect on Busy will redirect calls if Y according to the Redirection Addresses if the primary sub scriber device is busy Redirect on Out of Order Configuring BSC Interactive 10 9 will redirects calls if Y according to the Redirection Addresses if the primary sub scriber device is out of order Connection Priority prioritizes intra nodal traffic the higher the number the higher the priority This pri ority has no effect on traffic exiting a node Priorities are configured on all logical interfaces that use a physical frame relay port The device processor in the node uses these priorities to help determine the order in which it will process protocols When configuring priorities be careful to consider the types of traffic being routed on other connections in the node CAUTICN 1st 2nd etc Path Configured includes or excludes the associated port as a routing path to the subs
118. the link goes down Action Check the equipment to see what caused the failure to respond DLCI n Frm Relay PVC Disconnected Severity 4 Meaning Self explanatory Action None DLCI n Received Bad Frame Severity 3 Meaning Either the DLCI was not configured or the frame was on an unavailable DLCI Action Configure the DLCI or resend the frame DLCI n No Response to STATUS ENQ Severity 3 Meaning There was no response to a status enquiry from the DTE Action Check the status of the DCE DLCI n Flow Control On Severity 3 Meaning Flow control has been implemented on a frame relay port and data is queued Action None DLCI n Frame Discarded Flow Ctl Severity 3 Meaning Self explanatory Action The frame must be resent DLCI n Line does not exist Severity 3 Meaning Self explanatory Action Check the configuration records for the node and port DLCI n Not Configured Severity 3 Meaning Self explanatory Action Configure the DLCI in the port s database record SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 System Events 541 542 543 545 546 547 548 561 DLCI n Frame Relay Header Invalid Severity 3 Meaning The header contained an invalid DLCI Action Check the configuration record for the port DLCI n PVC does not exist Severity 3 Meaning Self explanatory Action Create a PVC record DLCI n Frame Discarded C
119. the supported statistics including current values and cumulative values since maximum values were last cleared Display LAN Card Interface Statistics displays the supported statistics including current values and cumulative values since maximum values were last cleared Display Frame Relay Utilization Statistics displays CIR Br and B values for a specified DLCI as well as the configured and actual percentages of bandwidth use by each bandwidth allocation group Display Voice Statistics A Display Voice Application Statistics displays data on calls received transmitted cleared and accepted as well as busy and time out statistics SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 B Display Voice Connection Statistics displays data on call setup frames received and transmitted numbers dialed callstate and congestion management F Reports A Create Configuration Report Chapter 3 produces a summary of all database records in the node View Configuration Report Chapter 3 displays the above summary View Initialization Report Chapter 2 produces a list of messages created during the current boot up of a node View Previous Initialization Report Chapter 2 produces a list of messages created during the previous boot up of a node ow U Introduction to System Operation 18 5 Chapter 19 On line Operations Numerous functions can be performed without disrupting normal operation of a SmartSwitch
120. traffic the higher the number the higher the priority This pri ority has no effect on traffic exiting a node Priorities are configured on all logical interfaces that use a physical frame relay port The device processor in the node uses these priorities to help determine the order in which it will process protocols When configuring priorities be careful to consider the types of traffic being routed on other connections in the node CAUTICN Bandwidth Allocation Group assigns the LLC2 host to one of sixteen groups whose parameters regulate bandwidth usage See Configuring Bandwidth Allocation Groups on page 7 6 Suppress XIDs prevents if Y the SmartSwitch 1800 from returning an XID inresponse toa null XID This might be desirable if the remote TPAD is not running PU 2 1 It should be noted that even if an XID is sent an SNRM Set Normal Response Mode immediately follows so the connection will be established Configuring Subscriber Addresses This operation configures the called and calling addresses that will be used for con necting to an LLC2 host or in X 25 call setup if SNA is being transported over a logical X 25 port To complete the connection the software must recognize where the callis coming from calling address and where it is going called address To display alist of current Subscriber IDs addresses press A at the Connections and Routing Paths Menu or A D A from the Main Menu To add or
121. updates the system memory with any changes that have been made to routing parameters Configure Async PAD Parameters Chapter 12 defines operating parameters for devices connected to SmartSwitch async PAD ports A Review Async PAD Profiles B Configure Async PAD Profiles C Review Async PAD Logins D Configure Async PAD Logins Review Model Information displays the maximum number of logical connections allowed and lists the protocols installed on the SmartSwitch 1800 Configure Bandwidth Allocation Groups Chapter 4 defines up to 16 groups that assign connection priorities to various types of traffic B Configure Protocols Chapter 5 A B C Review Protocol Configuration displays installed protocols Configure Protocols specifies the protocols that will be used Display Memory Status displays a table showing available and used memory C Configure Ports Introduction to Database Configuration A C D Configure RLP Ports Chapter 6 through Chapter 12 specifies types and operating parameters of serial ports Configure LAN Port Chapter 6 specifies the type Ethernet or Token Ring and associated address for the LAN interface X 25 Address Translation Templates Chapter 8 displays specifies and tests templates that are applied to incoming and outgoing call packets for the purpose of translating selected fields ofa packet that may not otherwise bein a compatible format A
122. viable Periodic SAP Timer is the interval between the periodic IPX SAP broadcasts from this interface RIP Enabled determines whether this interface will support RIP processing RIP Age Timer is used to delete route entries in the routing information table assuming RIP is enabled The timer starts restarts each time an entry is created updated by RIP or ref erenced for forwarding If the timer expires the router will assume that the entry is no longer valid due to hardware fai lure power outage etc and the entry will be deleted from the table RIP Maximum Size is the maximum possible RIP packet size including the IPX header 30 bytes and the LAN MAC header if transmitted on a LAN interface SAP Enabled determines whether this interface will support SAP processing SAP Age Timer is used to delete route entries in the server information table assuming SAP is enabled The timer starts restarts each time anentry is created updated by SAP or ref erenced for forwarding If the timer expires the router will assume that the entryis no longer valid due to hardware failure power outage etc and the entry will be deleted from the table SAP will then send a broadcast message indicating that the server is down Transport Time is the time in 55 millisecond units that it will normally take to forward frames out the interface Recommended values are 1 for LAN interfaces and 30 for WAN inter faces This time is used to
123. was before the change 10 T2 should be greater than or equal to T1 11 This parameter is relevant only if Logical DCE is Y x lt oa gt c 8 3 E o og m z 7 14 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Table 7 4 Frame Relay DLCI Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Committed Information Rate In Out Kbits sec 0 2000 0 Committed Burst Size In Out kbits Excess Burst Size In Out kbits BECN Recovery Count packets Outgoing DLCI Priority Backup Group Number Enable Backup Protocol Remote RLP 67 Remote Port Remote DLCI 5 Switchover Timer Switchback Timer Time to Hold Data While Waiting 08 CIR 16xCIR 0 Bc CIR x linespeed minus CIR 1 255 0 4 0 255 Y N5 0 SmartSwitch 1800 0 3 Other node type 0 7 16 991 0 65535 seconds 0 65535 seconds 8 0 65535 seconds 1 Ifthe Committed Information Rate is set to 0 and the Excess Burst Size is set to a value greater than 0 the DE Discard Eligibility bit will be turned on in all received In and or transmitted Out frames 2 CIR Committed Information Rate See first parameter in table 3 Set Outgoing DLCI Priority to 4 for all Voice DLCIs DLCIs over which Voice packets will be sent 4 Applicable only on the initiating node See explanation If configuring a DLCI that will be backed up you must leave this value atQ until you have configured a backup group Then re e
124. will again be routed on the lowest U line Line U 0 0 4 10 2 1 1 failed 12 2 In this case other system factors will determine whether line 1 0 or line 1 2 will be selected If we assume 1 0 is selected the new values of U will be as follows giving line 1 2 the next call Line U 0 0 4 10 4 1 1 failed 12 2 If the database is changed and lines are added or deleted from the routing path config uration or if lines become operational or not operational the next Call Request will trigger new U values based on the lines available at the moment As operational lines fill up their LCNs they are excluded from getting new calls If all operational lines have all LCNs in use new calls will be cleared Subscriber Parameters Table 8 3 Subscriber Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Subscriber Name 0 31 characters Routing Algorithm Systematic Redirection Y N Redirect on Busy Y N Redirect on Out of Order Y N Connection Priority 0 9 1st 2nd etc Path Configured Y N n a Physical port 0 7 2 Logical port 8 63 Redirection Address 0 1 etc valid address 1 The valid port numbers depend on the model of SmartSwitch 1800 see port locations onpage 6 1 2 The software does not verify that a specified port exists Make sure the port is configured in the database Subscriber Name identifies the subscriber to the console operator Routing Algorithm allows creation of a hunt group of ports see example on page
125. you must know the name s of the file s you want to transfer All possible database files are listed under Local File Backup earlier and the operating software files are listed below APAD CMP BRIDGE CMP BSCI CMP BSCB CMP EI CMP EAGLECAF OUT FRAME RECMP GATED CMP IP CMP IPX CMP LLC2 CMP NETVSRVP CMP PL CMP SDLC CMP SNMPD CMP TRAPD CMP VIDIAG BIN V4K8 BIN V8K BIN VB CMP VBOOT BIN VOICE CMP VXWORKS CMP VXWORKS SYM To copy one or more files to the SmartS witch 1 In Procomm use Setup if necessary to specify an Upload Path which identifies the directory in the PC containing the file s to be copied to the SmartSwitch 1800 Press E at the SmartSwitch 1800 s On Line Node Operations Menu or B A E from the Main Menu Enter the letter corresponding to the desired operation when asked Are you A Installing a Software File B Restoring a DatabaseFile This will ensure that the file s will be copied to the right place in the Smart Switch 1800 Press F at the SmartSwitch 1800 s On Line Node Operations Menu or B A F from the Main Menu 5 After reading the warning press Enter Click on the Procomm SendFileicon This will display a list of files inthe Upload Path directory Click on the file you want to copy to the SmartSwitch 1800 then click on OK After the file has been copied to the SmartS witch 1800 the On Line Node Oper ations Menu will be displayed If you want to copy another file
126. 0 overlapping is not allowed Note that by itself is very important because it matches any address Wildcards can be combined The address 3110 is any address beginning with 3110 and containing atleasttwo more digits The following figure shows an example of wildcard addressing Figure 6 7 Wildcard Addressing Example Configuring X 25 8 21 This configuration requires Port and Subscriber ID records in node 1 for e Subscriber00100 on RLP 0 Port 1 e Subscriber123 on RLP 1 Port 3 In node 2 RLP Port and Subscriber records must be configured for e Subscriber 12301 on RLPO port 0 e Subscriber 12302 on RLPO port 1 e Subscriber 12303 on RLPO port 2 e Subscriber 12304 on RLPO port 3 If subscriber 00100 sends a Call Request with any of called addresses 12301 through 12304 node 1 searches for a match finds 123 on Port 3 then routes the packet to node 2 RLPI port 0 where node 2 reads the full called address in the packet and routes it outthe appropriate port Search Order for Subscriber Addresses A subscriber address that includes a wildcard potentially matches more addresses than one with no wildcards For example the address matches all other addresses Without a checking mechanism an address with no wildcards could be read as a match for an address with a wildcard and sent to the wrong place To avoid this a search order has been established for performing call routing e Addresses with no wildcards wil
127. 0 100 0 0 UA amp ec 10 0 100 100 DISC sec 10 0 0 0 DM sec 10 0 0 0 FRMR sec 10 0 0 0 REJ sec 10 0 0 0 RR ec 10 50 25 25 RN R sec 10 0 0 0 INFO sec 10 500 A B Cc D E F G H I F2 Next F4 Clear Max F9 Stop Remote F10 Reboot Remote Others Exit Figure 21 5 Frame level Statistics Display E B F from Main Menu nz This example shows an X 25 frame level display A frame relay display NONE will not include the two lines below Start Time The information on those two lines includes the current and previous level 2 states and the time in the current state Information in a Frame Relay Display DE sec 10 number of frames transmitted received with the DE Discard Elgibility bit set per second over the five second reporting interval multiplied by 10 FECN sec 10 number of frames transmitted received with the FECN Forward Event Congestion Notification bit set persecond overthe five second reporting interval multiplied by 10 BECN sec 10 number of frames transmitted received with the BECN Backward Event Congestion Notification bit set per second over the five second reporting interval multiplied by 10 LMI sec 10 number of frames transmitted received using LMI frame man agement per second over the five second reporting interval multiplied by 10 ANXD sec 10 number of frames transmitted received using Annex D frame management per second over the five sec
128. 00 with a PC attached to the Console port The PC must be running Procomm Plus with ZMODEM Acl L The procedure was tested using Procomm Plus 2 1 for Windows but other versions containing ZMODEM should also work It is assumed that anyone performing this procedure knows how to use ZMODEM This operation places a heavy load on the SmartS witch 1800 s central processor and should be performed only when there is minimal traffic on the node CAUTION This operation copies files one at a time from the SmartS witch 1800 to the locally attached PC and is useful for backing up the SmartSwitch s configuration database You must know the name s of the file s you want to transfer All possible database files are listed in Table 19 1 on page 19 9 The firstthree exist automatically once the S martSwitch 1800 has undergone its initial IPL Other files will be created as new records are configured To back up one or more files 1 In Procomm use Setup to specify a Download Path The file will be copied to this directory in the PC It does not matter where the file is copied to as long as you remember where to find it when you want to copy it back to the SmartSwitch 1800 Press D at the SmartSwitch 1800 s On Line Node Operations Menu or B A D from the Main Menu 3 After reading the warning press Enter When prompted enter the name ofthe file you want to back up Be sure toinclude the path to the directory th
129. 000 10 1 sec 00 0 Up to 10 characters can be entered but only the first 8 will be recognized by Net View 2 Be aware that some NVMT s are larger than 265 bytes so you may want to set the value higher 3 In multiples of 4 4 Must belessthan the value for T1 to ensure that the remote link station will receive the delayed acknowledgment before T1 expires Name isthe VTAM PU name that will identify the SmartSwitch 1800 as a NetView Service Point Local Subscriber ID is a subscriber address for the local end of an LLC2 session established for a NetView connection An LLC2 Host record described in Chapter 9 must be created with 4 6 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Session Type Terminated and the same Local Subscriber ID and Remote Subscriber ID as specified here in the NetView parameters Remote Subscriber ID is a subscriber address for the remote end of an LLC2 session established for a NetView connection An LLC2 Host record described on page 9 18 must be created with Session Type Originated Local Subscriber ID the Remote Subscriber ID spec ified here in the NetView parameters and Remote Subscriber ID the Local Subscriber ID specified in the Net View parameters Maximum Bytes per Frame must correspond to the PIU size configured on the NetView host parameter MAXDATA of macro PU in VTAM Local SAP Address is a service access point SAP address used to identify the SmartSwitch to a NetVi
130. 000 ms 0 255 1 127 1 127 0 16 25 4105 Unlike the F7 on line update of a database record as per formed locally on a SmartSwitch 1800 sending a CONFIG N L anda COMMIT do not disable the port since they update the node s system memory and database values separately instead of writing one set of values to the other D 5 Appendix E ASCII Character Table ASCII Decimal Octal Hex Ctrl Key Character Value Value Value Combination NUL 000 000 00 Ctrl Space SOH 001 001 01 Ctrl A STX 002 002 02 Ctrl B ETX 003 003 03 Ctrl C EOT 004 004 04 Ctrl D ENQ 005 005 05 Ctrl E ACK 006 006 06 Ctrl F BEL 007 007 07 Ctrl G BS 008 010 08 Ctrl H HT 009 011 09 Ctrl I LF 010 012 0A Ctrl J VT 011 013 0B Ctrl K FF 012 014 oc Ctrl L CR 013 015 0D Ctrl M SO 014 016 0E Ctrl N SI 015 017 OF Ctrl O DLE 016 020 10 Ctrl P DC1 017 021 11 Ctrl Q DC2 018 022 12 Ctrl R DC3 019 023 13 Ctrl S DC4 020 024 14 Ctrl T NAK 021 025 15 Ctrl U SYN 022 026 16 Ctrl V ETB 023 027 17 Ctrl W CAN 024 030 18 Ctrl X EM 025 031 19 Ctrl Y SUB 026 032 1A Ctrl Z ESC 027 033 1B Ctr FS 028 034 1C Ctrl V GS 029 035 1D Ctrl 1 RS 030 036 1E Ctrl til de US 031 037 1F Ctrl SP 032 040 20 033 041 21 E 034 042 22 035 043 23 036 044 24 96 037 045 25 amp 038 046 26 apostrophe 039 047 27 040 050 28 041 051 29
131. 00000000180000060BB 0039080000 Packet is the same as any 802 3 TB packet except that a different PID is used BPDUs use a 00 0E PID RIP routed IP packet traced on DLCI 16 0016 0054 03CC45000034006600001 41 19E4D0202020202020201020802 080020EE930201000000020000030000000000000000000000 000000 03 Q 922 control byte CC NLPID for IP 45 IP version header length 00 IP type of service 00 34 total length of packet in hex 00 4E Identifier 00 00 Flags fragment offset 20 15 14 Time To Live 14 seconds hops 11 Protocol hex 11 is 17 UDP hex 01 is 01 ICMP hex 06 is 06 TCP etc 9E 65 IP header checksum 02 02 02 02 IP source address 02 02 0201 IP destination address 0208 UDP source port 520 0208 UDP destination port 520 0020 UDP length 20 hex is 32 decimal EE93 UDP header checksum 02 RIP Command byte Response 01 RIP Version 1 00 00 must be zero 03000000 IP address reporting route to network 3 0 0 0 00000000 must be zero 00000000 must be zero 00000000 Metric hops 1 15 note that 16 is unreachable ARP bridged IP Request packet traced on DLCI 16 0016 0076 0300800080C20007F FF FF FF FFFFF0080C7193D800036A AA A03 0000F8080600010800060400010080C7193D80C6554AB C0000 00000000C6554A015F4C5445585400000400000000000000A029 03 Q 922 control byte 00 Pad byte 80 SNAP NLPID for a bridged 802 3 frame 0080C2 OUI 0007 PID FFFFFFFFFFFF Destination
132. 00N 203301000000000N 231020100000000N Node Name nodexyz E F Rtytm Rty 60 60 60 60 60 Del item H lets you delete the remote subscriber that is currently highlighted You will be prompted Delete n where n is the AE sequence number Pressing Y will delete that line and move all entries below it up one sequence number A BSC TPAD subscriber can specify only one remote device which canbe an HPAD or an X 25 connection to the host An HPAD subscriber can specify up to 16 remote devices any of which can be a TPAD or an X 25 connection to the host Each con nection must be assigned a different local subscriber address Er You must also configure Device records for the attached BSC devices See Configuring BSC Interactive Devices on page 10 10 NOTE 10 3 BSC Interactive Port Parameters Table 10 1 BSC Interactive Port Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Port Type BSC not valid here Physical Port Interface see explanation see explanation Blocked Port Flag Y N N Line Speed 75 bps 19 2 Kbps 9600 bps Retransmission Period ms 1 9999 o Maximum Retransmissions 1 99 Maximum Bytes per Frame 25 4105 Generate Clock Y N Y Rcv Clock TT from DTE YN BSC Type 1 TPAD 2 HPAD 2 o S z o o 3 e c i 2 z z Y ER z lt Activate Connection w o poll EBCDIC ma leave at default ma leave at default Clear VC on Last Device
133. 096 is specified additional X 25 and frame headers can make the frame too large 2048 will not cause a problem since larger frames will simply be split then re assembled at the destination Mapped DLCI Number is the Data Link Connection Identifier which links the logical port to a logical con nection on the physical frame relay port It must match the DLCI configured on the device at the other end of the local rather than end to end connection Make sure no more than one of any interface type logical port framerelay IP IPX LLC2 interface or frame relay Bridge port is assigned the same DLCI Also make sure this DLCI is not configured as a Frame Relay CAUTION Backup DLCI or as part of an intra nodal frame relay PVC Blocked Port Flag causes the logical portto be disabled Y or enabled N only if the physical port is also enabled at node IPL The port will remain in that state until this parameter is changed or an on line enable B B C from the Main Menu ordisable B B A from the Main Menu is performed SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Configuring X 25 Priority continued prioritizes this logical port for intra nodal traffic the higher the number the higher the priority This priority has no effect on traffic exiting a node Priorities are configured on all logical interfaces that use a physical frame relay port The device processor in the node uses these priorities to help determi
134. 14 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Some changes to IP Static Routes and IP Interfaces described earlier CS require an extra step to update the SmartS witch 1800 software Changing NC L certain parameters will generate the message Dynamic Routing Parameters have changed Do you wish to update them at this time Y N N This must be done but if you are making several changes to IP Interfaces and Static Routes you can save time by specifying N for each change until the final one Entering Y after the final change will update all changes made to both IP Interfaces and Static Routes If you forget to specify Y afterthe last change you can still update the FRM via On line Update Dynamic Routing Parameters G at the IP LLC2 BRIDGH IPX Interfaces Configuration menu or A A E G from the Main Menu IP Routing Parameters Table 14 5 IP Routing Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Router valid IP address 255 255 255 255 Metric Count 1 255 1 Route Type Network Host Default Network Route Destination valid IP address or 0 0 0 0 0 Destination Mask valid IP address 255 255 255 255 Router is the IP address of a router that can reach the route destination Metric Count is the number of hops network gateways in the overall path over the intemet from the source to the destination Route Type Network defines a route for a network Host defines a route for a specific host Default de
135. 15 7 through Table 15 9 list parameters specific to frame relay X 25 and LAN interfaces respectively Explanations of most parameters follow Table 15 9 Frame Relay Interface Parameters Table 15 7 IPX Frame Relay Interface Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Blocked Port Flag Y N N Interface Type FRL Depends on inter face number Frame Type TYPE Il TYPE Il Maximum Transmission Unit frame size 3174096 bytes 4096 TO x lt z 2 S x gt 2 2 s o 1 fffffffe 00000000 Priority 0 9 Bandwidth Allocation Group 1 16 Port Diagnostics Enabled Y N NetBIOS Enabled Y N NetBIOS Hops 0 255 Periodic RIP Enabled Y N Periodic RIP Timer seconds 1 65535 2 Periodic SAP Enabled Y N Periodic SAP Timer seconds 1 65535 2 RIP Enabled Y N RIP Age Timer seconds 0 65535 2 3 RIP Maximum Size bytes 44 SAP Enabled Y N SAP Age Timer seconds 0 65535 2 3 Transport Time 55ms ticks 1 255 Serialization Enabled Y N Watchdog Spoofing Enabled Y N IP XWAN Enabled Y N Source Card 0 Source Port 0 7 4 gt gt I o 8 7 8 8 718 z Z zZ Source DLCI 16 991 gt 1 Default value is Ethernet or 802 5 depending on hardware for Interface 0 and FRL for Interface 1 63 2 Ifsetto greater than 0 see note 4 RIP Age Timer must be 3 times longer than Periodic RIP Timer and SAP Age Timer must be 3 times longer than Periodic SAP Timer 3 A value of 0 disables aging Valid port numbers depen
136. 16 0008 030851816780013F LAPB SABM 0016 0008 0308518167800173 LAPB UA 0016 0013 03085181678003001000F B0700 L APB Information frame 0016 0013 03085181678001201000F B8700 L APB Information frame 0016 0008 0308518167800121 LAPB Receiver Ready 0016 0008 0308518167800331 LAPB Receiver Ready 0016 0008 0308518167800331 LAPB Receiver Ready In RFC1490 encapsulati on theLAPB b frame follows the T1 618 header Q 922 control byte Q 933 NLPID and the level 2 and 3 protocol IDs 2 bytes each SNA APPN X 25 IP IPX traffic are identified on the DLCI based on their NLPIDs as well as if applicable level 2 and 3 headers e g X 25 0x03 Q 922 control 0x08 Q 933 NLPID T1 617 L2 LAPB PID 0x51 81 T1 617 L3 PID 0x67 80 LAPB frame For instance 013F is a LAPB SABM frame Frame Format Examples in hex IP IPX over RFC1490 Flag AddressCtrl PAD NLPID OUI PID Data FCS Flag Routed IP 03 cc start of IP header 45 Routed IPX 03 00 80 000000 8137 X25 over RFCI 490 Ctr NLPID LvI2PID LvI3PID Data FCS Flag 03 08 5181 6780 LAPB frame X 25 packet Native LLC2 Protocols Native LLC2 over frame relay is also called BNN SNA FIDA 03 08 4C80 7081 SNA FID2 03 08 4C80 7082 SNA APPN 03 08 4C80 7083 NetBIOS 03 08 4C80 7084 HPR 03 08 4C80 7085 Bridged Protocols Flag Address Ctrl NLPID SNAP HeaderType Field Data FCSFlag IPX 03 80 AA AA 03 81 37 NOVELL 03 80 AA AA 03 81 38 APPLETALK 03 80 AA AA 03 80 9B Both 802 3 TB Tran
137. 1800 for example e Taking remote control of another SmartSwitch 1800 or other Cabletron frame relay access device e Backing up restoring and transferring files e Enabling disabling ports or SNA PUs e Running tests The remainder of this chapter describes these operations and more Remote Control Remote control allows an operator to control a remote Cabletron frame relay access device via e aconnection through a network into a physical or logical via frame relay X 25 port on the node to be controlled or e an async terminal connected to an async PAD port through a network into an X25 port on the node to be controlled These restrictions apply to the Remote Control operation e A Cabletron frame relay access device cannot be controlled by more than one device at a time e While remotely controlling one node you cannot take remote control of another one e While a node is under remote control its keyboard is blocked to prevent local operation A Subscriber ID record for the controlled node must be configured in the node that will be at the controlling end The Subscriber ID in this record must be the Remote Control IDin the Node Defaults record of the node to be controlled The 1st Routing Path in the Subscriber record must be the local port in the controlling node through which the remote connection will be made Remote Control from the SmartSwitch 1800 1 Press A at the On Line Node Operations Menu or B
138. 2 15 configured for the logical port Retry Count is the number of times an autocall will be sent to the remote device Retry Interval is the time between autocall attempts User Data is an optional string of ASCII characters that will be placed verbatim into the user data field of an outgoing Call Request packet Facilities is an optional string of facility codes and related data that will be placed verbatim into the facility field of an outgoing Call Request packet DTR RTS Active When VC Up if Y means that DTR and RTS will be asserted only after a virtual circuit is established If N both signals will be asserted as soon as the port is enabled Input Signal Detection determines which signal s will be read to determine that the link is up 0 none required 1 DSR 2 DSR amp DCD 3 DSR amp DCD amp Call 4 DSR amp CTS 5 DSR DCD amp CTS RTS CTS H W Flow Control enables hardware flow control through stop start of data using RTS pin 4 CTS pin 5 and CD pin 8 on the RS 232 interface Flow control is usually necessary to maintain communication without data loss between devices or channels with different throughput capabilities RTS CTS flow control works only on a physical DTE port as physical DCE ports have RTS looped back internally to CTS The other common method of flow control is XON XOFF parameters 5 and 12 of the async PAD profile however when the data itself is likely to cont
139. 25 2 frame relay 3 async 4 SNA 5 BSCD 6 BSCB or 7 Voice On line Operations 19 11 From port 0 7 for physical ports 8 63 for logical ports Valid numbers for physical ports depend on the model of SmartS witch 1800 see port loca tions on page 6 1 To port 0 7 8 63 A disabled port s state is reported as Link Disabled on status displays and Ee the port can neither send nor receive packets Nore Quiescing and Unquiescing Ports Quiesce operations allow you to cause a single port or a sequential range of same ty pe ports e g all async PAD ports from port 0 to port 3 to become disabled when there are no active connections on the port s Once disabled the port s will remain dis abled until enabled using the Enable operation after which time a Quiesce must be performed again if that feature is desired Unquiesce operations allow retuming of one or more quiesced ports to anormal con dition without waiting for them to become disabled Select an operation from the menu Figure 19 1 items E H When prompted e If quiescing or unquiescing a single port enter RLP Port 0 7 for physical ports 8 63 for logical ports Valid numbers for physical ports depend on the model of SmartS witch 1800 see port loca tions on page 6 1 e If quiescing or unquiescing a range of ports enter Port Type 1 X 25 2 frame relay 3 async 4 SNA 5 BSCD 6 BSCB or 7 Voice From port 0 7 for physica
140. 4 165 166 167 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 Hex Value 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F E3 Appendix F Menu Structure Cen Items farthestto the leftand underlined e g A Configuration are the entries on the Main Menu NOTE A Configuration A Configure Node Configure Password Configure Time and Date Configure Node Defaults Configure SNMP Parameters A Configure System Defaults B Configure Community Table C Configure Trap Routing D Configure Model Number E Configure IPILLC2 BRIDGE IPX Default Parameters Configure IP Node Defaults Configure Bridge LLC 2 Node Defaults Review SNA LLC2 Hosts Configure SNA LLC2 Hosts Configure IPX Node Defaults Configure Filter Definitions and Applications Review IPX Filter Definitions Configure IPX Filter Definitions Review IPX Filter Applications Configure IPX Filter Applications On Line Update IPX Filter Definitions and Applications Review Bridge Filter Definitions Configure Bridge Filter Definitions Review Bridge Filter Applications Configure Bridge Filter Applications On Line Update Bridge Filter Definitions and Applications G On Line Update Dynamic Routing Parameters F Configure Async PAD Parameters A Review Async PAD Profiles B Configure Async PAD Profiles C Review Async PAD Logins D Configure Async PAD Logins G Review Model Information H Configure Bandwidth Allocation Groups B
141. 456 Subscriber File Upd SVCSUB DAT Severity 4 Meaning The SVC Subscriber file has been updated Action None Statistic Def File Upd STDPAR DAT Severity 4 Meaning The Default Statistics Parameters file has been updated Action None Translation File Upd XLTPAR DAT Severity 4 Meaning The X 25 Address Translation Template file has been updated Action None X 25 Default File Upd X25REC DAT Severity 4 Meaning The Node configuration file has been updated Action None Alarm Enable File Upd ERRMSG TXT Severity 4 Meaning The Alarms file has been updated Action None Remote Update File Upd UPDATE TXT Severity 4 Meaning A software update has been sent Action None Login Password Changed Severity 4 Meaning Self explanatory Action None Operator Logged into Node Severity 4 Meaning An async terminal operator has logged into the node via an async PAD port Action None SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 System Events 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 Operator Logged out of Node Severity 4 Meaning The async terminal operator has logged out of the node via the async PAD pott Action None PAD Login File Upd PADLOG DAT Severity 4 Meaning The Login file has been updated Action None IP Route File Upd IPRSUB DAT Severity 4 Meaning The IP Routing file has been updated Action None IP Interface File Upd IPRSUB DAT S
142. AP updates that are less efficient worse than the information in the server infor mation table SAP Ukn G Query is the number of SAP General Queries received with an invalid packet size These packets will be discarded SAP Ukn N Query is the number of SAP Nearest Queries recei ved with an invalid packet size These packets will be discarded SAP Ukn G Resp is the number of SAP General Responses received with an invalid packet size These packets will be discarded SAP Ukn N Resp is the number of SAP Nearest Responses received with an invalid packet size These packets will be discarded NetB Pkts Rcv is the number of NetBIOS packets received on the interface NetB Pkts Tx is the number of NetBIOS packets transmitted on the interface NetB Ukn Pkts Rev is the number of NetBIOS packets received on the interface with an invalid size Lite Pkts Rev is the number of NetWare Lite packets received on the interface Lite Pkts Tx is the number of NetWare Lite packets transmitted on the interface WD Req Pkts Rcv is the number of watchdog or keep alive requests received from other servers These are issued periodically to all clients to determine whether each client is still available WD Resp Pkts Rev is the number of received responses to keep ali ve messages issued by the local server Serial Pkts Rcv is the number of NetWare file server serialization security frames received The
143. Configuration Menu Whencreating a new profile be careful that you are not creating a duplicate C ofan existing profile When assigning a profile to a port the software scans NOTE the parameters of the specified profile and all other existing profiles and if there are duplicates it loads the profile that was created first SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 PAD Profile Parameters Table 12 1 Async PAD Profile Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Profile Description 1 31 uppercase chars none 0 126 02 Echo 0 no 1 yes 03 Data Forwarding Char 0 127 04 Idle Timer Delay sec 0 255 0 no 1 yes 0 255 characters 0 255 n a determined in Port configration 0 no 1 yes 1 0 7 0 0 255 characters 0 no 1 yes 0 127 0 127 0 126 0 255 0 255 linefeeds The numbers preceding the parameter names correspond to CCITT X3 Also the default values make up CCTIT profile 90 NOTE When specifying characters that will perform functions i e Data Forwarding or Character Delete be sure to specify these as different characters CAUTION Profile Description is used simply as an identifier It is not an X 3 parameter 01 PAD Recall allows the user s device to initiate an escape from data transfer or connection in progress state in order to send PAD command signals Values can be added are 0 escape is not allowed 1 escape will be initiated by Ctrl P 1 0 Data Link
144. Configuring BSC Interactive 10 7 Configuring Subscriber Addresses This operation configures the called and calling addresses that will be used in call setup To complete the connection the software must recognize where the call is coming from calling address and where it is going called address To display alist of current Subscriber IDs addresses press A at the Connections and Routing Paths Menu or A D A from the Main Menu To add or change a Subscriber ID press B at the Connections and Routing Paths Menu When prompted enter a Subscriber ID of up to 15 digits ID conventions are described on page 8 21 Node Name nod exyz SV C Subscriber Maintenance Subscriber ID 0100012345 Subscriber Name subl Routing Algorithm 0 Round Robin Systematic Redirection N Redirect on Busy Redirect on Out of Order Connection Priority Routing Paths Redirection Addresses A B D E F G H Option Figure 10 3 Typical SVC Subscriber Screen A D B from Main Menu Pressing G will display routing paths which link the subscriber with one or more ports Pressing H will display the addresses used for call redirection These addresses are valid only if Y is specified for one or more of items C D and E on the first screen Parameters for all three screens are described following Table 10 3 Subscriber Parameters 10 8 Table 10 3 SVC Subscriber Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value
145. Consecutive attempts at call redirection will be made to each alternate sub scriber in the list until the call is completed 12 16 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Redirect on Busy will redirect calls if Y according to the Redirection Addresses if the primary sub scriber device is busy Redirect on Out of Order will redirects calls if Y according to the Redirection Addresses if the primary sub scriber device is out of order Connection Priority prioritizes intra nodal traffic the higher the number the higher the priority This pri ority has no effect on traffic exiting a node Priorities are configured on all logical interfaces that use a physical frame relay port The device processor in the node uses these priorities to help determine the order in which it will process protocols When configuring priorities be careful to consider the types of traffic being routed on other connections in the node CAUITICN 1st 2nd etc Path Configured includes or excludes the associated port as a routing path to the subscriber device At least one path must be specified Port identifies the port s that make up the routing path s Redirection Address 0 1 etc are up to five subscribers that will be called according to the specified redirection option Configuring Abbreviated Addresses The Abbreviated Address operation allows you to assign a short name or mnemonic to beused in place of the subscriber ID when ma
146. Convertto Digit Convertto 0 0 4 2 8 1 C 3 1 8 5 A 9 9 D B 2 4 6 6 A 5 E 7 3 C 7 E B D F F Using the example 04 00 01 00 01 88 converts to 02 00 08 00 08 11 4 Enter the bit swapped value e g 020008000811 as the Host MAC Address This value will arrive at the host as the proper address e g 400010001088 after being translated Session Type if Originated means the SmartSwitch 1800 will initiate LLC2 sessions from the con figured Host MAC Address If Terminated the node will accept LLC2 sessions des tined for the host address In the examples shownin Figure 9 1 on page 9 3 LLC2 hosts must be configured in the SmartSwitch databases as follows e Example 1 One record in SmartSwitch 2 for the host with Session Type Terminated e Example 2 One record in S martSwitch 1 for the host with Session Type Orig inated one record in SmartSwitch 2 for the host with Session Type Terminated e Example3 Two records in the SmartSwitch for the host one withSession Type Originated the other Terminated e Example 4 One record in the SmartSwitch for the host with Session Type Originated SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Configuring SNA T1 T2 Ti is the Reply Timer which is used by the local node to detect a failure by the remote station to send a required acknowledgment or response The local node will start the timer when ittransmits one of these e an Informat
147. DU including Information LPDUs resent after a checkpoint operation will be sent following expiration of T1 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Priority prioritizes NetView traffic among all intra nodal traffic the higher the number the higher the priority This priority has no effect on traffic exiting an SmartSwitch Priorities are configured on all logical interfaces that use a physical frame relay port The device processor in the node uses these priorities to help determine the order in which it will process protocols The device processor in the SmartSwitch uses these priorities to help determine the order in which it will process protocols Bandwidth Allocation Group Configuring Node Defaults assigns NetView sessions to one of sixteen groups whose parameters regulate band width usage See Configuring Bandwidth Allocation Groups on page 7 6 4 9 Chapter 5 Loading Protocols Although a SmartSwitch 1800 is shipped with a set of protocols already installed a file must be configured to properly load them into the software To access Protocol configuration press A then B from the Main Menu Then e To display a list of configured and loaded protocols press A Anewly added protocol is displayed as Configured until the node is rebooted at which time the protocol will be displayed as Loaded X 25 is always loaded and will not be displayed The information is CS taken from the configuration file which
148. E DCE Cable Attached N Mask Link Alarms prevents if enabled transmission to the collecting node of the link alarms 400 406 Link Enabled Link Disabled etc Generate M bit Packets is used by the PAD to turnonthe M bit in the X 25 data packet if more than one packet is required to transmit the data from the PAD Default Calling Address will be inserted into an incoming X 29 Call Requestif the packet does not contain a calling address This parameter is relevant only if Disable X 121 User Calls is N Disable X 121 User Calls will 1f Y cause the port to accept only those calls that substitute an abbreviated address described later in this chapter for the called address Autocall causes when enabled the P AD to automatically call the remote device Called Address when the link comes up either through rebooting the node or pressing F7 after changing Autocall to Y Configuring Async Ports 12 11 12 12 Auto call Delay causes a delay after the link comes up before a Call Request will be issued Called Address is the ID of the remote device and is placed into the called address field of the Call Request This parameter is relevant only if Autocall is Y if Autocall is N the called address will come from either the user device s X 28 interface or an abbreviated address If the async port is one end of a connection to a logical X 25 port in the SmartSwtch the Called Address must match a Subscriber ID see page 1
149. E Timer is the delay after which the E amp M E lead follows the M lead Input Level specifies the local voice level intothe voiceport This parameter adjusts the sensitivity of the local voice channel to the signal from the attached device The purpose of this parameter is to match the voice channel dB level to the input signal A more negati ve setting produces a higher input gain i e 7 produces the least input gain and 22 pro duces the highest input gain Ifthe In level is reduced made morenegative the voice channel will be more sensitive to the input this will also cause the voice output at the remote device to sound louder Selecting this parameter will display a table of the following values Specify a value by entering the corresponding letter from that table A 22 F 17 K 12 P 7 U 2 Z 43 B 21 G 16 L 11 Q 6 V 1 4 C 20 H 15 M 10 R 5 w 0 2 5 D 19 1 14 N 9 S 4 X 41 3 6 E 18 J 13 o 8 T 3 Y 2 4 7 Output Level specifies the local voice level out of the voice port A more positive setting produces a higher volume i e 7produces the highest volume 22 the lowest Selecting this parameter will display the same table shown under Input Level 13 10 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 SLT Time out is the time the local Voice port will wait before an actual fax transmission begins If there is no fax tone when this timer expires the connection will be terminated Link Down Busy e
150. Escape 32 126 escape will be initiated by the character defined by this number Configuring Async Ports 12 3 02 Echo provides for characters received from the user s device to be transmitted back to the device as well as being interpreted by the PAD 03 Data Forwarding Char allows the selection of defined sets of characters received from the user s device to be recognized by the PAD as an indication to complete the assembly and forward a com plete packet sequence as defined in Recommendation X 25 Values can be added are 0 nodata forwarding character 1 alphanumeric characters A Z a z 0 9 ESC BEL ENQ or ACK DEL CAN or DC2 16 ETX or BOT 32 HT LF VT or FF 64 allcharacters in columns 0 amp 1 of Intemational Alphabet 5 that are not included above The contents of columns 0 amp 1 are equivalent to ASCII characters NUL through US in the table in Appendix E 127 allcharacters 04 Idle Timer Delay allows selection of an interval between successive characters received from the user s device which when exceeded will cause the PAD to terminate assembly of a packet and forward it as defined in Recommendation X 25 If expiration of the timer occurs before the forwarding size of the data packet is reached the PAD forwards the data packet to the remote DTE 05 Ancillary Device Control allows flow control between the PAD and the users device The PAD indicates whether it is ready to accept characters
151. File Transfer C Remote Software Update D Local File Backup E SetZMODEM Path F Local File Restore G Transfer Backup directory to ZMODEM Workstation H Transfer Backup directory from ZMODEM Workstation B On Line Port Operations A JDisablea Port B Disable a Range of Ports C Enable a Port D Enable a Range of Ports E Quiescea Port SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Menu Structure D oQnmuo F Quiesce a Range of Ports G Unquiesce a Port H Unquiesce a Range of Ports On Line Database Operations A Backup the Current Database to a Remote FRX6000 B Backup the Current Database to a Remote FRX4000 SmartSwitch 1800 C Restore the Backed Up Database to a Remote FRX4000 SmartSwitch 1800 D Back up the Database to a Local Directory E Restore the Database from a Local Directory F Back Up the Current System Files to a Local Directory G Restore the System Files from a Local Directory Test X 25 Address Translation Templates Re Load Initialization to Async Console IP Ping Connectivity Test On Line SDLC PU Operations A Disable an SDLC PU B Disable a Range of SDLC PUs C Enable an SDLC PU D Enablea Range of SDLC PUs NetView Access CSU DSU Tests A Self Test B Pattern Generation Test Frame Relay Backup Operations A Initiate Switching Primary DLCI Over to its Backup B Initiate Switching DLCI Back to the Primary Status Displays A Node Status B Port Status C Virtual Connections D Port Signals E Traffic Monitor A Port Moni
152. Flow Control Negotiation is an optional X 25 facility that permits negotiation of the flow control parameters packet and window sizes for either direction of data transmission on a per call basis If N is selected the default packet and window sizes will be used If Y is selected a packet and or window size included in a call packet will be used If either is not included the default for that parameter will be used Throughput Class Negotiation is an optional X 25 facility that permits negotiation of the throughput classes foreither direction of data trans mission ona per call basis If N is selected the default Maximum Throughput Class will be used If Y is selected any throughput class included ina call packet will be used If a class for either directionis not included its default value will be used SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Local Charging Prevention prevents calls if Y from being charged to this port Incoming calls from the network with Reverse Charging specified will be rejected outgoing calls will have Reverse Charging inserted if it is not already in the call packet Reverse Charge Acceptance authorizes transmission of incoming calls that request the X 25 Reverse Charging facility If N is selected for this parameter and a call requests Reverse Charging the call will not be transmitted Fast Select Acceptance authorizes transmission of incoming calls that request the X 25 Fast Select facility Inco
153. Guide Rev 01 received sequentially without BECN set the effective outgoing Be will be increased by 1 8 ofthe configured value As long as no BECNS are received the effective burst size will continue to increase until itreaches the full configured value Any time a BECN is received however the effective value will return to the value of the outgoing Bc Outgoing DLCI Priority sets a priority for this DLCI among others over the physical port Note that 4 is the highest priority Backup Group Number specifies if configured as any number other than 0 that this is a primary DLCI and identifies the backup DLCI s see Configuring Frame Relay Backup Groups on page 7 22 that will take over if this DLCI fails This parameter is applicable only on an initiating node which is the node that will initiate the switchover to a backup DLCI At switchover the initiating node notifies the remote node of the change A DLCI cannot be both a backup and a primary ATE Do not configure a Backup Group Number on this DLCI at the remote non initiating end CAUTIEN Enable Backup Protocol specifies that if Y this DLCI will be used as a non initiating backup The DLCI will wait for a backup protocol message from the initiating end telling the backup where to send the rest of the messages Remote RLP Port DLCI identifies the primary DLCI in the non initiating called remote for the purpose of differentiating node to which that t
154. How Filter Masks Work on page 16 7 Table 16 3 Bridge MAC Filter Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Filter Name 1 31 characters none Source MAC Address Value O ffffffffff 6 bytes fiffffffff Source MAC Address Mask O_ffffffffff 6 bytes ff fftffff Destination MAC Address Value O ffffffffff 6 bytes fiffffffff Destination MAC Address Mask O ffffffffff 6 bytes ffffffffff Filter Name helps the user identify the filter The name is not used by the software 16 8 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Source MAC Address Value is the MAC address in the source address field of the frame Destination MAC Address Value is the MAC address in the destination address field of the frame Table 16 4 Bridge SAP Filter Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Filter Name 1 31 characters none SSAP Value off 1 byte 0 SSAP Mask O ff 0 DSAP Value 0 ff 1 byte 0 DS AP Mask Off 0 Filter Name helps the user identify the filter The name is not used by the software SSAP Value identifies the source Service Advertising Protocol SAP DSAP Value identifies the destination SAP Table 16 5 Bridge Protocol Filter Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Filter Name 1 31 characters none Protocol ID Value O_ffff 2 bytes 0000 Protocol ID Mask O_ffff 2 bytes 0000 Filter Name helps the user identify the filter The name is notused by the software Protocol ID Value is the IEEE 802 value of
155. I address is the called address A 2 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 D or P is the letter D or P if P the data will not be echoed locally data is the user data An example of a Call Requestto called address 1000000000 with the Reverse Charging facility plus user data abcde is R 1000000000Dabcde An Abbreviated Address can be substituted forthe complete called address Ce if no facilities are included Also X 28 convention demands that when MUC3L sending a Call Request packet using an abbreviated address you precede the address with a period If you want to add user data to the packet you must separate it from the abbreviated address with an asterisk The format is address data If the Call Request is successful the async PAD will receive a Call Accept packet from the device atthe other end of the call Connection is now established and the terminal will display COM If the Call Request fails the terminal will display a diag nostic message explaining why The various messages are some of the PAD service signals described later in this appendix To send data once you are in Data Transfer mode simply enter the data To clear a call enter Command mode and type clr Enter The async terminal will display CLR conf Async PAD Service Signals Async Terminal Operations Transmission of PAD service signals is determined by async PAD profile CS parameter 6 APTE Asterisk is n
156. IR Severity 3 Meaning A frame was discarded probably because the excess burst size B was exceeded Action The frame must be resent DLCI n frame relay PVC deleted Severity 4 Meaning Self explanatory Action None DLCI n frame relay PVC connected Severity 4 Meaning Self explanatory Action None DLCI n Data Received on Inactive PVC Severity 3 Meaning One end of the PVC is probably not up Action Check both ends of the PVC DLCI n No STATUS ENQ Received Severity 3 Meaning No Status Enquiry was received when one was expected Action Check the remote device LLC Interface File Upd LLC2IPAR DAT Severity 4 Meaning The LLC2 Interface file has been updated Action None 22 23 22 24 562 563 564 565 640 641 642 643 LLC Host File Upd LLC2HPAR DAT Severity 4 Meaning The LLC2 Host file has been updated Action None LLC LAN Card File Upd LANPAR DAT Severity 4 Meaning The LLC2 LAN Card file has been updated Action None IPX Filter Def File Upd IPXFPAR DAT Severity 4 Meaning The IPX Filter Definitions file has been updated Action None IPX Filt App File Upd IPXFLTAP DAT Severity 4 Meaning The IPX Filter Applications file has been updated Action None Bridge Filt Def File Upd BRGFLTD DAT Severity 4 Meaning The Bridge Filter Definitions file has been updated Action None Bridge Filt App File
157. If parameter 2 is set to 0 parameter 20 does not apply 21 Parity allows the PAD tocheck parity in the data stream from the user s device and or to gen erate parity in the data stream to the user s device 0 no parity 1 parity checking 2 parity generation 3 checking and generation 22 Page Wait specifies the number of line feed characters that when sentby the PAD to the DTE will start a Page Wait condition suspending transmission of additional characters to the user s device 124 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Configuring Async PAD Login Parameters If an async subscriber will be required to log into a SmartSwitch 1800 async PAD a login ID must be assigned To display a list of existing login IDs and associated PAD profile names press C at the Async PAD Configuration Menu or A A F C from the Main Menu To add or change login ID parameters press D at the Async PAD Configuration Menu and enter a subscriberID descri bed on page 12 15 Node Name nod exyz Async PAD Login ID Login ID 123451234512345 Login Password pass Profile Name 90 Option Figure 12 1 Async PAD Login Parameters Screen A A F D from Main Menu If a record does not exist for the specified profile or if no profile is Cg specified the letter U will be displayed preceding or in place of the NITE profile name Login Parameters Table 12 2 Async PAD Login Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default
158. J48C e The LAN port provided in two interface types depends on the model Ethernet RJA8 UTP 10BaseT and DB15F AUI 10Base5 Token Ring RJ45 UTP and DB9F STP e WAN ports 0 and 1 are RS 232 DTE male and or DCE female depending on the attached Cabletron cables If the optional CSU DSU port is used WAN port 1 is disabled e WAN ports 2 and 3 are determined by the attached Cabletron cables RS 232 V 35 and or RS 449 all available as either DTE male or DCE female e WAN ports 4 7 exist on an optional expansion card and are determined by the type of card V 35 RS 232 or RS 422 which supports RS 449 interfaces and X 21 by special order SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Configuring a Serial or Voice Port Before configuring a physical port make sure that the following have been properly configured e Nodeparameters See Chapter 4 This is general configuration that must bedone no matter which protocols will be run in the node e Protocol s that will be transmitted over the physical port and any logical ports on the physical port See Chapter 5 Once these necessary records have been configured press A Configuration then C Configure Ports then A from the Main Menu When prompted enter a port number in the range 0 7 noting the port descriptions following Figure 6 1 and Figure 6 2 Pressing Enter without entering a number will accept the default of 0 Voice ports can
159. MAC address 0080C7193D80 Source MAC address 0036 length of packet in hex 54 bytes follow AAAA03 SNAP Header 0000F8 Protocol ID SNAP OUI will see 000000 or 00000C 0806 Ethertype ARP 0001 Hardware Ethernet 10MB 0800 Protocol Ethertype DOD IP 06 Hardware address length 04 Protocol address length 0001 Op Code 1 ARP request 2 ARP reply 3 RARP request 4 RARP reply 0080C7193D80 Sender s hardware address MAC address C6554ABC Sender s protocol address IP address 000000000000 Target hardware address MAC address C6554A01 Target protocol address IP address The rest is Ethernet padding 20 16 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Monitoring LAN Traffic Data fora LAN interface can be gathered by capturing current information and placing it into a buffer This data can then be displayed Configuring the Monitor To configure the parameters used in a capture press B at the Traffic Monitor Menu or C E B from the Main Menu This will display a screen similar to the fol lowing Node Name node xyz LAN Capture Statusand Control Menu Protocols IP NotLoaded IPX Not Loaded Bridge Not Load ed Recording Active Buffer Allocated 4 40 Events LANO Type 802 5 Capture On Options IP IPX Bridge Unknown A LAN Card 0 Trace Brid ge On D B TraceIP On E Trace Unknown On C TraceIPX Off F WhenFull Stop Option F1 Refresh F2 Stop Capture F3 Exit F4 P
160. MP MAC frame was not received 21 13 IP Statistics Displays IP Statistics 21 14 IP statistics track traffic of IP datagrams through a node Press C at the Statistics Menu and when prompted enter a Report Interval 5 65535 seconds Default is 5 This is the frequency with which the screen will be redisplayed with the most recent values Node Name node_xyz IP Statistics Dis play Report Interval sec 5 Current Time 6 17 1997 14 23 45 STATIS TIC CURR CUMULA TIVE STATIS TIC CURR CUMULATIVE Total Pkts 90 1000000000 Can t Forward 90 1000000000 Bad Checksum 90 1000000000 Pkt Forwd Sent 90 1000000000 Pkt Too Short 90 1000000000 Unkwn Protocol 90 1000000000 Pkt Too S mall 90 1000000000 Pkts Delivered 90 1000000000 Bad Hdr Length 90 1000000000 Local Pkts Sent 90 1000000000 Bad Pkt Length 90 1000000000 Pkts Dropped 90 1000000000 Pkt Fragments 90 1000000000 Total R eas mbled 90 1000000000 Frag Time Out 90 1000000000 Pkts Fragmented 90 1000000000 Frag Dropped 90 1000000000 Frag Created 90 1000000000 Pkts Forwarded 90 1000000000 Ca tFrag 90 1000000000 F4 Clear Cumulative Statistics Others Exit Figure 21 11 IP Statistics Display E C from Main Menu CE CURRis the current value and CUMULATIVE is the total since the last IPL of the node NHL Information in this Display Total Pkts is the total number of IP datagrams received on this node Can t Forward is the number of datagrams received headed toward unr
161. N IP Interface Secondary Address Configuration Up to 15 secondary IP addresses can be configured on a LAN interface providing support for multiple IP subnets on the same physical LAN segment To configure a secondary address press A The selected address will be highlighted in reverse video To select a different address press a number from 1 15 corre sponding to the sequence Seq number of the entry Pressing any valid number higher than the highest configured number will display a new entry for the next sequential number after the highest configured number When a secondary IP address item B is entered default values will be displayed for items C and D To delete an existi ng entry press G then Y when asked to confirm Any entries with higher sequence numbers will move up one to fill in the gap To delete a primary address Source IP Address on the first screen without deleting the group of associated secondary addresses do this Li J a i ar 1 Select one of the secondary addresses to be the new primary 2 Delete that secondary address 3 Reconfigure the Source IP Addressto specify the secondary address that was deleted 14 6 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 IP Interface Parameters Table 14 2 through Table 14 4 list all possible IP Interface parameters Some will not be displayed depending on how others are configured Because several parameters apply to more then one interface type descriptio
162. Name identifies the subscriber to the console operator Routing Algorithm allows creation of a hunt group of ports see example on page 8 22 for the purpose of routing per a pre selected algorithm 0 Round Robin selects ports specified cyclicly in numerical order according to the list of Redirection Addresses If the selected port is unreachable or con gested the Call Request will be sent to the next port If the port becomes available again it will be included in its assigned position 1 Altemate Route on Line Failure selects the first port that is notin a failed state Ifthe selected port does not makea connection the call will be cleared even if other ports are available 2 Alternate Route on Line Busy selects the first port that has LCNs available is not busy If the port has failed the next available port will be selected 3 Least LCN with Throughput selects the line with the minumum loading cal culated by weight and number of LCNs in use on that line Each line is assigned a weight proportional to its throughput within the routing path If use of a routing algorithm is not desired simply accept the default and specify only one routing path nz See Configuring a Hunt Group for SNA Subscribers Ne Configuring SNA 9 15 Systematic Redirection will redirect if Y all calls to the alternate subscribers specified by the Redirection Addresses Consecutive attempts at call redirection wil
163. P NR 5 F N R 7 P N R 0 N R 1 N S 0 0029 2D0000003782EB80001112404040404040404000 SNA F N R 1 ACTPU RU RSP N R 1 N S 1 0014 2D00020037836B80000D02010000 SNA ACTLU REQ S N R 1 N S 2 0014 2D00040037856B 80000D02010000 N R 1 N S 3 0014 2D00050037866B 80000D02013035 N R 1 N S 4 0014 2D00030037846B 80000D02010000 P NR 3 F N R 1 P NR 5 F N R 7 P N R 1 N R 5 N S 1 0025 2D0000023783EB80000D020100858000000C0603 SNA ACTLU RU RSP N R 5 N S 2 0020 2C00000200000B 80008106200C06030001000000 SNA NOTIFY RU ENABLED N R 5 N S 3 0025 2D0000043785EB 80000D020100858000000C0601 N R 5 N S 4 0020 2C00000400000B 80008106200C06010001000000 N R 5 N S 5 0025 2D0000053786EB 80000D020100858000000C0601 N R 5 N S 6 0020 2C00000500000B 80008106200C06010001000000 F N R 5 N R 7 N S 5 0014 2C00020000008B 80008106200000 N R 7 N S 6 0014 2C00040000008B 80008106200000 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 031 N R 7 N S 7 0204 280002000001038000C9C4407E40C9D9D4C17BF4 SNA BANNER VTAM MSG 10 031 N R 7 N S 0 0248 2000020000014081998540839695A38189958584 01 RR PN R 3 01 RR FN R 1 031 N R 7 N S 1 0248 2000020000018195844086858485998193409381 02 RR PN R 5 02 RR FN R 7 031 N R 7 N S 2 0231 240002000001C1E2E2C9E2E3C1D5C3C515C2A4A2 031 N R 7 N S 3 0014 2C00050000008B80008106200000 03 RR PN R 7 031 N R 4 N S 7 0025 2D0000033784EB80000D020100858000000C 0601 031 N R 4 N
164. P address is 32 bits divided into a network identifier followed by a node host identifier This allows the Internet Pro tocol to identify each physical network and each node on each physical network IP addresses are generally shown in dotted deci mal notation which means that each octet is represented by a decimal number and octets are separated by dots as in 130 6 52 245 IP networks are divided into classes with this addressing scheme e Class A allows up to 127 network numbers and several million node numbers Bit 0 is 0 bits 1 7 are the network identifier and bits 8 31 are the node iden tifier In dotted decimal notation the range of Class A addresses is 1 0 0 0 127 255 255 255 Network oo Node er The valid range in SmartSwitch 1800 configuration is 1 0 0 0 126 255 255 255 NO e Class B allows up to approximately 16 000 network numbers and approxi mately 65 025 node numbers Bits 0 1 are 10 bits 2 15 are the network iden tifier and bits 16 31 are the node identifier In dotted decimal notation the range of Class B addresses is 128 0 0 0 191 255 255 255 Fs Network Node e Class C allows up to approximately 2 million network numbers and 255 node numbers Bits 0 2 are 110 bits 3 23 are the network identifier and bits 24 31 are the node identifier In dotted decimal notation the range of Class C addresses is 192 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 E n UU Node Network If the node identifier
165. PAD it will be stored in the editing buffer and will cause the previously stored character to be deleted at packet forwarding or if a line display is performed Configuring Async Ports 12 5 17 Line Delete is the ASCII value of the character that will delete all characters stored in the editing buffer 18 Line Display allows the DTE to display the contents of the PAD s buffer on a new line The spec ified number defines the ASCII character that will be used as the Line Display char acter 19 Edit Service Signal allows the DTE to specify the format of service signals Values can be added are 0 no editing 1 edit signals for printing terminals 2 edit signals for display terminals 8 32 126 edit signals using one of these decimal ASCII characters If parameter 6 PAD Service Signal is set to0 this parameter does not apply 20 Echo Mask allows selected sets of characters received from the user s device to avoid transmission back to the start stop mode DTE Values can be added are 0 noecho mask all characters echoed 1 noecho of CR 2 noecho of LF 4 noecho of VT HT FF 8 noecho of BEL BS 16 no echo of ESC ENQ 32 noecho of ACK NAK STX SOH EOT ETB ETX 64 noecho of editing characters as designated by parameters 16 18 128 noecho of all characters not mentioned above and DEL If parameter 5 12 or 22 is set to anything other than 0 X ON and X OFF are not echoed
166. Port Priority NCHL When configuring priorities be careful to consider the types of traffic being routed on other connections in the node CAUTIEN Port identifies the physical port containing the interface Make sure the physical frame relay port is not reserved for backup DLCIs as determined by the For Backup Use Only parameter in the port record CAUTICN DLCI matches the connection with an interface at the remote end of the link SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Configuring Bridging Make sure the DLCI is not part of a frame relay DLCI backup group See page 7 22 Also make sure that the DLCI is different than the one configured for the physical port in the frame relay CAUIICN PVC record Format is the RFC1490 encapsulation method used for bridged traffic Note that specifying 8023_TB will add an Ethernet header to the frame and 8025 SRB will add a Token Ring header Bandwidth Allocation Group assigns the interface to one of sixteen groups whose parameters regulate bandwidth usage See Configuring Frame Relay Backup Groups on page 7 22 Host MAC Address 1s the MAC address of the LLC2 host in the node Session Type if Originated means that LLC2 connections from the configured Host MAC Address canuse this interface If Terminated connecti ons tothe configured address can use this interface LAN ID identifies the ring number used by a frame relay compliant source route bridge at the other end o
167. RIP entries received with no network address The network address configured for the interface will be used Path Not Fnd Pkt is the number of RIP packets that cannot be transmitted because a route to the destination network cannot be found RIP Pkts Tx is the number of RIP packets transmitted on the interface RIP G Query Tx is the number of RIP General Queries transmitted on the interface 21 19 21 20 RIP N Query Tx is the number of RIP Nearest Queries transmitted on the interface RIP G RespTx is the number of RIP General Responses responses to General Quenes transmitted on the interface RIP N Resp Tx is the number of RIP Nearest Responses responses to Nearest Queries transmitted on the interface RIP Pkts Rcv is the number of RIP packets received on the interface RIP G Query Rcv is the number of RIP General Queries received on the interface RIP N Query Rcv is the number of RIP Nearest Queries received on the interface RIP G Resp Rcv is the number of RIP General Responses responses to General Queries received on the interface RIP N Resp Rev is the number of RIP Nearest Responses responses to Nearest Queries received on the interface RIP Aged Entries is the number of entries that have been deleted from the routing information table due to expiration of the RIP Age Timer configured in the IPX Interface record described on page 15 9 RIP Prd_Broadcasts is the num
168. Review X 25 Address Translation Templates B Configure X 25 Address Translation Templates C Test X 25 Address Translation Templates Configure Logical Ports Chapter 8 specifies operating parameters for logical ports residing on physical frame relay ports 3 11 3 12 E F Configure IP LLC2 BRIDGE PX Interfaces A Review IP Interfaces Chapter 14 displays information on any IP interfaces see below configured in the SmartS witch B Configure IP Interfaces Chapter 14 specifies addressing and operating parameters for IP interfaces X 25 frame relay or LAN C Review Bridge Ports LLC2 Interfaces Chapter 9 Chapter 16 displays information on any bridge or LLC2 interfaces see below configured in the SmartSwitch 1800 D Configure Bridge Ports LLC2 Interfaces Chapter 9 Chapter 16 specifies location type and format of any bridge or LLC2 interfaces E Review IPX Interfaces Chapter 15 displays information on any IPX interfaces see below configured in the SmartSwitch F Configure IPX Interfaces Chapter 15 identifies any IPX interfaces Identifies type X 25 Ethemet etc and operating parameters Configure BSC Devices Chapter 10 A Review BSC Device Configuration displays information on any BSC Interactive devices see below configured in the SmartSwitch B Configure BSC Devices identifies devices using SmartS witch ports configured as BSC Interactive D Configure Connections
169. S 0 0020 2C00000300000B80008106200C06010001000000 03 RR FN R 4 01 RR PN R 3 01 RR FN R 1 02 RR PN R 5 02 RR FN R 7 03 RR PN R 1 03 RR FN R 4 031 N R 1N S 4 0014 2C00030000008B80008106200000 01 RR PN R 3 01 RR FN R 1 02 RR PN R 5 02 RR FN R 7 03 RR PN R 1 031 N R 5 N S 1 0009 2C0000020001838000 03 RR FN R 5 01 RR PN R 3 01 RR FN R 1 02 RR PN R 5 02 RR FN R 7 03 RR PN R 2 03 RR FN R 5 01 RR PN R 3 01 RR FN R 1 02 RR PN R 5 02 RR FN R 7 03 RR PN R 2 03 RR FN R 5 Status Displays 20 11 20 12 Frame Relay Ports The following figure shows an example of a frame relay port display 16 23 58 00 R 0016 D 0008 0308518167800131 16 23 59 10 R 0016 D 0008 0308518167800331 16 24 02 00 R 0016 D 0008 0308518167800331 16 24 02 20 R 0016 D 0008 0308518167800131 0000 LIV Status Enquiry 135 134 0000 LIVStatus 135 135 16 24 18 00 R 0016 F 0308518167800131 16 24 18 30 R 0016 D 0008 0308518167800131 16 24 18 40 R 0016 D 0008 0308518167800331 16 23 58 00 R 0016 F 0008 0308518167800131 16 23 58 00 R 0016 F 0008 0308518167800331 16 23 58 00 R 0016 B 0008 0308518167800131 16 23 58 00 R 0016 B 0008 0308518167800331 16 23 58 00 R 0016 B 0008 0308518167800331 0000 Full Status Enquiry 136 135 16 23 58 00 R 0016 B 0008 0308518167800331 0016 B 0008 0308518167800131 0008 0308518167800131 0008 0308518167800331 0016 B 0008 0308518167800131 Figure 20 7 Frame Re
170. SmartSwitch 1800 Sool MEN E pum A MEAE oeno oe ote eGo oRurxspo o 22e D tr a WA War 4 UEM Du User Guide For Release 4 0 CABLETRON TEMS 09 44 06 018 01 The Complete Networking Solution Copyrights and Disclaimers Cabletron Systems reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained inthis document without prior notice The reader should in all cases consult Cabletron Systems to determine whether any such changes have been made The hardware firmware and or software described in this manual is subject to change without notice IN NO EVENT SHALL CABLETRON SYSTEMS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL INDIRECT SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THIS MANUAL OR THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN IT EVEN IF CABLETRON SYSTEMS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF KNOWN OR SHOULD HAVE KNOWN THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES Copyright 1997 1998 by Cabletron Systems Inc P O Box 5005 Rochester NH 03866 5005 All rights reserved Printed in the United States of America Order Number IW48 USERDOC VxWorksis a copyrightof Wind River Systems Inc IP Internet Protocol code is copyright 1982 1986 by Regents of the University of California Allrights reserved This Cabletron product includes software developed by the University of California Berkeley andits contributors IP software is provided by the regents and contributors as is an
171. T Severity 4 Meaning The Frame Relay DLCI configuration file has been updated Action None Received Port Disable Request Severity 1 Meaning A local or remote operator performed a port disable B B A or B B B from the Main Menu Action None however all users of the port s should be made aware of the disable Received Port Dump Request Severity 1 22 11 22 12 432 433 434 435 436 437 439 Meaning The BSC device has experienced a problem that caused it to send a request to send a dump to the port Action Check the device Node Under Remote Control Severity 4 Meaning The SmartSwitch 1800 is under control ofa remote Cabletron frame relay access device SmartSwitch 1800 FRM FRX4000 FRX6000 or async terminal Action None Remote Control Released Severity 4 Meaning An operator has relinquished remote control see event 432 of the local SmartSwitch 1800 Action None Remote Control CXN Clr cc n dc n Severity 4 Meaning Aremote control connection see event 432 was cleared Action Depends on the cause See Appendix B for alist of codes LG Buffer MALLOC Problem PKTs Lost Severity 2 Meaning This applies to a debug tool used by service personnel and will not appear under normal operation Action None RCV Unknown Event Code from Net Severity 2 Meaning An unknown event was received from the network Action None
172. TICN This operation copies an entrire directory from an SmartSwitch 1800 to the locally attached PC and back This is useful for backing up the S martSwitch 1800 s configu ration database Copying the Directory to the PC l Make sure a directory with the same name as the one in the SmartSwitch 1800 exists in the PC In Procomm use Setup to specify a Download Path to the desired directory Press G at the SmartSwitch 1800 On Line Node Operations Menu or B A G from the Main Menu After reading the waming press Y 5 Click on the Procomm Receive File icon After all files in the directory have been received on the PC press Enter when prompted to strike any key The On Line Node Operations Menu will be dis played Copying the Directory from the PC l In Procomm use Setup if necessary to specify an Upload Path which identifies the directory in the PC to be copied to the SmartSwitch 1800 Press H at the SmartSwitch 1800 On Line Node Operations Menu or B A H from the Main Menu 3 After reading the warning press Enter Click on the Procomm Send File icon 5 After all files in the directory have been copied to the SmartSwitch 1800 press On line Operations Enter when prompted to strike any key The On Line Node Operations Menu will be displayed 19 7 Backing Up and Restoring Local Files 19 8 Local File Backup CE This operation applies only to a SmartSwitch 18
173. Transmission Unit the maximum size in bytes of the data field that can be used to encapsulate an IP datagram for transmission over the interface Network bit wise AND of the IP Address and the Mask IP Address IP address of the local interface Rem Address IP address of the remote device Flags B Broadcast L Loopback M Multicast P Point to point U Interface is operational 0 Unnumtered interface 1 Inverse ARP RTS Request to Send 2 response from Inverse ARP RTS Mask Network mask used during routing to determine the portion of the IP address associated with the network Each entry is two lines on the screen with the Mask on the second line under the associated IP Network ANOTE If the screen is filled with information you will be asked whether you want to display more Pressing F2 will display a screen of secondary addresses with this information IP interface number of the primary interface Secondary addr secondary IP address Sec broadcast broadcast address configured for the secondary address Sec netmask network mask configured for the secondary address 20 27 IPX Status Displays RIP Table SAP Table 20 28 To display the contents of IPX RIP Table press A at the Protocol Status Displays Menu or C F A from the Main Menu Each entry will contain the following Network IP X address of the network containing the SmartSwitch 1800
174. Transmission Unit 14 10 15 13 Maximum Window Size 8 11 8 18 MaxIn 9 25 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Menu structure F 1 Metric Count 14 15 Min Congestion 4 5 Modulo 8 8 8 16 Monitoring a LAN interface 20 17 serial port 20 7 Monitoring a line 20 7 Moving a database record 2 6 Multidrop 10 6 N N1 Polling Count 7 17 N2 4 8 9 13 924 N2 ErrorThreshold 7 17 N2 Retransmit Count 8 9 8 16 N3 4 8 9 13 9 24 N3 Monitored Events Count 7 17 NAK Retry Count 10 7 11 6 Name NetView 4 6 SNMP Community Table 17 3 NetBIOS Hops 15 14 NetMask 14 13 NetView management D 1 Network 15 17 Network Address Value 15 5 15 6 Network Mask 14 12 14 13 Network trunk configuring 8 4 No Data Poll Period 9 8 No Resp Poll Period 9 8 No Response Retry Count 10 7 11 6 No Response Timer 10 7 11 6 Node Address Value 15 6 Node Defaults 4 1 Bridge 16 3 IPX 15 2 Node Name 2 3 4 3 Node status displaying 20 1 NRZ 9 9 Number of Beginning Sync Char 10 6 Number of Beginning Sync Chars 11 6 Number of Leading Digits to Delete 13 15 Number of Trailing Pad Characters 10 6 Number of Training Pad Chars 11 6 O Offset 16 8 On line change F7 2 6 On Line Temporary Changes 9 24 Operator interfaces 1 3 Outgoing Access Allowed 8 12 8 20 Index Outgoing Calls Barred 8 11 8 18 Outgoing DLCI Priority 7 19 Output Level 13 10 Outstanding Frames 9 9 P Packet Size 8 34 9 9 12 19 Packet Type Value 15 7 PAD Recall 12 3 PAD Service
175. UTIEN Subscriber Name identifies the subscriber to the console operator The software does not use this infor mation Logical Channel is a logical link between the node and the subscriber Port specifies the port at each end of the PVC Packet Size allows setting a packet size for each end of the PVC Generally the same packet size will be configured in the port record at each end as well as in the PVC record Window Size allows setting a window size for each end of the PVC Generally the same window size will be configured in the port record at each end as well as in the PVC record Configuring Async Ports 12 19 Chapter 13 Configuring Voice Introduction The two voice ports in the SmartSwitch 1800 provide connectivity over frame relay for telephones PB Xs fax machines and analog modems Voice support includes e Ability to transmit voice and data over the same DLCI between SmartSwitch 1800s e Digital signal processing DSP technology providing quality equal to calls placed through a public telephone network e Compression options from 4 8 Kbps to 64 Kbps e Built in echo cancellation e Digital Speech Interpolation DSI to maximize bandwidth efficiency during silent periods in a voice conversation e Support for all common analog telephony interfaces including FXO FXS 2 and 4 wire E amp M and AC 15 e Support for both rotary and pulse dialing e Store and forward dialing e Variable number lengths and w
176. Upd BRGFLTAP DAT Severity 4 Meaning The Bridge Filter Applications file has been updated Action None IPX Interface File Upd IPXISUB DAT Severity 4 Meaning The IPX Interfaces file has been updated Action None Lan Card Number Type Mismatch Severity 3 Meaning Amismatch has occurred between the LAN card type and the requested interface type when configuring a LAN based IP or IPX interface Action Change the requested LAN card number or LAN card type SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 System Events 644 701 702 704 705 706 707 Fr RLP PORT DLCI Mismatch Severity 3 Meaning A mismatch has occurred between the current configuration and the requested RLP Port DLCI when configuring a frame relay based IP or IPX interface Action Change the requested RLP Port DLCI SDLC Rem Link Stn Not Responding Severity 2 Meaning Self explanatory Rem Link Stn is the Remote Link Station Action Check the PU to make sure it is operational SDLC Link Stn Sent DM Seventy 2 Meaning The link station sent a Disconnect Mode response and the logical link is down Action None SDLC Link Stn rcvd FRMR Inv cmd Severity 2 Meaning The remote device received an invalid command and responded with a Frame Reject Action None SDLC Stn rcvd FRMR IFLD invalid Severity 2 Meaning The remote device received an unpermitted I frame and responded with a Frame Reject Action
177. Value Login Password 0 6 characters QWERTY Profile Name 0 10 characters 90 Login Password interacts with the Login Required parameter in the Port record If login is required the user must log into the PAD in order to make a call through it Configuring Async Ports 12 7 Profile Name is aname given to the async PAD s profile If login is not required as determined in the Port record the profile specified in Port record is always in effect If login is required the profile specified in the PAD Login record becomes effective at login even if it is different from the profile specified in the Port record If the profile specified is not defined in the database the default profile 90 will be in effect See Configuring Async PAD Profiles on page 12 2 Configuring Async Port Records Once the necessary Node Line Processor and protocol parameters have been con figured press A at the Port Configuration Menu or A C A from the Main Menu When prompted enter a port number or press Enter to accept the default of 0 Valid port numbers depend on the model of SmartS witch 1800 see port locations on page 6 1 The display for an existing port will show the configured parameter values while the display for a new port will show default database values See Table 12 3 on page 12 9 The following figure is an example of an existing port Node Name nodexyz Async PADPort Parameters Port 0 Link State Linkup
178. Voice Application Statistics To display Voice Application statistics for both Voice ports press A at the Voice Sta tistics Displays Menu and when prompted enter a Report Interval 5 65535 seconds The default is 5 The display will show current and cumulative from the last IPL of the node or clearing of the values values for the statistics listed below The cumu lative statistics values can be cleared reset to zero by pressing F4 Statistics Displays Node Name node_xyz Voice Application Statistics Display Report Interval sec 5 Current Time 01 07 1998 14 23 45 PORT4 PORT 5 CUMULATI VE CUMULATIVE 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 STATISTICS Incoming Calk Received Outgoing Calls Placed Calk Terminated Received Calk Terminated Sent Outgoing Calls Accepted Incoming Calk Accepted Outgoing Calls Rejected Outgoing Calls Timed Out Version of DSP Image MOE Swims e ee F4 Clear Cumulative Statistics Others Exit Figure 21 7 Voice Connection Statistics Display E A from Main Menu The statistic names in this display are self explanatory except the Version of DSP Image which is not currently displayed Voice Connection Statistics 21 8 To display Voice Connection statistics for both Voice ports press B at the Voice Sta tistics Displays Menu When prompted enter e Port 4 or 5 e Report Interval 5 65535 seconds Default is 5 Node Nam
179. Y according to the Redirection Addresses if the current sub scriber has no LCNs available Redirect on Out of Order will redirects calls if Y according to the Redirection Addresses if the if the current subscriber s port is out of order Connection Priority prioritizes this subscriber for intra nodal traffic the higher the number the higher the priority This priority has no effect on traffic exiting a node Priorities are configured on all logical interfaces that use a physical frame relay port The device processor in the node uses these priorities to help determine the order in which it will process protocols When configuring priorities be careful to consider the types of traffic being routed on other connections in the node CAU TICN 1st 2nd etc Path Configured includes or excludes the associated port as a routing path to the subscriber device At least one path must be specified Port identify the RLP s and port s that make up the routing path s Redirection Address 0 1 etc are up to five subscribers that will be called according to the specified redirection option The SmartSwitch 1800 can redirect an X 25 call to an alternate subscriber if the original subscriber cannot be reached See Redirect on Busy and Redirect on Out of Order The SmartSwitch 1800 will call each address in the list until one is reached If Sys tematic Redirection is enabled the SmartSwitch 1800 will not call the original call
180. acked up Item A allows copying the database to a directory on the hard disk or a diskette Item B copies the database to flash memory on the local SmartSwitch These operations place a heavy load on the SmartSwitch 1800 s central processor and should be performed only when there is minimal traffic on the node CAUTICN Item C is used to restore the database that was backed up using item B The database will automatically be copied from and to the correct directories Local Backup and Restore Items D E Items D and E are used to back up a node s database to a local backup directory then restore the database into the original directory If the directory does not exist it will be created These operations can be performed ona local or remote via remote control node but in either case the operations affect the node under operator control 19 6 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Copying a SmartSwitch 1800 Directory to from a PC CE This operation applies only to a SmartS witch 1800 with a PC attached to the Console port The PC must be running Procomm Plus with ZMODEM Neill The procedure was tested using Procomm Plus 2 1 for Windows but other versions containing ZMODEM should also work It is assumed that anyone performing this procedure knows how to use ZMODEM This operation places a heavy load on the SmartS witch 1800 s central processor and should be performed only when there is minimal traffic on the node CAU
181. ain these characters for example in a binary file XON XOFF may become inadequate SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Disconnect Timer is an inactivity timer that determines the length of time the port can go without trans mitting or receiving characters as determined by the parameters Timeout if No Login Timeout if No Call and Timeout if No Data The actual timeout may be up to thirty seconds after the number of minutes specified Disconnect Duration is the length of time the PAD will drop the modem signals after logout of the user whether caused by atimeout or user command For a dial in line this should be set to something greater than 0 to ensure that the line does not remain physically con nected after a timeout or logout For a leased or directly connected line Disconnect Duration should be 0 to avoid disconnections Timeout if No Login if Y starts the disconnect timer the moment the user enters login state e g when DSR is asserted on the modem or when a direct connect user logs out As long as the dis connect timer has not expired the user can continue to attempt to log in On a dial in line if the timer has expired and Disconnect Duration is not 0 a physical disconnect will be initiated The modem signals will be dropped Ifthe user logs out the Disconnect Timer will be ignored and the line will immediately be disconnected This parameter should be N for a leased line otherwise the PAD banner
182. all has timed out during a busy condition Loading Calling Failed e Per Node Type is the configured Interface Peer Node Type e ACT Peer Node is the configured Peer Node Number e ACT Peer Port is the configured Peer Port Number Status Displays 20 21 e Port is the configured Local Node Port e DLCI is the frame relay DLCI to which the interface is assigned e BAG is the Bandwidth Allocation Group to which the interface is assigned e Pri is the Priority assigned to the interface Displaying LLC2 Session Status The status of any current LLC2 sessions can be displayed by pressing F atthe Pro tocol Status Displays Menu or C F F from the Main Menu Information in this Display e SSAP SAP address of the source end e DSAP SAP address of the destination end e SMAC MAC address of the source end e HMAC MAC address of the host e State Current link state e Call State Current state of the call Pending Connected or Cleared e SessType Session type Originated or Terminated e PUName PU name if one exists configured in the SNA Port PU record 20 22 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Bridge Status Displays Bridge Port Status Press A at the Bridge Status Displays Menu to display the configurational and oper ational status of all Bridge ports in the node Node Name node_xyz Bridge Port Status Display Bridge Id 0010 00000364439B Root Port 255 0 E
183. all setup packet if the packet does not include a window size Maximum Throughput Class specifies the default throughput class that will be inserted into a Call Request packet if Throughput Class Negotiationis not enabled or if a throughput class is not requested in the Call Request This value should not be higher than the line speed specified for the physical port Configuring X 25 8 17 Valid values in bits per second are 75 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 48K 64K Default Calling Address will be inserted into an incoming Call Request packet if the packet does not contain a calling address T20 Restart Timer will be started when the logical DTE issues a Restart Request and stopped and reset when a Restart Confirmation or Restart Indication is received If the timer expires the DTE should retransmit the Restart Request T21 Incoming Call Timer will be started when the logical DTE issues a Call Request packet and stopped and reset when a Call Connected Clear Indication or Incoming Call is received If the timer expires the DTE should send a Clear Request T22 Reset Timer will be started when the logical DTE issues a Reset Request and stopped and reset when a Reset Confirmation or Reset Indication is received If the timer expires the DTE should retransmit the Reset Request or a Clear Request T23 Clear Timer will be started when the logical DTE issues a Clear Request and stopped and reset when a Clear Co
184. alled Calling Address or User Data Configuring X 25 Toreplace all or part of any of these fields press B or C at the Translation Template Maintenance Menu When prompted enter the desired information as described below L Literal digits which means that the actual digits you enter here will replace that same number of digits in the specified field Type L followed withno spaces by the desired digits 0 9 For example typing L1234 Enter will replace four digits in the selected part of the field with the actual numbers 1234 Called address The characters entered here are not necessarily the exact char acters of original called address but rather the characters digits or wildcards of the template ID that match the original called address that part not already trans lated Type X followed with no spaces by the desired characters 1 9 A F indicating which positions of the 15 digits in the original called address are to replace the selected portion of the packet For example typing X1234 Enter takes the first second third and fourth characters of the remaining original called address part of the template ID The matching procedure is described in the following example Assume The called address of the packet is 31101234567800 The Template ID is 31102 U1232 The Translation Formula is L1234X567 The translation inserts literal digits 1234 then takes the characters from the original called address
185. alled address To display a list of current Subscriber IDs addresses press A at the Connections and Routing Paths Menu or A D A from the Main Menu To add or change a Subscriber record press B at the Connections and Routing Paths Menu When prompted enter a Subscriber ID of up to 15 digits ID conventions are described on page 8 21 Node Name nod exyz SV CSubscriber Maintenance Subscriber ID 0100012345 Subs criber Name sub 1 Routing Algorithm 0 Round Robin Systematic R edirection N Redirect on Busy Redirect on Outof Order Connection Priority Routing Paths H Redirection Addresses Option Figure 12 3 Typical SVC Subscriber Screen A D B from Main Menu Pressing G will display routing paths which link the subscriber with one or more ports Pressing H will display the addresses used for call redirection These addresses are valid only if Y is specified for one or more of items C D and E on the first screen Parameters for all three screens are described following Table 12 4 Configuring Async Ports 12 15 Subscriber Parameters Table 12 4 SVC Subscriber Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Subscriber Name 0 31 characters Routing Algorithm Systematic Redirection Y N Redirect on Busy Y N Redirect on Out of Order Y N Connection Priority 0 9 1st 2nd etc Path Configured Y N wa Physical port 0 3 Logical port 8 63 Redirection Address 0 1 etc valid address 1 The so
186. ameand Server Name is assigned a value and an associated mask The mask determines by the process described below whether the filter will be applied to the packet The binary bits of the mask will be ANDed 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 to the value as in this example Assume the value hex is 1234 and the mask is F000 The binary ANDing is as follows Value 0001001000110100 Mask 1111000000000000 AND Result 0001000000000000 The mask will also be ANDed to its corresponding field in each IPX packet as deter mined by IPX Filter Applications This result will be compared to the AND result of the configured value and mask If the two results match the filter will be applied This process allows anumber of packet field values to match the AND result of the mask and value for example Packet field 1233 Mask F000 Packet field 1237 Mask F000 Binary value 0001001000110011 Value 0001001000110111 Mask 1111000000000000 Mask 1111000000000000 AND Result 0001000000000000 AND Result 0001000000000000 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 IPX Filter Parameters The four types of IPX filters are listed in separate tables e RIP filters see Table 15 2 e SAP filters see Table 15 3 e Packet filters see Table 15 4 e RIP Router filters see Table 15 5 Explanations of some parameters follow the tables Explanations of individual masks are not included below because they were described in general under How Filt
187. amp M applications E amp M signaling works by applying DC voltages to the E and M leads in the process of connecting and disconnecting Without a proper ground the DC voltages do nothave a common point of reference which can result in unintended or sporadic signaling To avoid grounding problems certain conditions must be con sidered First check the distance between the PB X and the SmartSwitch 1800 If the two are not within close proximity then their AC grounds may not be the same If the S mart Switch and the PBX are in the same room however it is likely that they share the same AC ground Second in an E amp M application the common ground must be the telco PTT ground This assures that the ground potential of the PBX telephone interface and the Smart Switch telephone interface are the same Based on the above conditions grounding may be established directly or indirectly The direct methodis to connect a grounding wire between the telco P TT interfaces on the PBX and SmartS witch You can do this by connecting the ground wire from the PBX to pin 8 SG of the RJ45 connector on the SmartS witch This will establish the same ground potential at both interfaces For various reasons direct grounding is not always possible or practical To establish anindirect ground make sure the telco PTT grounds ofthe PB X and the S martSwitch are connected to their respective AC grounds The AC grounds of the two devices must be at the same
188. and prompt will periodically be output This is harmless but unnecessary This parameter is automatically disabled on a PVC connection Timeout if No Call if set to Y starts the disconnect timer as soon as the user logs in or a virtual circuit is cleared and the PAD is ready to receive commands from the user The timer is reset every time the port receives or transmits a call This parameter is automatically disabled on a PVC connection Timeout if No Data if set to Y starts the disconnect timer as soonas avirtual circuit is connected The timer is reset every time the port receives or transmits a character If Y is specified and the user has escaped from the data transfer state by pressing Ctrl P any data sent to the port will not be output through the port When the disconnect timer expires the software will check for any data waiting to be output as well as the state of the user If there is data waiting and the user has escaped from data transfer state the user will be returned to data transfer state and the dis connect will be canceled This parameter is automatically disabled on a PVC connection Disconnect if Clear Recvd Configuring Async Ports determines whether the user will be logged out if he receives a Clear Request from the network Also if Disconnect Timer and Disconnect Duration are set to values other than 0 the modem signals will be dropped when the user is logged out This parameter is automat
189. and repair has been made Ifthis is not done the telephone company may temporarily disconnect service The telephone company may make changes in its technical operations and procedures if such changes affect the compatibility or use of this device the telephone company is required to give adequate notice of the changes If the telephone company requests information on what equipmentis connected to their lines inform them of the following The telephone number to which the equipment is connected The ringer equivalence number 0 6B indicated on the label The USOC jack required RJ45 The FCC registration number indicated on the label The ringer equivalence number REN is used to determine how many devices can be connected to your telephone line In most areas the sum of the RENs of all devices on any one line should not exceed 5 0 If too many devices are attached they may notring properly In the event of equipment malfunction all repairs should be performed by Cabletron Systems Inc or an authorized agent It is the responsibility of user requiring service to report the need for service to Cabletron Systems Inc or an authorized agent Service can be facilitated by contacting Cabletron Systems Inc Phone 603 332 9400 Monday Friday 8 AM 8 PM Eastern Time 35 Industrial Way E mail support ctron com Rochester NH 03861 FCC NOTICE IC Canada About This Manual This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules O
190. any facilities try reconnecting the equipment to other telephone circuits If the problem persists it is likely that the connected equipment is at fault If you find the problem is with the connected voice equipment contact the manufac turer of the equipment for repair assistance If you suspectthat the problem is with the telephone company lines or central office equipment contact your local telephone company repair service Ifthe problem is with the SmartS witch 1800 contact Cabletron Systems Technical Support at Phone 603 332 9400 FAX 603 337 3075 E mail support ctron com Voice Configuration Reference Information C 19 Appendix D NetView Management The SmartSwitch 1800 supports a NetView service point function which allows a node to be configured and managed from a NetView host NetView support provides management access to downstream SDLC devices and allows diagnosing problems and changing parameters in the node The service point inthe SmartSwitch 1800 connects to the NetView host via an LLC2 session over LAN or frame relay which is established at node IPL LLC2 must be installed in either the service point node or another SmartS witch 1800 that is con nected to the service point node via X 25 physical link or over frame relay per Annex G orRFC 1490 The link can be bet ween two nodes of any type among SmartSwitch 1800 9W004 FR X4000 and FRX6000 The NetView host also referred to as a focal point sends co
191. arded by the device To display the existing Speed Dial Map table press B at the Voice Configuration Menu or A F B from the Main Menu The display will include a list of con figured speed dial numbers with associated long dial and extended dial strings To configure a Speed Dial number press C atthe Voice Configuration Menu When prompted for Speed Dial Abbreviated Digits enter the number of characters configured for Speed Map Dial Digits in Voice Level System Configuration The maximum is four A question mark wildcard can be used for any single digit and an asterisk wildcard can be used for any number of digits See page C 8 Node Name nod e xyz Speed Dial Map Configuration Parameters Speed Map Abbreviated Digits 101 A Long Dial Digit Mapping 000101 B Extended Dial String 12345 7890 12345 Option Figure 13 3 Speed Dial Map Configuration Menu A F C from Main Menu 13 6 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Speed Dial Map Parameters Table 13 3 Speed Dial Map Configuration Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Long Dial Digit Mapping 6 digits see explanation none Extended Dial String 0 16 digits none 1 Including commas each of which will create a pause when the number is being dialed The length of the pause is determined by the value configured for Forward Delay in the Voice Port record Long Dial Digit Mapping is the number for which the speed dial number is a short
192. asterisk 042 052 2A 043 053 2B E 2 ASCII Character comma hyphen period OONODOORWN O TTOIN lt XS lt CAWNDOVOZSKHASTA ITOMMOOWDYM vv il Avs caret underline single quote OoOadaon Decimal Value 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 Octal Value 054 055 056 057 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 Hex Value 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 ASCII Character Table ASCII Character e lt cTt7H70ODTO 357K TEQ x y Z oe tilde DEL Decimal Value 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 Octal Value 147 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 160 161 162 163 16
193. at contains the SmartSwitch 1800 s database files The directory name is hfs so the file name must be preceded by hfs Note the direction of the slash For example to specify the file X25 REC DAT type hfs x25rec dat Enter The entry can be in uppercase or lowercase Click on the Procomm Receive File icon After the file has been received on the PC the On Line Node Operations Menu will be displayed If you want to back up another file press D otherwise make another selection or press F3 to exitthe menu SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Table 19 1 Database Files On line Operations 19 9 19 10 Local File Restore amp m This operation applies only to a SmartSwitch 1800 with a PC attached to the Console port The PC must be running Procomm Plus with ZMODEM Mc 1 X The procedure was tested using Procomm Plus 2 1 for Windows but other versions containing ZMODEM should also work It is assumed that anyone performing this procedure knows how to use ZMODEM This operation places a heavy load on the SmartS witch 1800 s central processor and should be performed only when there is minimal traffic on the node CAU TICN This operation copies files from the locally attached PC to the SmartS witch The pro cedure can be used to install a software update into the SmartS witch or to restore database files that were backed up with the Local File Backup operation The operation transfers one file at atime and
194. at the screen in Figure 7 4 A screen similar to the following information will be displayed for each con figured DLCI Node Name node xyz Port DLCI ICIR IBC IBE OCIR OBC OBE BECN Pii Proto Primary Info Grp RRLP RPrt RDLCI SOT SBT TTH 2 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 2 50 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 1 0 50 25 0 20 PgUp PgDn F2 ReviewAll DLCIs F3 Exit Figure 7 5 DLCI Configuration Review Screen 7 10 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 The first line of parameters applies to all DLCIs on the port or in the node if F2 is pressed The second line exists only for DLCIs configured as primary DLCIs in backup configurations In the example in Figure 7 5 DLCI 50 is a primary All the parameters are listed in Table 7 4 on page 7 15 The parameters in the first line are Port DLCI are self explanatory ICIR Committed Information Rate In IBC Committed Burst Size In IBE Excess Burst Size In OCIR Committed Information Rate Out OBC Committed Burst Size Out OBE Excess Burst Size Out BECN BECN Recovery Count Pri Outgoing DLCI Priority Proto Enable BackupProtocol The parameters in the second line are FRM Configuring Frame Relay Grp Backup Group Number RRLP Remote RLP RPrt Remote Port RDLCI Remote DLCI SOT Switchover Timer SBT Switchback Timer TTH Time to Hold Data While Waiting Configuring DLCI Parameters Figure 7 4 Item D To configure DLCI parameters listed in Table 7
195. ation Initiating Frame Relay Backup Switch over Switchback Chapter 20 Status Displays Dusplasaue Node SANUS Lseiseqictedpk e bet ESO EDAM AOT EK UA Ea RER Displaying Port Status Displaying Virtual Connections Displaying Pol S1oudlei sse dodtecene tat LH eee Oct p b EM DRUG IMObDitocmb FEE a ose eb xn buda HR aD nd eda VE dH aS ROME Serial Ports i Monitoring LAN Traffic Displaying Frame Relay Backup S Status bibas ik edu cobra MM Roos Displaying SDLC PU Status Displaying Voice Interfaces Displaying LLC2 Session HOT A Bridge Status Displays Bridge Port Status Bridge Forwarding Table IP Status T HO EMEN NAMES DUM MM OH IP Ue DEBES soared eer cci uA 2 see odd Un E Re RM ub ted trad et pU Fidi e M IP UE I Pu H M IPX Stats Dis r C M Be I E E uero acetate EE baba tou E SAP Table Disabling and Enabling SDLC 2 MM xi Chapter 21 Statistics Displays RLP Statistics Configuring RLP Statistics Thresholds eccriene 21 3 Port Stati stics Configuring Port Statistics Thresholds onncrnnrn TM wa 21 5 ios xd san 21 7 a E we 21 8 21 9 Frame level Statistics Frame Relay Utilization Statis tics Voice Statistics Voice Application Statistics Voice Connection Statistics Bridge Port Statistics LAN Interface Statistics
196. ational event Depending on the event no action may be necessary and if so correcting the configuration of certain database parameters may be adequate Event messages and their severity levels are listed in Chapter 22 17 5 Section Ill Operation Chapter 18 Introduction to System Operation Once the database has been configured and the node has been brought on line little operator intervention is generally necessary The various functions that can be per formed from the menus allow the operator to do such things as Perform on line software updates to nodes Enable and disable ports useful for maintenance or updates or for preventing use of particular ports for any reason Transfer files between nodes Back up and restore database and or system files Take control of remote Cabletron frame relay access devices SmartSwitch 1800 Frame Relay Module FRX4000 FRX6000 Monitor status of the node ports connections or traffic Display event messages and configure routing of events Display statistics for level 2 RLPs and ports plus IP and IPX interfaces Produce reports on configuration and boot messages Cg If you are controlling a remote Cabletron frame relay access device most of these operations relate to that device NOTE For reference the following figure shows the Main Menu 18 2 Node Name nod e_xyz MAIN MENU A Configuration Operation Status Displays Events S tatis tics Reports O
197. atus Message from the DCE A physical frame relay port can be dedicated to providing backup DLCIs or backups can co exist with regular DLCIs on a port In a backup configuration oneendis considered the initiating node and the other the remote node The initiating end is the one that will establish the backup link if it dis covers that the primary link is down A node can be the initiating node for some backup configurations and the remote node for others Any sessions in progress when a primary DLCI goes down will not be er transferred directly to the backup DLCL but will be reset then established NOTE on the backup DLCIs used for backup on the initiating node are assigned to backup groups each of which can contain up to ten backup DLCIs A backup groupis then assigned to one or more primary DLCIs the ones that will be backed up The basic procedure for configuring backup DLCIs is 1 Configure all DLCIs that will be backed up or used as backups All parameters can be configured for each DLCI except specifying a Backup Group Number on a primary DLCI that will be backed up on an initiating node which will initiate the switchover to a backup DLCI 2 Configure backup groups A backup group is one or more DLCIs that will act as backup if the primary goes down 3 Configure Backup Group Numbers and related information for primary DLCIs This will assign a Backup Group to each primary DLCI For each example in Figu
198. auses harm to the telephone network your telephone company may discontinue your service temporarily If possible they will notify youin advance But if advance notice is not practical you will be notified as soon as possible You will be given the opportunity to correct the situation and you will be informed of your rights to file a complaint with the FCC Your telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operation or procedures that could affect the proper functioning of your equipment S hould they do so you will be notified in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninter rupted telephone service Repair Instructions If you experience any operational problems while using the SmartSwitch 1800 follow this procedure First determine whether the problem is the unit other voiceequipment e g a PBX or key system or telephone company facilities 1 Ifthe equipment is connected directly to a telephone company line try recon necting the SmartSwitch 1800 to a different line If the problem persists it is likely that the SmartSwitch 1800 is at fault 2 Ifthe equipment is connected to other voice equipment try reconnecting the SmartS witch 1800 to another port or tie line on the connected equipment If the problem clears up it is likely that the connected equipment is at fault 3 Ifthe equipment is connected to other voice equipment and the equipment is also experiencing difficulty with the telephone comp
199. be reset whenever an Information or Supervisory acknowledgment LPDU is sent by the local node is the maximum number of sequentially numbered Information LPDUs that the local node can have outstanding If Twis reached and acknowledgment will be sent is the maximum number of times that an LPDU including Information LPDUs resent after a checkpoint operation will be sent following expiration of T1 Priority prioritizes intra nodal traffic the higher the number the higher the priority This pri ority has no effect on traffic exiting a node Priorities are configured on all logical interfaces that use a physical frame relay port The device processor in the node uses these priorities to help determine the order in which it will process protocols When configuring priorities be careful to consider the types of traffic being routed on other connections in the node CAUTICN Bandwidth Allocation Group assigns the LLC2 host to one of sixteen groups whose parameters regulate bandwidth usage See Configuring Bandwidth Allocation Groups on page 7 6 Routing Subscriber ID associates a Subscriber ID with the LLC2 host and partially defines the local sub scriber IDs all of which must begin with the Routing Subscriber ID Source MAC Address Mask is used to identify the SmartSwitch to inbound frames from a local LAN in an Origi nated LLC2 session Source address masks and host MAC addresses are placed ina forwarding list that i
200. being routed on other connections in the node CAUTICN 1st 2nd etc Path Configured includes or excludes the associated port as a routing path to the subscriber device At least one path must be specified Port identifies the port s that make up the routing path s Redirection Address 0 1 etc are up to five subscribers that will be called according to the specified redirection option SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Introduction Chapter 12 Configuring Async Ports The integral Async PAD function in the SmartSwitch 1800 allows asynchronous devices to connect to a frame relay or X 25 network Required Configuration To run a portas an integral async PAD in a SmartS witch 1800 make sure the fol lowing are properly configured Node parameters Chapter 4 This is general configuration that must be done no matter which protocols will be run in the node Async PAD Profiles page 12 2 which define the operation of the attached devices Login parameters page 12 7 which define passwords tobe used when logging into the SmartSwitch Loaded protocols Chapter 5 Async plus frame relay or X 25 Async port s page 12 8 plus frame relay Chapter 7 or X 25 Chapter 8 port s that will connect to the user device s and network Subscriber IDs page 12 15 which identifiy user devices to each other and the SmartS witch Abbreviated address es page 12 17 if desired This feature described laterin t
201. being used The SmartSwitch 1800 assumes this format is being used if the first digit dialed is the character configured for Long Dial Prefix 2 of Leading Digits to Delete is set to any value greater than 0 3 Auto Dial is set to Y Source of Extended Digits specifies if Extended Dial Digitsin Voice System Level Configuration is greater than 0 the source of the extended digits when the user of attached equipment dials a speed dial number When MAP is specified for Source of Extended Digits extended digits are taken from the Extended Dial String in the speed dial map table When USER is specified extended digits are taken from the user of attached equipment i e the user must dial a speed dial number and an extended digit string See the Store and Forward Dialing examples on page C 1 for more information about how this parameter is used SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 of Leading Digits to Delete specifies the number of leading dial digits that will be deleted before a dial string is forwarded This parameter is primarily used to delete leading digits that may be inserted by an attached PBX For example assume the user of attached equipment dials 1234 and the attached PBX inserts the number9 as a prefix to the dial string If of Leading Digits to Deleteis setto1 the SmartSwitch 1800 willremove the 9 before forwarding the dialed digits 1234 Forward Delay specifies only if Forwarded Output Digits is All or Ext
202. ber of periodic RIP messages broadcast from this node advertising the available routes from the routing table in the FRX FRM RIP Upd Broadcasts is the number of RIP messages broadcast from this node to update the network with any changes in routes RIP INV Net Rev is the number of RIP packets received with an invalid network address one that does not match the network address configured on the interface These packets will be discarded RIP Worse Rt Rcv is the number of RIP packets received containing routing updates that are less efficient worse than the routes already in the routing information table RIP Ukn G Query is the number of RIP General Queries received with an invalid packet size These packets will be discarded RIP Ukn N Query is the number of RIP Nearest Queries received with an invalid packet size These packets will be discarded RIP Ukn G Resp is the number of RIP General Responses received with an invalid packet size These packets will be discarded RIP Ukn N Resp is the number of RIP Nearest Responses received with an invalid packet size These packets will be discarded SAP Pkts Tx is the number of SAP packets transmitted on the interface SAP G Query Tx is the number of SAP General Queries transmitted on the interface SAP N Query Tx is the number of SAP Nearest Queries transmitted on the interface SAP G Resp Tx is the number of SAP General Responses respo
203. ble B B A from the Main Menu is performed Line Speed is the data trans mission rate in bits per second and the clock speed on a serial port when the port is a physical DCE e the attached I O cable is DCE If this port is a physical DTE specify the line speed that matches as closely as possible that of the device connected directly to the port Selecting this parameter for a CSU DSU port will toggle between the two valid values of 56K bps and 64K Clear Channel Selecting this parameter for any other physical interface type will display a list of ranges Press the letter corresponding toa range to display the valid speeds within that range All possible speeds are 75 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 14 4K 19 2K 24K 28 8K 38 4K 48K 56K 64K 72K 112K 128K 168K 192K 224K 256K 280K 320K 336K 384K 392K 448K 504K 512K 560K 576K 616K 640K 672K 704K 728K 768K 784K 832K 840K 896K 952K 960K 1 008M 1 024M 1 064M 1 088M 1 12M 1 152M 1 176M 1 216M 1 232M 1 28M 1 288M 1 344M 1 4M 1 408M 1 456M 1 472M 1 512M 1 536M 1 568M 1 6M 1 624M 1 664M 1 668M 1 728M 1 792M 1 856M 1 92M 1 984M 2 048M If an RS 232 DCE port is directly connected to the DTE via the standard Cabletron cable the maximum supported speed is 64K If longer cabling is MeL used the maximum speed is 19 2K The EIA standard for RS 232 addresses speeds up to 19 2 Kbps 8 7 8 8 Modulo is the number of values used in X 25 level 2 sequenced packets The actual f
204. bscriber ID can contain an asterisk as the final digit if so the asterisk will not be a universal wildcard but instead willinclude the range 000 511 or 00 99 if 13 digits precede the wildcard or 0 9 if 14 digits precede the wildcard 9 Maxdata will be overridden by Maxdata in the SNA PU parameters and Maxin will be overridden by Tw in the LLC2 parameters Configuring SNA 9 21 Host MAC Address is the MAC address of the host or workstation to which an SNA LLC2 device needs to connect If the host will be attached via an Ethernet interface in the SmartSwitch and the remote device is attached via a Token Ring or vice versa this MAC address will be bit swapped internally because of the differences in frame formatting between Ethernet and Token Ring Inthis case the address must be bit swapped again so the remote device will receive an address in the correct format Bit swapping is done by reversing the order of the bits digits within each byte pair of digits of the hexadecimal address while leaving the sequence of the bytes unchanged For example to bit swap the hex address 400010001088 1 Break the address into pairs of digits 40 00 10 00 10 88 2 Reverse the digits within each pair 104 00 01 00 01 88 3 Replace each digit as specified in the following table This reverses the binary bits of each digit For example 7 0111 binary becomes E 1110 binary Digit Convertto Digit Convertto Digit
205. by the routing table e Configure two ports as SNA HPADs one called HPADI for this list with Round Robin specified and one or more routing paths configured and the other port HPAD2 with any routing algorithm but only one routing path e The Port parameters for each port specified in the Routing Paths of each HPAD must contain a Remote Subscriber ID for any TPAD that might call either HPAD The Remote Subscriber ID in the HPAD s Port configuration is the Local Subscriber ID in the TPAD s Port configuration e Include HPAD2 in HPADI s routing path 9 16 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 e Configure only one routing path for each TPAD e In Port configuration disable Autocall foreach HPAD and enable it for each TPAD e In Port configuration configure HPAD1 s Local Subscriber ID as the only Remote Subscriber for each TPAD When the host polls the HPADs they will become operational The TPADs will autocall and the HPADs will connect to the TPADs by Round Robin Since all the TPADS are configured to connect to HPAD1 which has HPAD2 in its routing path they will be connected to HPADI then HPAD2 then HPAD1 and so on If HPADI fails all calls will be routed to HPAD2 until HPAD1 is again operational Configuring an LLC2 Virtual LAN ID Configuring SNA A virtual LAN ID is normally assigned by a system administrator The ID is used internally by the SmartSwitch 1800 to identify a virtual bridge that connects the LLC2
206. c tions to networks Each port must be configured in the software to specify the oper ating parameters of the hardware and the protocol that will run on the port The SmartSwitch 1800 supports physical ports as well as logical X 25 ports which run on a physical frame relay port Configuration of logical ports is described in Chapter 8 Locations of Physical Ports WAN 0 WAN 1 WAN2 WAN3 LAN Port Optional Console Port VOS d CSU DSU Port Figure 6 1 Physical Ports on Voice Models The physical interfaces on Voice models of SmartSwitch 1800 are as follows The CSU DSU port is RJ48C The LAN port provided in two interface types depends on the model Ethernet RJA8 UTP 10BaseT and DB 15F AUI 10B ase5 Token Ring RJ45 UTP and DB9F STP WAN ports 0 and 1 are RS 232 DTE male and or DCE female depending on the attached Cabletron cables If the optional CS U DS U port is used WAN port 1 is disabled WAN ports 2 and 3 are determined by the attached Cabletron cables RS 232 V 35 and or RS 449 all available as either DTE male or DCE female Voice ports 1 and 2 are RJ45 6 2 Ports 4 7 are on an optional expansion card WAN 4 WAN5 WAN6 WAN 7 a eee CITY vmm fe LAN Port WAN 0 WAN 1 WAN 2 WAN 3 CSU DSU Port Optional Console Port Figure 6 2 Physical Ports on Data Only Models The physical interfaces on data only models of SmartSwitch 1800 are as follows e The CSU DSU port is R
207. calculate the least cost path during routing If IPXWAN Enabled described later is Y Transport Time will be overridden by the value calculated by IPXWAN SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Serialization Enabled determines whether NetWare file server serialization security frames will be for warded on the interface These broadcast frames are used by Novell to hold infor mation regarding the licensing of the file server executables Disabling serialization allows filtering of these broadcasts to reduce WAN traffic and is not intended to interfere with copyright protection mechanisms Watchdog Spoofing Enabled determines whether this interface will be used by the local node to respond to keep alive messages on behalf of the client workstations Novell servers periodically issue these messages to all clients to determine whether each client is still available Descriptions of Parameters Specific to Frame Relay Interfaces IPXWAN Enabled determines whether Novell s IPXWAN protocol will be used on the interface IPXWAN specifies a method for IPX routers to communicate across W AN links The SmartSwitch 1800 implements IPXWAN running over RFC 1490 compliant frame relay and RFC1356 compliant X 25 Source Card Port DLCI identifies the location of this end of the frame relay IPX interface Note that there is no Source Card but the software code is shared with the Netlink FRX6000 which does have a card backup DLCIs as dete
208. card is installed Getting Started 2 3 Loggin into the Main Menu Configuration see Section II and management see Section IIT operations are accessed via a menu structure using a keyboard and video device Once the Smart Switch has been configured and is operational it does not need a keyboard and video device however they are necessary to get the unit up and running When running outside the menu operations a display will be similar to the following figure and will show the current status of all ports on the node This display is described in detail on page 2 4 Node Name node xyz Port Status Dis play Page 1 Type PPS Conn State Type PPS Conn State FRL 62 4 Operational SNA 12 Operational FRL 112 7 Operational SNA 6 Operational VCE 10 1 On Hook VCE 1 On Hook Ethernet Figure 2 3 Port Status Display Node Name at the upper right identifies the device under control of the key CE board and screen If the device is a directly connected SmartSwitch 1800 Nga L theID will be the Node Name configured in the Node Defaults file See Chapter 4 If an operator takes remote control see page 19 1 of another SmartSwitch 1800 or some other type of Cabletron frame relay access device Node Name will become the Remote Control ID configured in Node Defaults on the controlled device Any configuration or control operations will affect that device rather than the local one If the controlled device has a display screen the m
209. ce Initiated Call The attached device grounds the E lead signaling to the PBX thatit wants a connection The PBX supplies 48 Vdc to the M lead sig naling the response PBX Initiated Disconnect The PBX initiates disconnection by opening the M lead The M lead is pulled to 0 Vdc as biased by the attached device In response the attached device opens the E lead which is pulled to 48 Vdc as biased by the PBX Attached Device Initiated Disconnect The attached device initiates the disconnect by opening the E lead The E lead is pulled to 48 Vdc as biased by the PBX In response the PB X opens the M lead which is pulled to 0 Vdc as biased by the attached device Voice Configuration Reference Information C 17 E amp M Type Il Idle Condition The E leadis biased by the PBX at 48 Vdc The M lead is biased at 48 Vdc by the attached device SmartS witch 1800 PBX Initiated Call The PBX grounds the M lead signaling to the attached device that it wants a connection The attached device grounds the E lead signaling the response Attached Device Initiated Call The attached device grounds the E lead signaling to the PBX that it wants a connection The PBX grounds the M lead signaling the response PBX Initiated Disconnect The PBX initiates disconnection by opening the M lead The M lead is pulled to 48 Vdc as biased by the attached device In response the attached device opens the E lead which
210. cess any desti nation regardless of compatibility Also see the Store and Forward Dialing Variable Length Dialing and Wild Card Character examples below for more information about how users of voice and fax equipment can initiate calls Store and Forward Dialing The SmartSwitch 1800 supports store and forward dialing of speed dial numbers and extended dial digits The extended dial di gits can be defined in the map table and asso ciated with a speed dial number or entered by the user of attached equipment Store and forward dialing is enabled by setting the Extended Dial Digits parameter in Voice System Level Configuration page 13 3 to a non zero value Individual voice fax ports page 13 8 must be configured to identify how and what dial digits are for warded The following examples show system port and map table confi guration entries that store and forward extended digits from user input and from map table entries Map Table Store and Forward Digits In the following example a caller dials 59222 to connect to Port 4 on Node 1 The caller hears a dial tone then dials 77 to place a call to the user at extension 7777 on PBX B Port 4 Telephone with number Port 5 7777 internal to PBX Phone line connected Telephone with number to PBX number 59222 555 1212 outside line Figure C 1 Store and Forward Dialing Example 1 To handle the dialing inputs and outputs shown in this example configure the Smart Switch 1800
211. ch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Node Name node_xyz Bridge Filter Ap plications Bridge Port Number Filter Type Direction Permit Filte Application 1 Filte Application 2 Filter Application 3 Filte Application 4 Filter Application 5 Filte Application 6 Filter Application 7 Filter Application 8 Filter Application 9 Filter Application 10 lt A B c D E F G H I J K escocooocece cse Option Figure 16 3 Typical Bridge Filter Applications Record ALLAT ELIF I from Main Menu Up to 100 filters can be configured displayed over ten pages screens PgDn and PgUp can be used to move through the screens Atany screen pressing F3 will save the configuration for all ten screens and exit the display Pressing Esc at any screen will abandon the changes for all ten screens and exit When finished configuring filter definitions and applications you must perform an on line update to make the changes effective immediately Press J at the Filter Def initions and Applications Configuration Menu The changes will be sent to the software in the SmartSwitch 1800 Bridge Filter Application Parameters Table 16 7 Bridge Filter Applications Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Permit Y N N Filter n 0 65535 0 Permit Determines whether the traffic defined by the Filter n entries will be permitted or denied passage across the interface Filter n corresponds to the Filter IDs i
212. chased with the SmartSwitch 1800 press A then A then G from the Main Menu NOIL Table 5 1 Protocol Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Protocol None FR frame relay Async SDLC BSC 1 BSC B IP SNMP RIP LLC2 IPX NVSP Next available protocol NetView Service Point BRIDGE VOICE not already configured CE X 25 is always loaded and is not a configurable option This pre vents the possiblility of deleting X 25 whichis a necessary protocol NCXML for use by intemal SmartSwitch 1800 traffic Follow these guidelines when configuring protocols RIP is a valid choice only if IP is already specified If SNMP is configured IP must also be configured If LLC2 is configured BRIDGE must also be configured If NVSP is configured LLC2 and BRIDGE must also be configured ER With the exception of X 25 protocols must be configured in the Pro tocol file before they can be configured on ports NL After all desired changes have been made press F3 to save the changes then reboot the SmartSwitch 1800 as follows Rebooting will clear all connections on this device However the device must be rebooted to implement the change CAUTICN 1 Press F10 2 When asked Reboot the SmartSwitch 1800 press Y 3 Type restart Enter 5 2 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Chapter 6 Configuring Physical Ports SmartSwitch 1800 ports provide access connections to devices and routing conne
213. cribed in Appendix A NON Rebooting the Remote Node Before rebooting notify all users of this node since all connec tions on all ports will be cleared CAUITICN Press period to reboot the node When asked Remote reboot the node press Y Exiting Remote Control Press comma to exit remote control When asked Stop remote control press Y Node Namez NN where NN is theNode Name configured in Node Defaults will be displayed in the upper right hand comer at the remote node meaning that the remote node is now under local control control at its own screen If the controlled node detects that the remote control line failed during a remote control session remote control will be terminated and the remote node s local Main Menu will be displayed on its screen Ondine Operations 19 3 Transferring Files and Updating Software Remote File Transfer This operation copies a file from one Cabletron frame relay access device Smart Switch 1800 FRM FR X4000 FRX6000 to another er This operation requires either physical X 25 ports or logical X 25 on physical frame relay ports on each device NOCH Before a file transfer is performed to or from this node make sure a File i Transfer IDis specified in Node Defaults NON L Press B at the On Line Node Operations Menu or B A B from the Main Menu When prompted enter e File Transfer ID and File Transfer Pwd password of the remote node to which
214. criber is a subscriber ID associated with the source IP interface port The port is the first Routing Path configured in the SVC Subscriber record Destination Subscriber is a subscriberID associated with the destination IP interface port The port is the first Routing Path configured in the SVC Subscriber record SVC Retry Timer is the frequency with which calls will be placed to try to establish an X 25 connection SVC Idle Timer is a period that IP remains active with no traffic before the X 25 connection is cleared Max VCs to Establish is the number of virtual circuits over which IP traffic will be transmitted in parallel SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 PVC Connection simply states whether this interface is a PVC Descriptions of Parameters Specific to LAN Interfaces Source IP Address is the IP address of the end to end sender The valid range of values guarantees that you cannot configure all Os or all1s fora network ID node ID or subnet ID See page 14 1 Network Mask is used during routing to determine the portion of the address associated with the network and subnetwork if any Allbits associated with the network subnet should beset to 1 and must be contiguous Broadcast Address 1s used to send to all LAN hosts on the network Proxy ARP Enabled Determines whether Proxy ARP will be supported on the Ethemet interface Proxy ARP allows the SmartSwitch to respond to ARP requests on one subnet
215. criber device At least one path must be specified Port identifies the port s that make up the routing path s Redirection Address 0 1 etc are up to five subscribers that will be called according to the specified redirection option Configuring BSC Interactive Devices 10 10 Port records contain the information that identifies ports configured for BSC Inter active operation You must also define the devices connected to those ports To display a list of configured devices press A at the BSC Devices Configuration Menu or A C F A from the Main Menu To configure a device press B at the BSC Devices Configuration Menu When prompted enter e RLP Press Enter accepting the default of 0 e BSC Port 0 3 Defaultis 0 e Control Unit 0 31 See Table 10 4 e Device Unit 0 31 See Table 10 4 Up to 32 Device Units can be configured for each Control Unit e Any other requested information noting the values in Table 10 5 on page 10 12 Press Enter at a prompt to specify the default value SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 A B Cc D E F BSC Interactive Device Parameters RLP Port Con trol Unit Device Unit Connection ID Single User Virtual Circuit Transparent Text Supported Printer N Dis ply Y Prntr Disable Status Response Browse all d evice Parameters 0 Normal Status Option Figure 10 4 BSC Interactive Devices Screen ALIC FLIB from
216. cut The number must identify its associated device as follows Note that the valid values for the voice concentrator vary depending on the device type The numbers below relate to ACT Networks SDM network access devices SmartS witch1800 Digits 1 4 Voice Node Number configured in Voice System Level Parameters 0001 9999 DigitS 0 or 1 This digit is irrelevant on the SmartS witch 1800 so either value can be used Digit6 Channel number 4 or 5 which identifies the Voice port See Figure 13 4 SDM Digits 1 2 Switch number 01 61 Digits 3 4 Port number 00 15 Digit5 Slot number 1 8 if FP or DX 1 4 if JFP Digit6 Channel number 0 5 if DVC Arbitrary typical ly 1 6 if FP or JFP Extended Dial String is an extended set of digits that will be forwarded with the call if Source of Extended Digits in the Voice Port record is set to MAP If Source of Extended Digits is set to USER any extended digits must be entered by the operator at the initiating device Calls placed to a speed dial number will go to the device e g PBX whose full number is associated with that speed dial number in the Map table If extended dial digits are included in the table or the call the call will automatically be forwarded through the remote device to the telephone number that matches the extended digits Configuring Voice 13 7 Configuring Voice Ports To configure a Voice port press D at the Voice Configuration Menu or A C D
217. d Status lists the possible operational states that each port can be in See State under Displaying Port Status on page 20 2 of Ports is the total number of physical and logical ports in the node with the associated status Displaying Port Status 20 2 Press B at the Status Displays Menu to display the status of all serial lines on this node LAN port status is not displayed Node N ame node xyz Port Status Display Page 1 Type PPS Conn State Type PPS Conn State FRL 62 4 Operational SNA 12 Operational FRL 112 7 Operational SNA 6 Operational VCE 10 1 On_Hook 5 VCE 1 On Hook Ethernet F1 Login Figure 20 2 Port Status Display C B from Main Menu Information in this Display P is the port number Type is the port type FRL Frame relay X25 X 25 SNA SNA BSI BSC Interactive BSI BSC Batch ASY Async PAD VCE Voice LOG Logical Eth Ethernet PPS is packets per second passing through the port Conn is the number of virtual connections currently in use State for non Voice ports Linkup The necessary level 1 modem signals are present and the level 2 link is up For frame relay PVCs this state means that LMI is running Restarting Level 2 is up and level 3 is starting its initial handshake sequence Operational The line is up and ready to establish a connection or transfer data On a frame relay logical DTE port with link layer management con f
218. d time Configure Node Defaults Chapter 4 specifies IDs and passwords used for remote control file transfer and alarm routing and reporting operations Configure SNMP Parameters Chapter 17 identifies the SNMP manager defines communities and specifies SNMP trap routing A Configure System Defaults B Configure Community Table C Configure Trap Routing D Configure Model Number not used since SNMP recognizes only one model for the Smart Switch 1800 Configure IP LLC2 BRIDGEAPX Default Parameters A Configure IP Node Defaults Chapter 14 specifies whether the SmartSwitch 1800 will act as an IP gateway and which version of RIP will be used B Configure Bridge LLC 2 Node Defaults Chapter 9 Chapter 16 specifies parameters that will be used internally by the node to identify a virtual bridge that will connectthe LLC2 function to LAN interfaces and frame relay PVCs C Review SNA LLC2 Hosts Chapter 9 displays any LLC2 hosts see below that have been configured on the SmartS witch 1800 D Configure SNA LLC2 Hosts Chapter 9 defines LLC2 hosts on the SmartSwitch 1800 includes session type originated or terminated necessary addresses timers E Configure IPX Node Defaults Chapter 15 defines operation of the SmartSwitch 1800 when used as an interface to a Novell NetWare network F Configure Filter Definitions and Applications A Review IPX Filter Definitions Chapter 15 displays any IPX f
219. d Y N Secondary Address Parameters 1 15 next in sequence Sec IP Addr 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 none NetMask 255 0 0 0 255 255 255 254 see note Bcast Addr 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 see note RMetric 0 255 0 RIP Support Enabled Rcv Only Disabled Enabled 1 The default value of the network mask will be configured automatically to reflect the appropriate address class after an IP address is specified Network Mask is determined by Source IP Address and NetMask is determined by Sec IP Addr If the interface is configured as unnumbered and therefore no Source IP Address is configured the default value of Network Maskwill be taken from the numbered interface that is assigned If an IP address Source IP Address Sec IP Addr is specified changed the network mask will automatically change to default values appropriate for the new address For this CAUICN reason configure the IP address first then the mask 2 The default value of the broadcast address will be configured automatically after an IP address or a network mask is specified The value will be the dotted decimal notation result of ANDing the binary versions of the IP address and the network mask then filling in the remaining bits with 1s Broadcast Address is associated with Source IP Address and Network Mask while Bcast Addr is associated with Sec IP Addr and NetMask If the SourcelP Address Sec IP Addr or Network Mask Netmask is specified changed the
220. d any express or implied warranties including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed In no event shall the regents or contributors be liable for any direct indirect incidental special exemplary or consequential damages including but not limited to pro curement of substitute goods or services loss of use data or profits or business interruption however caused and on any theory of liability whether in contract strict liability or tort including negligence or otherwise arising in any way out of the use of this software even if advised of the possibility of such damage Gateway Daemon GateD software Release 3 5 5 is maintained and developed by Cornell University andits collaborators The version of GateD used with this Cabletron product has been modified Netlinkis a trademark of Cabletron Systems Inc All other product designations are the property of their respective owners Statements of Compliance FCC Statement for Part 68 The Federal Communications Commission FCC has established rules that permit this device to be directly connected to the telephone network Standardized jacks are use for these connections This equipment should not be used on party lines or coin operated lines If this device is malfunctioning it may also cause harm to the phone network this device should be dis connected until thesource of the problemcan be determined
221. d on the model of SmartSwitch 1 800 see port locations on page 6 1 Make sure the port is not configured in the Port record for backup use only See page 7 18 5 Make sure the DLCI is not part of aframe relay DLCI backup group or intra nodal frame relay PVC both described in Chapter 7 15 10 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 X 25 Interface Parameters Configuring IPX Table 15 8 IPX X 25 Interface Parameters Parameter Valid Values Blocked Port Flag Y N Interface Type X 25 Frame Type TYPE II Maximum Transmission Unit frame size 31 4096 bytes 1 fffffffe Priority 0 9 3 x lt o gt Q En 8 o continued Default Value N Depends on inter face number TYPE Il 4096 00000000 a Bandwidth Allocation Group 1 16 Port Diagnostics Enabled Y N Y N w o o m gt D z amp o ziz a a o o mie o 3 a 0 255 Periodic RIP Enabled Y N z Periodic RIP Timer seconds 1 65535 2 Periodic SAP Enabled Y N Periodic SAP Timer seconds 1 65535 2 RIP Enabled Y N RIP Age Timer seconds 0 65535 23 z RIP Maximum Size bytes SAP Enabled Y N SAP Age Timer seconds 0 65535 23 1 255 Serialization Enabled Y N Watchdog Spoofing Enabled Y N IPXWAN Enabled Y N L valid subscriber address 4 Destination Subscriber valid subscriber address 4 i seconds 5 60 0 5 Max VCs to Establish 1 8 PVC Connection z o E eo z none n
222. d to the interface 3 Perform an on line update of the definitions and applications described under Configuring IPX Filter Applications on page 15 8 Configuring IPX Filter Definitions To review existing filter definitions press A at the Filter Definitions and Applica tions Configuration Menu or A A E F A from the Main Menu To configure a filter definition press B at the Filter Definitions and Applications Configuration Menu When prompted enter e Filter category 0 RIP 1 SAP 2 Packet 3 RIP Router The default is 0 e Filter ID 1 65535 The default is 1 This is simply a unique identifier e Any other requested information noting the values in Table 15 2 through Table 15 5 Press Enter at a prompt to accept a default value The display will depend on the filter category The following figure shows an example of a SAP filter record Configuring IP X 15 3 154 IPX Filter Definitions Filter Category 1 SAP Filter ID 1 xo Filter Name filter zxy Service Type Value 0004 Service Type Mask 000f Server Name server 123 Network Address V alue ff00ac00 Network Ad dress Mask ffff0000 Node Address V alue 10ac45000001 Node Address Mask ffffff000000 Socket Add ress Value 4000 Socket Add ress Mask f000 A B Cc D E F G H I J Hi E 5 Figure 15 2 IPX SAP Filter Record A A E F B from Main Menu How Filter Masks Work Each IPX filter parameter except Filter N
223. d twisted pair and the MAC medium access control layer as Token Ring Address is a coded representation of the destination of a message Alarm see Event ACELP Stands for Algebraic Code Excited Linear Predictive which is a type of voice com pression algorithm that can be configured for SmartSwitch 1800 Voice ports ARP stands for Address Resolution Protocol which dynamically maps network addresses to MAC addresses ASCII stands for American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCII terminal is a VT100 or compatible video display terminal Async stands for asynchronous Asynchronous describes terminals printers and other devices that transmit data in a discontinuous character stream it also describes the protocol used to interconnect such devices ATC Stands for Adaptive Sub band Transform Coding which is a type of voice com pression algorithm that can be configured for SmartSwitch 1800 Voice ports Auxiliary Console is an async terminal connected to the Console port in a SmartSwitch 1800 and acting as an operator console glo 2 Async terminal is a VT 100 or compatible video display terminal Auto baud is the default line speed code throughput class for async PAD ports When aPAD places a call through a port set to Autobaud the port s internal clocks are set to match the speed of the PAD Bandwidth is the difference between the lowest and highest frequencies ofa transmission channel usually e
224. ddress User Data Protocol ID Facilities Transhtion Temphte Template ID CalledA ddress User Data Protocol ID Facilities Translated Packet CalledA ddress User Data Protocol ID Facilities 1234567 Calling A ddress 3333333 01000000 User Data 55555 1234C U L8401X7 Calling A ddress P P User Data P P 10010B74840133333330000100000035353535 8401 Calling A ddress 3333333 01000000 User Data 55555 Strike any key tocontinue Figure 6 11 Address Translation Test Screen A C C C from Main Menu Node Name n odexyz 8 31 Configuring X 25 to X 25 PVCs A SmartSwitch 1800 PVC isa permanent connection between two physical ports in anode This allows communication between the attached devices as soon as they are powered up without having to first make a call to establish a connection X 25 PVC support includes X 25 to X 25 and async to X 25 described in Chapter 12 To display a list of current PVCs of all types press A at the PVC Configuration Menu or A D E A from the Main Menu To add orchange an PVC press B at the PVC Configuration Menu When prompted enter a 1 4 digit Connection ID which is simply a number unique to this connection that identifies the PVC Node Name nod exyz PVC Maintenance Connection ID1 A PVC Type X 25to X25 B Connection Priority 0 Connection Between X 25 Port C Subscriber Name D Logical Channd RLP F Port G Packet Siz H Window Size a
225. ddress and an interface for the physical con nection Terminated LLC Host records always make the calls Originated LLC Host records always expectto receive calls Only one Originated and one Terminated LLC Host recordcan be configured for each MAC address SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 RFC 1490 Format An RFC1490 format used for SNA traffic is configured in the frame relay LLC2 Interface Bridge Port record The options in order of lowest overhead to highest overhead are e Native LLC2 also known as BNN or Boundary Network Node When this format is used no MAC addresses are transmitted across the frame relay link e 802 5 SRB source route bridge also known as BAN or Boundary Access Node SmartSwitch 1800 devices support B AN type 1 This format is gen erally used for 3174 gateways and AS 400s because they need to see a MAC address e 802 3 TB transparent bridge used when talking to routers that cannot do BAN or BNN Subscriber IDs Subscriber IDs are only used locally within each SmartSwitch 1800 to link records e g SDLC PU record to LLC host record unless the device is running X 25 SDLC LLC2 primary the S martSwitch 1800 would be SDLC secondary to the FEP or logical ports i e QLLC in which case the subscriber IDs correlate to the static routes defined in the subscriber routing tables Netview Service Point NVSP is supported only via LLC2 connections The local and remote subscriber addr
226. ddress field of a Call Request packets coming into this SmartSwitch File Transfer Pwd is a password used in conjunction with the File Transfer ID Both the File Transfer ID and the File Transfer Pwd must match what is expected or the SmartS witch will not accept a request for file transfer Collecting Node ID is definedona collecting node described later foruse by other Cabletron frame relay access devices that send their alarms to that collecting node This same ID must be configured on each non collecting node as the Primary Alarm Output ID The Collecting Node ID has no function on non collecting nodes Collecting Node Pwd is a password that will be checked to verify that the Primary Alarm Output ID is being used for alarms Since the same ID can be specified for several functions the software processes can use the passwords to identify the different functions Any non alarm passwords must be different than any alarm passwords Unless you are certain you are not duplicating a password leave all passwords at the default settings CAUTION Primary Alarm Output ID specifies where alarms will be sent On a device configured as a collecting node the ID is usually associated with an async PAD port connected to a printer or server On non collecting nodes the ID is usually the Primary Alarm Output IDof a collecting node The alarm system is designed for guaranteed delivery to the primary output device and output to the secondary de
227. de defined by Node Number Hops is the number of routers in a packet s path to the destination network Transport Time is the time in 55 millisecond units that it will normally take a packet to reach the des tination network if this route is used Configuring IPX 1517 Router Is the hex value of the node address of the router that will forward a packet when this route is used If Novell s IPXW AN protocol is used on the interface as configured in the IPX Interface file described earlier in this chapter this field will be ignored Interface is the IPX network number assigned to the interface used to send packets that are using this route IPX SAP Static Route Parameters Table 15 11 IPX SAP Static Route Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Service Type 0 65535 0 Server Name 1 48 characters asterisk wildcard Server Network Address 1 fffffffe 4 bytes 0000000 1 Server Node Address 1 fffffffffffe 6 bytes 000000000001 Server Socket Number O ffff 0000 Intervening Networks 1 65535 1 Router 1 fffffffffffe 6 bytes 000000000001 Interface 0 65535 0 Service Type is a SAP Service Type code Some common types are 0003 print queue 0004 file server 0005 job server 0007 print server 0009 archive server 0024 remote bridge server Server Name identifies a specific server in the IPX internetwork Server Network Address is an IPX network number assigned to the network containing the s
228. der Bridge Hello Time Bridge Forward Delay is the time the bridge will wait after entering Listening state before entering Learning state or after entering Learning state before entering Forwarding state This delay is intended to assure that the tree topology is stable before itis put into use The states are described under Bridge Port Status on page 20 22 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Configuring Bridging Bridge Aging Timer determines how long leamed addresses will be saved in the forwarding table before they are deleted Bridge Priority will become the first two octets of the Bridge ID used to determine which bridge will be Root Since the lowest Bridge ID becomes Root a lower Bridge Priority increases the possibility of becoming Root Max Size Bridge Forwarding Table determines the maximum number of entries in the bridge forwarding table The actual number may be limited by available memory IP Bridging Enabled determines whether IP traffic can be bridged If IP bridging is not enabled IP traffic assuming IPis configured and loaded in the node will be routed IPX Bridging Enabled determines whether IPX traffic can be transmitted over the bridge If IPX bridging is not enabled IPX traffic assuming IPX is configured and loaded in the node will be routed SRB ID is the Source Route Bridge ID of the bridge If the outgoing port is configured as Source Route it is necessary for the node to generat
229. device that acts as a transfer point for data between endpoints of a physical logical connection SmartSwitch 1800s and other Cabletron frame relay access devices are often referred to as nodes OPX stands for Off Premise Extension When configured for this option a voice FAX module operates in loop start mode and provides loop current to the attached device Packet is a group of data and control signals transmitted as a composite whole across a packet switching network Packet Switching is the breaking up of data intosmaller pieces and the trans mission of these pieces over a network via X25 glo 7 glo 8 PAD stands for packet assembler disassembler which allows a non X 25 device to access a SmartSwitch 1800 by converting its protocol to the X 25 packet mode protocol and vice versa SmartS witch 1800 supports integral async SNA and BSC PADs PBX stands for Private Branch Exchange and refers to a small private telephone switch PDN stands for public data network which is a network operated by common carriers or telecommunications administrations for the purpose of providing data transmission capabilities to the public Physical DCE DTE see DCE and DTE Port is the entry or exit point for node traffic Protocol is an agreement on format meaning and relative timing of information exchanged between two communications devices PU stands for physical unit which is an IBM referenced to
230. dging Enabled Default Ethernet Frame Type Valid Values n a accept the default Y N 1 10 seconds 6 40 seconds 4 30 seconds 10 10000000 seconds 0 65535 128 6 5535 Y N Y N 0 f hex Type Il 802 3 Default Value 15 300 32768 32768 N 1 To assure correct operation of the spanning tree algorithm follow these rules a Bridge Max Age must be less than or equal to twice the value of Bridge Forward Delay minus 1 second b Bridge Max Age must be greater than or equal to twice the value of Bridge Hello Time plus 1 second 2 This parameter is irrelevant on aa Token Ring SmartSwitch 1800 Bridge Enabled enables bridging in the node implementing the spanning tree algorithm state described under Bridge Port Status on page 20 22 No BPDUs see NutTE Bridge Hello Timebelow will flow No data will be bridged except termi nated LLC2 traffic Ze If Bridging is disabled all Bridge ports on the node will go into Forwarding Bridge Hello Time is the frequency with which all bridges on the network will send Hello messages also called BPDUs or Bridge Protocol Data Units to adjacent bridges the next ones in all bridge paths when the local bridge is Root Note that a root bridge is the one with the lowest ID which contains its Bridge Priority and MAC address on the network Bridge Max Age determines how long Hello messages will remain valid when the local bridge is root described un
231. dified are listed below If two words are shown either can be used The parameters are listed in and described following Table 9 1 Corresponding Parameter Keyword s in SmartS witch 1800 Valid Values NODATA or PAUSE No Data Poll Period 0 125 ms NORESP or ACTIVETO No Resp Poll Period 40 9999 ms GENCLCK or CLOCKINGGenerate Clock Y N RCVCLOCK Rev Clock TT from DTE Y N ISTATUS Blocked Port Flag Y N NRZI NRZ Y N SPEED Line Speed see page 9 8 D4 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 NetView Management Keywords when the PU is being modified are listed below The parameters are listed in and described following Table 9 2 Keyword LOCALSUB REMOTESUB ATCL RTYTM RTYCT ADDR ISTATUS LOCALSAP LOCALMAC IDBLK IDNUM LANTI LANT1 LANT2 LANN2 LANN3 LANTW BAG MAXDATA Corresponding Parameter in SmartSwitch 1800 Local Subscriber ID Remote Subscriber ID Autocall Autocall Retry Time Autocall Retry Count Station Address Istatus Local SAP Address Local MAC Address IDBLK IDNUM Ti T1 T2 N2 N3 Tw Bandwidth Allocation Group Maxdata Command F NET CONFIG COMMIT Option COMMIT will update the SmartSwitch 1800 database value s with all changes made since the last COMMIT on line update of the record or node IPL Valid Values 0 15 characters 0 15 characters Y N 15 255 sec 0 255 0 FF Active Inactive 0 FC O F FF FF FFF FFFF 0 F FF 0 FFFFF 1 50 sec 0 250 ms 100 5
232. digits 4 Source MAC Address Mask up to 8 hex digits 5 On Line Temporary Changes Y N Connections Parameters 04 fe hex in multiples of 4 04 Type LLC2 7 LLC2 Local Subscriber ID up to 15 digits 8 none Remote Subscriber ID up to 15 digits none IDBLK 000 fff 000 IDNUM 00000 fffff 00000 Maxdata 265 521 1033 1289 1545 2057 65 Maxin 1 127 1 1 Except ffffffffffff Must be in 802 5 Token Ring format which may require bit swapping when entering the address See the explanation of Host MAC Address 2 Ahostaddress can be configured for one Originated and one Terminated session but no more than one each 3 Mustbe less than the value for T1 to ensure that the remote link station will receive the delayed acknowledgment before T1 expires 4 An asterisk wildcard can be used as a final digit The wildcard is not valid If fewer than 15 digits are entered an asterisk must be the final character 5 lstdigit mustbe 4 5 6 or7 and an asterisk wildcard can be used as a final digit If fewer than 8 actual digits notincluding an asterisk are specified zeros will be added to total 8 actual digits This value must not conflict with the Locally Administered MAC Address described on page 6 5 6 Displayedonly if Session Typeis Terminated 7 Although selecting this item toggles between SNA and LLC2 Typemust be LLC2 8 Each Local Subscriber ID must begin with all of the actual Routing Subscriber ID A Local or Remote Su
233. ding field in each Bridged packet as determined by Bridge Filter Applications This result will be compared to the AND result of the configured value and mask If the two results match the filter will be applied This process allows a number of packet field values to match the AND result of the mask and value for example Packet field 1233 Mask F000 Packet field 1237 Mask F000 Binary value 0001001000110011 Value 0001001000110111 Mask 1111000000000000 Mask 1111000000000000 AND Result 0001000000000000 AND Result 0001000000000000 Configuring Bridging 16 7 Bridge Filter Definition Parameters Table 16 2 through Table 16 6 list the various filter parameters Explanations of some parameters follow the tables Explanations of individual masks are not included below because they were described in general under How Filter Masks Work on page 16 7 Table 16 2 Bridge Generic Filter Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Filter Name 1 31 characters none Sq 116 1 Offset 0 254 octets 0 Value O ff hex 0 Mask O ff hex 0 Del Allows you to delete the specific entry defined by the sequence number Filter Name helps the user identify the filter The name is not used by the software Sq is a Sequence number to identify the entry Offset is the number of octets into the frame to the octet that will be checked against the Value and Mask Value is used in conjunction with the Mask as described under
234. does not allow configuring NIL X25 This prevents the possiblility of deleting X 25 which is a nec essary protocol for use by intemal SmartSwitch 1800 traffic e To display a table of memory usage press C This information in conjuction with information in the release notes can help in planning the number of pro tocols to run e To add or remove a protocol press B This will display a screen similar to Figure 5 1 Node Name nodexyz RLP Configuration RLP 1 Status Installed Memory Configuration 8 Meg RLP Type RLP Line Interface Card 1 UNIVERSAL Line Interface Card 2 VOICE Configured Protocol 1 FR gt Protocol 2 IP Protocol 3 VOI CE Protocol 4 SDLC Protocol 5 BSCI Protocol 6 None Protocol 7 None Protocol 8 None Protocol 9 None Option Figure 5 1 Protocol Configuration M enu A BL B from Main Menu E The parameters RLP Status RLP Type and Line Interface Card 1 2 are irrel A evant and are displayed only because some of the SmartSwitch 1800 MC L software code is shared with the FRX6000 which uses the information To add change or remove unload a protocol aremoved protocol will remain available for re loading press the letter corresponding to the protocol number The Configured column will display the next available protocol among those in the model of SmartSwitch 1800 that was purchased All possible protocols are listed in Table 5 1 Can To display a list of all protocols pur
235. dpoints assuming there are multiple possible paths Each Bridge is identified by a Bridge ID which is made up of atwo octet Bridge Pri ority configured in Bridge Node Defaults followed by a unique 48 bit ID which is created automatically by the software Bridging is supported on Ethernet Token Ring and frame relay interfaces The interfaces used for Bridging in the SmartS witch 1800 are the same as CS those used for LLC2 When referring to Bridging however these inter ASTE faces will becalled Bridge ports since the IEEE 802 1d standard uses the term port to identify a connection to a bridge Avoid configuring parallel Bridge LLC2 frame relay links between two FRMS if one path is in native LLC2 format and the other in some other format Since native LLC2 interfaces do not CAUIICN support the spanning tree protocol a loop can be created causing a node failure Required Configuration To configure a Bridge in a SmartSwitch 1800 make sure the following are properly configured e Node parameters Chapter 4 This is general configuration that must be done no matter which protocols will be run in the node e Loaded protocols Chapter 5 Bridging and frame relay e LAN port page 6 5 that will connect to a Local Area Network e Framerelay Chapter 7 port s that will connect to a network and or framerelay PVC e Bridge parameters described later in this chapter 162 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01
236. e IP LLC2 BRIDGE IP X Default Parameters Menu or A A E C from the Main Menu This will list the hosts MAC addresses and identify each LLC2 session as Originated or Terminated In an Originated session the host initiates LLC2 sessions in a Terminated session the host accepts sessions destined for the address Ee A host to terminal connection is always initiated by the terminal NTL To configure a host press D at the Configure IP LLC2 BRIDGE IPX Default Param eters Menu When prompted enter e Host Number 0 128 Defaultis 0 e Any other requested information if this is anew host noting Table 9 4 on page 9 21 The resulting display will depend on the configured session type Figure 9 6 Originated Figure 9 7 Terminated 9 18 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Node Name nodexyz SNA LLC2 Originated Session Configuration Screen 1 of 2 HostNumber 1 Host MAC Address Session Type T1 100 msec T2 msec Ti N3 Tw N2 Priority Bandwidth Allocation Group Routing Subscriber ID Source MAC Address Mask Connections Screen 2 Option 0C005A 123402 Originated 10 100 30 al 1 8 0 2 1121000000 40000470 Figure 9 6 LLC2 Originated Host Configuration Screen A A E D from Main Menu CS Pressing M will display a screen similar to Figure 9 8 NOL Node Name nodexyz SNA LLC2 Temninated Session Configuration Screen 1 of 2 Host Number 1 Host MA CA ddr
237. e If the port is configured for autobaud only press Enter Data bits and parity settings must match throughout an async connection CAUTICN 2 Ifthe port is configured in the Port record to not require login go to step 3 If login is required enter when prompted the login password defined in the Async PAD Login record described on page 12 7 3 The Async PAD banner described on page A 5 will be displayed at the top of the terminal screen The terminal is now in Command mode described in the next paragraph Command and Data Transfer Modes The async terminal has two modes of operation Local operations at the async terminal are performed in Command mode In Data Transfer mode the PAD interprets all input from the terminal as data and transmits it to the remote device If this is aP VC connection you can enter Data Transfer mode from Command mode by entering the PAD recall character specified in the Async PAD profile If this is an SVC connection you must send a Call Request packet to enter Data Transfer mode See Placing a Call froman Async Terminal on page A 2 Either way once in Data Transfer mode you can toggle back and forth between the two modes by entering the PAD recall character Async Terminal Commands The following commands can be entered in Command mode Fora list of commands type help Enter STAT Get connection status CLR Clear Connection PAR n1 n2 n3 Reads value of 1 or
238. e M signal e The remote unit uses the OPX option and detects an off hook condition on its two wire loop start circuit e The remote unit uses the SLT option and detects a ring signal on its two wire loop start circuit SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Follow this step by step check list when connecting the SmartSwitch 1800 inan E amp M application 1 Determine the required E amp M signaling convention used by the PB X tie line port Type L II IL IV or V 2 Set Switch 20n the front of the SmartSwitch see Figure 13 60n page 13 11 for the proper signaling type See Table 13 5 on page 13 12 3 Connect the voice pair s and signaling wires as outlined under E amp M Wiring on page C 13 4 Finally configure each S martSwitch 1800 port parameter to reflect the hardware configuration AC15 Connections AC15 is a four wire signaling system two wire trans mit two wire receive used by PB Xs to communicate with each other and other PB X like communications equipment SDM FP 2 Wire Xmit vee ee 2 Wire Rev Figure C ACI5 Example AC15 is implemented as a single tone 2280 hertz system that operates in three states 1 Continuous Tone On 2 Pulsed Tone or 3 Continuous Tone Off Voice Configuration Reference Information C 11 PTT Telco Connectors and Cabling 3 B a Figure C 7 RJ45 Connector Pins The RJ45 connector on a SmartSwitch 1800 is mainly used for E amp M operation An RJ45 cable i
239. e specifies whether or not the PVC will be used to transport Voice packets If set to Voice the PVC will transport only the Voice packets from the incoming traffic Data packets will be routed as though there was no PVC configured on the DLCI Primary Secondary Name identifies each end of the connection to the console operator The software does not use this information Primary Secondary DLCI is a logical connection identifier for each end of the PVC The DLCIS are defined here If rate control CIR Bc Be will be enforced be sure to configure those parameters in the frame relay Port record See NCXML page 7 18 Primary Secondary Port is the port at each end of the internal connection FRM Configuring Frame Relay 7 21 Configuring Frame Relay Backup Groups A Frame Relay Backup Group is one or more DLCIs that can act as a backup for one or more primary DLCIs If a node detects a failure in a primary DLCI connection the software will search the backup group configured for the primary DLCI and will selectthe first available DLCI in that group as a backup The backup will become operational and will remain in that state until the primary becomes active again If the backup fails while in use the software will check the status of the primary then if necessary search the primary s backup group for another backup Any sessions in progress when a primary DLCI goes down will not be _ transferred directly to the backup DLCI but w
240. e 2 the forwarded dial string extended digits only as specified is output to PBX B and the specified phone rings The comma in the extended dial string for speed dial number 12 is also 1 2 second since it uses the same value as the forward delay for the pause User Dialed Store and Forward Digits In the following example a call is initiated from a phone on PB X A through an inter mediate PBX B to a phone attached to a remote PBX C at extension 777 Voice Port 4 Voice Port 5 Voice Port 4 P Frame Relay Phone line 59111 Telephone Voice Port 5 pe E Telephone 7777 Figure C 2 Store and Forward Dialing Example 2 To handle the dialing inputs and outputs shown in this example configure the Smart Switch 1800 nodes as follows Node 1 e System Level Parameters Voice Node Number 1 Speed Map Dial Digits 2 User Dialed Extended Dial Digits 5 Voice Configuration Reference Information C 3 e Speed Dial Map Table Speed Dial Abbreviated Digits 25 Long Dial Digit Mapping 000215 2 node number 5 Voice port number Extended Dial String 7777 e Voice Port 4 Configuration Node 2 Source of Extended Digits USER ofLeading Digits to Delete 0 Forward Delay 4 25 sec intervals Forwarded Digit Type DTMF Forwarded Output Digits Ext e System Level Parameters Voice Node Number 2 User Dialed Extended Dial Digits 5 e Voice Port 5 Configuration
241. e Full Message isY the remote device must be configured to generate M bit packets 4 The Default Calling Address is relevant only if Disable X 121 User Calls is N 5 The Called Address is relevant only if Autocallis Y Port Type specifies the protocol the port will support Selecting this parameter will display a list of all serial protocols loaded in the device Physical Port Interface must be configured as follows For reference port locations are shown on page 6 1 e Port is always RS 232 e Port 1 is RS 232 or DSU depending on whether the optional CSU DSU card is installed e Ports 2 and 3 are determined by the attached cables RS 232 V 35 or RS 449 Blocked Port Flag will cause the port to be enabled N or disabled Y at node IPL The port will remain in that state until this parameter is changed or an on line enable B B C from the Main Menu or disable B B A from the Main Menu is performed X 3 Line Speed isthe data transmission rate in bits per second Specify the line speed that matches as closely as possible the configuration of the device connected to the port Selecting this item displays a list of valid line speeds To specify a speed press the letter corresponding to the speeds Valid speeds are 50 75 75 1200 100 110 134 5 150 200 300 600 1200 1840 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 57 6K Autobaud Selecting Autobaud causes the line speed to be read from the first trans mission from the async dev
242. e Idle Timer to a period longer than the Periodic Status Timer to give the system a chance to update itself The timer is usually set to 0 on a collecting node The Line Idle Timeris also affected by the value of Max Congestion described on page 4 5 Configuring Node Defaults 4 5 Alarm Autocall Timer specifies the frequency with which the SmartSwitch will attempt to establish an alarm connection with its Primary Alarm Output ID during initial call setup or after the pre vious alarm connection is cleared Alarm Max Retries is the number of times the SmartSwitch will attempt to establish an alarm connection with its Primary Alarm Output ID during initial call setup or after the previous alarm connection is cleared If the value specified is greater than 0 the Alarm Autocall Timer will be used untilthe maximum retry value is reached If the connection is still not established a retry will be made once every hour NetView Parameters Table 4 2 NetView Parameters Local Subscriber ID Remote Subscriber ID Maximum Bytes per Frame Local SAP Address Local MAC Address IDBLK IDNUM T1 2 N3 w N2 Priority Bandwidth Allocation Group Valid Values up to 8 characters 0 15 characters 0 15 characters 25 4105 0 fc hex O Iffifffffiff O fff O fffff 0 250 x 100 msec 100 5000 msec 1 50 sec 1 127 1 127 0 255 0 9 1 16 Default Value none none none 265 2 04 000000000000 00
243. e Opera tions Menu or B A H from the Main Menu Node Name node_xyz NetView Access Option Menu Input FileName nmvtCmd in Output FileName nmvtCmd out Write to File OFF Read From File Read From Keyboard Exeaite Last Command Option Figure D 1 NetView Access Options Menu B A H from Main Menu Commands can be sent individually or via a batch file You can also create a batch file made up of commands you send The supported commands are described later in this chapter The various operations work as follows e To send commands from the keyboard select Read From Keyboard then enter the desired command s If you want to create a batch file of the commands you send specify the desired Input File Name then specify ON for Write To File If you do not want to create a batch file make sure Write To File is OFF e To repeat the last command you entered press F e To send commands from an existing batch file specify the desired Output File Name then select Read From File The commands will be executed one at a time and each command after the first one will be executed only after you press F2 D 2 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Supported Commands The syntax of a RUNCMD from Net View is generally as follows RUNCMP SP OL XPu APPL NVOperid command where OLXPu is the VTAM PU name of the SmartS witch 1800 NetView sees the SmartSwitch 1800 as a PU NVOperid is the ID of the NetView operator
244. e Rates Minimum Voice Rates Maximum 3 User Dialed Extended Dial Digits Option 1 80V 20 00Hz 1 4 8 64 0 Figure 13 2 Voice System Level Configuration Menu A FL A from Main Menu After making any changes be sure to press F7 to update the system memory Otherwise the changes will not take effect until the next re boot of the SmartSwitch 1800 CAUTICN Table 13 1 lists the system level parameters Explanations of the parameters follow the table Table 13 1 Voice System Level Parameters Parameter Voice Node Number Ring Voltage Frequency Country Code Speed Map Dial Digits Voice Rates Minimum kbits sec Voice Rates Maximum kbits sec User Dialed Extended Dial Digits Valid Values Default Value 1 9999 1 75V 16 66Hz 80 V 20Hz 75V 25Hz 60 V 50Hz 75V 50Hz 80V 20Hz 0 999 1 3 4 8 8 32 64 48 4 8 8 32 64 0 16 13 3 13 4 Voice Node Number identifies the SmartSwitch 1800 as the source or destination node incall setup frames This number must be the first four digits of each long dial number and is the number that must be dialed to reach a remote device If a speed dial number is configured for the long dial number the operator can enter that speed dial number and the software will read the long dial number from the speed dial map table Ring Voltage Frequency are the voltage and frequency of the telephone ring circuit In two wire OPX FXS mode the SmartSwitch 1800 p
245. e SmartS witch 1800 Connectthe signaling wires as indicated in the following table Table C 2 E amp M Wiring E amp M Signaling Type Connections Connect Blue wire to the E Orange wire to the M and Brown wires to the SG or common ground PBX leads Connect Blue wire to the E Brown wire to the SG Orange wire to the M and Gray wires to the SB PBX leads Connect Blue wire to the E Orange wire to the M and Gray wireto the SB PBX leads Connect Brown wire to SG or common ground Normally when PBX to PB X E amp M tie trunks are installed the E lead of one PBX is normally crossed over and connected to the M lead of the other PBX and vice versa In a multiplexer application the crossover is accomplished digitally therefore when connecting a PBX to the system in E amp M mode the E and M leads of the PBX connect to the E and M leads of the cable from the SmartSwitch straight through without crossing Voice Configuration Reference Information C 13 E amp M PBX TO PBX CONNECTION Figure C S E amp M Connections E amp M Signaling Types The SmartSwitch 1800 supports five E amp M signaling standards Types I through V for PBX tie line interfaces These conventions as defined by AT amp T specifications are described below With each signaling type the PBX supplies one signal known as the M signal for Mouth and accepts one signal knownas the E signal for Ear Conversely the tie
246. e model of SmartSwitch 1800 see port locations on page 6 1 A menu similar to the following figure will be displayed Node Name node xyz Port Statistics Thresholds System Memory Received frames Sec 10 Transmitted frames Sec 10 Retran frames Sec 10 FCS errorsSec 10 Logical rejects Sec 10 Transmit error ratio Receive error ratio Receive port utilization Transmit port utilization cococcoocccc cocccoccocccc A B c D E F G H I Option Figure 21 4 Port Statistics Configuration Menu E A from Main Menu CE Changing a threshold changes the database value Press F7 to write the change to system memory NCHL A threshold is either a number or a percentage depending on the statistic The valid range for any statistic is 0 65535 Default 0 When the measured value for the sta tistic crosses the threshold in either direction an alarm is generated 214 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Frame level Statistics Statistics Displays Frame level statistics are frame relay if the port is configured for frame relay or X 25 level 2 statistics per second multiplied by 10 Node Name node_xyz Frame Statistics Display RLP 0 Port 1 Report Interval sec 5 Start Time 4 21 1997 09 41 49 L2State Current Previous Total Time in Current State Information Transfer SABM Outstanding O0 Days 1 Hrs 4Mins Transmitted Received CD FRAME TY PE CURR MAX CURR MAX SA BM sec 10 10
247. e nod e xyz Voice Connection Statistics Dis play Source RLP 0 Port 5 Destination Node 110 RLP 0 Port 0 DLCE 16 Report Interval sec 5 Current Time 01 07 1998 14 23 45 STATISTICS Call State Frames Receivedfrom Network Frames Transmittedto Network Congestion Management from Network 0 Congestion Management to Network 0 Call Setup Time msec 100 Call Duration secs 1 14 Number Dialed 100100 Baud Rate 9600 Interface Underruns 0 Interface Overruns 0 Figure 21 8 Voice Connection Statistics Display ELI I B from Main Menu As this manual was going to press there was a possibility that the CS above display would change to clarify the information shown for NC3L Source and Destination at the top of the screen The correct descrip tions of those items are in the list below Information in this Display Source RLP Port Identifies the local Voice port RLP is irrelevant and will always be 0 Destination Node identifies the device at the remote end of the frame relay connection Destination RLP Port DLCI identify the local frame relay interface that will be used to transport Voice frames Call State will be one of these On Hook Off Hook Call Active a call has been placed and answered Pending the call has timed out during a busy condition butthe receiver is still off hook Loading SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Calling Failed Received Frames from Netw
248. e ry IVA DIO PROC ML UL ore soceri CHEN CEPR RATHER DOR MU POOR CERE t IS DOE ease eade HEU uU eoR eu LUN ats usb paca iets Ems a pr Vu PS DCN baud SOMME B i b nnd s de NNI Configuration Introduction to Database Configuration Database Setup Recommend a0 Leia tkbttriebel trn CER SUR HUM aU Cuie Fade Configuration Examples Serial Protocols over Frame Relay vi via a Logical POTS aannemen Frame Relay PVC Passthrough LLC2 PUs over Frame Relay to AS 400 3x 7As SDLC over Frame Relay to SNA Hs F Producing a Configuration Report 1 5 eie eser tenete Where to Find Configuration Information sss Configuring Node Defaults Database and System Memory Values ee ee suere Node Defaults Parametrs soscas naar HERI bee ERREUR En tele Loading Protocols Configuring Physical Ports Locanons or PRY SICAL PO 1325 aei S Cogtieiemng a eua or Votos POIL auae axes Coder endrRAE Er aru Database and System Memory Values eee Contigunng the Port Parameters eniti tree destactenese Couhmiuug d LAN Folorunso LAN Card Pargmeltetrs eieaciteeciteete tiene eoa ciet ot Ple den EE Iudice dus 2 1 sein 2 24 2 5 2 8 2 8 2 9 2 9 2 9 2 9 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 3 6 4 vii Chapter 7 Configuring Frame Relay DUO CU CORO coe D pA HER PARK reat ewe eterna crest Han ER errr ew ds 7 1 DLST SIA I aces T Frame Relay Back posso uei eda D ROAD ER edet PRU REA 7 2 Required Co
249. e secondary dial string 6666 is Output Forwarded Output Digits EXT Voice Configuration Reference Information C 7 Using Wildcards in Speed Dial Numbers C8 The question mark and asterisk wildcards can be included in map table entries and dialed by users of attached equipment A question mark matches any single digit an asterisk matches multiple digits In the map table a wildcard can be included in the speed dial number in any digit position except the first e g 23 is valid but 23 is not When the first digit of a dialed number is the asterisk wildcard the SmartSwitch will process the remaining dial digits as long call format dialing if the configured Long Dial Prefix in Voice Port configuration is an asterisk In any other digit position the wildcard s will betreated differently depending on what is being dialed Ifan asterisk appears in a extended dial string it is treated as anormal extended digit no special processing If an asterisk is dialed in a speed dial number the SmartS witch will search the map table for a matching entry Any pre configured numbers will be given priority any number with an CS asterisk as the first digit Ne When the SmartSwitch searches the map table for an entry that matches the user dialed number an exact match terminates the search and the associated entry is used to set up the call If a map table entry with wildcard s is found the SmartSwitch records how closely the map entry matc
250. e shown below Annex D 0000 Full Status Enquiry 001 000 0000 Full Status 001 001 016 N 017 N 0000 LIV Status Enquiry 002 001 0000 LIV Status 002 002 0000 LIV Status Enquiry 003 002 0000 LIV Status 003 003 0000 LIV Status Enquiry 004 003 0000 LIV Status 004 004 0000 LIV Status Enquiry 005 004 0000 LIV Status 005 005 0000 LIV Status Enquiry 006 005 0000 LIV Status 006 006 0000 Full Status Enquiry 007 006 0000 Full Status 007 007 016 A 017 A 0000 LIV Status Enquiry 008 007 LMI T 1023 Full Status Enquiry 001 000 R 1023 Full Status 001 001 141 N 241 A T 1023 LIV Status Enquiry 002 001 R 1023 LIV Status 002 002 T 1023 LIV Status Enquiry 003 002 R 1023 LIV Status 003 003 T 1023 LIV Status Enquiry 004 003 R 1023 LIV Status 004 004 T 1023 LIV Status Enquiry 005 004 R 1023 LIV Status 005 005 T 1023 LIV Status Enquiry 006 005 R 1023 LIV Status 006 006 T 1023 Full Status Enquiry 007 006 R 1023 Full Status 007 007 141 A241 A T 1023 LIV Status Enquiry 008 007 The pair of 3 digit numbers at the end of each line are the send receive sequence numbers For example LIV Status Enquiry 002 001 means that the DTE received sequence 001 and sentsequence 002 If the timestamp is turned on it will be displayed at the left of each line Note that the TorRin LMI frames indicates whether the frame was transmitted or received by the port being traced Note thatin the above example the frame relay DTE port is configured for an N1 Polling Coun
251. e shown below A display at a sending node will show only that node s events Chicago 1008 01 16 1998 08 34 31 end of ipl Chicago 1013 01 16 1998 08 34 32 L 0 P 2 link PAD fail Chicago 1004 01 16 1998 08 34 38 L 0 P 0 link X 25 fail Chicago 1005 01 16 1998 08 34 44 L 0 P 0 restart with cc 7 dc 0 Chicago 1006 01 16 1998 08 35 15 L 0 P 0 operational StLouis 1008 01 16 1998 08 30 43 end of ipl St Louis 1004 01 16 1998 08 30 50 LO P 1 link X 25 fail St Louis 450 01 16 1998 08 31 41 St Louis 1005 01 16 1998 08 32 24 L 0 P 3 restart with cc 0 dc 0 St Louis 1006 01 16 1998 08 32 35 LO P 3 operational StLouis 450 01 16 1998 08 33 01 St Louis 1005 01 16 1998 08 33 14 L 0 P 1 restart with cc 0 dc 0 St Louis 1008 01 16 1998 08 33 31 end of ipl Press F3 to stop displaying events and return to normal menu operations System Events 22 3 Severity Levels for SNMP Trap Routing Each event is assigned a severity level whichis used in SNMP trap routing described on page 17 4 to determine which level s will be sent to an SNMP manager There are four levels of severity Level 1 Serious fault This is a serious error and immediate action is required Level 2 Major fault link alarm Link alarms 400 406 are at this level simply to show importance for any other events take action as soon as possible Level 32 Minor fault traffic disturbance Clear the fault atthe first suitable Occasion Level 4 Configuration error informational ev
252. e the Routing Information Field RIF in forwarded frames the Source Route Bridge ID will be inserted into the RIF Default Ethernet Frame Type determines the format that will be used in Token Ring to Ethemet translation if the node does not know the type generated by the source device Once the node has received a frame from a device over an Ethernet interface it will know the format for future frames Configuring Bridge Filters Filtering is the method by which the network manager controls usage of an inter network A filter permits or denies depending on how it is configured some or all of a specific type of bridged traffic across an interface This can be helpful in such ways as limiting unwanted or inappropraite traffic onto LANs or W ANS or preventing access to certain devices for security purposes The process of confi guring and using Bridge filters is as follows Both procedures are described later in this chapter 1 Create a Bridge Filter Definition record 2 Create a Bridge Filter Applications record which will determine how the filter definitions will be applied 3 Perform an on line update of the definitions and applications described under Configuring Bridge Filter Applications on page 16 10 To review existing filters press F atthe Filter Definitions and Applications Configuration Menu or A A E F F from the Main Menu Configuring Filter Definitions To define a filter press G at the Co
253. e valid only if Y is specified for one or mote of items C D and E on the first screen Parameters for all three screens are described following Table 1 1 2 11 8 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Subscriber Parameters Table 11 2 SVC Subscriber Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Routing Algorithm 0 3 Systematic Redirection Y N Redirect on Busy Y N Redirect on Out of Order Y N Connection Priority 0 9 1st 2nd etc Path Configured Y N RLP n a Port Physical port 0 3 Logical port 8 63 Redirection Address 0 1 etc valid address Thesoftware does not verify that aspecified port exists Make sure all specified ports are configured in the database Subscriber Name identifies the subscriber to the console operator Routing Algorithm allows creation of a hunt group of ports see example on page 8 22 for the purpose of routing per a pre selected algorithm 0 Round Robin selects ports specified cyclicly in numerical order according to the list of Redirection Addresses If the selected port is unreachable or con gested the Call Request will be sent to the next port If the port becomes available again it will be included in its assigned position 1 Altemate Route on Line Failure selects the first port that is notin a failed state Ifthe selected port does not makea connection the call will be cleared even if other ports are available 2 Alternate Route on Line Busy selects the
254. eachable destinations Bad Checksum is the number of datagrams received with a bad checksum for the IP header Pkt Forwd Sent is the number of datagrams forwarded through this node Pkt Too Short is the number of datagrams received with a length other than that specified in the header Unkwn Protocol is the number of datagrams received using an unknown or unsupported protocol Pkt Too Small is the number of datagrams received that were discarded because the IP header would not fit into a single buffer Pkts Delivered is the number of datagrams delivered to an application e g SNMP on this node SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 e Bad Hdr Length is the number of datagrams received with a header size less than the minimum IP header length e LocalPkts Sent is the number of datagrams generated forwarded by this node e Bad Pkt Length is the number of datagrams received with a length other than the length of the header e Pkts Dropped is the number of datagrams dropped due to a situation such as lack of buffers e PktFragments is the number of datagram fragments received e Total Reasmbled is the number of complete datagrams properly reassembled atthis node e Frag Time Out is the number of datagram fragments discarded because of tim eouts e Pkts Fragmented is the number of outgoing datagrams properly fragmented e Frag Dropped is the number of datagram
255. eceiving node Late Collisions is the number of transmitted frames that were involved in col lisions while outside the flow control window Underruns is the number of frames that were not accepted due to DMA direct memory access underrun errors SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Statistics Displays Token Ring Specific Statistics FCS Violations is the number of frames received that have failed the Frame Check Sequence FCS cyclic redundancy check CRC Copy Errors is the number of frames received with duplicate addresses Trans Absences is the number of five half bit time transitions The counter is incremented every time transitions are not detected between SDEL and EDEL in a repeated frame Frequency Errors is the number of frames received with signal frequency problems Frm with Aborts 1s the number offrames that were aborted in mid transmission Act Mon Regen is the number of times the active monitor is lost and regen erated No Return Frms is the number of frames that fail to retum from around the ring due to a timeout or reception of another frame Underruns is the number of frames that were not accepted due to DMA direct memory access underrun errors No Buff Avail is the number of frames that could not be received repeated due to lack of buffer space A C Errors is the number of AMP and SMP MAC frames with AC ARI FCI equal to zero when an intervening A
256. ect 9 10 Disable Status Response 10 12 Disable X 121 UserCalls 12 11 Discard Output 12 5 Disconnect Duration 12 13 Disconnect if Clear Recvd 12 13 Disconnect if Clear Sent 12 14 Disconnect Timer 8 13 12 13 Display All CUGs 8 20 DLCI configuration reviewing 7 10 DLCI parameters configuring 7 12 DLCI sharing 7 1 DLCIs learned 7 13 Dotted decimal notation 14 1 DSAP Vale 16 9 DSU CSU tests 19 15 DTE Clear Retry Count 8 12 8 19 DTE Reset Retry Count 8 12 8 19 DTE Restart Retry Count 8 12 8 19 DTMF Detection 13 10 DTMF Off Duration 13 16 DTMF On Duration 13 16 DTR RTS Active When VCUp 12 12 Dynamic Signaling Action 12 14 E EBCDIC 104 11 5 Echo 12 4 Echo Mask 12 6 Edit Service Signal 12 6 Editing in async PAD profile 12 5 Enable Backup Protocol 7 19 Enable Bandwidth Allocation 7 18 Enable Inverse ARP 14 11 Enable Outgoing Rate Control 7 18 Enabled traps 17 5 Encapsulation Method 8 16 End to End Acknowledgement 10 4 Entry 7 22 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 ERRMSG TXT 22 1 Errmsg txt Database Error 4 2 Error codes from async terminal A 5 Error Retransmit Count 10 7 Escape key 2 7 Event collection configuring 22 1 Event generation 22 3 Event messages 22 4 Events 22 1 severity levels 22 4 Events displaying 22 3 Excess Burst Size In Out 7 18 Exiting a menu 2 5 Extended Dial String 13 7 F F1 2 5 F10 2 6 F2 2 5 F3 2 5 F4 2 6 F5 2 6 F6 2 6 F7 2 6 4 2 6 3 F9 2 6 Facilities 12 12 Fast S
257. ecutive RIP and S AP Service Advertising Pro tocol transmissions This parameter provides compatibility with older Novell servers Router Name is simply an identifier for the IPX network It must be unique within the network 152 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Configuring IPX Filters Filtering is the method by which the network manager controls usage of a mixed network by connection oriented and connectionless traffic Connectionless traffic does not require establishment of a logical connection prior to data exchange A filter permits or denies depending on how itis configured some or all of a specific type of IPX traffic across an interface For example a filter can be configured to deny trans mission of all outbound IPX SAP entries The process of configuring and using IPX filters is as follows Both procedures are described later in this chapter 1 Create an IPX Filter Definition record 2 Create an IPX Filter Applications record which will e Identify the node that contains the interface to be affected e Identify the interface to be affected by specifying an ID that matches one in the IPX Interface file described later in this chapter e Specify the filter category RIP SAP packet or RIP router e Specify a direction inbound or outbound e Specify whether the filter s to be applied will permit or deny passage of the type of data defined by the filter s Identify up to 100 filters to be applie
258. ed as long as it is smaller than the maximum specified here Default Packet Size will be assigned to an incoming call setup packet if the packet does not request a packet size Maximum Window Size is the maximum number of unacknowledged packets per logical channel that can pass through the port Default Window Size will be assigned to an incoming call setup packet if the packet does not request a window size Maximum Throughput Class specifies the default throughput class that will be inserted into a Call Request packet if Throughput Class Negotiation is not enabled or ifa throughput class is not requested in the Call Request This value should not be higher than the line speed specified for the physical port Valid values in bits per second are 75 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 48K 64K Default Calling Address will be inserted into to an incoming Call Request packet ifthe packet does not contain acalling address T20 Restart Timer will be started when the port issues a Restart Request and stopped and reset when a Restart Confirmation or Restart Indication is received If the timer expires the port will retransmit the Restart Request T21 Incoming Call Timer will be started when the port issues a Call Request packet and stopped and reset when a Call Connected Clear Indication or Incoming Call is received If the timer expires the port will send a Clear Request T22 Reset Timer will be started wh
259. ed subscriber but will start immediately with the first subscriber in the redirection list Configuring X 25 Address Translation Templates The X 25 address translation function in the SmartSwitch 1800 provides automatic translation of selected fields within a Call Request packet according to a previously defined template You can change the called address calling address user data and or facilities fields of a Call Request packet as it passes into or out of the node There are various uses for this feature for example e For security reasons a translation of the calling address might enable routing of all Call Request packets with certain addresses while all others are cleared e Translation of user data can allow rerouting of all packets with the same called address with all those containing one type of information going to one location while those with another type go elsewhere The translation template has two parts the template ID and the translation formula The Call Request packet can be modified using the translation formula to replace parts of it with characters specified by the formula and or with parts of the template ID Each port has two sets of translation templates associated with it one for incoming packets and one for outgoing packets When an incoming packet enters the node it is immediately checked against any incoming template defined for that port If the packet matches the template a translation is carr
260. ed Host to the SDLC port Note that this record is not required on the remote SmartSwitch 1800 because that device originates the comnection i e it is not being called LAN IDs LAN IDs can be configured in two places e LLC2 node defaults to identify a virtual bridge that connects the LLC2 function to LAN interfaces e LLC2 frame relay interfaces using 802 5 Source Route Bridge format to identify the ring number used by a source route bridge at the remote end This ID is normally assigned by a system administrator Note that the LAN ID on an originated LLC2 interface must match the LAN ID on the corresponding termi nated interface Be aware that when configuring these records LAN IDs must be entered in hex Also note that other than the matching IDs on each originated terminated interface pair each LAN ID must be unique within the network on which the SmartSwitch 1800 will operate LLC2 Function Intemally LLC2 connects to interfaces via a virtual bridge LLC2 Host and Interface records act as both origination and termination points for LLC2 For example if you are configuring SDLC to LLC2 conversion to be transmitted over frame relay to a Token Ring host the following is the logical LLC2 record flow SNA Port PU record Chapter 9 with the parameter LLC2 Connection set to Yes This acts as the both the LLC2 Host and LLC2 Interface termination record In addition you must configure an originated Host for the target MAC a
261. ed to carry frame relay traffic as well as other protocols encapsulated in frame relay per RFC 1490 via logical X 25 ports over frame relay A frame relay port can act as physical DCE connecting to end user devices or DTE connecting to anetwork or frame relay PVC Frame relay support includes e RFC 1490 for HDLC LLC2 IP IPX over frame relay e Line speeds up to 2 048 Mbps e Voice over frame relay e LMI Annex D link management e Annex F segmentation and re assembly e Bandwidth allocation e Connection prioritization e Incoming and outgoing rate control CIR e Virtual circuit backup for single or multiple PVCs DLCIs including bandwidth allocation on backup circuits Each logical connection on a physical frame relay port is assigned a Data Link Con nection Identifier DLCI which identifies a point to point connection as shown in the following example The numbers represent DLCIs Multiple protocols can be passed over a single physical frame relay port by sharing a DLCI Each node supports upto 976 user configurable DLCIs Several more are sup ported but are reserved for intemal use Frame Relay Backup 7 2 Frame relay virtual circuit backup in the SmartSwitch 1800 provides frame relay DLCIs with automatic backup protection in the event of LMI loss or port failure A DLCI is considered down inactive if level 1 is down If LMI is used the DLCI is also considered inactive if not reported as active in a Full St
262. edirects 14 10 ICMP statistics displaying 21 15 ID subscriber 8 22 IDBLK 4 7 9 12 9 25 Idle Fill Character 9 10 Idle Timer 11 6 Idle Timer Delay 12 4 IDNUM 4 7 9 12 9 25 In Hunt Group 13 9 Inactivity Timer 8 12 9 10 Incoming Access Allowed 8 12 8 20 Incoming Calls Barred 8 10 8 18 Initial Profile Name 12 11 Idx 3 Input Level 13 10 Input Signal Detection 12 12 Insert lt lf gt after cr 12 5 Interface 15 18 15 19 Interface Voice 13 12 Interface Type 9 28 Bridge 16 14 IPX 15 13 Internal Network 15 2 Intervening Networks 15 18 IP addressing 14 1 IP ARP table displaying 20 26 IP Bridging Enabled 16 5 IP gateway 14 2 IP Interface statistics displaying 21 18 IP interfaces configuring 14 4 displaying 20 21 20 26 IP ping connectivity test 19 14 IP route static configuring 14 14 IP routing table displaying 20 25 IP routing configuring 14 1 IP statistics displaying 21 14 IPX Bridging Enabled 16 5 IPX Filter Applications configuring 15 8 IPX filter definitions configuring 15 3 IPX interface configuring 15 9 IPX Network Address 15 13 IPX node defaults 15 2 IPX RIP table displaying 20 27 IPX SAP table displaying 20 28 IPX static route configuring 15 16 IPX statistics displaying 21 19 IPX configuring 15 1 IPXWAN Enabled 15 15 Istatus 9 11 J Jitter 13 13 L Ll Duplex 9 10 L2DatMode 9 11 LAN Card 9 28 LAN Card Number 15 16 LAN ID 9 30 16 15 LAN interface statistics displaying 21
263. elect Acceptance 8 10 8 18 Fax Supported 13 11 File backup FRX4000 to local PC 19 7 File backup SmartSwitch to loca PC 19 8 File restore PC to SmartS witch 19 10 Filetransfer 19 4 File Transfer ID 4 4 File Transfer Pwd password 4 4 Files operating 19 10 Filter 15 7 Filter n 15 9 16 11 Filter Applications Bridge 16 10 IPX 15 8 Filter Definitions Bridge 16 6 IPX 15 3 Filter masks Bridge 16 7 IPX 15 4 Filter Name 15 5 Bridge 16 8 16 9 16 10 IPX 15 5 15 6 Flow Control async PAD 12 5 RTS CTS 12 12 Flow Control Negotiation 8 10 8 17 Index For Backup Use Only 7 18 Format RFC1490 9 29 16 15 Forward Delay 13 15 Forwarded Dight Type 13 15 Forwarded Output Digits 13 15 Forwarding table Bridge displaying 20 24 Frame relay 7 1 backup 7 2 groups configuring 7 22 manual switchover 19 16 status displaying 20 19 port configuring 7 9 PVC configuring 7 20 utilization statistics displaying 21 6 Frame Type 15 13 Frame level statistics displaying 21 5 Full Duplex 10 4 11 6 Function keys 2 5 G Gap 152 Generate Clock 7 16 8 9 9 9 10 6 11 5 Generate M bit Packets 12 11 wow Group n Excess Priority 7 8 wow Group n Percentage 7 7 wow Group n Use Excess Burst 7 8 H Help on line 2 5 Highest Incoming Channel 8 10 8 17 Highest Outgoing Channel 8 10 8 17 Highest Two Way Channel 8 10 8 17 Hops 15 17 Host MAC Address 9 22 9 29 16 15 HSAP 9 25 Hunt group example 8 23 I ICMP R
264. en the port issues a Reset Request and stopped and reset when a Reset Confirmation or Reset Indication is received If the timer expires the port will retransmit the Reset Request SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 T23 Clear Timer will be started when the port issues a Clear Request and stopped and reset when a Clear Confirmation or Clear Indication is received If the timer expires the port will retransmit the Clear Request DTE Restart Retry Count is the number of times a Restart Request from the logical DTE will be transmitted The DTE will stop issuing the request on receipt of a Restart Confirmation or Restart Indication If the Restart Retry Count expires restart and recovery procedures should be initiated DTE Reset Retry Count is the number of times a Reset Request from the logical DTE will be trans mitted The DTE will stop issuing the request on receipt of a Reset Confirmation or Reset Indi cation If the Reset Retry Countexpires restart and recovery procedures should beini tiated DTE Clear Retry Count is the number of times a Clear Request from the logical DTE will be trans mitted The DTE will stop issuing the request on receipt of a Clear Confirmation or Clear Indi cation If the Clear Retry Countexpires recovery procedures should be initiated CUG Parameters Preferential CUG Flag specifies whether the port has a preferential CUG if the port belongs to any CUGs Preferential CUG is adefa
265. enced Packet Exchange packet 11 NCP NetWare Core Protocol packet 14 Propagated packet used for NetBIOS an IBM protocol that performs transport and session layer tasks Destination Network Value is the network number of the destination node s network The internetwork address is the network number followed by the socket number Destination Node Value is the physical address of the destination node The node s intemetwork address is the network number followed by the node address followed by the socket number Destination Socket Value is the socket address of the packet s destination process Source Network Value 1s the network number of the source node s network Source Node Value is the physical address of the source node Source Socket Value is the socket address of the packet s source process Table 15 5 IPX RIP Router Filter Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Filter Name 1 31 characters none Router Address Value O ffffffffffff 6 bytes 000000000000 Router Address Mask O ffffffffffff 6 bytes 00000000 Filter Name helps the user identify the filter The name is notused by the software Router Address Value identifies the router to which the filter will apply Configuring IP X 15 7 Configuring IPX Filter Applications IPX Filter Applications determine how filters will be used at the interface To review existing applications press C at the Configure Filter Definitions and Application
266. ent Depending on the event no action may be necessary and if so correcting the configuration of certain database parameters may be adequate Event Messages 224 A list of event messages follows with each message s meaning and any action to be taken The list is modified as necessary to include additional events As shown in the example under Displaying Events each message is preceded by an RLP number always 0 and port number If the recommended action does not correct a problem contact Cabletron Systems Technical Support at e Phone 603 332 9400 Monday Friday 8 AM 8 PM Eastern time e E mail support ctron com e FTP ctron com 134 141 197 25 e Login anonymous e Password Your e mail address 146 Transmitter stuck Severity 4 Meaning No clock is being generated Action Check configurations and set the clock 181 Configured for extended sequence numbering received SABM Severity 4 Meaning The Port record is configured for a maximum frame sequence number Outstanding Frames greater than 7 but acommand was received setting the mode to allow amaximum of 7 Action None SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 System Events 182 197 198 219 250 304 Configured for normal sequence numbering received SABME Severity 4 Meaning The Port record is configured for a maximum frame sequence number Outstanding Frames of 7 or fewer but acommand was received setting the mode to allow u
267. ently check the line for noise and check for configuration errors on both the port and the connected device 315 Log Rej Sec exceeded T n C n Severity 4 Meaning The port statistic Logical Rejects Sec 100 has exceeded the threshold T n that was set by the user C n is the current value Logical Rejects are the sum of Rejects and Frame Rejects A value consistently greater than zero indicates line problems Action If this happens frequently check the line for noise and check for configuration errors on both the port and the connected device 316 Trn Err Ratio exceeded T n C n Severity 4 Meaning The port statistic Transmit Error Ratio has exceeded the threshold T n that was set by the user C n is the current value The Transmit Error Ratio is the ratio of retransmitted frames per second to successfully transmitted frames per second Action If this happens frequently check the line for noise and check for configuration errors on both the port and the connected device 317 Rev Err Ratio exceeded T n C n Severity 4 System Events 22 7 Meaning The port statistic Receive Error Ratio has exceeded the threshold T n that was set by the user C n is the current value The Receive Error Ratio is the ratio of frames rejected per second to frames accepted per second Action If this happens frequently check the line for noise and check for configuration error
268. er identifies the Calling Address of each end of the connection Status Displays 20 5 RLP is always0 except fora remote control file transfer or alarm connection in which case this number is always 253 P is the port number 0 7 are physical ports 8 63 are logical ports unless RLP is 253 in which case 66 Remote control 67 File transfer 68 Alarm con nection Displaying Port Signals 20 6 This display lists basic configuration and line status for all serial ports as well as signal states on off atthe physical interfaces Press D at the Status Displays Menu When prompted for an RLP number press Enter accepting the default and only valid value of 0 Node Name node_xyz Line Processor Status RLP 0 Interface R S 422 PortNumber 1 2 Phy Interface RS 449 Port Config No SNA Logical Inter DCE Line Speed 1 472M Line Status Oper TD 2 ON RD 3 ON RTS 4 ON CTS 5 ON DSR 6 ON DCD 8 ON TC 15 ON RC 17 ON DTR 20 ON 2292299 e zZ F2 Next RLP Card F9 S top Remote F10 A bort Remote PgUp First 4 Ports PgD n Last 4 Ports Oth ers Exit08 14 52 Figure 20 5 Port Signals Display C D from Main Menu Information in this Display Port Number is self explanatory Phy Interface is the type of connector on the port taken from the Port record Port Config is the port type FRL SNA X25 etc as configured in the Port record If norecord has been created for this p
269. er Masks Work on page 15 4 Table 15 2 IPX RIP Filter Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Filter Name 1 31 characters none Network Address Value O tfffffff 4 bytes fiffffff Network Address Mask O_ffffffff 4 bytes ffffffff Filter Name helps the user identify the filter The name is not used by the software Network Address Value is a number assigned to the local network Table 15 3 IPX SAP Filter Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Filter Name 1 31 characters none Service Type Value 0 ffff 2 bytes tff Service Type Mask O ffff 2 bytes tff Server Name 1 47 characters asterisk wildcard Network Address Value O tffffffff 4 bytes ffffffff Network Address Mask O_ffffffff 4 bytes ffffffff Node Address Value O ffffffffffff 6 bytes ffffffffffff Node Address Mask O ffffffffffff 6 bytes HffEETETE Socket Address Value O ffff 2 bytes f fff Socket Address Mask O ffff 2 bytes tff Filter Name helps the user identify the filter The name is notused by the software Configuring IP X 15 5 Service Type Value is aS AP Service Type code Some common types are 0003 print queue 0004 file server 0005 job server 0007 print server 0009 archive server 0024 remote bridge server Server Name identifies a specific server whose incoming outgoing packets will be affected by the SAP filter Network Address Value is an IPX network number assigned to the network containin
270. er ID in the remote node s LLC2 Host record Remote Subscriber ID is the subscriber address assigned to the remote end of the SNA connection If config uring an LLC2 to SDLC link this address must match the Local Subscriber ID con figured in the SNA port record for the S DLC device If configuring an LLC2 to LLC2 connection this address must match the Local Subscriber ID in the remote node s LLC2 Host record IDBLK is used in conjunction with IDNUM in generating the Node field in an XID frame format 0 or 3 to establish a link station connection to the host A further explanation is provided under IDNUM IDNUM is used in conjuction with IDBLK in generating the Node field in an XID frame format 0 or 3 to estblish a link station connection to the host If both IDBLK and IDNUM are set to 0 the Node field of the XID will be provided by the attached SDLC device The node will send an XID command to the remote node to indicate that the SDLC device should be polled for an XID Maxdata must correspond to the PIU size configured on the host parameter MAXDATA of macro PU in VTAM For a link between a PU type 4 and a PU type 2 the frame size con figured for the HPAD and TPAD SNA ports must be set at the value of MAXDATA in VTAM plus 6 bytes corresponding to the length of the link header and the link trailer Maxin is the maximum number of sequentially numbered Information LPDUs that the link station can have outstanding Configu
271. erface Jitter Call Timer Long Dial Prefix Suppression Auto Dial Parameters Auto Dial Auto Dial Number Auto Poll Auto Poll Timer Enhanced Dialing Parameters Dial Timer sec Source of Extended Digits of Leading Digits to Delete Forward Delay Forwarded Digit Type Forwarded Output Digits Make Break Ratio DTMF ON Duration DTMF OFF Duration Tone Type Valid Values Y N 4 8 8 32 64 Kbps 1 255 0 255 seconds see explanation see explanation irrelevant not currently supported 1 99 seconds Y N Y N OPX SLT E amp M AC15 Depends on setting of Telephony Interface Type see explanation 10 255 msec in 5 ms increments 1 30 seconds see explanation 1 5 1 no suppression Y N number of digits configured for Speed Map Dial Digits Y N 5 30 seconds 0 10 0 no time limit Map User 0 4 0 40 0 25 sec increments DTMF Pulse None All Ext Make 20 80 in increments of 2 Break 80 20 in increments of 2 30 1000 ms 30 1000 ms DTMF MF Default Value N 8Kbps 3 0 dB 4 dB N 30 Y OPX Loop Start 80 asterisk 04 Map 0 2 0 5 sec DTMF None 34 66 100 100 DTMF 1 0 disable 1 enable 2 255 number of seconds tone will be generated 2 Valid only if Interfaceis E amp M 3 The number of digits used as an auto dial number The parameter Speed Map Dial Digits is configured in Voice System Level Parameters 4 Ifyou set S
272. erhead to highest overhead are e Native LLC2 also known as BNN or Boundary Network Node When this format is used no MAC addresses are transmitted across the frame relay link e 802 5 SRB source route bridge also known as BAN or Boundary Access Node SmartSwitch 1800 devices support B AN type 1 This format is gen erally used for 3174 gateways and AS 400s because they need to see a MAC address e 802 3 TB transparent bridge used when talking to routers that cannot do BAN or BNN Subscriber IDs Subscriber IDs are only used locally within each SmartSwitch 1800 to link records e g SDLC PU record to LLC host record unless the device is running X 25 SDLC LLC2 primary the S martSwitch 1800 would be SDLC secondary to the FEP or logical ports i e QLLC in which case the subscriber IDs correlate to the static routes defined in the subscriber routing tables PU1 Devices PU1 devices can not be defined as Token Ring attached to the AS 400 AS 400 pro grammers might try to get around this by defining different device types i e 5494 PU 2 0 or PU 2 1 to 5294 and 5394 PUI controllers However when this is done the ACTPU is not spoofed internally and is sent to the remote controller The Smart Switch 1800 cannot accept and respond and the controller and AS 400 will go into error mode The 5394 can be RPQed to act as a PU2 1 device see IBM RPQ 8Q0775 5294 controllers cannot be RP Qed and must be attached as SDLC de
273. erial port in the node off line Disable a Range of Ports Takes a specified group of same type ports off line Enable a Port Brings any physical or logical serial port in the node on line Enable a Range of Ports Brings a specified group of same type ports on line Quiesce a Port Causes any physical or logical serial port in the node to be taken off line when there are no active connections Quiesce a Range of Ports Quiesces a specified group of same type ports SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Introduction to System Operation G Unquiesce a Port Cancels the Quiesce a Port command only if there are still active connections on the port H Unquiesce a Range of Ports Unquiesces a specified group of same type ports On Line Database Operations Chapter 19 backs up database and or system files locally or remotely Back up the Current Database to a Remote FRX6000 Back up the Current Database to a Remote FRX4000 SmartSwitch 1800 Restore the Backed Up Database to a Remote FRX4000 SmartSwitch 1800 Back up the Database to a Local Directory Restore the Database from a Local Directory Back Up the Current SystemFiles to a Local Directory Restore the System Files from a Local Directory Test X25 Address Translation Templates Chapter 8 Tests templates to assure they were correctly created Re Load Initialization to Async Console Chapter 19 Sends default terminal settings to an Auxiliary Console
274. erity 4 Meaning The situation that caused event 313 has ended Action None 22 16 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 System Events 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 FCS Rej Sec Under Threshold Severity 4 Meaning The situation that caused event 314 has ended Action None Log Rej Sec Under Threshold Severity 4 Meaning The situation that caused event 315 has ended Action None Tran Err Ratio Under Threshold Severity 4 Meaning The situation that caused event 316 has ended Action None Rev Err Ratio Under Threshold Severity 4 Meaning The situation that caused event 317 has ended Action None Port Rvc Usage Under Threshold Severity 4 Meaning The situation that caused event 318 has ended Action None Port Trn Usage Under Threshold Severity 4 Meaning The situation that caused event 319 has ended Action None Delete failed nonexistent interface n Severity 4 Meaning An IP Interface database record was created for a non existent interface Someone then deleted the record using F4 which caused this message to be generated No mem avail processing intface n Severity 3 Meaning The RLP function did not have enough available memory to add the specified interface Action Contact Cabletron Systems Technical Support See page 22 4 22 17 22 18 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 Can t add
275. ers and frame relay only performance for all logical connections Port Signals displays configuration data for each port in the node and shows on off status of each signal at the interface Traffic Monitor A Port Monitor displays control and information data of all level 3 packets passing through a specified port B LAN Capture Status and Control Menu allows configuration of parameters that specify information to be captured when monitoring LAN traffic C LAN Capture Review displays captured LAN monitor information 18 4 F Protocol Status A IPX RIP Table Display displays the contents of the RIP table B IPX SAP Table Display displays the contents of the SAP table C SDLC PU Status displays a list of configured station addresses for a specified SNA port including current active inactive states D Bridge Status Displays A Bridge Port Status Display displays a list of Bridge ports including type active status bridge state forwarding listening etc and number of bytes received and transmitted B Bridge Forwarding Table Display displays a list of MAC addresses and their associated bridge ports plus any flags that have been set E Frame Relay Backup Status displays the current state of frame relay primary and backup DLCIs A Display States for all Backup DLCIs on a Port B Display States for all Primary DLCIs on a Port C Display States for all Backup DLCIs in a Group F LLC 2Session Status di
276. erver identified by Server Name Server Node Address identifies the IPX node attached to the server network Server Socket Number is an IPX socket number that identifies the process For example the SAP process is 0452 Intervenin g Networks is the number of routers that a packet must pass through to reach the server if this route is used 15 18 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Router is the hex value of the node address of the router that will forward a packet when this route is used If Novell s IPXWAN protocol is used on the interface as configured in the IPX Interface file this field will be ignored Interface is the IPX network number assigned to the interface used to send packets that are des tined for this server Configuring IP X 15 19 Introduction Chapter 16 Configuring Bridging The SmartSwitch 1800 supports transparent spanning tree bridging of non routable LAN traffic e g NetBIOS DECnet AppleTalk over frame relay between 802 3 Ethernet or 802 5 Token Ring LANs The SmartSwitch also supports translational bridging between Ethernet and Token Ring LANs For more information on bridging refer to IEEE standard 802 1d Bridging support includes e Encapsulation of Ethernet and Token Ring traffic per RFC 1490 for trans mission over frame relay e Transparent Spanning Tree 802 1 bridging e Translational bridging between Ethernet and Token Ring LANs e Compatibility with Source Route B
277. es between devices Local configuration Centralized alarm routing Statistics displays Line monitor SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Hardware Overview Models Part Number 1W48 E B 1W48 E SDLC 1W48 E IP 1W48 E SBR 1W48 E MULT 1W48 T B 1W48 T SDLC 1W48 T IP 1W48 T SBR 1W48 T MULT Product Overview The SmartSwitch 1800 is available in several models some of which support Voice and data transmission and some of which are data only Table 1 1 lists the models that support Voice At the time this User Guide went to press model numbers had not been created for the data only models Table 1 1 Voice Models of SmartSwitch 1800 Hardware 2 Voice ports 4 serial ports 1 Ethernet port 2 Voice ports 4 serial ports 1 Ethernet port 2 Voice ports 4 serial ports 1 Ethernet port 2 Voice ports 4 serial ports 1 Ethernet port 2 Voice ports 4 serial ports 1 Ethernet port 2 Voice ports 4 serial ports 1 Token Ring port 2 Voice ports 4 serial ports 1 Token Ring port 2 Voice ports 4 serial ports 1 Token Ring port 2 Voice ports 4 serial ports 1 Token Ring port 2 Voice ports 4 serial ports 1 Token Ring port Protocols Frame Relay SDLC IP SNMP Bridging LLC2 Voice Frame Relay SDLC IP SNMP Voice Frame Relay SDLC IP SNMP Bridging LLC2 Voice Frame Relay SDLC IP SNMP LLC2 RIP IPX Voice Frame Relay X 25 SDLC IP SNMP Bridging LLC2 RIP IPX Voice BSC Async NVSP Frame Relay
278. es dans le R glement sur le brouillage radio lectrique dict le minist re des Communications du Canada Rev Date Reason for Update 01 March 1998 General availability This manual supplements screen prompts and menus as an aid in configuring the database and performing system operations on a SmartSwitch 1800 Before using the manual you should be familiar with Smart Switch 1800 hardware as well as the protocols frame relay IP SNA etc you will be using Terminology and Conventions This typefacerepresents general text This typeface represents key board input and video output This text is dark cyan in on screen versions of the manual and black in paper versions In on screen versions of the manual items in blue are links to other places inthe manual This symbol points to an informational note relating to the text table or figure that immedi Ce ately precedes or follows it Mop SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 This symbol and text identifies a cautionary note the content of which is more critical to heed than an informational note AUI CIN The following references to keyboard keys appear in the manual and or on the screen N is a reference to a key on your keyboard where N is the key Enter means that you should type inthe information then press the Enter key Type is similar to Enter except that the word Enter follows the information to be typed e g type n Enter Pres
279. ess 0C005A123402 Session Type Terminated T1 100 msec 10 T2 msec 100 Ti 30 N3 1 Tw N2 Priority Band width Allocation Group Routing Subscriber ID 121000000 Connections Screen2 PASM TOBE OOP Op tion Figure 9 7 LLC2 Terminated Host Configuration Screen A A E D from Main Menu CE Pressing M will display a screen similar to Figure 9 8 NOL Configuring SNA 9 19 Node Name nod exyz SN ALLC2 Originated Session Configuration Screen 2 of 2 Host Number 1 A B C D EF G H I J Sq HSAP Local Sub Remote Sub TypeIDBLKIDNUMMaxDataMaxIn Dd 04 112100000011 6554433222 SDLC01700001 4105 128 04 112100000012 6554433223 SDLC01700002 4105 128 04 112100000015 6554433225 LLC2 04 112100000016 6554433226 SDLC01700003 265 7 04 112100000020 6554433228 LLC2 Option Figure 9 8 LLC2 Host Connections Screen This example shows a configuration for an Originated session A display CE for a Terminated session will not have columns E J as shown but instead Ng L will simply have column E Del In either case selecting Del after selecting a sequence Sq number will delete that line 9 20 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 LLC2 Host Parameters Table 9 4 LLC2 Host Parameters Valid Values Default Value valid MAC address 400000000001 Ori ginated Terminated 2 Terminated 1 250 100 5000 3 1 50 1 127 1 127 0 255 Priority 0 9 Bandwidth Allocation Group 1 16 Routing Subscriber ID up to 15
280. essage Under remote control Keyboard blocked by id n will be displayed where n is the Remote Control ID of the con trolling device After the operator presses F1 at the screen in Figure 2 3 and enters a password described on page 2 9 the Main Menu Figure 2 4 will appear 2 4 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Node Name node_xyzl Version n n n MAIN MENU A Configuration B Operations C Status Displays D Events E Statistics F Reports Option Figure 2 4 Main Menu This is the starting point for all menu operations The organization of the menus is shown in Appendix F Reviewing Boot Messages Getting Started As a SmartSwitch 1800 boots screen information assuming there is a screen verifies configuration file format and displays any errors This data is displayed only until the SmartSwitch software is running however it is saved ina file named BOOTRPT TXT and the operator can later display it This can be used as a tool to verify that startup of the node proceeded without errors If there is an error reported the data may aid in fixing the problem If the device is shut down then rebooted the existing BOOTRPT TXT file will be renamed BOOTBAK TXT and anew BOOTRPT TXT will be created BOOTRPT TXT and BOOTBAK TXT can be used as follows 1 Display and review the data from the current boot of the device 2 Address any reported problems 3 Re boot the device This copies the previous b
281. esses always point to the LLC2 Originated Host record and are the opposite of the respective local and remote subscriber addresses configured there Producing a Configuration Report A configuration report contains this information e Software version number e Passwords e Boot time e Various database parameter values e Line status for each port To create a configuration report press A at the Reports Menu or F A from the Main Menu The report is created and saved to the node s hard disk under the name REPORT TXT CE You cannot generate a configuration report while a file transfer is in progress AL To display the configuration report press B at the Reports Menu or F B from the Main Menu Introduction to Database Configuration 3 9 Where to Find Configuration Information The following shows where to find the configuration files among the menus The first item A Configuration is an entry on the Main Menu Following some items are the chapters appendices in this manual where the items below those entries are described A Configuration A Configure Node A Configure Password Chapter 2 allows changing the default login pass word Configure Time and Date Chapter 2 allows setting a correct time date that will be displayed on some screens and reports and will allow all SmartSwitch 1800s FRX4 6000s and 9W004s on a network to be in sync regarding reports and alarm messages that include the date an
282. eter will display a list of all serial protocols loaded in the device Physical Port Interface must be configured as follows For reference port locations are shown on page 6 1 e Port 0 is always RS 232 e Port 1 must be RS 232if the port is being configured for BSC e Ports 2 and 3 are determined by the attached cables RS 232 V 35 or RS 449 Blocked Port Flag will cause the port to be enabled N or disabled Y at node IPL The port will remain in that state until this parameter is changed or an on line enable B B C from the Main Menu or disable B B A from the Main Menu is performed Line Speed is the data trans mission rate in bits per second and the clock speed on a serial port when the port is a physical DCE i e the attached I O cable is DCE If this port is a physical DTE specify the line speed that matches as closely as possible that of the device connected directly to the port Retransmission Period is the length of time before the node will transmit an I frame if the previous trans mission is not acknowledged If the period expires the timer will be reset and a super visory frame will be transmitted demanding immediate acknowledgement The Maximum Retransmissions see that entry counter will also be incremented The default value of 2000 ms allows avoidance of unnecessary retransmission of frames that have merely been delayed Configuring BSC Interactive 10 5 10 6 Maximum Retransmissions
283. eued messages is the total number of frames queued Received frames per sec 10 is the numberof frames received per second over the five second reporting interval multiplied by 10 Transmitted frames per sec 10 is the number of frames transmitted per second over the five second reporting interval multiplied by 10 e Rejected frames per sec 10 is the number of frames rejected per second over the five second reporting interval multiplied by 10 e Retransmitted frames per sec 10 is the number of frames retransmitted per second over the five second reporting interval multiplied by 10 If the value is consistently greater than zero and there are no other problems you should increase the T1timer Retransmission Period in the Port record Configuring RLP Statistics Thresholds For each RLP statistic you can specify a threshold that when crossed causes an alarm to be sent to the collecting node Press A at the Statistics Menu When prompted for a Statistic level press Enter accepting the default of L for RLP A menu similar to the following figure will be displayed Node Name node xyz RLP Statistics Thresholds RLP 0 System Memory Percentage of Buffers in Use Number of Queued Messages Received framesS ec 10 Transmitted frames S ec 10 Rejected frames Sec 10 Retrans mitted Frames Sec 10 Option Figure 21 2 RLP Statistics Configuration Menu E A from Main Menu CE Chan
284. ev receive Clock TT from DTE 7 17 8 9 9 9 10 6 11 5 Reboot Remote F10 2 6 Receive Break Signal 12 4 Redirect on Busy 8 26 10 9 11 10 12 17 Redirect onOutof Order 8 26 9 16 10 9 11 10 12 17 Redirection Address 8 26 9 16 10 10 11 10 12 17 Remote control 19 1 Remote Control ID 4 3 Remote Control Pwd password 4 4 Remote DLCI 7 19 Remote file transfer 19 4 Remote Port 7 19 Remote RLP 7 19 Remote Software Update 19 5 Remote Sub 10 7 11 7 Remote Subscriber ID 4 7 9 10 9 25 REPORT TXT 3 9 Reset causes B 2 async A 5 Restart causes B 2 Retransmission Period Retry Count 12 12 Retry Interval 12 12 Retry Number 10 7 11 7 Retry Timer 10 7 11 7 Reverse Charge Acceptance 8 10 8 18 Review Model Information 5 2 Ring Frequency 13 4 Ring Speed 6 4 RIP Age Timer 15 14 RIP Enabled 15 14 RIP Flash Updates 14 10 RIP Full Updates 14 10 RIP Maximum Size 15 14 10 5 11 4 Idx 6 RIP Support 14 10 14 14 RIP table displaying 20 27 RIP Version 144 RIP version 14 3 RMetric 14 14 Route Destination 14 15 Route Type 14 15 Router 14 15 15 18 15 19 Router Address Value 15 7 Router Name 15 2 Routing Algorithm 8 25 9 15 10 9 11 9 12 16 Routing Metric Count 14 10 Routing Subscriber ID 9 24 Routing table IP displaying 20 25 RTS Control 7 17 8 10 RTS CTS H W Flow Control 12 12 S SAP Age Timer 15 14 SAP Enabled 15 14 SAP table displaying 20 28 SDLC PU disabling 19
285. everity 4 Meaning The IP Interface file has been updated Action None X 25 CUG File Updated CUGPAR DAT Severity 4 Meaning The Closed User Group file has been updated Action None SNMP Trap File Upd TRPPAR DAT Severity 4 Meaning The SNMP Trap Routing file has been updated Action None SNMP Community File Upd COMPAR DAT Severity 4 Meaning The SNMP Community Table file has been updated Action None RLP Buf Usage Under Threshold Severity 4 Meaning The situation that caused event 304 has ended Action None 22 15 465 RLP Msg Queued Under Threshold Severity 4 Meaning The situation that caused event 305 has ended Action None 466 RLP Rev Frm Sec Under Threshold Severity 4 Meaning The situation that caused event 306 has ended Action None 467 RLP Trn Frm Sec Under Threshold Severity 4 Meaning The situation that caused event 307 has ended Action None 468 RLP Rej Frm Sec Under Threshold Severity 4 Meaning The situation that caused event 308 has ended Action None 469 RLP Rtm Frm S Under Threshold Severity 4 Meaning The situation that caused event 309 has ended Action None 471 Rev Frm Sec Under Threshold Severity 4 Meaning The situation that caused event 311 has ended Action None 472 Tran Frm Sec Under Threshold Severity 4 Meaning The situation that caused event 312 has ended Action None 473 ReTran Frm Sec Under Threshold Sev
286. ew host This parameter is relevant only in aconnection to a 3174 or AS 400 type setup where a specific source SAP address is required Ifthe session will be run over a native LLC2 frame relay interface the parameter will be ignored Local MAC Address IDBLK identifies the local SmartSwitch to a NetView host Like the local SAP address this parameter is relevant only ina connection toa 3174 or AS 400 ty pe setup where a spe cific source MAC address is required If the session will be run over a native LLC2 frame relay interface the parameter will be ignored is used in conjunction with IDNUM in generating the Node field in an XID frame format 0 or 3 to establish a link station connection to the host A further explanation is provided under IDNUM IDNUM T1 Configuring Node Defaults is used in conjuction with IDBLK in generating the Node field in an XID frame format 0 or 3 to establish a link station connection to the host If 0 is specified for both IDBLK and IDNUM the Node field of the XID will be provided by the attached device The node will send an XID command to the remote node to indicate that the device should be polled for an XID is the Reply Timer which is used to detect the failure to receive a required acknowl edgment or response from the remote link station The link station will start the timer when it transmits one of these e an Information LPDU LLC protocol data unit e aCommandLPDU with the P bit
287. f the LLC2 session will be run over a native LLC2 frame relay interface the parameter will be ignored Local MAC Address identifies the PU to the host Like the local SAP address this parameter is relevant only in a connection to a 3174 or AS 400 type setup where a specific source MAC address is required If the LL C2 session will be run over a native LLC2 frame relay interface the parameter will be ignored Configuring SNA 9 11 9 12 IDBLK is used in conjunction with IDNUM in generating the Node field in an XID frame format 0 or 3 to establish a link station connection to the host A further explanation is provided under IDNUM IDNUM T1 T2 is used in conjuction with IDBLK in generating the Node fieldin an XID frame format 0 or 3 to establish a link station connection to the host If both IDBLK and IDNUM are set to 0 the Node field ofthe XID will be provided by the attached SDLC device The node will sendan XID command to the remote node to indicate that the SDLC device should be polled for an XID is the Reply Timer used to detect the failure to receive a required acknowledgment or response from the remote link station The link station will start the timer when it transmits one of these e an Information LPDU LLC protocol data unit e aCommandLPDU withthe P bit set to B 1 If this LPDU is sent while the timer is already running the link station will reset and restart it The link station will reset T1 whe
288. f this PVC The value is normally assigned by a system administrator Each LAN ID must be unique within the network on which this LAN IDs can also be configured in LLC2 Bridge Node Defaults M node will operate CAUITICN 16 15 Chapter 17 Configuring SNMP The SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol agent allows a network man agement station using internet protocol to obtain information from Cabletron frame relay access devices Access to the agent is through any IP interface including frame relay or X 25 ports configured for IP and LAN interfaces The agent handles get and for some fields set commands from the SNMP manager to provide topology information and node status This information is retrieved by calling it from the Management Information Base MIB The SmartSwitch 1800 supports parts of the Internet standard MIB II RFC 1213 as well as the frame relay MIB RFC 1315 the SDLC MIB RFC 1747 the X 25 MIBs RFC 1381 and 1382 and a Cabletron proprietary Netlink MIB The tree structures are shown in the MIB Reference Guide part number 09 41 06 149 which is available from Cabletron Systems Configuring SNMP System Defaults SNMP system defaults identify the local agent to the SNMP manager Press A at the SNMP Configuration menu to display the following screen Node Name node xyz SNMP DefaultsMenu A System Name B System Location C System Contact Option Figure 17 1 SNMP System Defaults Menu A A
289. face number as 0 There is no LAN card but the software code is shared with the Netlink FR X6000 which does have a card Configuring Static IPX Routes Routing of IPX traffic is handled dynamically by such protocols as RIP and SAP as well as via static routes configured in the SmartSwitch 1800 To display configured static routes press H at the Connections and Routing Paths Menu or A D H from the Main Menu To configure a route press I atthe Connections and Routing Paths Menu When prompted enter e Type 0 RIP or 1 SAP The defaultis 0 e Route Service Number 0 65535 The default is 0 This is simply an identifier The display will be similar to the RIP example in the following figure A SAP record will display different parameters 15 16 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Node Name node_xyz IPX Route Main tenance Type Route Number 3 Network A ddress 0000f0ac Hops 26 Transport Time 30 Router 00000000ff34 Interface 5 Option Figure 15 5 IPX RIP Route Record A D I from Main Menu IPX RIP Static Route Parameters Table 15 10 IPX RIP Static Route Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Network 1 fffffffe 4 bytes 00000001 Hops 0 65535 1 Transport Time 0 65535 1 Router O fffffffffffe 6 bytes 000000000001 Interface 0 note 0 1 The highest interface in the IPX Interface file Network is the IPX network address of the network containing the no
290. fault Value Dynamic Optimization is not currently supported Group n Percentage 0 100 Group n Excess Priority 0 16 Group n Use Excess Burst Y N Group n Percentage is a percentage of bandwidth that will be dedicated to traffic in a group if necessary If the traffic does not require the full allocation unused bandwidth will be available to other groups The total percentage assigned to all sixteen groups can be greater than 100 This allows allocating 100 to for example four or five groups that will be used for a par ticular type of traffic and 100 to another few groups and so on Since usage obvi ously cannot exceed 100 any allocation of greater than 100 will be treated as 100 with the percentages assigned to the affected groups treated as relative per centages For example assume that Group 1 is assigned 60 Group 2 is assigned 70 and both groups are assigned to IP interfaces Under a full traffic load Group 1 FRM Configuring Frame Relay 7 7 will be allocated 60 130 46 of the available bandwidth and Group 2 will be allo cated 70 130 54 Group n Excess Priority determines the order in which groups are given their allocations of bandwidth the higher the number the higher the priority Group n Use Excess Burst will Gf Y allow traffic that falls into the Excess Burst Size to be transmitted Any packets exceeding Be will be buffered in the SmartSwitch Configuration Example 7 8 Here i
291. figuration Menu and enter a 1 4 digit Connection ID which is simply anumber unique to this connection that identifies the PVC Node Name node_xyz PVC Maintenance Connection ID1 A PVC Type FRL to FRL B Connection Priority 0 C Traffic Type Connection Between Frame R day Port D Primary Name E Primary DLCI Primary RLP G Primary Port and Frame Relay Port H Secondary Name I Secondary DLCI Secondary RLP J Secondary Port Option Figure 7 8 Frame Relay PVC Configuration A D E B from Main Menu It does not matter which end of the PVC is configured first NTE 7 20 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Frame Relay PVC Parameters Table 7 5 Frame Relay PVC Parameters Primary Secondary DLCI 16 991 16 Primary Secondary RLP n a 0 Primary Secondary Port Voice models 0 3 Data only models 0 7 0 1 The DLCI must match the DLCI configured atthe remote end of the physical link Connection Priority prioritizes this connection for intra nodal traffic the higherthe number the higher the priority This priority has no effect on traffic exiting a node Priorities are configured on all logical interfaces that use a physical frame relay port The device processor in the node uses these priorities to help determine the order in which it will process protocols When configuring priorities be careful to consider the types of traffic being routed on other connections in the node CAU TICN Traffic Typ
292. figuring the central site as logical DCE allows the line monitor at that end to track incoming status enquiries from the DTE end O Additional Parameters D Configure DLCI Parameters DLCI ID 17 DLCI Backup Configuration A Backup Group Number 0 B Enable Backup Protocol Y E For Backup use Only N 7 4 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Example 2 In Example 2 the primary link is between Node 1 Port 2 DLCI 16 and Node 2 RLP 0 Port 0 DLCI 18 The DLCIs should be configured as described for Example 1 with the exception naturally of Node 2 RLP 0 Port 4 DLCI 17 with one difference when configuring Backup Group 10 see step 3 under example 1 set ProtEnab to N Then if the primary link goes down a connection will automatically be established between Node 1 Port 0 DLCI 17 and the Other Device Example 3 In Example 3 the configuration between Node 1 and Node2 is the same as in example 1 The Other Device must be configured to recognize both the primary and backup connections Required Configuration To run frame relay in a SmartSwitch 1800 make sure the following are properly con figured e Node parameters Chapter 4 This is general configuration that must be done no matter which protocols will be run in the node e Loaded protocols Chapter 5 frame relay and any others that will be trans mitted over the frame relay link e Frame Relay Bandwidth Allocation Groups page 7 6 if configuring multiple protoco
293. fines a route that will be used if no other route is found Route Destination is the IP address of the destination for host routes Destination Mask is the mask used for network routes It is used only during routing to identify the portion of the address associated with the network When an IP datagram is received the software masks off this portion of the overall address and searches for a match to the remaining address in the node s IP routing table If there is no match then the destination mask is checked If no match is found here either the default route 1fconfigured will be used If the default route is not con figured the datagram will be discarded and an error message will be sent to the source Configuring IP Routing 14415 Introduction Chapter 15 Configuring IPX The S martSwitch 1800 supports connections to Novell IPX networks for the purpose of routing traffic among LAN attached workstations and local remote servers over frame relay or X 25 or between local LANs The SmartSwitch 1800 supports IPX versions of RIP routing information protocol and SAP service advertising protocol providing end to end compatibility over a LAN or frame relay network via RFC 1490 with other IPX routers Filtering of different types of IPX traffic allows a network manager to select which IPX traffic will be allowed to enter and leave the wide area network WAN IPX is supported on Ethernet Token Ring 802 5 and frame
294. first port that has LCNs available is not busy If the port has failed the next available port will be selected 3 Least LCN with Throughput selects the line with the minumum loading cal culated by weight and number of LCNs in use on that line Each line is assigned a weight proportional to its throughput within the routing path If use of arouting algorithm is not desired simply accept the default and specify only one routing path Systematic Redirection will redirect if Y all calls to the altemate subscribers specified by the Redirection Addresses Consecutive attempts at call redirection will be made to each alternate sub scriber in the list until the call is completed Configuring BSC Batch 11 9 1140 Redirect on Busy will redirect calls Gf Y according to the Redirection Addresses if the primary sub scriber device is busy Redirect on Out of Order will redirects calls if Y according to the Redirection Addresses if the primary sub scriber device is out of order Connection Priority prioritizes intra nodal traffic the higher the number the higher the priority This pri ority has no effect on traffic exiting a node Priorities are configured on all logical interfaces that use a physical frame relay port The device processor in the node uses these priorities to help determine the order in which it will process protocols When configuring priorities be careful to consider the types of traffic
295. formation exchanged between link stations in different nodes The LPDU consists of destination service access point see DSAP and source service access point see SSAP address fields a control field and optionally information fields SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Glossary MAC stands for medium access control which is the second layer in the three layer ISO LAN protocol hierarchy The first layer is Physical and the third is LLC LLC is described in this glossary MAC supports medium dependent functions and uses the services of the physical layer to provide services to LLC M Bit is the more data bit in an X 25 packet and indicates that more information related to the packet will follow Modem stands for Modulat or demodulator whichis a device used to convert serial digital data into a signal suitable for transmission over a telephone line and to reconvert the analog signal from the phone line back into serial digital data Netlink is the famil y name of Cabletron s FRX4000 and FRX6000 frame relay access products as well as the name of Cabletron s proprietary MIB that applies to the FR X4000 FRX6000 SmartSwitch 1800 and Frame Relay Module Network is a series of points connected by communications channels NMVT stands for network management vector transport whichis an IBM service encoding used in sessions between a control point and a PU physical unit Node is a physical
296. from the user device by transmitting special characters that are used to switch DTE transmission on and off 0 no use of XON XOFF 1 use XON XOFF in data transfer 2 always use XON XOFF 06 PAD Service Signal provides the user s device with the ability to specify whether or not and in what format P AD service signals are transmitted Values can be added are 0 no service signals will be transmitted 1 service signals will be transmitted in standard format 4 prompt signal will be transmitted in standard format asterisk 5 service and prompt signals will be transmitted in standard format Some common service signals are listed in Appendix A 07 Receive Break Signal allows the selection of the operation of the PAD after receipt of a break signal from the user s device Values can be added are 0 noaction 1 PAD willsend an intermpt packet to the remote end but will remain in data transfer mode 2 PAD will reset the virtual call and remain in data transfer mode 124 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 4 PAD will send an indication of a Break message to the remote end and remain in data transfer mode 8 PAD will escape from data transfer mode and enter command mode 16 PAD will discard output 08 Discard Output allows a PAD to discard the contents of user sequences in packets on request rather than disassembling and transmitting these to the user s device 09 Padding After lt c
297. ftware does not verify that a specified port exists Make sure all specified ports are configured in the database Subscriber Name identifies the subscriber to the console operator Routing Algorithm allows creation of a hunt group of ports see example on page 8 22 for the purpose of routing per a pre selected algorithm 0 Round Robin selects ports specified cyclicly in numerical order according to the list of Redirection Addresses If the selected port is unreachable or con gested the Call Request will be sent to the next port If the port becomes available again it will be included in its assigned position 1 Alternate Route on Line Failure selects the first port that is not in a failed state If the selected port does not make a connection the call will be cleared even if other ports are available 2 Alternate Route on Line Busy selects the first port that has LCNs available is not busy If the port has failed the next available port will be selected 3 Least LCN with Throughput selects the line with the minumum loading cal culated by weight and number of LCNs in use on that line Each line is assigned a weight proportional to its throughput within the routing path If use ofa routing algorithm is not desired simply accept the default and specify only one routing path Systematic Redirection will redirect if Y all calls to the alternate subscribers specified by the Redirection Addresses
298. ful and the user is now connected to the network LOGIN REJ indicates that login was unsuccessful LOGOUT ACC is displayed when the PAD accepts a logout command LOGOUT REJ is displayed when the user attempts to log out but either the Port record was not configured to require login or a VC on this port has not yet been cleared OVERRUN ERROR indicates that the PAD is unable to cope with the rate at which characters are being received by the port resulting in loss of characters Enabling XON XOFF flow control async PAD profile parameter 5 usually corrects this error PAGE indicates that a page wait condition async PAD profile parameter 22 has occurred PARITY ERROR indicates a parity error on the port due to either noise on the channel or an incompatibility between the parity settings of the port and its connected device password is arequest to enter a password PROF ACC means the async PAD profile was accepted PROF REJ means the async PAD profile was rejected PVC ERR indicates that a Clear was received on a PVC port suggesting a possible abnormality in the port configuration RESET indicates a Reset received from the network RESET DTE means that the network has received a Reset from the remote DTE SET CMD DISALLOWED means Set Command was not allowed STAT ENGAGED is a response to the Status command indicating that a VC is cur rently set up on the port STAT FREE is are
299. function to LAN interfaces If LLC2 will run in the local node press B at the Configure IP LLC2 BRIDGE IPX Default Parameters Menu or A A E B from the Main Menu When prompted enter e Virtual LAN ID 0 fff hex The default is 000 LAN IDs can also be configured in LLC2 Interface Bridge Port records later in this chapter Each Virtual LAN ID must be unique among all LAN IDs throughout the network CAUIICN on which this node will operate e If also configuring Bridging in the node address the remaining parameters as described in Chapter 16 Otherwise press Enter accepting the default for each remaining parameter since they are not used for LLC2 9 17 Node Name nodexyz Configure Bridge LLC2 Node Defaults Virtual LAN ID Bridge Enabled Bridge Hello Time A B C D Bridge Max Age E Bridge Forward Delay F Bridge Aging Timer seconds G H I J K L Bridge Priority Max Size Bridge Forwarding Table IP Bridging Enabled IPX Bridging Enabled SRB ID Default Eth ernet Frame Type Option Figure9 5 LLC2 Defaults Configuration Screen A A E B from Main Menu Only item A applies to LLC2 Leave the remaining parameters at their default values NOL Configuring LLC2 Hosts Each SNA LLC2 host device that will connect to a SmartSwitch 1800 running LLC2 must be configured in the database To display any LLC2 hosts already configured for this node press C at the Configur
300. g the server identified by Server Name Node Address Value identifies the node to which the filter will be applied Socket Address Value is an IPX socket number that identifies a process or protocol Some Novell socket numbers are 0451 NCP Process 0452 SAP Process 0453 RIP Process 0455 NetBIOS Process 0456 Diagnostics Process Table 15 4 IPX Packet Filter Parameters Parameter Filter Name Packet Type Value Packet Type Mask Destination Network Value Destination Network Mask Destination Node Value Destination Node Mask Destination Socket Value Destination Socket Mask Source Network Value Source Network Mask Source Node Value Source Node Mask Source Socket Value Source Socket Mask Valid Values 1 31 characters 0 ff 1 byte O ff 1 byte O ffffffff 4 bytes O ffffffff 4 bytes O iffffffffffff 6 bytes O ffffffffffff 6 bytes O ffff 2 bytes O ffff 2 bytes O ffffffff 4 bytes O ffffftff 4 bytes O ifffffffffff 6 bytes O ffffffffffff 6 bytes O ffff 2 bytes O ffff 2 bytes Default Value none ff ff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffffffff ffi fffffffff ffff ffff ffffffff ffffffff fri fffffffff ffffffffffff 1 0451 Filter Name helps the user identify the filter The name is not used by the software 15 6 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Packet Type Value identifies the packet type 00 unknown packet type 01 RIP packet 04 SAP packet 05 SPX Sequ
301. gh suppression 5 very high suppression A larger suppression level saves composite bandwidth allowing more data channels to operate simultaneously with voice channels Auto Dial Parameters Auto Dial Enables or disables the auto dial feature of the SmartSwitch 1800 If auto dialing is enabled the SmartSwitch 1800 will dial configured Auto Dial Number when the handset attached to this Voice port is taken off hook Enabling this parameter will disable the variable length dialing feature for CS this channel regardless of the Dial Timer setting Nu Auto Dial Number is anumber to which the SmartSwitch 1800 will attempt to connect when the handset or its equivalent attached to this port is taken off hook if Auto Dial is set to Y The SmartSwitch will automatically dial the long form number defined in the speed dial map table configuration that is associated with the speed dial number speci fied here Configuring Voice 13 13 13 14 Auto Poll enables or disables auto polling if Auto Dial is set to Y When Auto Pollis enabled the SmartSwitch 1800 polls the destination device with the frequency specified by Auto Poll Timer If the poll is not acknowledged the SmartSwitch will busy out the channel This parameter can be useful in situations where the destination is an emer gency number that must always be available If the destination does not answer the automatic poll the busy out condition will notify an attached PBX that the e
302. ging a threshold changes the database value Press F7 to write the change to system memory NTL A threshold is either a number or a percentage depending on the statistic The valid range for any statistic is 0 65535 Default 0 When the measured value for the sta tistic crosses the threshold in either direction an alarm is generated 21 2 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Port Statistics Statistics Displays Node Name node_xyz PortS tatistics Report RLP 0 Port 1 Report Interval sec 5 Start Time 4 21 1997 09 41 49 CDSTATISTICS NAME DATE TIME Received frames Sec 10 4 21 1996 09 45 19 Transmitted frames Sec 10 4 21 1996 09 45 19 Retran frames Sec 10 4 21 4996 09 45 19 FCS errors Sec 10 4 21 1996 09 45 19 Logical rejects Sec 10 4 21 1996 09 45 19 Transmit error ratio 3 4 21 1996 09 45 19 Receive error ratio 4 21 1996 09 45 19 Percent Receive port util 4 21 1996 09 45 19 Percent Transmit p ort util 4 21 1996 09 45 19 F2 Next F4 Clear Max F9 Stop Remote F10 Reboot Remote Others Exit Figure 21 3 Port Statistics Display E B P from Main Menu CE Pressing F4 will reset the MAX maximum values to the CURR current values NTL Information in this Display Received frames per sec 10 number of frames received by the port per second over the five second reporting interval multiplied by 10 Transmitted frames per sec 10 number of frames transmitted by the
303. guration Bridge Port LLC2 Interface Number 0 Interface Type Ethernet Blocked Port Flag N Port Priority 128 Path Cost 100 Priority 0 LAN Card 0 Option Figure 16 5 Bridge Port Record Example A C EL D from Main Menu Bridge Port Parameters Configuring Bridging The following table lists parameters for all interface types Explanations of some parameters follow the table Table 16 8 Bridge Port LLC2 Interface Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Interface Type Ethernet TokenRing FRL FRL frame relay Blocked Port Flag Port Priority Native LLC2 format n a All other formats 0 128 Native LLC2 format n a All other formats 1 1000 Lan interface 62 LAN speed in Mb s FR int see note R 0 7 DLCI 16 991 Format Native LLC2 8025 SRB 8023 TB Native LLC2 Bandwidth Allocation Group 1 16 Host MAC Address valid host address 400000000001 Session Type Originated Terminated Originated LAN ID 000 fff hex 6 fff 1 Determined by line speed of frame relay port 16 13 16 14 2 Valid portnumbers depend on the model of SmartSwitch 1800 see port locations on page 6 1 Make sure the port is not configured in the Port record for backup use only 3 Make surethe DLCI is not part of a frame relay DLCI backup group Also make sure the DLCI is not the one configured on the port as a frame relay PVC 4 If Native LLC2 the interface can be used only for terminated LLC2 traffic 5 Confi
304. gured in LLC2 Host file 6 Must be unique among all LAN IDs throughout the network on which this node will operate Interface Type identifies whether the interface is on a LAN or a frame relay network Blocked Port Flag causes the port to be enabled N or disabled v at node IPL The interface will remain in that state until this parameter is changed and an on line update of the bridge port is performed Port Priority will become thefirst octet of the Port ID field in Spanning Tree Protocol messages The lower the number the higher the priority that the interface will be given among other interfaces in the spanning tree Path Cost is the cost of transmitting a frame through the port onto the LAN This cost deter mined by the speed of the LAN port the higher the speed the lower the cost will be added together with all other path costs on a specific link between source and desti nation devices The total will then be compared to other total path costs to determine the least expensive end to end path Priority prioritizes this interface for intra nodal traffic the higher the number the higher the priority This priority has no effect on traffic exiting a node Priorities are configured on all logical interfaces that use a physical frame relay port The device processor in the node uses these priorities to help determine the order in which it will process protocols Can This priority has no connection to Bridge Priority or
305. h two wire telco switching equipment e g a central office or the station side of an analog PB X The SmartSwitch 1800 can be configured for FXO by setting the Voice port parameter Telephony Interface Type to OPX FXS is a voice configuration that interfaces with two wire telco equipment such as tele phones The SmartSwitch 1800 can be configured for FXS by setting the Voice port parameter Telephony Interface Type to SLT Gateway is a port that provides access to a foreign network one that is not part of the local network HPAD is an integral to a SmartS witch 1800 SNA or BSC PAD connected to a host Hunt group is a designated group of ports that share incoming calls according to a pre defined algorithm ICMP stands for internet control message protocol which handles IP error and control messages Gateways and hosts use ICMP to report problems concerning datagrams back to the source Internet is an interconnected group of packet s witching networks joined by gateways sup porting the TCP IP protocol The term also refers to the DARPA Defense Advanced Projects Research Agency Internet Internet Protocol is the Internet standard protocol that defines the datagram as the basic unit of data transmitted across the internet stands for internet protocol glo 5 glo 6 IPL stands for initial program load which is the loading into a node of the operating software on power on or re boot
306. has been reached Action If this occurs frequently you may want to increase the level of Maximum Congestion specified in Node Defaults End of Congestion n events lost Severity 4 Meaning The Minimum Congestion level has been reached See event 414 Action None SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 System Events 416 417 426 428 429 430 431 PAD Autocall Retries Exhausted Severity 3 Meaning The async PAD retry timer has expired without a connection being established Action None however if this occurs with any frequency you may want to increase the timer Retry Count or check the remote async device for problems Frame Relay Link Failed Severity 1 Meaning The physical link is down Action Check the cables for secure connections and proper operation PU Status p n stn Ox n status z n Severity 2 Meaning The SDLC PU status has changed Action None Duplicate of DLCI n on Port Severity 3 Meaning Eachconnection sharing a DLCI must be ona different logical port and two records have been configured specifying the same logical port on one DLCI DLCIs are configured in records for logical ports IP LLC2 IPX interfaces over frame relay Bridge ports and frame relay PVCs Only one ofthe duplicate connections will come up Action Check the database records for the duplicate configuration and change one or more of the records File Update FRDLCI DA
307. hat RTS and CTS are not high then it raises DCD and starts transmitting When transmission is done the DCE drops DCD RTS and CTS are low during this period For both Full and Half L1 Duplex the DTE raises DTR and the DCE raises CS DSR The link is considered up when both DTR and DSR are high NOH Make sure this parameter is configured correectly or the PU will not become active CAUTICN PU Subscriber Parameters PU Name identifies the PU to an SNMP or NetView host identifies the PU to an SNMP or NetView host Local Subscriber ID identifies the local device A Subscriber ID record see page 9 14 must also be con figured for this ID Remote Subscriber ID identifies the remote device A SubscriberID record see page 9 14 must also be con figured for this ID If the PU is one end of a connection to a logical X 25 port in the S martSwitch this address must match a Subscriber ID configured for the logical port 9 10 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Maxdata must correspond to the PIU size configured on the host parameter MAXDATA of macro PU in VTAM For a link between a PU type 4 and a PU type 2 the frame size configured for the TPAD port must be set at the value of MAXDATA in VTAM plus 6 bytes corresponding to the length of the link header and the link trailer Autocall causes automatic calling between SNA ports when the controller identified by Link Address becomes active If set to Y on an SNA po
308. hat no status will be sent If 0 the connection will remain active continuously Continuous retries until connection is established PUn Node Name is displayed at the upper right of the screen when the device is being controlled by the local keyboard and monitor If the local operator is controlling a remote Cabletron frame relay access device the Remote Control ID of that device will be displayed as the local Node Name Remote Control ID Configuring Node Defaults is required if a remote Cabletron frame relay access device or async terminal will be used to take control of the local SmartSwitch 1800 via a physical or logical portin the local device The ID will be checked against the called address fields of incoming Call Requests The remote device can be a terminal connected to an async PAD port on aremote Cabletron frame relay access device or the remote device itself 4 3 Make sure that each Cabletron frame relay access device on the same network is assigned a different Remote Control ID CAUTICN Remote Control Pwd is a password used in conjunction with the Remote Control ID and will be checked against the user data field of a Call Request packet Both the Remote Control ID and the password must match what is expected or the SmartSwitch will not accept a request for remote control File Transfer ID is used for file transfers see page 19 4 to or from this SmartSwitch The ID will be checked against the called a
309. he connection Logical and physical DCE DTE are independent of each other e g a port can be a physical DCE and logical DTE Generate Clock specifies whether the port will generate the clock necessary to synchronize traffic over the link If the port is a physical DCE determined by the port s I O cable interface set this parameter to Y since the physical DCE generates clock If the port is DTE set the parameter to N SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Rev Clock TT from DTE allows the clock to be looped back from the DTE using the TT Terminal Timing signal which can be helpful on high speed lines Generally if the local interface is physical DCE and the line speed is above 256 Kbps this parameter should be set to Y Make sure the remote DTE is configured to provide the terminal timing CSU DSU Operating Mode determines whether the attached modem connection can be normal or limited distance LDM where the distance depends on the wire gauge number of splice points and line speed For example 26 gauge wire and a line speed of 64K bps allows a distance of 15000 feet Lowering the speed to 56K increases the allowable distance to 18400 feet If 19 gauge wire is used the distances can be multiplied by three RTS Control if configured as Constant means that RTS Request to Send will always be asserted if configured as External the CSU DSU will control RTS Link Layer Management determines whether and what type of
310. he node will delay acknowledgment ofa received I frame if there is no outgoing I frame to be sent If during this period the node receives an I frame for transmission the acknowledgment will be sent with it and the delay timer will be reset T3 Link Alive Period is the length of time after which the node will poll its counterpart if there is no data transfer Logical DCE defines the port as if Y logical DCE or if N DTE The other end of the connection must be the opposite of this port Logical DCE DTE is independent of physical A node connecting a subscriber device into a network should normally be configured as logical DCE Lowest Highest Incoming Two Way Outg oing Channel are the ranges of logical channel numbers LCNs that subscribers can use for calls through this port The valid values for each parameter are determined as follows Channel Valid Values Lowest Incoming 1 through Highest Incoming Highest Incoming Greater than equal to Lowest Incoming Lowest 2 Way Greater than Highest Incoming Highest 2 Way Greater than equal to Lowest 2 Way Lowest Outgoing Greater than Highest 2 Way Highest Outgoing Lowest Outgoing through 4095 Changing any parameter to a value that violates this order automatically changes any other values now in violation specifying the first value s within the valid range If any pair is not used its constraints apply to the next higher or lower pair whichever is appropriate in the above list
311. he remote device sent an invalid N r and a Frame Reject was returned Action None 746 LLC 2 FRMR Sent IFLD too long Severity 2 Meaning The remote device sent an I frame that was too long and a Frame Reject was retumed Action None 747 LLC 2 FRMR Sent no reason Severity 2 Meaning Self explanatory Action None 748 LLC 2 FRMR Revd no reason Severity 2 Meaning Self explanatory Action None 759 Excessive Link CRC errors Severity 2 Meaning Self explanatory The line will be shut down and re establishment will be re tried one every minute Action None 761 SDLC Transmit link error Severity 2 Meaning Self explanatory The line will be shut down and re establishment will be re tried later Action None 762 SDLC Link Stn rev FRMR Unexp IFLD Severity 2 Meaning The remote station received an S or U frame with an unexpected I frame attached Action None System Events 22 29 Section IV Appendices Appendix A Async Terminal Operations Before establishing an end to end link an async terminal must make a connection to the async PAD as follows 1 Once the SmartSwitch 1800 async terminal and any modems in the link are powered on do this at the terminal e If aspecific line speed is configured in the Port record go to step 2 e If the async PAD port is configured in the Port record for autobaud and parity auto detect press Enter then then Enter
312. hes the user dialed number and continues the search If another map table entry with wildcard s is encountered the SmartSwitch compares the two entries and retains the entry that most closely matches the user dialed number This process continues until the entire map table has been searched and compared If there is no exact match in the map table the entry with the wildcard s that most closely matches the user dial number is used For example assume that map table entries have been defined for speed dial numbers 3 333 and 33 If the user dials 3330 the first mapping table entry 3 will be recorded as a match When the second entry 333 is encountered the S martSwitch will discard the first entry because 333 more closely matches the user dialed entry 3330 When the S mart Switch encounters the third map table entry 33 it will retain and use the second mapping table entry because 333 more closely matches 3330 than 33 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Telephony Interface This section describes the telephone interfaces that are supported by the SmartSwitch 1800 and provides additional information on the tie line signaling standards and the E amp M interface Telephone Interfaces The SmartSwitch 1800 supports three types of telephone interfaces OPX SLT and E amp M Figure C4 shows the different types of telephone interfaces that are supported by SmartSwitch 1800s Figure C 4 Trunk and Station Connection
313. his DLCI connects for normal operation A remote RLP does not need to be configured if the remote deviceis another Smart Switch 1800 or an FR X4000 The primary and all of its backup DLCIS in a non initiating FRX6000 FRM must be on the same RLP CAUTICN Switchover Timer is the time the initiating node will wait after detecting a primary DLCI failure before it checks for available backups Switchback Timer is the time the initiating node will wait before switching from the backup to the primary DLCI after the primary becomes active again If set to the maximum of 65565 the backup will not switch to the primary unless it the backup fails FRM Configuring Frame Relay 7 19 Time to Hold Data While Waiting is the time the node will queue data while waiting for a backup DLCI to become active If neither a backup nor the primary has not become active when this timer expires the data will be discarded Configuring Frame Relay PVCs Across the Node A SmartSwitch 1800 PVC isa permanent connection between two physical ports in the node This allows communication between the attached devices as soon as they are powered up without the need to first establish a connection To display a list of current PVCs press A at the PVC Configuration Menu or A D E A from the Main Menu The display will list PVCs of all supported types frame relay X 25 async and async to X 25 To add or change a PVC press B at the PVC Con
314. his chapter allows short nicknames to be assigned to subscriber addresses to ease entry of addresses PVC connections page 12 18 which create permanent connections between two ports in the node A PVC can be created between two async ports or between an async port and an X 25 port Configuring Async PAD Profiles 12 2 Anasync PAD profile is a specific set of X 3 parameters whose values define the oper ation of the device connected to an async PAD port on a SmartSwitch 1800 Different profiles contain the same parameters but with difference s in the values To display a list of existing PAD profile names and descriptions press A at the Async PAD Configuration Menu or A A F A from the Main Menu Note that the database contains one profile 90 which is a CCITT profile used for connecting ter minals to the PAD Changing a value in a profile in effect creates a new profile Unless you want to affect every device assigned that profile create a new profile instead of changing an existing one Do not CAUIICN change profile 90 since this is a CCITT standard To addor change a profile press B at the Async PAD Configuration Menu and enter the desired profile name 1 10 uppercase characters to display the first of two screens of parameters listed in Table 12 1 Press PgDn at the first screen to display the second screen Press PgUp at the second screen to return to the first screen or F3 to retum to the Node
315. ic load than the configured Bandwidth Allocation Group would allow so the node adjusted the bandwidth allocated to this trunk Action None IPX Route File Upd IPXRSUB DAT Severity 4 Meaning The IPX Route file has been updated Action None Alloc Error on Master SNMP Agent Severity 1 Meaning A buffer could not be allocated to process an SNMP message Action None BPAD Invalid Pkt n PL Severity 3 Meaning An invalid packet has been received disabling the port Action Re enable the port B A C from the Main Menu BPAD Invalid MSG n Link Severity 3 Meaning An invalid message has been received disabling the port Action Re enable the port B A C from the Main Menu BPAD Invalid MSG n Exchange Severity 3 Meaning An invalid message has been received disabling the port Action Re enable the port B A C from the Main Menu BPAD Invalid CUA n DUA n Severity 3 Meaning An invalid message has been received disabling the port Action Re enable the port B A C from the Main Menu 22 19 22 20 505 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 LINK Invalid MSG fc n BPAD Severity 3 Meaning An invalid message has been received disabling the port Action Re enable the port B A C from the Main Menu BSCI Invalid control block Severity 3 Meaning An error has occured and has disabled the port Action
316. ic being routed on other connections in the SmartS witch CAUITICN Subscriber Name identifies the subscriber to the console operator The software does not use this infor mation Logical Channel is a logical link between the node and the subscriber The physical line may have a number of logical channels An LCN assigned to a port in a PVC must be lower than the lowest LCN specified for any SVC subscriber on the same port Port specifies the port at each end of the PVC Packet Size allows setting a packet size for each end of the PVC Generally the same packet size will be configured on the port ateach end as well as in the PVC Window Size allows setting a window size for each end of the PVC Generally the same window size will be configured on the port at each end as well as in the PVC Configuring X 25 8 33 Introduction Chapter 9 Configuring SNA SNA supportin the SmartSwitch 1800 includes SDLC for serial lines and LLC2 for LAN connections SNA ports are used to connect IBM hosts with PUs physical units over a frame relay via RFC1490 or X 25 via Annex G network SDLC to LLC2 and LLC2 to SDLC conversion are performed for transmission over frame relay Devices attached to SmartSwitch 1800 SNA ports can also communicate with any QLLC compatible devices that have integral X 25 interfaces e g NPSI on IBM 3725 3745 SDLC support includes Configurable frame size Configurable link addresses NRZ NRZI support
317. ically disabled on a PVC connection 1243 12 14 Disconnect if Clear Sent determines whether the user will be logged out if he sends a Clear to the network Also if Disconnect Timer and Disconnect Duration are set to values other than 0 the modem signals will be dropped when the user is logged out This parameter is automatically disabled on a PVC connection Async PAD Type defines the PAD type for transparent polled multipoint async operation 0 normal X 3 1 HPAD 2 TPAD Devices Connected is the number of devices connected to the async port This value must be 1 for X 3 PAD and TPAD Assemble Full Message assembles if Y incoming packets from the remote device assuming M bit is set into acomplete message before forwarding it to the local async device This function works only if the M bit is set in packets from the remote device CAUTICN Data Forwarding Criteria specifies as currently implemented that the async PAD profile parameters will determine when data is forwarded Special Forwarding Char is not implemented in the current release Dynamic Signaling Action is not implemented in the current release SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Configuring Subscriber Addresses This operation creates records for the called and calling addresses that will be used in call setup To complete the connection the software must recognize where the call is coming from calling address and where it is going c
318. ice then set automatically NOTE SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Initial Profile Name is an async PAD profile see page 12 2 that will be in effect on this port until the user of the async device logs into the PAD at which time the profile in the PAD Logins record see page 12 7 becomes effective If N is selected in the Port record for Login Required the profile in the Port record is always in effect If the specified profile is not defined in the database the default profile 90 will be in effect Login Required determines whether or not async PAD users will be required to log in before con necting with this port If Y the user will be prompted to log in and must enter a Login ID and Login Password see page 12 7 or an Abbreviated Address see page 12 17 Parity determines the type of parity checking that will be used on incoming data Pressing K at the Port screen changes the value to the next one in the list 0 None 1 Auto detect 2 Even 3 Odd The S martSwitch 1800 supports 8 data bits with no parity checking or 7 data bits with even or odd panty checking They also support 7 data bits MOTE with auto detect parity checking if X 3 Line Speed is set to Autobaud and PAD profile 21 is configured to check parity Make sure the data bits and parity settings will match throughout the connection CAUITICN DCE Cable Attached identifies whether the port will act as a physical DCE DCE Cable Attached Y or DT
319. ice capable of interpreting event messages Events parameters are set in Node Defaults A A C from the Main Menu The message file ERRMSG TXT contains the format of events for message construction Configuration To configure a SmartSwitch 1800 to collect events from other Cabletron frame relay access devices SmartS witch 1800 FRM FRX4000 FRX6000 do the following in Node Defaults described in Chapter 4 I Set Collecting Node to Y The default setting is N so the parameter may have to bereconfigured Configure Max Congestion and Line Idle Timer according to the guidelines in Chapter 4 Specify a Collecting Node ID and Collecting Node Pwd Password Keeping the default password is recommended These will be used by other nodes to place a call If you want this node to route all events including its own to another device such as a printer specify a Primary Alarm Output ID and Primary Alarm Output Pwd Password Keeping the default password is recommended Note that the password serves no function if a printer is specified If you wantthis node to route all events to a second device as well as that defined in step 3 specify a Secondary Alarm Output ID and Secondary Alarm Output Pwd Password Keeping the default password is recommended At each node that will send its events to the collecting node 1 2 Set Collecting Node to N the factory default setting Specify the Primary Alarm Output ID
320. ide Rev 01 Parameter Descriptions Descriptions of Parameters Common to All Interface Types Blocked Port Flag causes the IPX interface to be enabled N or disabled Y at node IPL The port will remain in that state until this parameter is changed Interface Type Supported types are Ethernet 802 5 Token Ring X 25 and Frame Relay Frame Type TYPE Il matches Novell s Ethernet II frame type RAW matches Novell s Ethernet_802 3 frame type LLC matches Novell s Ethernet 802 2 or Token Ring frame type SNAP matches Novell s Ethernet SNAP or Token Ring SNAP frame type Maximum Transmission Unit is the maximum frame size in bytes that can be transmitted or received over the IPX interface Any frames larger thanthe Maximum Transmission Unit MTU will be dis carded If the MTU is less than the size of a minimal datagram the value will auto matically change to the minimal datagram size IPX Network Address identifies the local interface to the Novell network Priority prioritizes this subscriber for intra nodal traffic the higher the number the higher the priority This priority has no effect on traffic exiting a node Priorities are configured on all logical interfaces that use a physical frame relay port The device processor in the node uses these priorities to help determine the order in which it will process protocols When configuring priorities be careful to consider the types of traffic being routed on other c
321. iden tifier there must be a method of telling IP of the modification This is done with a subnet mask The mask is created by taking the 32 bit binary IP address then sub stituting a 1 for every bit that identifies the network or a subnet and a 0 for every bit that identifies a node When IP applies this mask to an actual IP address it can see which bits identify the subnet and which identify the node IP already knows the network s class and therefore which bits identify the network Using the Node as an IP Gateway A SmartSwitch 1800 can function as an IP gateway and forward IP packets This requires that IP be configured and loaded in the Protocols file described in Chapter 5 14 2 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Required Configuration To run IP in a SmartSwitch 1800 make sure the following are properly configured Node parameters Chapter 4 This is general configuration that must be done no matter which protocols will be run in the node Loaded protocols Chapter 5 IP RIP and the transport protocol frame relay or X 25 LAN port page 6 5 that will connect to the LAN s Frame relay Chapter 7 or X 25 Chapter 8 port s that will connect to a network or frame relay PVC IP parameters described in this chapter Configuring IP Node Defaults Each SmartSwitch 1800 device supports one of three versions of the Routing Infor mation Protocol RIP which used by IP to update routing tables The de
322. ied out and the packet continues toward its destination using the routing tables defined by SVC Subscriber configu ration If the packet does not match the template it is not accepted An outgoing packet is checked just before it leaves the node If it matches the tem plate a translation is carried out if it does not match it continues unchanged The hunt group function is performed within the routing table process so to handle outbound packets a port that is part of a hunt group needs a set of templates that is specific to that port This allows a different set of outbound translations for each port Address translation is especially useful in providing backup routing via a public data network PDN as represented in the following example Primary route failed Node 1 VA Node 2 ae x F p Mi cree SY Backup route over PDN E Figure 8 8 Backup Using Address Translation 8 26 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Configuring X 25 To resolve any differences in addressing conventions the backup path invokes a trans lation of the called and calling addresses The SmartSwitch 1800 compatible called and calling addresses are transl ated into PDN compatible called and calling addresses Node 2 has a translation template defined to intercept packets with the PDN com patible calling address for node 1 It translates these into the SmartSwitch 1800 com patible calling address for node 2 The backup routing is transparent
323. ifies the PU and must match the ADDR parameter set in the macro PU in the VTAM config uration The station address is usually set to C1 for point to point SDLC lines and in series C1 C2 C3 etc for multidrop lines e Name PU name configured in the PU parameters in the SNA Port record e State will beone of these Active Inactive Never Activated Pending Contact waiting for Normal Response Mode 999 20 20 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Pending Discontact waiting for Normal Disconnect Mode Inoperational due to failure of a higher resource e g port Displaying Voice Interfaces To display status of the two Voice interfaces press H at the Protocol Status Displays Menu or C F H from the Main Menu Node Name node_xyz Voice Interface Dis play Menu Page 1 Interface PerNode ACTPeer ACTPeer Number Status Type Node Port RLP Port DLCI Bag Pri t 1 Inactive S S1800 2 1 0 3 44 5 PgUp PgDn F3 Exit F2 Up date Figure 20 11 Voice Interfaces Display C FL H from Main Menu Information in this Display All of the information is this display except Status comes from the Voice Interfaces file See page 13 17 e Interface Number identifies the interface This is the number specified when an interface database record is created e Status will be one of the following On Hook Off Hook Call Active a call has been placed and answered e Pending the c
324. igure Frame Relay Backup Groups SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 F Configure Voice Application Chapter 13 defines operating parameters for the two Voice ports Voice System Configuration Review Voice Speed Dial Map Configure Voice Speed Dial Map Configure Physical Ports Review Voice Interfaces Configure Voice Interfaces moov Introduction to Database Configuration 3 13 Chapter 4 Configuring Node Defaults Node Defaults are a set of parameters that identify a SmartSwitch 1800 for purposes of remote control software updates file transfers and or alarm reporting to or from other Cabletron frame relay access devices SmartSwitch 1800 9W004 FRX4000 FR X6000 and define connections between the SmartSwitch 1800 and a NetView manager device Press C at the Node Configuration Menu to display a screen similar to Figure 4 1 This is the first of three Node Defaults screens pressing PgDn or PgUp will change the display among the three screens The first two screens contain parameters that apply to all users The third screen con tains parameters used in sessions between a NetView host and the Net View service point function in the Smart Switch 1800 If the NetView function will not be used the third screen does not have to be configured Node Name node xyz Node Defaults Configuration Screen 1 of 3 Database System Memory Node Name node xyz node xyz Remote Control ID Remote Con trol Pwd Kile Transfe
325. igured this state means that the port has received a Full Status Response from the DCE frame relay switch as a result of a Full Status Enquiry sent by the SmartSwitch 1800 Ona frame relay logical DCE port this state means thatthe port has received a Full Status Enquiry from the attached DTE SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Disabled The link has been broken by the Disable Port operation at the On Line Control menu Disconnect For X 25 level 1 is up but level 2 cannot be established For SNA HPAD no XID or SNRM command frame has been received for any link address configured for the HPAD subscriber Configured The port is configured in the database but has been disabled Dial Ready The X 25 dial port is ready to transmit or receive calls Quiesced The port has been quiesced described on page 19 12 Failed Some modemcontrols are not present and the physical link is down e State for Voice ports Configured The portis configured in the database but has been disabled On Hook Self explanatory Dialing Self explanatory Wait on Accept The number has been dialed but the device atthe remote end has not yet established a connection Call Active A call has been placed and answered Pnd on Hook The device at the remote end has been placed on hook while the call was in progress Failed The physical link is down Displaying Virtual Connections Status Displays T
326. ilarly the PBX generates the M signal by sourcing a current to the tie line equipment which detects it via a resistive load The Type I interface requires that the PBX and tie line equipment share a common signaling ground reference This can be achieved by connecting signal ground from the PBX to the SG lead pin 8 of the RJ45 connector Voice Configuration Reference Information C 15 Type Il Type Ill Type IV Type V The Type II interface requires no common ground instead each of the two signals has its own return For the E signal the tie line equipment permits current to flow from the PBX the current returns to the PB X s groundreference Similarly the PBX closes a path for current to generate the M signalto the tie line equipment A variation of Type II Type HI uses the SG lead to provide common ground With this configuration the PB X drops the M signal by grounding it rather than by opening a current loop Type IV is symmetricandrequires no common ground Each side closes a current loop to signal the flow of current is detected via a resistive load to indicate the presence of the signal Type V is a simplified version of Type IV This is also a symmetric interface using only two wires Type V requires a common ground between the PBX and the tie line equipment this is provided via the SG leads E amp M Grounding Considerations Proper grounding is essential for correct operation of telephone equipment in E
327. ildcard mapping e Start and delay E amp M signaling e Group III V 17 V 27 and V 29 facsimile support with primary rate of 14 4 Kbps and fallback rates as low as 2 4 Kbps Three majorconfigurable components of the SmartSwitch 1800 are involved in setting up a voice call over frame relay e Voice ports channels which connect to telephony equipment e Speed long dial table which assigns user defined short speed dial numbers to longer numbers e Voice interfaces which designate frame relay DLCIs for voice data trans mission Calls are routed between voice ports and frame relay ports by internal mapping using the dial table that reads the destination node number for a voice call and associates it with a voice interface The voice interface record includes an associated frame relay port and DLCI over which the Call Request frame will be sent to the destination node The SmartS witch 1800 cancombine voice and data frames over the same frame relay DLCI In the current release of software splitting the voice and data at the other end requires a connection to another Cabletron frame relay device FR X4000 FRX6000 9W 004 or SmartS witch 1800 That device must be configured with a PVC between the network frame relay port and the frame relay port that will transmit only the voice frames Once the data and voice frames have been separated in the Cabletron frame relay device each data frame will be routed based onthe DLCI configuration a
328. ill remain valid 2 9 Stopping Operation Logging Out If you have been working within menu operations and wish to log out press F4 at the Main Menu The Port Status Display screen will be displayed with any updates The software will continue to run but only those who know the password will be able to gain access to the menus You must press F1 and enter the password to get back into the Main Menu Rebooting To reboot from within the menu level press F10 When asked Reboot press Y Youcannot reboot the device from the initial Port Status Display You must 7 first press F1 and enter the password to get to the Main Menu Nr Rebooting the node clears all connections If you do not want to do this simply press F4 to log out then leave the device running CAUTIEN Shutting Down To shut down a SmartSwitch 1800 unplug it from its power source Make sure all users of the device are aware that it will be shut down CAUTIEN What Next Once you are familiar with the menus and how they work proceed to Section II to con figure the database 2 10 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Section Il Configuration Chapter 3 Introduction to Database Configuration Each SmartSwitch 1800 contains its own configuration database which contains information identifying the hardware components and defines the operating param eters of the hardware and software Each database file contains defining parameters for
329. ill be reset then established NOIL on the backup To review existing backup groups press A at the Frame Relay Backup Groups Con figuration Menu or A E A from the Main Menu To configure a backup group press B at the Frame Relay Backup Groups Configu ration Menu When prompted enter a Frame Relay Backup Group Number 1 255 The default is 1 Backup Group Parameters 7 22 Table 7 6 Frame Relay Backup Group Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Entry 0 9 0 Port Voice models 0 3 Data only models 0 7 0 DLCI 16 991 1 1 6 WaitTimer 0 65535 seconds 20 ProtEnab Y N IN 2 Delete allows deleting anentry n a n a 1 The DLCI must have already been created in the Port record Also a DLCI cannot be assigned to more than one backup group nor can it be assigned to a backup group if itis a primary DLCI one that will be backed up 2 See explanation is simply an identifier is the physical port on which the backup DLCI is being configured is the backup being configured WaitTimer is the time after a primary DLCI failure that the software will wait for this DLCI to become active before checking the next backup DLCI If the backup does not become SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 active before the timer expires the software will search the backup group for the next available backup ProtEnab enables if Y the backup protocol on the specified DLCI It should be set to Y if
330. ilters see next item that are configured on the SmartSwitch B Configure IPX Filter Definitions Chapter 15 specifies parameters for transmission of RIP and SAP updates and or generic IP X packets per interface and direction C Review IPX Filter Applications Chapter 15 displays information on any IPX filter applications see below configured on the SmartSwitch D Configure IPX Filter Applications Chapter 15 applies IPX filters to interfaces filter ty pes directions SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 F E On Line Update IPX Filter Definitions and Applications Chapter 15 allows updating the S martSwitch with any changes without rebooting F Review Bridge Filter Definitions Chapter 16 displays any Bridge filters see next item that have been configured on the SmartSwitch G Configure Bridge Filter Definitions Chapter 16 specifies parameters for regulation of bridge traffic by filtering MAC addresses NetBIOS names SAP updates etc H Review Bridge Filter Applications Chapter 16 displays information on any bridge filter applications see below configured on the SmartSwitch Configure Bridge Filter Applications Chapter 16 applies bridge filters to interfaces filter t ypes directions J On Line Update Bridge Filter Definitions and Applications Chapter 16 allows updating the S martSwitch with any changes without rebooting G On Line Update Dynamic Routing Parameters misc
331. ine when prompted enter the RLP and port numbers r rmm P Allows tracing a selected SDLC polling address when you are performing level 2 tracing of an SDLC port Selecting P will display the message SDLC Station Address to filter FF All Q Enables disables display of X 25 QData packets R Enables disables display of X 25 Restart Reset packets on an X 25 port or LMI DLCI information on a frame relay port Only the sequence numbers will be displayed for Link Integrity Verification messages on a frame relay port S Updates and redisplays the Display Selectionis message shown above T Enables disables timestamps hours minutes seconds milliseconds and lengths of packets Enables disables interpretation of classified frames LLC2 and LAPB Y Enables disables classification of RFC1490 frames by PID 2 Enables display of all LAPB SDLC and BSC level 2 frames if appropriate tothe port Note that you cannot monitor level 2 X 25 logical ports with this option use option 3 instead 3 Changes LAPB SDLC and BSC display see 2 above back to level 3 i e LAPB to X 25 SDLC to QLLC BSCI to DSP BSCB to DQ F3 Exits Line Monitor mode Pending display of Datapackets the line monitor stores them ina buffer If the display cannot keep up with the line s data traffic the buffer will overflow and some packets will not be displayed When this occurs the message Line Monitor Buffer is Full appears Buffer overflow d
332. ion bit set and b Enable Outgoing Rate Control is Y Committed Burst Size In Out Bc is incoming or outgoing depending on the parameter the maximum amount of data that the network agrees to transferundernormal conditions within the time period defined by Bc CIR Any data exceeding Bc will have the Discard Eligibility DE bit turned on and will be tracked by the SmartS witch 1800 statistic DE sec 10 Turning on the DE bit will not automatically cause a packet to be discarded but will tell the network which packets it can discard if traffic becomes too heavy Excess Burst Size In Out Bz is the incoming or outgoing depending on the parameter maximum amount of data in excess of the Committed Burst Size that the network will attempt to transfer during the time interval used for the Committed Burst Size Any outgoing data exceeding this value will be buffered in the SmartSwitch 1800 and any incoming data exceeding the value will be discarded BECN Recovery Count is a method of controlling the rate of return to maximum traffic flow after it has been reduced due to congestion If a packet is received with the BECN backward explicit congestion notification bit set outgoing traffic will be throttled back to CIR and the effective value of Be will become 0 li mting traffic flow to the configured Bc From Won Wow that point on for each n packets where n is the value of BECN Recovery Count 7 18 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User
333. ion LPDU LLC protocol data unit e a Command LPDU with the P bit set to B 1 If this LPDU is sent while the timer is already running the local node will reset and restart it The node will reset T1 when it receives one of these e AREJ Reject LPDU provided a Command LPDU with the P bit set to B 1 is not outstanding e A Response LPDU with the F bit set to B 1 e An Information or Supervisory LPDU with an Np greater than the last Ng received and less than or equal to the line station s Vs provided a Command LPDU with the P bit set to B 1 is not outstanding If additional LPDUs are set from the remote station after the local node has reset T1 the timer will be restarted if acknowledgments of or responses to those LPDUs are out standing If no acknowledgments responses are outstanding the local node will start the inactivity timer See Ti later If T1 expires and acknowledgments responses are still outstanding the local node will send one of the following then restart T1 e A Supervisory LPDU with the P bit set to B 1 to solicit remote link station status e Any Unnumbered LPDUS that were not responded to the first time they were sent If acknowledgments responses are still outstanding after N2 tries see that entry the local node will declare the link inoperative The value specified for T1 should allow for any delays introduced by the MAC sub layer e g queuing is the Receive Acknowledgment Timer
334. iration of the Inactivity Timer Line Setup Timer is started when the port enters Linkup state If the timer expires before there is a response from the other end the port will enter Failed state Configuring a Logical X 25 Port To display all logical ports configured on the SmartSwitch 1800 press A D E A from the Main Menu This will display a list of all PVCs and logical ports To configure a logical port press A C D from the Main Menu When prompted enter e Frame Relay Port Default is 0 This is the physical port on which the logical port will reside Valid port numbers depend on the model of SmartSwitch 1800 see port locations on page 6 1 e Logical Port 8 63 Default is 8 The display for an existing port will show the configured parameter values while the display for a new port will contain default database values shown in the following figure Node Name node xyz Logical Port Parameters screen 1 of 4 RLP 0 Por 0 I O UNIVERSAL Mapped DLCI Number Block ed Port Flag Connection Priority Band width Allocation Group Encapsulation Method Modulo Maximum LAPB Window Size N2 Retransmit C ount T1 Retransmit Period msec T2 Wait AckPeriod msec T3 Link Alive Period sec Logical D CE M X 25Logical Port Screen 2 A B D E F G H I J K L Option Figure 6 5 Logical Port 8 Database 16 N 0 0 REC 1490 0 Modulo 8 7 20 3000 1000 5 Y
335. is all zeroes the overall 32 bit IP address refers specifically to the network identified by the network identifier If the host identifier is all ones the 32 bit address refers to all hosts attached to the network This is the IP broadcast address for that network If the entire 32 bits are ones the address refers to all hosts on the local network IP addresses are administered by Standford Research Institute s Network Information Center NIC M7 Subnet Addressing Multiple physical networks can use a single IP network address This is done by using a portion of the node identifier it does not need to be incomplete octets as a subnet identifier For example in a Class B network the first and second octets are the network identifier and the third and fourth are the node identifier If the network con tains the maximum of 65 025 nodes management will most likely be easier if the third octet of the IP address is used to define up to 255 subnets on the network The fourth octet can then define up to 255 nodes on each subnet effectively providing unique identifiers for all 65 025 nodes on the network As described earlier the first octet of the IP address identifies the network s class 0 127 A 128 191 B and 192 223 C Once the Internet Protocol knows the class it knows how many octets are supposed to identify the network and how many are sup posed to identify the node When part of the node identifier is used as a subnet
336. itted on the Bridge port Bridge Forwarding Table The Bridge Forwarding Table is used to match MAC addresses with Bridge ports on which to forward frames If an address is not found in the table the frame will be for warded out all Bridge ports except those configured for native LLC 2 All MAC addresses are in non canonical Token Ring format AKSTE As a frame is received its source and destination MAC addresses will be added if not already there to the table If received from a Token Ring the addresses will be bit swapped described under Host MAC Address on page 9 22 when added to the table The SmartSwitch 1800 software contains a set of reserved MAC addresses that are considered static and will always be inthe table The remaining entries are con sidered dynamic and will remain in the table for the time period configured as the Bridge Aging Timer in Bridge Node Defaults Press B at the Bri dge Status Displays Menu to display aforwarding table forall MAC addresses received on Bridge ports in the node 20 24 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Node Name node_xyz Bridge Forward ing Table Dis play MAC Address Ehegs C00000000002 Static Don t Fwd C000000000F0 Discovery Pending PgUp PgDn F2 Refresh Table F3 Exit F4 Flush Table Figure 20 13 Bridge Forwarding Table Display C F D B from Main Menu Pressing F2 will update the display It is not updated automatically Pressing F4 will allow
337. king X 25 calls from a terminal con nected to a SmartSwitch 1800 async PAD port To display a list of existing abbreviated addresses and their associated subscriber IDs press C at the Connections and Routing Paths Configuration Menu or A D C from the Main Menu To add or change an abbreviated address press D at the Connections and Routing Paths Configuration Menu When prompted enter the address you want to use up to 10 alphanumeric characters The address will be displayed if it is an existing address the associated subscri ber ID will also be displayed along with the message Subscriber ID defined or Subscriber ID undefined if the IDis notin the database Configuring Async Ports 1247 Configuring Async PVCs 12 18 A SmartSwitch 1800 PVC isa permanent connection between two physical logical ports in anode This allows communication between the attached devices as soon as they are powered up without having to first make a call to establish a connection Async PVC support in the SmartSwitch 1800 includes async to async and async to X25 To display a list of current PVCs press A at the PVC Configuration Menu or A D E A from the Main Menu To add or change a PVC press B at the PVC Con figuration Menu and enter a 1 4 digit Connection ID whichis simply a number unique to this connection that identifies the PVC Node Name nod exyz PVC Maintenance ConnectionID1 A PVC Type Async PAD to X 25 B
338. l link is down Action None LLC 2 SABME Received when open Severity 2 22 27 22 28 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 Meaning The remote station sent a SABME to the local station but the local station had already been initialized via a S ABME UA exchange Action None If the problem persists contact Cabletron Systems Technical Support See page 22 4 LLC 2 FRMR Rcvd Invalid Command Severity 2 Meaning The remote device received an invalid or unsupported command and returned a Frame Reject Action None LLC 2 FRMR Rcvd IFLD not permitted Severity 2 Meaning The remote device received an I frame when it was not permitted and returned a Frame Reject Action None LLC 2 FRMR Rcvd Invalid Nr Severity 2 Meaning The remote device received an invalid N r and retumed a Frame Reject Action None LLC 2 FRMR Rcvd IFLD too long Severity 2 Meaning The remote device received an I frame that was too long and retumed a Frame Reject Action None LLC 2 FRMR Revd Invalid Command Severity 2 Meaning The remote device received an invalid command or response and retumed a Frame Reject Action None LLC 2 FRMR Sent IFLD not permitted Severity 2 Meaning The remote device sent an I frame when it was not permitted and a Frame Reject was returned Action None LLC 2 FRMR Sent Invalid Nr Severity 2 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Meaning T
339. l Ready DTE Restart Request DCE Restart Indication Ready DTE Waiting SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Cause and Diagnostic Codes 1B 1C 1D 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2F 30 31 32 33 34 40 4 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 50 51 52 53 70 71 72 73 112 113 114 115 Description Packet type Invalid for State p3 Packet type Invalid for State p4 Packet type Invalid for State p5 Call Clearing Phase Packet type Invalid for State p6 Packet type Invalid for State p7 Reset during data xfer Packet type Invalid for State d1 Packet type Invalid for State d2 DCE Waiting Data Transfer Call Collision DTE Clear Request DCE Clear Indication Flow control Ready DTE Reset Request Packet type Invalid for State d3 DCE Reset Indication Packet not allowed Unidentifiable packet Call on one way LCN Invalid packet type on PVC Packet on unassigned LCN Reject not subscribed to Packet too short Packet too long Invalid GFI Restart with non zero bits 1 4 in octet 1 or 1 8 in octet 2 Packet type not compatible with facility Unauthorized interrupt confirmation Unauthorized interrupt Unauthorized reject No channel available Time expired Time expired for incoming call Time expired for clear indication Time expired for reset indication Time expired for restart indication Call set up call clearing or registration problem Facility Registrati
340. l X 25 facility that permits negotiation ofthe throughput classes for either direction of data transmission on a per call basis If this parameter is set to N the default Maximum Throughput Class will be used If set to Y any throughput class included in a call packet will be used If a class for either directionis notincluded its default value will be used Local Charging Prevention prevents calls if Y from being charged to this port Incoming calls from the network with Reverse Charging specified will be rejected outgoing calls will have Reverse Charging inserted if it is not already in the call packet Reverse Charge Acceptance authorizes transmission of incoming calls that request the X 25 Reverse Charging facility If this parameter is set to Nand a call requests Reverse Charging the call will not be transmitted Fast Select Acceptance authorizes transmission of incoming calls that request the X 25 Fast Select facility 8 9 Incoming Calls Barred is an X 25 facility that prevents transmission of incoming calls to this port Outgoing Calls Barred is an X 25 facility that prevents transmission of outgoing calls from this port Mask Link Alarms prevents if enabled trans mission to the collecting node of the link alarms 400 406 Link Enabled Link Disabled etc Maximum Packet Size is the maximum data packet size that will be allowed to pass through this port A packet size included in a call setup packet will be us
341. l and electrical interface for DCE DTE connec tions Ithas more signals than RS 232 providing such features as diagnostic and bal anced circuits SAP stands for Service Advertising Protocol or Service Access Point Service Adver tising Protocol allows routers and servers to exchange internetwork service infor mation e g locations and availability of file and print servers which connect to the network at Service Access Points SDLC stands for synchronous data link control IBM s version of CCITT s HDLC high level data link control bit oriented protocol Segmentation is the same as Fragmentation SLT stands for Single Line Telephone When configured for this option a voice FAX module operates in loop start mode and provides the loop to the attached device SNA stands for IBM s S ystems Network Architecture Spanning Tree Algorithm is a method employed in bridging that avoids closed loops in the data path by deter mining the bridge with the lowest path cost whichis the cost of transmitting a frame onto the LAN glo 9 SSAP stands for source service access point whichis the address of the link service access point LS AP from which a link protocol data unit LPDU originates Subscriber is auser of the SmartSwitch 1800 device Subscriber IDs are the called and calling addresses used in X 25 call setup svc stands for switched virtual circuit which is a temporary logical association
342. l and logical interface of this end of the frame relay link Make sure the physical frame relay port is not reserved for backup DLCIS as determined by the For Backup Use Only parameter in the port record see page 7 18 AUIICN Also Make sure this DLCIis not configured as a Frame Relay Backup DLCI or as part of an intra nodal frame relay PV C Enable Inverse ARP allows if Y the frame relay interface to be configured without specifying a desti nation IP address Once the frame relay interface and its DLCI become active the IP function in the SmartSwitch 1800 sends an Inverse ARP Address Resolution Pro tocol request over the interface The response will containthe destination IP address allowing the IP interface to become active If an ARP request from the SmartS witch 1800 receives no response within 5 seconds the request will be resent every 5 seconds up to 5 times After the 5th attempt a 30 second timer will start after which the re send sequence will be repeated If Enable Inverse ARP is changed from N to Y the SmartSwitch will immediately gen erate an Inverse ARP request If this parameter is set to N a Destination IP Address see next entry must be con figured Destination IP Address is the IP address ofthe end to end receiverfor point to point frame relay connections The valid range of values guarantees that you cannot configure all Os or all 1s for a network ID node ID or subnet ID See page 14 1 Unn
343. l be made to each alternate sub scriber in the list until the call is completed Redirect on Busy will redirect calls Gf Y according to the Redirection Addresses if the primary sub scriber device is busy Redirect on Out of Order will redirects calls if Y according to the Redirection Addresses if the primary sub scriber device is out of order Connection Priority prioritizes intra nodal traffic the higher the number the higher the priority This pri ority has no effect on traffic exiting a node Priorities are configured on all logical interfaces that use a physical frame relay port The device processor in the node uses these priorities to help determine the order in which it will process protocols When configuring priorities be careful to consider the types of traffic being routed on other connections in the node CAUITICN 1st 2nd etc Path Configured includes or excludes the associated port as a routing path to the subscriber device At least one path must be specified Port identify the port s that make up the routing path s Redirection Address 0 1 etc are up to five subscribers that will be called according to the specified redirection option Configuring a Hunt Group for SNA Subscribers Hunt groups are described on page 8 22 The function has some special requirements for SNA routing e Each SNA portin a routing path must have a unique network address even if it will not be used explicitly
344. l be searched first e Addresses with only wildcards will be checked next e Addresses with will be checked last Within each wildcard group addresses with the most non wildcard digits will be checked first For example 311012345678 will be checked before 3110 Hunt Group Example 8 22 Here is an example of how the hunt group function works using the algorithm Least LCN With Thruput The routing path process will calculate a loading factor based on the number of LCNs in use and the line speeds for each Call Request received The method is proprietary but is described generally here Ports and letter symbols in the example are Line Speed RLP 0 port 0 2400 bps RLP 1 port 0 4800 bps RLP 1 port 1 in failed state but is defined as a routing path RLP 1 port 2 9600 bps M The maximum bps of any operational line in this routing path group w The bps of an individual line U A proprietary line utilization factor taking into account the number of active VCs on the line and the line s speed SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Configuring X 25 To illustrate how calls will be distributed among these lines assume there are no calls on any line The lines will have the following process variables Line Speed Mw U 00 2400 4 4 10 4800 2 2 1 1 failed 12 9600 1 1 A Call Request will be routed on line 1 2 since it has the lowest U The next Call Request will produce a new calculation for Ufor all lines and
345. l ports 8 63 for logical ports Valid numbers for physical ports depend on the model of SmartS witch 1800 see port loca tions on page 6 1 To port 0 7 8 63 While an X 25 dialout port is quiesced it cannot receive alarms or file transfers or be used by a remote Cabletron frame relay access device to MeL take control of the node Also quiescing a range of ports has no affect on any port types within that range other than the type specified 19 12 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Disabling and Enabling SDLC PUs These operations disable or enable the link station connection between the node and a PU or arange of PUs grouped by sequential port numbers Press G at the Operations Menu to display the following figure Node Name nod e_xyz On Line SDLC PU Operations A Disable an SDLC PU B Disable a Range of SDLC PUs C Enable an SDLC PU D Enable a Range of SDLC PUs Option Figure 19 2 On Line SDLC PU Operations Menu B G from Main Menu Select the desired operation from the menu When prompted e If enabling or disabling a single PU enter RLP Port 0 7 Valid numbers for physical ports depend on the model of SmartSwitch 1800 see port locations on page 6 1 PU station address 0 ff e If enabling or disabling a range of PUs enter From port 0 7 Valid numbers for physical ports depend on the model of SmartSwitch 1800 see port locations on page 6 1 e To port 0 7 Ondine Operation
346. lay Line Monitor Display C E from Main Menu There are two types of frame status and data On each line of either type the leftmost field shows the DLCI number The example in Figure 20 7 shows status frames in ANSI T1 617 Annex D format This and LMI Rev 1 format are described under Status NOIL Exchanges on page 20 12 Status Exchanges Each status exchange line contains atthe end a pair of 3 digit numbers that are the next and current sequence numbers The types of status exchange will be one of these e Full Status Enquiries which are sent by the frame relay DTE i e the Smart Switch 1800 e Full Status Responses which help the DTE leam which DLCIS are available for sending receiving data The frame relay DCE switch should report a DLCI as active only when it has a path through the frame relay network The status of a DLCI will be reported as N new or A active A DLCI is reported as new if this is the first time it is being reported to the DTE A DLCI reported as active will if not already done transition the frame relay DLCI on the Virtual Con nections Display C C from the Main Menu to Data trans and the port Port Status Display C B from the Main Menu to Operational SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Status Displays The format of status exchanges depends on the type of link management Annex D frames always use DLCI 0000 and LMI frames always use DLCI 1023 Examples of both formats ar
347. line equipment e g the SmartSwitch 1800 accepts the M signal fromthe PBX and provides the E signal to the PBX The M signal accepted by the tie line equipment atoneendofa tie circuit becomes the E signal output by the remote tie line interface The five E amp M signaling types are illustrated in the following figure C414 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Type Tie Line PBX Equipment y N E a b o Tie Line PBX Equipment __ V TM TT v w e Type Tie Line IM PBX atp ment V Se a is Type Il SG M Tie Line PBX Equipment SB eE Type lll SG Tie Line PBX E auipment iM SS V V NE E T Type IV F M N y Type V Figure C 9 E amp M Signaling Types The illustrations in this figure are abstracted from the specifications to show the essential components of the signaling circuitry In this figure the symbol V refers to battery voltage which can be 25 Vdc to 65 Vdc and is usually nominally 48 Vdc Each of the illustrations in the figure show the PBX s E amp M interface on the left and the corresponding tie line equipment interface on the right With the Type I interface the tie line equipment generates the E signal to the PBX by grounding the E lead The PBX detects the E signal by sensing the increase in current through a resistive load this is indicated in the figure by the unconnected node branching from the right side of the E resistor Sim
348. ling Verification Timer indicates how long the logical DCE will wait between Status Enquiry messages from the DTE before recording an error FRM Configuring Frame Relay 7 17 Enable Outgoing Rate Control determines whether the rate parameters CIR Bo Bg will be enforced Enable Bandwidth Allocation determines whether bandwidth allocation described on page 7 6 will be enforced For Backup Use Only determines whether all DLCIs on the port will be reserved exclusively as backups for other DLCIs in the same node See Configuring Frame Relay Backup Groups on page 7 22 If this parameter is set to Y the port will remain disabled until needed for backup If configuring the port for backup use only make sureno DLCIs on the port have been configured on an IP IPX or LLC2 interface NOTE Automatic DCE enables if Y automatic detection by the software of whether the port is a physical DCE or DTE This can be helpful in cases such as a connected backup CSU DSU which might be configured differently than the primary connection The automatic DCE feature allows switchover to occur without reconfiguring the port DLCI Parameters Committed Information Rate In Out CIR is the incoming or outgoing depending on the parameter data throughput that the network agrees to support under normal conditions Outgoing throughput greater than CIR will be reducedto CIR if a a packet is received with the BECN backward explicit congestion notificat
349. link station to delay sending an acknowledgment of a received Information LPDU The timer is started when the LPDU is received and reset when the acknowledgment is sent If the timer expires before the acknowledgmentis sent it must be sent as soon as possible is the Inactivity Timer used by the link station to detect an inoperative condition in either the remote link station or the transmission medium The timer will be started if T1 has been reset for one of the reasons listed under T1 and additional LPDUs have been sent by the remote link station and there are no outstanding acknowledg ments or responses from the local link station If the local station does notreceive an LPDU before Ti expires the station must send an LPDU with the P bit set to B 1 to solicit the remote station s status Recovery then proceeds as described under T1 is the number of Information LPDUs that will be received before sending an acknowl edgment This parameter is used in conjunction with T2 to allow stations to reduce traffic A counter is initialized to N3 and will be decremented by one each timea valid sequential Informati on LPDU is received When the counter reaches 0 an acknowl edgment is sent N3 is reset whenever an Information or Supervisory acknowledgment LPDU is sent by the local station is the maximum number of sequentially numbered Information LPDUs that the link station can have outstanding is the maximum number of times that an LP
350. lowing conditions and configura tions will disable variable length dialing 1 Long call format dialing is being used The SmartS witch 1800 assumes this format is being used if the first digit dialed is the character configured for Long Call Prefix Voice Configuration Reference Information C 5 2 of Leading Digits to Delete is set to any value greater than 0 3 Auto Dial is set to Y The following illustration and example configurations and dialing scenarios further illustrate how this feature is configured and used Telephone Voice Port 5 6666 Figure C 3 Variable Length Dialing Example Node 1 e System Level Parameters Voice Node Number 1 Speed Map Dial Digits 4 User Dialed Extended Dial Digits 4 e Speed Dial Map Table Speed Dial Abbreviated Digits 0033 Long Dial Digit Mapping 000214 2 node number 4 Voice port number Extended Dial String 5555 e Voice Port 4 Configuration Source of Extended Digits MAP Dial Timer 3 sec Node 2 e System Level Parameters Voice Node Number 2 User Dialed Extended Dial Digits 4 e Voice Port 4 Configuration Source of Extended Digits MAP Forward Delay 4 25 sec intervals Forwarded Output Digits Ext C4 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Node 3 e System Level Parameters Voice Node Number 3 User Dialed Extended Dial Digits 4 e Voice Port 5 Configuration Source of Extended Digi
351. ls of SmartSwitch 1800 differ from those on data only models Information on both is provided here along with worksheets that allow you to fill in pertinent information that you will use to configure the software database Naturally you should fill in only the table that applies to your model type ERU WAN 0 WAN 1 WAN2 WAN3 LAN Port Voice 1 Optional Console Port CSU DSU Port Figure 2 1 Physical Port Locations on Voice Models Table 2 2 lists all possible physical ports on Voice models of SmartSwitch 1800 Table 2 1 Port Assignments for Voice Models Coes RS 232 Y E S amp S o E S 1 Physical interface as described below Port 0 is RS 232 Port 1 must be either RS 232 or DSU Ports 2 and 3 are determined by the attached cable V 35 RS 232 or RS 449 Ports 4and 5 are Voice Each cable is physical DTE male connector or DCE female connector Add a T or Cto the interface type to record this information This does notapply to a Voice DSU or LAN port 2 The protocols that can be assigned to ports depend on the model of SmartSwitch 1800 and the options that were purchased All possible protocols are listed below Ports 0 3 Frame relay X 25 SDLC BSC Interactive BSC Batch Async Ports 4 5 Voice LAN Port IP IPX Bridge LLC2 Note that the LAN protocols IP IPX Bridge LLC2 are also assigned to physical frame relay ports via interface records that map the protocols to the physical ports
352. ls to run over a frame relay port e Frame relay port s page 7 9 that will connect to the user device s network and or PVC s e PVC connections page 7 20 which define permanent circuits between physical ports in the node e Frame Relay Backup Groups page 7 22 if configuring one or more backup DLCIs FRM Configuring Frame Relay 7 5 Configuring Bandwidth Allocation Groups To optimize frame relay bandwidth use various types of interfaces can be assigned to one of sixteen bandwidth allocation groups each defined by the parameters listed in Table 7 1 on page 7 7 Bandwidth allocation groups can ensure that response time sensitive traffic gets access to the available frame relay bandwidth Each of the following entities that use a frame relay port can be assigned in the database records to a bandwidth allocation group e Node for usein sessions with a NetView host e Logical port e SNA Port LLC2 parameters e IP interface e IPX interface e LLC2 host e LLC2 interface e Bridge port For further control bandwidth allocation can be enabled or disabled on each frame relay port This feature is applied only when a line s available bandwidth is limited Ee i e packets must be queued before transmission ACTS Also note that bandwidth allocation is not applied in a frame relay passthrough configuration frame relay PVCs into and out of the S mart Switch internal PVC between the two frame relay ports Altho
353. ly display a list of options To make a selection press either the function key shown preceding the desired option or the character preceding the desired menu item The list of options varies depending on what menu is displayed all the options are described below Function key equivalents on an async terminal key pad are listed on page 2 8 F1 Select Another Record or Redisplay Refresh Next Record dis plays the first prompt that appeared on your screen after you made your menu selection so you can specify another record Redisplay Refresh refreshes a display with updated information F2 Next Record or Remote Refresh Next Record displays the next sequential record on your screen for verification modification or deletion Remote Refresh refreshes a remote display F3 Exit menu returms you to the previous menu saving any changes you have made Some menus have two sets of values Database and System Memory Changes will affect only the database unless you press F7 before MOTE pressing F3 This will update the system memory Database and System memory values are described on page 4 2for Node Defaults and page 6 3 for Ports 2 6 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 F4 Exit menu or Delete Record or Clear Max Stats Exit Menu appears at the Main Menu and exits to the Port Status display Figure 2 3 To retum to the menu you must enter the node s password This feature is for security to protec
354. means of confirming that communication is pos sible Out In Time Exceed is the number of transmitted datagrams that subsequently were discarded by a router due to expiration of the datagram s time to live or by a destination host due to inability to reassemble the datagram within the nec essary time period The message text says Outgoing if this node is a point in the path of the datagram and Incoming if the datagram originated at this node SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Statistics Displays Out In Bad IP Hdr is the number of transmitted datagrams that subsequently were discarded due to a header size less than was specified The message text says Outgoing if this node is a point in the path of the datagram andIncoming if the datagram originated at this node Out Time Req is the number ofrequests to other entities inthe IP path fortimes tamps which are a method of determining delay characteristics over the Intemet In Time Req is the number of requests received from other entities in the IP path for timestamps which are a method of determining delay characteristics over the Internet Out Time Rsp is the number of responses to timestamp requests that were made to this node by other entities in the IP path In Time Rsp is the number of responses received by this node to timestamp requests Out Info Req is the number of requests to other entities in the IP path for the IP address of the network t
355. mergency call should be routed to another call routing device Auto Poll Timer is the frequency with which an Auto Poll will be sent Enhanced Dialing Parameters Dial Timer isa delay the SmartSwitch 1800 will use to determine when variable length dialing is complete Variable length dialing allows the user to place a call without entering the configured number of digits for the speed dial number When the operator of the attached voice fax equipment dials a digit that is not the con figured Long Dial Prefix the SmartSwitch 1800 assumes a speed dial number is being dialed and activates the Dial Timer If the timer expires with no new digit entries the SmartS witch will assume dialing is complete A setting of 0 means the Dial Timer will never expire The SmartS witch 1800 will wait indefinitely for the operator to enter the digits NIL If the number of dialed digits is less than the value specified for Speed Map Dial Digits in Voice System Level Configuration the SmartSwitch 1800 will pad the dialed number with leading zeros before searching the speed dial map table For example assume Speed Map Dial Digits is 4 and the user dials 33 when the Dial Timer expires The speed dial number 0033 will be used to search the map table for a defined desti nation Note that regardless of the Dial Timer setting any of the following conditions and or configurations will disable variable length dialing 1 Long call format dialing is
356. ming Calls Barred is an X 25 facility that prevents transmission of incoming calls to this port Outgoing Calls Barred is an X 25 facility that prevents transmission of outgoing calls from this port Maximum Packet Size is the maximum data packet size that will be allowed to pass through this port A packet size included in a call setup packet will be used as long asit is smaller than the maximum specified here Default Packet Size will be assi gned to an incoming call setup packet if the packet does not include a packet size A packet size of 512 bytes is imposed on all protocols except X25 between the PAD port and the logical port The Default Packet Size is used for trans mission out the logical port X 25 traffic uses the Maximum Packet Sizeconfigured on the X 25 port CE Multiple packet sizes e g multipoint SDLC to QLLC require either mul tiple logical ports or X 25 address translation see page 8 27 which allows NCL modification of facilities in Call Request packets Maximum Window Size is the maximum number of sequentially numbered I frames that can be waiting for acknowledgment by the end to end destination device If this number is exceeded no frames will be transmitted until an acknowledgment is received There is also alocal level 3 window for X 25 traffic This window will al ways be in effect unless the D bit is set at the attached X25 device NCHL Default Window Size will be assi gned to an incoming c
357. mmands to the service point in the form of NMVTS network management vector transports The service point function translates information from the node into NMVTs and responds to the host Four types of NMVTS can be transmitted e RUNCMDSs commands from the host to execute specified operations Three types of command are supported e Display used to display status and configuration information e Vary used to change the active inactive status of a PU or line e Modify used to change configuration of a PU and the line between it and the node e RUNCMD replies from the service pointto the host e Alerts unsolicited information about events in the node lines or PUs e LPDAs link problem determination aids which are procedures used to test status and to control the node communications line and PU interface The S martSwitch 1800 supports LPDA versions 1 and 2 NOTE The actual command syntax used in NMVTs from the host is documented in IBM s VTAM Operation manual Responses to host commands generally use the textual characteristics of VTAM with a different prefix Local NetView Access The SmartSwitch 1800 supports a local NetView access function that allows the node operator to send commands from the node to lines and PUs This function is only between the node and lines PUs the commands and responses are not transmitted to NetView To display the NetView Access Options Menu press H at the On Line Nod
358. model of SmartS witch 1800 see port locations on page 6 1 The display for an existing port will show the configured parameter values while the display for a new port will show default database values See Table 9 1 and Table 9 2 The following figure is an example of an existing port Node Name nodexyz SNA Port Parameters T Link State Linkup Database System Memory A SNA SNA B snal snal C Physical PortInterface V35 V 35 D Blocked Port Hag N N E LineSpeed 64k bps 64k bps F No DataPoll Period ms 40 40 G No Resp Poll Period ms 2000 2000 H Maximum Retransmissions I Outstanding Frames J Generate Clock K RevClock TT fromDTE L SNA Type M NRZ N Packet Size O Additional SNA Port Parameters P SDLC PU Operations Option Figure 9 2 SNA Port Screen 1 A C A from Main Menu After making any changes be sure to press F7 to update the system memory Otherwise the changes will not take effect until the next re boot of the SmartS witch 1800 CAUTCN After configuring the above screen press O to display a second screen The param eters for both screens are listed in Table 9 1 on page 9 6 You must also define the PUs physical units that will communicate via the SNA port Once the Additional SNA Port Parameters are configured press F3 to returnto Figure 9 2 then press P A to display a list of configured PUs or P B to configure a PU If configuring a PU enter when prompted an SDLC PU S
359. more async PAD profile parameters n1 Ist parameter n2 2nd etc Standard parameters see page 12 3 are 1 22 SET n1 m1 n2 m2 n3 m3 Sets and reads async PAD profile parameters n1 Ist parameter m1 new value PROF Sets standard set of parameters CCITT profile 90 is available RESET Reset connection INT Send interrupt packet SET ni m1 n2 m2 n3 m3 Sets one or more async PAD profile parameters n1 lst parameter m1 new value HERLP Provides more information Same as HERLP Gnn Z Y R N Selection parameters used to represent facilities in Call Request packets unless they are specified in autocall Call Requests Gnn CUG nn is the CUG number Z Group Send Y 2 Priority R Reverse Charging N NUI Port displays the RLP and port number to which you are connected and the called and calling addresses Placing a Call from an Async Terminal One way to place a call is simply to enter the calling address subscriber ID of the destination DTE There must be a record for that subscriber ID User data and or facilities in any combination can be included as described below To place a call using facilities and user data enter the data in the format f f f addressDdata or f f f addressPdata where f isthe letter s representing the desired facility s Gnn CUG nn is the CUG number Z Group Send Y Priority R Reverse Charging N NU
360. mpany The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the company s inside wiring associated with a single line indi vidual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility desig nated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment mal functions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure fortheir own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power facility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This pre caution may be particularly important in rural areas CAUTION USERS SHOULD NOT ATTEMPT TO MAKE SUCH CONNECTIONS THEMSELVES BUT SHOULD CONTACT THE APPROPRIATE ELECTRIC INSPECTION AUTHORITY OR ELECTRICIAN AS APPROPRIATE This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits forradio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Industry Canada Le pr sent appareil num rique met pas de bruits radio lectriques d passant les limites applicables aux appareils num riques del la class A prescrit
361. n 7 12 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Node Name nod e xyz Frame Rday DLCI Configuration screen 2 of 2 RL 0 Port DLO 16 A BackupGroup Number 0 B Enable Back up Protocol N Option Figure 7 7 Frame Relay DLCI Configuration Screen 2 If you configure a Backup Group Number Enable Backup Protocol will be CS replaced by several parameters listed in Table 7 4 on page 7 15 that NUCL determine backup operation If you change Enable Backup Protocol to Y the Backup Group Number entry will disappear Viewing Learned DLCIs Figure 7 4 Item E If the portis a logical DTE a list of all DLCIs extracted from LMI AnnexD frames can be displayed by pressing E atFigure 7 4 Each displayed DLCI will be followed by three columns A N and C with the following possible values A a active i inactive N n new o old A newly learned DLCI will become old after the first Full Status Inquiry C c configured via the DLCI configuration screen leamed through some other means e g through link management information FRM Configuring Frame Relay 7 13 Frame Relay Port Parameters Table 7 3 Frame Relay Port Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Port Type Frame Relay not valid here Physical Port Interface see explanation see explanation Blocked Port Flag Y N N Line Speed bits per sec see explanation 9600 Maximum Bytes per Frame 16 4096 1600 Logical DCE Y N3 Y Y N Y
362. n it receives one of these e A REJ Reject LPDU provided a Command LPDU with P bit set to B 1 is not outstanding e A Response LPDU with the F bit set to B 1 e An Information or Supervisory LPDU with an Np greater than the last Np received and less than or equal to the line station s V provided a Command LPDU with P bit set to B 1 is not outstanding If additional LPDUs areset from the remote link station after the local station has reset T1 the timer will be restarted if acknowledgments of orresponses to those LPDUs are outstanding If no acknowledgments responses are outstanding the link station will start the inactivity timer See Ti If T1 expires and acknowledgments responses are still outstanding the link station will send one of the following then restart T1 e A Supervisory LPDU with the P bit set to B 1 to solicit remote link station status e Any Unnumbered LPDUs that were not acknowledged when first sent If acknowledgments responses are still outstanding after N2 tries see that entry the link station will declare the link inoperative The value specified for T1 should allow for any delays introduced by the MAC sub layer e g queuing is the Receiver Acknowledgment Timer used by the link station to delay sending an acknowledgment of a received Information LPDU The timer is started when the LPDU is received and reset when the acknowledgment is sent If the timer expires before the acknowledgment
363. n templates 8 27 Transparent Text Supported Transport Time 15 14 15 17 Trap routing configuring 17 4 severity levels for 22 4 Tw 4 8 9 13 9 24 Type 9 21 10 4 10 12 11 5 U Unnumbered Interface 14 11 14 12 Updating software 19 5 User Data 12 12 User Dialed Extended Dial Digits 13 5 V Value 16 8 VC to be Cleared After Disc 11 6 Virtual connections displaying 20 3 Idx 7 Virtual LAN ID 9 17 16 4 Voice configuring 13 1 port configuring 13 8 Voice Application Statistics 21 7 Voice Connection Statistics 21 8 Voice Node Number 13 4 Voice Rates Maximum 13 5 Voice Rates Minimum 13 5 Voice System Configuration 13 3 W WaitTimer 7 22 Watchdog Spoofing Enabled 15 15 Wildcards in subscriber addresses 8 22 Window Size 8 34 12 19 X X25 address translation templates 8 27 X 25 configuring 8 1 X 3 Line Speed 12 10 Z ZMODEM 19 7 19 8 Idx 8 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01
364. n the Bridge Filter Definitions file Configuring Bridging 1641 Configuring Bridge Ports A Bridge portis a SmartS witch 1800 LAN interface or frame relay port that will operate as a bridge connection to the LAN or WAN Press C at the IP LLC2 BRIDGE IP X Interfaces Configuration Menu to display con figured Bridge ports Node Name node xyz Review Bridge Ports LLC2 Interfaces Ethernet Frame Relay Native LLC 2 Frame Relay 3 8025 SRB Frame Relay 8025_SRB Frame Relay 33 8023 TB PgUp PgDn F3 Exit F9 Stop Remote F10 Abort Figure 16 4 Bridge Ports Display IA CI ELIC from Main Menu CS These interfaces can be used for either LLC2 or Bridging Also note Tas that the RLP column is irrelevant on the SmartSwitch 1800 NACL To configure an interface press D at the IP LLC2 BRIDGE IPX Interfaces Confi g uration Menu When prompted for an Interface Number which is merely a sequential number to identify the interface e If modifying an existing record enter the interface number 0 95 Do not configure more than one interface per DLCI on a port CAUTIEN e If creating a new record press Enter which will automatically specify the next available sequential interface number The display depends on the interface the following figure shows an example and Table 16 8 lists the parameters for all interface types 16 12 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Node Name node xyz Bridge Port LLC 2 Interface Confi
365. nables if Y or disables if N automatic busy out of channels when the link is down When this parameter is enabled the system will automatically busy out channels when the composite link is down When disabled channels remain on hook with the link is down If your application is connected to a PBX that can route calls to an alternate source e g an ACD based onan all busy condition enable this parameter so the PBX will recognize this condition and reroute the calls while the composite link is down This parameter affect on hook channels only when the link down condition occurs Active calls remain in progress until they return to on hook NOTE Fax Supported specifies whether or not faxes will be transmitted on the port If N all calls will be treated as voice If Y both voice and fax will be transmitted In most cases this parameter should be enabled to allow both voice and fax calls can be processed If a voice call experiences excessive noise while this parameter is enabled Cg the SmartSwitch 1800 might interpret it as fax call Disabling this NOTE parameter will cause the call to be treated as voice regardless of noise con ditions Telephony Interface Type specifies in conjunction with Interface the type of interface that will be used by the Voice channel Appendix C contains more information about selecting the appropriate interface If E amp M is specified you must also set Switch 2 on the front of the S martSwitch
366. nal A 1 Committed Burst Size In Out 7 18 Committed Information Rate In Out 7 18 Community Table configuring 17 2 Configuration database 3 1 Configuration report 3 9 Configure Model Number 3 10 F 1 Connection ID 10 7 Connection Priority 7 21 8 26 8 34 9 16 10 10 11 10 12 17 12 19 Connections displaying 20 3 Controller Type 11 6 Copying a database record 2 6 Country Code 13 4 CSU DSU Operating Mode 7 17 8 9 CSU DSU tests 19 15 D Data Forwarding Char 12 4 Data Forwarding Criteria 12 14 Data transfer mode async terminal A 1 Database 3 1 backing up 19 6 files 19 9 restoring 19 6 setup recommendations 3 1 Database and system memory values 4 2 6 3 Date changing 2 8 DCE Cable Attached 12 11 Default Calling Address 8 11 8 19 12 11 Default Ethernet Frame Type 16 5 Default Packet Size 8 11 8 18 Default Window Size 8 11 8 18 Del 14 6 Delay Retry Count 11 6 Delay Timer 11 6 Delete BSC subscriber Delete CUG 8 20 Delete 7 23 Deleting a database record 2 6 Destination IP Address 14 11 14 12 Destination MAC Address Value 16 9 10 3 11 7 Idx 2 Destination Mask 14 15 Destination NetBIOS Name 16 10 Destination Network Value 15 7 Destination Node Value 15 7 Destination Socket Value 15 7 Destination Subscriber 14 12 15 15 Devices Connected 12 14 Diagnostic codes B 2 SmartSwitch specific B 4 SNA B 4 X 25 B 2 Dial port configuring 8 5 Dial Support 8 12 Dial Timer 13 14 Disable Request Disconn
367. ncentrator is a communications device that allows a shared transmission medium to accom modate more data sources than there are channels available Configuration database see Database Congestion is a local condition that occurs when there are too many packets to be queued in the node buffers causing information transfer to be delayed Database contains the files that define network configuration subscribers alarms and statistics Datagram is the basic unit of information passed across the Internet It is the IP equivalent of a packet DCE stands for data circuit terminating equipment which provides the functions nec essary for communication operations between the end user device see DTE and the network Physical DCE refers to the hardware configuration and Logical DCE refers to the software configuration Note that physical and logical DCE are independent of each other however for each if one end of the connection is DCE the other must be DTE and vice versa Designated Bridge Designated Port is the bridge and the SmartSwitch 1800 port on the bridge on a LAN that provides the minimum cost path to the root bridge described later Dial Port is an X 25 port connected to a dialup modem Dotted Decimal Notation is the syntactic representation for a 32 bitinteger consisting of four 8 bit numbers in base 10 separated by periods This format is used for IP addresses DSAP
368. nd X 25 Port I Subscriber Name Logical Channd RLP Port Packet Size Window Size Figure 8 12 X 25 to X 25 PVC Screen A D E B from Main Menu CE It does not matter which end of the PVC is configured first NOL 8 32 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 X 25 PVC Parameters Table 8 5 X 25 PVC Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Connection Priority 0 9 Subscriber Name 0 31 characters Logical Channel 1 255 Por 0 7 Packet Size 128 4096 Window Size 1 74 1 Logical channels must be lower than the lowest LCNs assigned to any subscribers on the ports in the PVC configuration 2 Valid port numbers depend onthe model of SmartSwitch 1800 see port locations on page 6 1 3 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 or 4096 Cannot be greater than the smaller Maximum Packet Size specified on the ports for both ends of the connection 4 Cannot be greater than the smaller Maximum Window Size specified on the ports for both ends of the connection Connection Priority prioritizes this connection for intra nodal traffic the higher the number the higher the priority This priority has no effect on traffic exiting a node Priorities are configured on all logical interfaces that use a physical frame relay port The device processor in the node uses these priorities to help determine the order in which it will process pro tocols When configuring priorities be careful to consider the types of traff
369. nd data type Required Configuration To run Voice over frame relay in a SmartSwitch 1800 make sure the following are properly configured e Node parameters Chapter 4 This is general configuration that must be done no matter which protocols will be run in the node e Loaded protocols Chapter 5 Frame relay and Voice e Frame relay Chapter 7 port s that will connect to the network e Voice system level parameters page 13 3 e Speed dial map page 13 6 e Voiceport s page 13 8 e Voiceinterface s page 13 16 Voice Configuration Menu To access the Voice Configuration Menu press A Configuration then F from the Main Menu Node Name node xyz Voice Configuration Menu Voice S ystem Configuration Review Voice S peed Dial Map Configure Voice Speed Dial Map Configure Physical Port Review Voice Interfaces Configure Voice Interfaces Option Figure 13 1 Voice Configuration Menu A F from Main Menu 132 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Configuring Voice System Level Parameters Configuring Voice Certain database parameters apply to specific ports or interfaces Others are con figured only once and apply to all voice calls on the node Pressing A at the Voice Configuration Menu will display a menu similar to the fol lowing Node Name node_xyz Voice S ystem Level C onfiguration Parameters Voice Node Number Ring Voltage Frequency Country Code Speed Map Dial Digits Voic
370. nd destination Ukn Sockets Rcv is the number of socket numbers received that could not be identified Some socket numbers assigned by Novell are 0451 NCP Process 0452 SAP Process 0453 RIP Process 0455 NetBIOS Process 0456 Diagnostics Process Rev BSys Discard through R_Decomp Errors are not monitored by the FRX FRM but are included in the statistics list because it is part of the IPX MIB The statistics in the list between the above two are Bad Checksum Rev Local Rev Pkts Path_Not Found Local Tx Pkts Bad Local Tx Pkts Tx BSys Discard Open Socket Fail State Changes Init Fail Ms to Tx 1 Byte R RIP Ent Filter is the number of received RIP entries discarded due to a filter T RIP Ent Filter is the number of transmitted RIP entries discarded due to a filter R SAP Ent Filter is the number ofreceived SAP entries discarded due to a filter T SAP Ent Filter is the number of transmitted SAP entries discarded due to a filter R RIP Pkt Filter is the number of received RIP packets discarded due to a RIP router filter T RIP Pkt Filter is the number of transmitted RIP packets discarded due to a RIP router filter SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Chapter 22 System Events SmartSwitch 1800 alarm or event messages can be displayed locally see Dis playing Events on page 22 3 as well as sent toan async terminal a serial or parallel printer another node or any other dev
371. ne SDLC Remote RNR limit exceeded Severity 2 Meaning The remote station is busy This could be a hardware or buffer problem in the remote device SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 System Events 717 718 720 721 722 736 737 738 Action Check the hardware and configuration at the remote device SDLC Rem Tx Frame exceeds MAXDATA Severity 2 Meaning A frame transmitted by the remote station exceeds the configured value for Maxdata maxi mum bytes per I frame Action None SDLC Rem sent UA in NRM Severity 2 Meaning The remote station sent a UA while in Normal Response Mode which is not allowed Action None SDLC No DSR on link Severity 2 Meaning A necessary DSR was not received from the DCE Action Check the modem to make sure it is operational SDLC No CTS on link Severity 2 Meaning A necessary CTS was not received from the DCE Action Check the modem to make sure it is operational SDLC No External CLock Severity 2 Meaning The necessary clock is not being provided Action Check the modem to make sure it is operational SDLC LLC 2 Remote Link Stn lost Severity 2 Meaning The remote stationis not responding Either the Inactivity Timer Ti or Acknowledgment Timer T2 has expired Action Check the remote station to make sure it is operational LLC 2 DM Received Severity 2 Meaning The remote station sent aDisconnect Moderesponse and the logica
372. ne the order in which it will process protocols When configuring priorities be careful to consider the types of traffic being routed on other connections in the node CAUTIEN Bandwidth Allocation Group assi gns the logical port to one of sixteen groups whose parameters regulate bandwidth usage by outgoing traffic on the physical link See Configuring Bandwidth Allo cation Groups on page 7 6 Encapsulation Method is the method by which traffic over the logical port will be enveloped within frame relay frames for transmission The valid methods are T1 617 Annex G and T1 617 RFC1490 With Annex G a LAPB frame is encapsulated immediately following the frame relay header flag 2 byte T1 618 header LAPB address LAPB control LAPB I field x 25 x 75 With RFC 1490 the order is T1 618 header Q 922 control byte Q 933 NLPID 2 byte level 2 protocol ID 2 byte level 3 protocol ID LAPB frame Although it may appear that RFC1490 encapsulation uses more overhead the number of protocols being encapsulated are important in determining the method e RFC1490 The protocols will be identified on the DLCI based on their NLPIDs and if applicable level 2 and level 3 headers e g X 25 flag T1 618 2 byte header 0x03 Q 922 control 0x08 Q 933 NLPID T1 617 level 2 LAPB PID 0x51 81 T1 617 level 3 PID 0x67 80 LAPB frame e AnnexG Each protocol must be encapsulated in X 25 for transmission over a single DLCI because Annex G allo
373. nfiguration butubeustitabic tad dais D Configuring Bandwidth Alkacson C E E Bandwidth Allocation Group Parameters E E E EET 7 7 Configuration Ex amples sic iscssciscsasssisvonssicsmascwossantameanescasuavaie 7 8 Configuring Frame Relay Ports iade UAR Reviewing DLCI Configuration Figure 4 ltem m 2 10 Configuring DLCI Parameters Figure 7 4 Item D 7 12 Viewing Learned DLCIs Figure 7 4 Item OP CANCUQU NN 7 13 Frame Relay Port Parameters iss EE Configuring Frame Relay PVCs pre the Madea T TA Frame Relay PVC Parameters Peel Configuring Frame Relay iP ail Groups Cs Backup Group Parameters bap ER DH D PORE nda a Fane Chapter8 Configuring X 25 TO ics ection eet ah ene dO E estat door pus 8 1 Regoied Conil EBEN ia os eire OD YD HAEC HU EPAD COLE nU Cue Bob E Configuring a Physical X 25 Port E D Configuring Closed User Groups GG REA E Co pe CU ERG NDS EA 8 3 Contouring Network Dunk aus sie ereciesertask assa OA cirea dne dE TOR io Cn Physica X 75 Port Parmie O ceo operc dr ap SERE Obl t e Duet DE did 8 6 Onna ine a Lorra X23 POIL a e o nedietepr ten uae ae E eed eeu ur iniu dad Logical Port PStiritlets iac e obedit diee latis MAD CMM E QE Configuring Subseriber ls aou esce orien ete Feet sbbeo ime exe O22 Lo eS eun Mu 8 22 Hunt Group Example X nnn 0 X Er BOL Subscriber Parameters
374. nfigure Filter Definitions and Applications Menu When prompted enter e Filter Type 4 Generic 5 MAC Default 6 LLC2SAP 7 Protocol 8 Bridged native NetBIOS e Filter ID 1 65535 The default is 1 This is simply a unique identifier e Any other requested information noting the values in Table 16 2 on page 16 8 through Table 16 6 on page 16 10 Press Enter ata prompt to accept a default value The display will depend on the filtercategory The following figure shows an example of aMAC filter record 166 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Node Name node_xyz Bridge Filter Definitions Filter Category 5 MAC Filter ID 1 Filter Name filter abc Source MAC Address Value ff 0ac00 Source MAC Address Mask ffff0000 Destination MAC Address Value 102045000001 Destination MAC Add ress Mask ffffff000000 Option Figure 16 2 Bridge MAC Filter Configuration Screen AL ALIELIF G from Main Menu How Filter Masks Work Most Bridge filter parameters are assigned values and associated masks The mask determines by the process described below whether the filter will be applied to the packet The binary bits of the mask will be ANDed 04 020 0 120 1 1 1 to the value as in this example Assume the value hex is 1234 and the mask is F000 The binary ANDing is as follows Value 0001001000110100 Mask 1111000000000000 AND Result 0001000000000000 The mask will also be ANDed to its correspon
375. nfigured as unnumbered and therefore no Source IP Address is configured the default value of Network Mask will be taken from the numbered interface that is assigned If a Source IP Address is specified changed the Network Mask will automatically change to a default value appropriate for the new address For this reason configure the Source CAUIICN IP Address first then the Network Mask 4 These addresses must also beconfigured in Subscriber records described on page 8 20 and cannot contain wildcards In the record for the Source Subscriber do not configure any Routing Path In the record for the Destination Subscriber configure 1st Routing Pathas the node RLP only if FRX6000 or FRM and X25 port that will be used for the physical interface On an FRX6000 or FRM that RLP does not need to be the same one that has IP installed 14 8 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Configuring IP Routing Table 14 4 Ethernet Token Ring IP Interface Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Maximum Transmission Unit 1 4096 4096 Routing Metric Count 0 255 0 ICMP Redirects Y N RIP Support 0 Enabled 1 Rcv only 2 Disabled 0 Enabled RIP Flash Updates sec 5 300 10 RIP Full Updates sec 10 300 Priority 0 9 Bandwidth Allocation Group 1 16 Interface Type Ethernet 802 3 802 5 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Network Mask 255 0 0 0 225 255 255 254 Broadcast Address 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Proxy ARP Enable
376. nfirmation or Clear Indication is received If the timer expires the DTE should retransmit the Clear Request DTE Restart Retry Count is the number of times a Restart Request from the logical DTE will be transmitted The DTE will stopissuing the request on receipt ofa Restart Confirmation or Restart Indication If the Restart Retry Count expires restart and recovery procedures should be initi ated DTE Reset Retry Count is the number of times a Reset Request from the logical DTE will be transmitted The DTE will stop issuing the request on receipt of aReset Confirmation Reset Indication or Clear Request If the Reset Retry Count expires restart and recovery procedures should be initiated DTE Clear Retry Count isthe number of times a Clear Request from the logical DTE will be transmitted The DTE will stop issuing the request on receipt of a Clear Confirmation or Clear Indi cation If the Clear Retry Countexpires restart and recovery procedures should be ini tiated 8 18 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Closed User Group Parameters Configuring X 25 The Closed User Group CUG function is an X 25 privacy feature that allows cre ation of up to 100 groups of users per port Members of a CUG can communicate with other members but access to and from network users outside that CUG may be denied determined by Outgoing Access Allowed and Incoming Access Allowed The CUG index number is included in call packets and is c
377. ng Subcriber IDs are the called and calling addresses that are placed in call packets Each Subscriber ID record also defines routing for calls to the subscriber Each subscriber ID or address consists of up to 15 digits including if desired question marks and or asterisks used as wildcards See Wildcards in Subscriber Addresses Subscribers using a public data network PDN must conform to the format used by the PDN For example CCITT Recommendation X 121 specifies this format a one digit international code followed by a four digit Data Network Identification Code DNIC followed by up to 10 digits of Network Terminal Number NTN A private network that will not communicate with other networks does not need to follow the format any or all ofthe digits can be used as desired following the guide lines in this chapter Wildcards in Subscriber Addresses Each subscriber is assi gned to a SmartSwitch 1800 port and more than one subscri ber device can use a port To eliminate the need to specify the complete ID of every sub scriber on the port the question mark and the asterisk can be used as wildcard char acters A question mark in an address matches any single digit For example 3110 is any 14 digit address that begins with 3110 An asterisk matches any combination of digits including none at all For example 3110 00 is any address that starts with 3110 and ends with 00 including 311000 but not 3110
378. ng state Only Status Displays 20 23 BPDU frames will be received or transmitted to allow the port to get its status into the spanning tree algorithm The port will leave this state when the Bridge Forward Delay timer see page 16 4 expires If the port is selected as Root or Designated port it will enter Forwarding state If the port is not selected as Root or Designated port it will enter Blocking state A Root port is the one selected by the spanning tree algorithm as Ee the port used to reach the root bridge which is the least cost MC L bridge in a link A Designated port is the port that connects to the least cost path to the root bridge Learning BPDUSs Hello messages are being sent between bridges and the spanning tree algorithm is being updated The port will leave this state when the Bridge Forward Delay timer see page 16 4 expires If the port is selected as Root or Designated port it will enter Forwarding state If the port is not selected as Root or Designated port it will enter Blocking state Forwarding the Bridge port is participating in bridging of frames as well as ongoing learning and updating of the spanning tree algorithm If the algorithm redesignates the port as non root or non designated the port might enter Blocking state Blocking the Bridge port has not been selected as Rootor Designated and is transitioning to the Listening state e Rcv Xmit are the cumulative bytes received transm
379. nicate with each other and other PBX like communications equipment 2W E amp M and 4W E amp M can be configured in these modes viathe switches on the front of the SmartS witch e 2W E amp Mor 4W E amp M IS Immediate Start the industry standards for E amp M oper ation e 2W E amp M or4W E amp M DD Delay Dial which will cause the SmartSwitch will expect an attached PB X to raise its M lead to request a dial register The S mart Switch will respond as follows 1 toggle the E lead 2 send a dial register to the PBX 3 retum the E leadto its original state and 4 wait for dial digits from the PBX no dial tone is transmitted to the PBX e 2W E amp M or4W E amp M WS Wink Start which will cause the SmartSwitch will expect an attached PB X to raise its M lead to request a dial register The S mart Switch will respond by sending a dial register to the PBX When the PBX indi cates it is ready for dial digits no dial tone is transmitted to the PB X the SmartSwitch will toggle the E lead When the E lead returns to its ori ginal state the PBX will transmit dial digits to the SmartSwitch 2W E amp M TE or 4W E amp M TE Timed E amp M are specified you can specify a delay at which the E Lead follows the M Lead See TE Timer below 13 12 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Jitter specifies the amount of jitter delay which is used to compensate for the variable arrival time of frames Inconsistent arrival can result in a cho
380. nodes as follows Node 1 e System Level Parameters Voice Node Number 1 e Speed Map Dial Digits 2 e Speed Dial Map Table Speed Dial Abbreviated Digits 77 Long Dial Digit Mapping 000215 2 node number 5 Voice port number Extended Dial String 7777 e Voice Port 4 Configuration e Source of Extended Digits MAP ofLeading Digits to Delete 0 e Forward Delay 2 25 sec intervals Forwarded Digit Type DTMF e Forwarded Output Digits Ext Node 2 e System Level Parameters Voice Node Number 2 e Speed Dial Map Table Speed Dial Abbreviated Digits 12 Long Dial Digit Mapping 000215 2 node number 5 Voice port number e Extended Dial String 9 5551212 C2 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 e Voice Port 5 Configuration of Leading Digits to Delete 0 Forward Delay 2 25 sec intervals Forwarded Digit Type DTMF Forwarded Output Digits Ext The sequence of steps in placing a call are as follows 1 The caller dials 59222 2 PBX A connects to Node 1 Port 4 and the caller hears a dial tone 3 The caller dials 77 or 12 4 Node 1 translates the 2 digit speed dial number from long digits and the extension from the map table 5 After a 1 2 second delay 25 sec times 2 as configured for Forward Delay a call is established to Node 2 Port 5 6 Aftera 1 2 second delay 25 sec times 2 as configured for Forward Delay on Nod
381. ns of all IP Interface parameters follow Table 14 4 Configuring IP Routing Table 14 2 Frame Relay IP Interface Parameters Valid Values Default Value Maximum Transmission Unit 1 4096 1500 Routing Metric Count 0 255 0 Y N Y RIP Support 0 Enabled 1 Rev only 2 Disabled 0 Enabled RIP Flash Updates sec 5 300 RIP Full Updates sec 10 300 Priority 0 9 Bandwidth Allocation Group 1 16 FRL frame relay Source Card 0 0 7 16 991 Enable Inverse ARP Y N see note Destination IP Address 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 none Unnumbered Interface Y N see note 3 Source IP Address 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 none Netw ork Mask 255 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 4 255 0 0 0 1 Valid port numbers depend on the model of SmartSwitch 1800 see port locations on page 6 1 Makesure the frame relay port is not configured in the Port record for backup use only See page 7 18 Make sure the DLCI is not part of a frame relay DLCI backup groupor intra nodal frame relay PVC both described in Chapter 7 Y for new interfaces N for interfaces already configured when the current release of SmartS witch 1800 software is installed 255 255 255 255 is valid only on a point to point interface The default value of Network Mask will be configured automatically to reflect the appropriate address class after the Source IP Address is specified If the interface is configured as unnumbered and therefore no Source IP Address is configured
382. nses to General Queries transmitted on the interface SAP N Resp Tx is the number of SAP Nearest Responses responses to Nearest Queries transmitted on the interface SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Statistics Displays SAP Pkts Rev is the number of SAP packets received on the interface SAP G Query Rev is the number of SAP General Queries received on the interface SAP N Query Rev is the number of SAP Nearest Queries received on the interface SAP G Resp Rcv is the number of SAP General Responses responses to General Queries received on the interface SAP N Resp Rcv is the number of SAP Nearest Responses responses to Nearest Queries received on the interface SAP Aged Entries is the number of entries that have been deleted from the routing information table due to expiration of the S AP Age Timer configured in the IPX Interface record SAP Prd Broadcast is the number of periodic SAP messages broadcast from this node advertising the available servers from the server table in the FRX FRM SAP Upd Broadcast is the number of SAP messages broadcast from this node to inform the network of changes to the server table SAP INV Net Rcv is the number of SAP packets received with an invalid network address one that does not match the network address configured on the interface These packets will be discarded SAP Worse Rt Rcv is the number of SAP packets received containing S
383. nsmisison will be multidrop several stations between end points or point to point Slow Poll Retry Count applicable only to connections configured for multidrop specifies how many times the control unit CU will be polled if it is not responding before itis put on the slow poll list CUs on the slow poll list will be polled with a frequency determined by the parameter Slow Poll Retry Frequency Slow Poll Retry Frequency specifies the number of times active CUs will be polled between pollings of the CUs on the slow poll list of Beginning Sync Char specifies the number of synchronization characters that will be added to the beginning of each frame of Trailing Pad Characters specifies the number of padding characters that will be appended to each frame to ensurethat the last significant character is sent before the data transmitter switches off SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Poll Interval Timer specifies the time between passes through the polling list No Response Timer is activated after transmission of a general poll or a data frame On expiry a NAK EOT General Poll sequence is transmitted and the No Response Retry Countis incre mented The timer will be de acti vated on reception of any valid frame from the line during Link Down No Response Retry Count specifies how many times the user device will be polled if it is not responding before control is passed on the next cluster accompanied by other c
384. nter Port Configuration on this RLP port DLCI and specify the desired group A value of 0 means that the DLCI will not be backed up therefore set the Group to0 if the DLCI will be a backup o nN ON tA Port Type Specify Nfor the initiating backup DLCI and Y for the remote backup DLCI Displayed only if Backup Group Numberisa value other than 0 Valid only if the remote node is an FRX6000 or FRM If set to 65535 switchback will not occur unless the backup fails specifies the protocol the port will support Selectingthis parameter will display a list of all serial protocols loaded in the SmartSwitch Physical Port Interface must be configured as follows For reference port locations are shown on page 6 1 e Port 0 is always RS 232 e Port 1 is RS 232 or DSU depending on whether the optional CSU DSU card is installed e Ports 2 and 3 are determined by the attached cables RS 232 V 35 or RS 449 FRM Configuring Frame Relay 7 15 Blocked Port Flag will cause the port to be enabled N or disabled Y at node IPL The port will remain in that state until this parameter is changed or an on line enable B B C from the Main Menu or disable B B A from the Main Menu is performed If set to Y no backup DLCIs on this port will be used even if the port is enabled via on line port enable Line Speed is the data transmission rate in bits per second and the clock speed when the portis a physical DCE ie
385. ntial CUG Flag Y N Preferential CUG Incoming Access Allowed Y N 60 5 8 2 5 0 g S a a 3 2 8 03 i 6 amp oj z clolo aiais e z z Outgoing Access Allowed Y N Dial Port Parameters Dial Support None Dialout Dialin None 1 30 Disconnect Ti mer seconds 1 255 Line Setup Timer seconds 1 255 1 7 if Modulo 8 1 127 if Modulo 128 2 This parameter is relevant only if Physical Port Interface is something other than RS 232 and Generate Clock is Y 3 Omeans the parameter is not used SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Configuring X 25 4 IfSDLC LLC2 conversion is configured over theport Fast Select Acceptance must be Y Also if the X25 link is toan X 25 network the network must support Fast Select as wellas calluser data greater than 32 bytes Port Type specifies the protocol the port will support Selectingthis parameter will display a list of all serial protocols loaded in the device Physical Port Interface must be configured as follows For reference port locations are shown on page 6 1 e Port 0 is always RS 232 e Port 1 is RS 232 or DSU depending on whether the optional CSU DSU card is installed e Ports 2 and 3 are determined by the attached cables RS 232 V 35 or RS 449 Blocked Port Flag will cause the port to be enabled N or disabled Y at node IPL The port will remain in that state until this parameter is changed or an on line enable B B C from the Main Menu or disa
386. nu To add or change a Subscriber ID press B at the Connections and Routing Paths Menu When prompted enter a Subscriber ID of up to 15 digits ID conventions are described on page 8 22 Node Name nod exyz SV C Subscriber Maintenance Subscriber ID 0100012345 Subscriber Name subl Routing Algorithm 0 Round Robin A B C Systematic Redirection D Redirect on Busy E Redirect on Out of Order F Comnection Priority G Routing Paths H Redirection Addresses Option Figure 8 6 Typical SVC Subscriber Screen A D B from Main Menu If configuring an ID that will be a Source Subscriber on an IP over X 25 CS Interface described in Chapter 14 accept the default values for all param NC IL eters after Subscriber Name and do not configure any Routing Path If con figuring an ID that will be a Destination Subscriber on an IP over X 25 Interface accept the default values for all parameters afterSubscriber Name except 1st Routing Path which must be configured as the node and physical X 25 port that will be used as the interface Pressing G will display routing paths which link the subscriber with one or more ports Pressing H will display the addresses used for call redirection These addresses are valid only if Y is specified for one or more of items C D and Eon the first screen Parameters for all three screens are described following Table 8 3 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Subscriber Addressi
387. o display all physical and logical connections on a physical port press C at the Status Displays Menu and when prompted enter an RLP port number 0 3 The display will differ depending on whether or notthe port is a frame relay port Figure 20 3 shows a frame relay port and Figure 20 4 shows a non frame relay port 204 Connection Status Display Menu Page 1 RLP 0 Port 0 From SeqDLCI 16 17 18 20 32 33 34 35 36 10 25 11 24 12 42 13 43 14 44 il 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ve State Data trans Data trans Data trans Data trans Data trans Data trans Data trans Data trans Data trans Data trans Data trans Data trans Data trans Data trans Cumulative Trans 587 588 592 580 585 600 621 579 586 588 593 602 610 585 Red 497 574 586 486 602 594 600 543 584 586 610 498 506 560 Disc gt eoncnooooacre To P 9 10 11 14 18 19 22 23 24 30 29 33 34 35 Node Name node xyz DLCI State 16 17 18 20 28 29 30 31 32 25 24 42 43 44 Data_trans Data_trans Data_trans Data_trans Data_trans Data_trans Data_trans Data_trans Data_trans Data_trans Data_trans Data_trans Data_trans Data_trans Figure 20 3 Virtual Connections Display on Frame Relay Port Information in this Display C C from Main Menu e Seq is a sequence number used to identify the connection e DLCI is the DLCI on which the connection exists e State Data trans mean
388. o which they are attached In Info Req is the number of requests received froma host for the IP address of the network to which this node is attached Out Info Rsp is the number of responses sent by this node to information requests In Info Rsp is the number of responses received by this node to information requests Out Mask Req is the number of requests to other entities in the IP path for the subnet mask of the IP network to which they are attached In Mask Req is the number of requests from other entities in the IP path for the subnet mask of the IP network to which this node is attached Out Mask Rsp is the number of responses sent by this node to subnet mask requests In Mask Rsp is the number of responses received by this node to subnet mask requests 21 17 IP Interface Statistics IP Interface statistics track IP traffic over the node interface Press E at the Statistics Menu and when prompted enter e Interface Number 0 128 e Report Interval 5 65535 Default is 5 The display will be similar to the following figure with IP LAN or IPWAN at the upper left identifying the interface type Node Name node_xyz IP Interface Statistics Dis play Report Interval sec 5 Current Time 02 05 98 10 32 45 Interface Number 2 Type FRL MTU 4096 STATISTIC CURR CUMULATIVE STATISTIC CURR CUMULATIVE PacketsIn 21 269134 Packets Out 21 269420 Bytes In 8161 139690157 Bytes Out 8161 139822450
389. oes not impair data integrity or interfere with traffic To exit the Line Monitor press F to stop the display from scrolling assuming it is scrolling then F3 Stopping the scrolling first is notalways necessary but allows quicker access to the software when F3 is pressed especially from an async ter minal 20 8 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 X 25 Line Monitor The X 25 line monitor is used to monitor X 25 SDLC BSC and async ports The fol lowing figure shows an example 09 23 05 16 I DATA LCN 4072 PS 4 LNG 1024 56686520756190G801 09 23 05 27 I DATA LCN 4072 PS5 LNG 1024 46686521255190G811 09 23 05 27 I RR LCN 4071 PS 09 23 06 05 O RR LCN 4072 PR6 PS 09 23 06 18 O DATA LCN 4072 PR6 PS6 LNG 1024 557586707555090G85 09 23 07 13 O DATA LCN 4071 PR6 PS7 LNG 1024 54389450758090G859 Figure 20 6 X 25 Line Monitor Display C E from Main Menu Information in this Display On each line Status Displays The leftmost field shows the time to hundredths of a second The next field displays Incoming or O Outgoing Outgoing packets are also displayed in reverse video The next field identifies the packet ty pe D M or Q appears between the packet type and the LCN field if the D M or Q bit is tumed on in the packet LCN is the logical channel of a data session PR is the packet receive sequence number PSis the packet send sequence number LNG is the length of the data in bytes The field
390. on code not allowed Facility parameter not allowed Invalid called address Invalid calling address Invalid facilty registration length Incoming call barred No LCN available might mean that maximum number of connections 1024 was reached Call collision Duplicate facility requested Non zero address len gth Non zero facility length Facility not provided when expected Invalid CCITT specified DTE facility Miscellaneous protocol error Improper cause code from DTE Not aligned octet Inconsistent Q bit setting International problem Remote network problem International protocol problem International link out of order B 3 SNA Codes 98 116 117 118 120 121 124 125 128 152 Cabletron Specific Codes B 4 Hex 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 77 89 8a 8B 8C 8D 8b 8F 90 91 92 Dec 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 Description International link busy Transit network facility problem Remote network facility problem International routing problem Temporary routing problem Unknown called DNIC Maintenance action Normal ISO IP X 25 disconnect Description General protocol error Invalid command Unexpected command PDU reject Invalid header Invalid data Invalid frame Oversized frame Sequence error Frame reject Invalid response Inactivity timer expired Unexpected command Link down Description In
391. ond reporting interval multiplied by 10 21 5 e Frames sec 10 number of frames transmitted received per second over the five second reporting interval multiplied by 10 e DiscF sec 10 number of outgoing incoming discarded frames per second over the fi ve second reporting interval multiplied by 10 Information in a Non Frame Relay Display X25 frame level statistics are counts per second multiplied by 10 of these standard LAPB commands and responses SABM set asynchronous balanced mode un numbered command UA un numbered acknowledgment un numbered response DISC disconnect un numbered command DM disconnect mode un numbered response FRMR frame reject un numbered response REJ reject supervisory command or response RR receive ready supervisory command or response RNR receive not ready supervisory command or response INFO information information transfer command Frame Relay Utilization Statistics Frame Relay Utilization statistics track traffic over a frame relay DLCI and monitor the usage by each configured group on that DLCI Press H at the Statistics Menu and when prompted enter e Port 0 3 Default is 0 e DLCI 16 991 Default is 16 e Report Interval in seconds 5 65535 Default is 5 Node Name node xyz Frame R day Utilization Statistics RLP 0 CIR In Out bit sec 512000 512000 Port 0 Bc In Out bit 512000 512000 DLCI 16 Be In Out bit
392. onding Seq sequence number To delete an entry select it then press E and Y when asked to confirm All entries below a deleted one will move up one in the list agement LMI or Annex D initial IPL traps will be lost by the If running IP over a frame relay port with link layer man M time the frame relay DLCI comes up CAU HN Trap Routing Parameters 174 Table 17 3 Trap Routing Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Address valid IP address 0 0 0 0 Enabled N Severity 14 4 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Configuring SNMP Address is an IP address to which all traps meeting the enabled and severity class criteria will be sent Enabled determines whether or not traps meeting the severity class criterion will be sent to the specified address Severity determines the lowest severity level traps events that will be sent to the specified address 1 is the highest For example if 3 is specified traps of severity levels 1 2 and 3 will be sent assuming the menu item is enabled There are four levels of severity Level 1 Serious fault This is a serious error and immediate action is required Level 2 Major fault link alarm Link alarms 400 406 are at this level simply to show importance for any other events take action as soon as possible Level 3 Minor fault traffic disturbance Clear the fault at the first suitable occasion Level 4 Configuration error inform
393. ondition checks Error Retransmit Count specifies the number of times the node will resend a block of data after the receiving device has detected an error in that block NAK Retry Count specifies the number of times the node will send a frame when the receiving device is unable to acknowledge that is returns a NAK to the node Explanations of Subscriber Parameters Sq isa sequence number which eases selection of a line onthe screen to change To move to another line press A and enter the sequence number Local Sub is the calling address used by the local device A Subscri ber ID see page 10 8 must also be configured for this address Remote Sub is the called address used for calls by the local device A Subscriber ID see page 10 8 must also be configured for this address If the BSC port is one end of a connection to a logical X 25 portin the SmartSwitch 1800 this address must match a Subscriber ID configured for the logical port Atcl Autocall causes a BSC TPAD to automatically call its HP AD when the controller identified by Link Address becomes active This parameter has no function if the port is an HPAD Rtytm is the Retry Timer which determines the time between autocall retries Rty is the Retry Number which is the maximum number of times an autocall will be sent Conn ID is an internal connection identifier that will link the BSC port with a device configured in the BSC Devices file page 10 10
394. one 20 1 1 Valid LAN interface depends on hardware model Default value is Ethernet or 802 5 depending on hardware for Interface 0 and FRL for Interface 1 63 2 Ifset to greater than 0 see note 4 RIP Age Timer must be 3 times longer than Periodic RIP Timer and SAP Age Timer must be 3 times longer than Periodic SAP Timer 3 Avalue of 0 disables aging 4 The addresses specified here must also be configured in Subscriber records with certain requirements These are described on page 8 20 15 11 LAN Interface Parameters Table 15 9 IPX LAN Interface Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Blocked Port Flag Y N N Interface Type Ethernet 802 5 Depends oninter face number Frame Type TYPE Il RAW LLC SNAPI TYPE II Maximum Transmission Unit frame size Ethernet 45 1518 1518 802 5 48 4096 409 6 NetBIOS Enabled Y N NetBIOS Hops 0 255 Periodic RIP Enabled Y N Periodic RIP Timer seconds 1 65535 2 Periodic SAP Enabled Y N Periodic SAP Timer seconds 1 65535 RIP Enabled Y N 1 Valid LAN interface depends on hardware model Default value is Ethernet or 802 5 depending on hardware for Interface 0 and FRL for Interface 1 63 2 lfsetto greater than 0 see note 4 RIP Age Timer must be 3 times longer than Periodic RIP Timer and SAP Age Timermust be 3 times longer than Periodic SAP Timer 3 A value of 0 disables aging olzilzij ila z gj z z 8 15 12 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Gu
395. onnections in the node CAUITICN Bandwidth Allocation Group assigns the IPX interface to one of sixteen groups whose parameters regulate band width usage See Configuring Bandwidth Allocation Groups on page 7 6 Port Diagnostics Enabled denables or disables the IPX interface s ability to handle Novell Diagnostic packets If enabled IPX will forward or respond to a diagnostic packet depending on to whom it is addressed If disabled IPX will ignore the packet NetBIOS Enabled determines whether Novell encapsulated NetBIOS frames received on the interface will be processed If disabled NetBIOS frames will be discarded Configuring IPX 15 13 15 14 NetBIOS Hops is the maximum number of hops allowed for routing a Novell encapsulated NetBIOS frame Each router in a packet s path to the destination network is one hop Frames exceeding this value will be discarded Periodic RIP Enabled determines whether the node will originate periodic IPX Routing Information Pro tocol RIP messages from this interface assuming RIP is enabled to inform the network that the route through this interface is viable Periodic RIP Timer is the interval between the periodic IPX RIP broadcasts from this interface Periodic SAP Enabled determines whether the node will originate periodic IPX Service Advertising Protocol SAP messages from this interface assuming S AP is enabled to inform the network which SAP entries in the routing table are
396. ons require a keyboard and screen in one of several forms The typical method of connecting to a SmartSwitch 1800 is viaan ASCII VT100 type terminal configured for 9600 bps 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity or a terminal emulator on a PC running Procomm Plus for Windows Each SmartSwitch 1800 is shipped with cabling to support connection to an ASCII terminal or a PC SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Quick Start Chapter 2 Getting Started The SmartSwitch 1800 Installation amp Setup Guide shipped with each unit describes the procedure for connecting to the SmartSwitch from a local or remote keyboard and video device Once this has been done the SmartSwitch must be customized for the devices to which it will connect the traffic it will receive and transmit and various operating parameters that can be set to your specific needs Much of the configuration can be performed from an existing central site FRX6000 via remote control of the SmartSwitch 1800 At a minimum however someone must configure a remote control ID and a physical port on each new SmartSwitch 1800 to allow the central site FRX6000 to gain access to the SmartSwitch 1800 The basic steps you should take to get the SmartSwitch up and running are l Read the remainder of this chapter as it explains the user interface on a Smart Switch 1800 This information will help you understand the menu operations that are necessary to configure the SmartS witch fo
397. oot data to a backup file 4 Display the new boot data and compare itto the previous data This will show whether the problem was fixed Also a problem that occurred during the previ ous boot up will often be cleared up by re booting To display the data from the current boot up press C at the Reports Menu or F then C from the Main Menu To display the data from the previous boot up saved in a file called BOOTBAK TXT press D atthe Reports menu or F D from the Main Menu 2 5 Moving Through the Menus To select a menu item press the letter to the left of the item To return to the next higher menu from a lower level press F3 To move from operations under one Main Menu entry to operations under another entry you must return to the Main Menu The easiest way is to press F3 repeatedly until the Main Menu is displayed Prompts Within the menu operations there are two kinds of prompts e Information prompts respond by typing the requested information then pressing Enter e Yes no prompts respond by pressing Y or N Throughout this manual are tables of valid and default values To specify a default if one exists press Enter in response to a prompt Pressing Enter when it is not required may cause the next prompt to automatically select the default choice CAUTION On Line Help Most screen menus display a prompt called Option Pressing in response to this prompt will usual
398. ork is the number of Voice frames received Transmitted Frames to Network is the number of Voice frames transmitted Congestion Management Frames from Network is self explanatory Congestion Management Frames to Network is self explanatory Call Setup Time msec is self explanatory Call Duration secs is self explanatory Number Dialed is self explanatory Baud Rate Kbits sec is self explanatory Interface Under runs is the number of frames that were not accepted due to DMA direct memory access overrun errors Interface Over runs is the number of frames that were not accepted due to DMA direct memory access underrun errors Bridge Port Statistics Statistics Displays Press A at the Bridge Status Displays Menu to display the configurational and oper ational status of all Bridge ports in the node Node Name node_xyz Bridge Port Status Display Bridge Id 0010 00000364439B Root Port 255 0 Ethernet Active Disabled 4294967296 4294967296 1 Token Ring Active Listening 4675561234 4675561234 2 Fim Nat LLC2 Active Learning 4561230000 4562222100 3 Frm 8023 TB Active Blocking 4561231100 4561231100 PgUp PgDn F2 MoreInfo F3 Exit Figure 21 9 Bridge Port Status Display C F D A from Main Menu To display statistics for the Bridge ports on the above screen press F2 Pressing Pg Up or PgDn will display other statistics screens if there are more and pressing F2 will
399. ormally the PAD prompt character nnnnn COM means that a vitual circuit has been established with a subscriber whose ID is nnnnn ALREADY CONNECTED indicates there is already a VC setup so another call cannot be made until the current call is cleared AUTOCALL INITIATED BY SUBSCRIBER nnnmm is self explanatory AUTOCALL RETRIES EXHAUSTED RETURN TO COMMAND STATE means that the autocall retry timer has expired CALL CLEARED indicates that the call is being cleared CALL TIMED OUT is displayed when the network does not respond toa virtual circuit call setup request within a certain time CLR cause cause code diagnostic code is displayed when the call is cleared Some common causes and codes are listed in Appendix B CLR CONF confirms the clearing of a call DISCONNECT TIMER EXPIRED indicates that the inactivity timer on the port has expired A 3 A 4 ERR is a response to an invalid command ERR NC indicates a network congestion error FRAMING ERROR indicates that the port is not finding the stop bit at the end of the character bits This can be due to noise or a mismatch in such parameters as speed bits character or stop bits between the port and its connected device LINE DISCONNECTED indicates that modem signals on the port were dropped to effecta physical disconnection login is a requestto enter a subscriber ID LOGIN ACC indicates that login was success
400. ort No Config is displayed on this line and the one below it Logical Inter is the logical interface DCE orDTE as taken from the Port record If no record has been created forthis port No Config is displayed on this line and the one above it Line Speed is the speed configured in the Port record SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 e Line Status Failed level 2 is down Disconnect level 2 is up level 3 is down Restart level 3 is restarting Not_configured port is not configured Operational level 3 is up e TD 2 etc The signal names with connector pin numbers in parentheses are listed as ON OFF or UNK unknown non functional unused or in transition between states For different physical interfaces the names remain the same but the numbers change If displaying signal information for a remote subscriber press F2 to update the data The display for a remote subscriber shows by default the current values at the time you opened the record Monitoring Traffic Serial Ports Status Displays The port monitor displays the control data and information data of traffic passing over a Serial interface Data can be gathered in real time for an X 25 SDLC BSC or async port or an LLC2 session Running the traffic monitor on a frame relay port will degrade performance on the port CAUTIEN Press A at the Traffic Monitor Menu or C E A fromthe Main Menu and when prompted enter a Por
401. ort 1 is RS 232 or DSU depending on whether the optional CSU DSU card is installed e Ports 2 and 3 are determined by the attached cables RS 232 V 35 or RS 449 Blocked Port Flag will cause the port to be enabled N or disabled Y at node IPL The port will remain in that state until this parameter is changed or an on line enable B B C from the Main Menu or disable B B A from the Main Menu is performed Line Speed is the data transmission rate in bits per second and the clock speed on a serial port when the port is a physical DCE i e the attached I O cable is DCE If this port is a physical DTE specify the line speed that matches as closely as possible that of the device connected directly to the port Selecting this parameter for an CSU DSU port will toggle between the two valid values of 56K bps and 64K Clear Channel Selecting this parameter for any other port type will display alist of ranges Press the letter corresponding to a range to display the valid speeds within that range All possible speeds are 75 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 14 4K 19 2K 24K 28 8K 38 4K 48K 56K 64K 72K 112K 128K 168K 192K 224K 256K 280K 320K 336K 384K 392K 448K 504K 512K 560K 576K 616K 640K 672K 704K 728K 768K 784K 832K 840K 896K 952K 960K 1 008M 1 024M 1 064M 1 088M 1 12M 1 152M 1 176M 1 216M 1 232M 1 28M 1 288M 1 344M 1 4M 1 408M 1 456M 1 472M 1 512M 1 536M 1 568M 1 6M 1 624M 1 664M 1 668M 1 728M 1 792M 1 856M 1 92M 1
402. ort Interval sec 5 STATISTIC Pkts to Route 10 NetB Hops 2 Lrg Path Not Fnd Pkt RIP G_Query Tx RIP G_Resp_Tx RIP Pkts Rey RIP N_Query Rev CURR CUMULATIVE 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 STATISTIC Hops Too Large 10 RIP No Net Addr 10 RIP Pkts Tx 10 RIP N_Query Tx RIP N_Resp Tx RIP G Query Rev RIP G Resp Rev RIP Aged_Entries RIP Upd Broadcast RIP Worse Rt Rev RIP Ukn N Query RIP Ukn N Resp CURR CUMULATIVE 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 RIP N_RespRev RIP Prd_Broad cast RIP INVNet Rev RIP UknG_Query RIP UknG_Resp PgUp PgDn F4 C lear Cumulative Statistics Others Exit Figure 21 14 IPX Statistics Display E F from Main Menu There are three screens of IPX statistics Pressing F7 will display the next one if there is one and pressing F6 will display the previous one if there is one All IPX statistics are listed below Information in this Display Pkts to Route is the number of IPX packets routed through the local node Hops Too Large is the number of routed packets that were discarded because the hop count exceeded 15 the maximum allowable NetB Hops 2 Lrg is the number of NetBIOS packets that were discarded because the hop count exceeded the number of NetBIOS Hops specified in the IPX Interface record for the local FRX FRM interface RIP No Net Addr is the number of
403. ort is a physical DTE specify the line speed that matches as closely as possible that of the device connected directly to the port Retransmission Period is the length of time before the node will transmit an I frame if the previous trans mission is not acknowledged If the period expires the timer will be reset and a super visory frame will be transmitted demanding immediate acknowledgement The Maximum Retransmissions see that entry counter will also be incremented SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 The default value of 2000 ms allows avoidance of unnecessary retransmission of frames that have merely been delayed Maximum Retransmissions is the maximum number of times the node will attempt to send an Iframe after a Retransmission Period expiration A larger value for this parameter increases the prob ability of an eventual successful transmission but a smaller value permits faster detection of a permanent error condition Maximum Bytes per Frame is the maximum frame size that will be transmitted on the port Generate Clock specifies whether the port will generate the clock necessary to synchronize traffic over the link If the port is a physical DCE determi ned by the port s I O cable interface specify Y since the physical DCE generates clock If the port is DTE specify N Rev Clock TT from DTE allows the clock to be looped back from the DTE using the TT Terminal Timing signal which can be helpful on high speed
404. ort to a collecting node depends on the number of connections that can exist on the collecting node A SmartS witch 1800 supports up to 512 connections A connection on a collecting node is required for each reporting device Do not configure a collecting node to send its alarms to another y collecting node The alarms will be ignored due to a format mis match CAUTILN Max Congestion is a percentage of the SmartS witch 1800 alarm buffer If this level is exceeded no more alarms will be put into the buffer until it has reached the specified Min Con gestion See that entry below and Alarm Buffer on page 22 2 Min Congestion is a percentage of the SmartS witch 1800 alarm buffer As long as the percent of the buffer that is full is below this level alarms will always be placed into the buffer See Alarm Buffer on page 22 2 Periodic Status Timer sets the frequency with which the S martSwitch will send a heartbeat alarm message containing the date and time The heartbeat serves as a verification that the S mart Switch is operational Line Idle Timer is aperiodthat an SVC alarm connection will remain active after an alarm message is sent If no alarm is generated during this ti me the alarm connection is cleared The Periodic Status Timer see that entry determines the frequency with which routine status messages for this SmartSwitch will be sent On a reporting non collecting node it is generally preferable to set the Lin
405. ource of Extended Digits to Map the Dial Timer value will automatically be 13 9 set to 0 If you set Source of Extended Digits to User you must set the Dial Timer to a value other than 0 If you exit the record via F3 without resetting the Dial Timer and pressing F7 to update the System Memory the System Memory value will automati cally be set to 5 and this value will be in effect Blocked Port Flag will cause the portto be enabled N or disabled Y at node startup The port will remain in that state until this parameter is changed or an on line enable B B C from the Main Menu or disable B B A from the Main Menu is performed If set to Y no backup DLCIs on this port will be used even if the port is enabled via on line port enable Rate specifies the desired transmission rate for voice frames This value is transmitted as part ofa Call frame a call will be established if there is enough bandwidth at each end to provide the configured rate DTMF Detection enables disables or specifies a time span over which DTMF Dual Tone Multi Fre quency tones will be regenerated DTMF tones are the beeps usually heard when dialing a touch tone telephone 0 DTMF tones are passed transparently to the remote device 1 The SmartSwitch will detect incoming tones and regenerate them as received 2 255 The S martSwitch will regenerate DTMF tones for the specified number of seconds including call setup Timed
406. p EPIReGarR Re e LS 15 10 IPX RIP Static Route Parameters see RR 123 17 15 11 TPX SAP Static Route Parametets iscs xri en LO 18 xvii xviii 16 1 16 2 16 3 16 4 16 5 16 6 16 7 16 8 17 1 17 2 17 3 19 1 B dse Node Det anit Paraneteta uie acie hart R Bridge Genero Filler POaEQEBHOTS esnaera Badge MAC Filter Patatnelera sinis tite tace e rbv ip REM Cole et n Bdge SAP Filter Paraetetss uoce Gio eed parue pne EL a Badge Protocol Filter Paramotis iie ncecucnberb cp b ctia erbe orbes Badge NetBIOS Filter Parameters uie enceeer etre neta Bridge Filter Applications Parameters 1 biene Badge Pos2 LLC2 Interface Parameters euet SNMP System Defaults Parameters aeree Community Table Parameter sancionan meaa Trap Routing Parameters oue terrre rta eee cire Databuse P Mes uertit eite deed bee eM Debe RJJ Cable Connection S ooo eee e op e prERUIPRPE DEDE D bU 16 4 16 8 16 8 16 9 16 9 16 10 16 11 16 13 17 2 17 3 17 4 19 9 C 12 C 13 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Section Getting Started Chapter 1 Product Overview The SmartSwitch 1800 is a high performance multiprotocol branch access device providing the ability to transmit LAN data legacy data e g SDLC bisync async voice and fax over a single frame relay link A powerful management capability allows allocation of frame relay bandwidth to ensure that each type of traffic receives the necessary quality of service
407. p to 127 Action None Received FRMR WXYZ n control field n V s n V r n CMD RSP n Severity 2 Meaning The RLP HDLC frame processor task received a frame reject FRMR tesponse to a previously transmitted frame Action The system recovers automatically from this error however if the message is repeated it may mean that you have a bad communica tions line SABM DISC with wrong link address Severity 4 Meaning The HDLC frame processor task for the port has received an improperly addressed frame from the subscri ber This situation usually occurs when the port and subscriber devices are both con figured as logical DCEs or logical DTEs Action Modify the Port record so that one end of the connection is a logical DCE and the other is a logical DTE Illegal TC Gen CIk Combination Severity 1 Meaning The software has determined that a port is set to run at anillegalline speed throughput class Action This is probably a configuration error Check the Port record and change the throughput class if necessary Excessively noisy line Severity 3 Meaning Self explanatory Action Check the communications line and cables RLP Buf Usage exceeded T n C n Severity 4 Meaning The RLP statistic Percentage of Buffers in Use has exceeded the threshold T n that was set by the user C n is the current value Action If this happens frequently you may need to reroute some traffic
408. peration is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment uses gen erates and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed in accordance with the operatiors manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a res idential area is likely to cause interference in which case the user will be required to correct the inter ference at his own expense WARNING Changes or modifications made to this device which are not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to the equipment The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment This certification mean that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements The department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that itis permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications co
409. port in the SmartSwitch 1800 includes the following scenarios some of which are diagrammed in Figure 9 1 on page 9 3 e Connection between a LAN attached host workstation and SNA devices via SDLC to LLC2 and LLC2 to SDLC conversion over a frame relay or X 25 network example 1 or frame relay PVC example 4 e Connection between LAN attached workstations over a frame relay or X 25 network example 2 or a frame relay PVC example 3 e Connection between workstations attached to different LANs on the same SmartS witch Support of end to end LLC2 connections requires that the full LLC2 pro tocol not LLC2 R be confi gured and loaded in the RLP file as described NIL in Chapter 5 LLC2 R does support conversion Protocol conversion is accomplished by terminating an SDLC connection in the SmartS witch and establishing an LLC2 connection to the SNA host The following figure shows some examples of SDLC and LLC2 configurations Note that the LANs shown are all Token Ring The same examples can be presented with Ethernet LANs SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 SDLC T a E qe A Host PUs Frame Relay or X 25 E 551800 1 E 5518002 a o Host PUs 3 551800 E A Router Host PUs Frame Relay PVC SDLC 5 rem PUs HOST Figure 9 1 SDLC LLC2 Examples Required Configuration Configuring SNA To run SNA in a SmartS wich 1800 make sure the following are properly configured Node parameters Chapter 4
410. port per second over the five second reporting interval multiplied by 10 Retran frames per sec 10 number of frames retransmitted by the port per second over the five second reporting interval multiplied by 10 FCS errors sec 10 number of Frame Check Sequence the same as CRC or Cyclic Redundancy Check errors recei ved on the port per second over the five second reporting interval multiplied by 10 A value consistently greater than zero indicates line problems Logical rejects sec 10 sum of Rejects and Frame Rejects received onthe port per second over the five second reporting interval multiplied by 10 A value consistently greater than zero indicates line problems Transmit error ratio ratio of retransmitted frames per second to successfully transmitted frames per second on the port Receive error ratio ratio of frames rejected per second to frames accepted per second on the port Receive port util ratio of non flag characters to total characters being received by the port Transmit port util ratio of non flag characters to total characters being trans mitted by the port 21 3 Configuring Port Statistics Thresholds For each port statistic you can specify a threshold that when crossed causes an alarm to be sent to the collecting node Press A at the Statistics Menu When prompted enter e Statistic level P for Port e Port 0 7 Valid numbers for physical ports dependon th
411. potential as is usually true when both devices are located in close SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 proximity Check with the PBX manufacturer regarding connecting the PBX AC ground to telco PTT ground NOTE Connecting AC grounds and telco PTT grounds of telephone equipment may violate rules of certain regulatory agencies Check with your local telephone company and or agency regarding regulations that deal with grounding Interface Conversions Different telephony interfaces can be configured at the local and remote SmartSwitch 1800s Through Voice System Configuration page 13 3 each device is informed of the interface type used at the remote end Signaling conversion is done in the multi plexing software without the aid of any external equipment The following combina tions are supported E amp M to E amp M E amp M to OPX Loop Start E amp M to SLT Loop Start OPX Loop Startto OPX Loop Start OPX Loop Startto SLT Loop Start Application Examples gm In the following examples the term attached device refers to tie line equi pment such as the SmartSwitch 1800 NOL E amp M Type Idle Condition The E lead is biased by the PBX at 48 Vdc The M lead is biased at 0 Vdc by the attached device SmartSwitch 1800 PBX Initiated Call The PBX supplies 48 Vdc to the M lead signaling to the attached device that it wants a connection The attached device grounds the E lead signaling the response Attached Devi
412. ppy voice quality Increasing the jitter buffer size will increase the end to end delay but will insure smoother voice quality Call Timer is the amount of time the SmartSwitch 1800 will wait fora response to a Call Connect or Call Clear request When the SmartSwitch issues the Call Connect or Call Clear request it will set a timer to the value configured here If that timer expires with no response from the destination the SmartSwitch will generate a busy tone Long Dial Prefix is a character that will be required preceding calls using the long call format i e when a speed dial number is not used When the user at an attached device e g tele phone or Fax machine dials a long form number s he must precede the number by the Long Dial Prefix Selecting this parameter will display a table of the following values Specify a value by entering the corresponding letter from that table A 0 D 3 G 6 J 9 B 1 E 4 H 7 asterisk c 2 F 5 I 8 L Suppression is a level of suppression of background noise For most calls low suppression 2 should be sufficient The higher the suppression level the greater the possibility that low volume voice will be lost therefore suppression levels higher than 2 should be used only if it can be certain that background noise will be low or all of the voice trans mitted will be sufficiently louder than the background noise 1 no suppression 2 low suppression 3 medium suppression 4 hi
413. press F7 to update the Y the next re boot of the SmartSwitch 1800 CAUTICN Pres sing J lists more parameters and pressing K displays a screen similar to the fol lowing All BSC Batch parameters are listed in Table 11 1 11 2 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 BS CBatch Subscriber Information A Sq 01 02 03 04 05 Sdea Port 1 I V35 B Local Sub 100101000000000 100101000000001 100101000000002 100101000000003 100101000000004 Node Name n odexyz C Remote Sub DAtd ERtytm FRty G Del 200201000000000N 211020100000000N 212202010000000N 203301000000000N 231020100000000N 60 0 60 0 60 0 60 0 60 0 Figure 11 2 BSC Batch Port Record Screen 3 BSC Batch Port Parameters Configuring BSC Batch Parameter Port Type Table 11 1 BSC Batch Port Parameters Physical Port Interface Blocked Port Flag Line Speed Retransmission Period ms Maximum Retransmissions Generate Clock Rev Clock TT from DTE EBCDIC Transparent Text Supported k Full Duplex of Beginning Sync Chars of Trailing No Response Timer No Response Retry Count Pad Chars continued on next page sec Valid Values Default Value BSC B not valid here see explanation see explanation Y N N 75 bps 19 2 Kbps 9600 bps 1 9999 2000 1 99 25 4105 Y N YIN Y N Y N C A F N 114 Table 11 1 BSC Batch Port Parameters continued Parameter Valid Values Default Value Delay Time
414. pter 13 6 4 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Configuring a LAN Port Each SmartSwitch 1800 contains an Ethernet or Token Ring depending on the model port To configure the port press B at the Port Configuration Menu Node N ame nod exyz LAN Card Configuration Interface Number 0 Type TokenRing Locally Admin MAC Addr 400000000001 Ring Speed 16 MBits 5 ec Option Figure 6 4 LAN Card Configuration Record A C B from Main Menu er Item C Ring Speed will not be displayed if Type is Ethernet NCHL CS This screen is called LAN Card Configuration because the software code is shared with the FRX6000 and Frame Relay Module both of which NC contain one or FRX6000 only two LAN cards LAN Card Parameters Table 6 1 LAN Card Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Locally Admin MAC Addr 000000000000 7fffffff ff fff 000000000000 Ring Speed 4 MBits sec or 16 MBits sec 16 MBits sec 1 Token Ring SmartSwitch only Locally Admin MAC Addr is aMAC address that will override the universally administered MAC address If all zeros are specified the universal address will be used Under most circumstances this parameter should be left at the default setting Ring Speed specifies the speed of the ring to which the interface will connect Configuring Physical Ports 6 5 Introduction DLCI Sharing Chapter 7 FRM Configuring Frame Relay Frame relay ports inthe SmartSwitch 1 800 are us
415. ption Figure 18 1 Main Menu Menu items under entry A are described in Chapter 3 The following shows where to find the remaining operations among the menus The chapters where items are described are shown in parentheses Any item not followed by a chapter appendix number is described in the chapter appendix shown following the next higher level B Operations A On Line Node Operations Chapter 19 A B C H Remote Control allows control of a remote Cabletron frame relay access device Remote File Transfer transfers files between nodes Remote Software Update updates a remote node to a new release of SmartSwitch 1800 software Local File Backup copies a file to a PC running Procomm Plus connected to the SmartSwitch 1800 s Console port Set ZMODEM Path configures a path that will be used by Local File Restore see next entry for copying files to a SmartSwitch 1800 Local File Restore copies a file to the SmartSwitch 1800 from the PC running Procomm Plus connected to the Console port Copy Backup directory to ZMODEM PC copies an entire database that was backed up using On Line Database Operations to a PC running Procomm Plus connected to the SmartSwitch 1800 s Console port Copy Backup directory from ZMODEM PC copies the database transferred in item G above back to the SmartS witch 1800 B On Line Port Operations Chapter 19 A B C Disable a Port Takes any physical or logical s
416. r sec 1 10 Delay Retry Count 1 255 NAK Retry Count 1 255 VC to be Cleared After Disc Y N Idle Timer sec 5 180 Subscriber Information 1 16 Local Sub 0 15 characters Remote Sub 0 15 characters Atcl Autocall Y N 3 Rtytm Retry Timer sec 15 255 Rty Retry Number 0 255 0 indefinite Del Delete see explanation 1 75 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 14 4K 19 2K 2 Relevantonly if Physical Port Interface is something other than RS 232 and Generate Clockis Y 3 Ifthe BSC port is connecting to a logical X 25 port in the SmartSwitch Atcl must be set to Y Port Type specifies the protocol the port will support Selecting this parameter will display a list of all serial protocols loaded in the device Physical Port Interface must be configured as follows For reference port locations are shown on page 6 1 e Port is always RS 232 e Port 1 must be RS 232 if the port is being configured for BSC e Ports 2 and 3 are determined by the attached cables RS 232 V 35 or RS 449 Blocked Port Flag will cause the port to be enabled N or disabled Y at node IPL The port will remain in that state until this parameter is changed or an on line enable B B C from the Main Menu or disable B B A from the Main Menu is performed Line Speed is the data transmission rate in bits per second and the clock speed on a serial port when the port is a physical DCE i e the attached I O cable is DCE If this p
417. r ID Kile Transfer Pwd Collecting SmartS witch ID Collecting S martS witch Pwd Primary Alarm Output ID Primary Alarm Output P wd Secondary Alirm Output ID Secondary Alarm Output Pwd A B 9 D E F G H I J K Option Figure 4 1 Node Defaults Configuration Screen 1 A AL C from Main Menu system memory Otherwise the changes will not take effect until After making any changes be sure to press F7 to update the M the next re boot of the SmartSwitch 1800 CAUITICN Although the entries for the various passwords appear blank default values exist if you change one be sure you do not duplicate an existing password CAUIICN If there is a error in the configuration for alarm reporting a message will be displayed at the top or bottom of the screen The possible messages are Nave Primary Alarm Reporting Error will appear ifthe software that drives the alarm output device is unable to output to the device Primary NOT Configured will appear if a Primary Alarm Output ID is not specified Errmsg txt Database Error will appear if the error message file cannot be found This might happen if a software update was not correctly installed To correct this the file can be transferred from a remote SmartSwitch or copied from a locally attached PC with Procomm as described on page 19 4 Database and System Memory Values 4 2 Two sets of values exist for Node Defaults parameters Database values exi
418. r gt determines how many ifany NULL padding characters will be added after a carriage return character 10 Line Folding provides for automatic insertion of appropriate format effectors in the character stream trans mitted to the user s device The number indicates maximum characters per line 11 Speed is either the X 3 Line Speed specified in Port configuration or if autobaud was spec ified the speed of the async device connected to the port The speed cannot be changed in the PAD Profile record 12 Flow Control allows XON XOFF from the user s device to control the rate of data transfer from the PAD 13 Insert If after cr causes a linefeed to be inserted after a carriage return in the specified instances Values can be added are 0 none 1 after CR in transmission to the DTE 2 after CR in retum from the DTE 4 after CR in echo to the DTE 14 Padding after lt lf gt determines how many if any NULL padding characters will be added after a linefeed 15 Editing provides for character delete line delete and line display editing capabilities in the PAD command state and data transfer state for the user s device If editing is enabled the PAD will suspend forwarding of data packets after expiration of the idle timer or if the editing buffer is full 16 Character Delete is the ASCII value of the character that is used to delete characters When this char acter is received by the
419. r your application Review the default database parameter settings listed in tables throughout Section IL A list of tables can be found in the Table of Contents Many param eters can be left at the default settings but some must be reconfigured to match your specific needs Hill in Table 2 2 on page 2 3 to identify the physical interface protocol and connected device on each physical port You will need more information when configuring database records but these tables can be used as convenient refer ences Log into the menu operations if not already done This is described in the Smart Switch 1800 Installation amp Setup Guide as well as on page 2 4 Set the correct date and time as described on page 2 9 Event alarm messages reports and some displays include the current date and time as setin the Smart Switch They should be accurate for proper network monitoring and man agement Change the login password if desired The default password i sNETLINK You can change this to any password of up to 14 characters as described on page 2 9 Configure the necessary database records Node Chapter 4 SNMP parameters Chapter 17 if SNMP management will be performed protocols Chapter 5 network ports frame relay Chapter 7 or X 25 Chapter 8 plus LAN inter faces and legacy access ports miscellaneous chapters in Section II Port Assignment Worksheet 2 2 The port options on Voice mode
420. rame Relay 7 8 2 Port Configuration A C A from Main Menu for the backup RLP 0 RLP Port 0 F Logical DCE N Oneend ofthe backup must belogical DTE and the other DCE Configuring the central site as logical DCE allows the line monitor at that end to track incoming status enquiries from the DTE end O Additional Parameters D Configure DLCI Parameters DLCI ID 17 DLCI Backup Configuration A Backup Group Number 0 B Enable Backup Protocol N Notnecessary because protocol is enabled in Frame Relay Backup Group record E For Backup Use Only Y 3 Frame Relay Backup Groups Configuration A F B from Main Menu Frame Relay Backup Group Number 10 RLP 0 Port 0 DLCI 17 WaitTimer 60 seconds or any number in range 0 65535 however the setting should be reasonably greater than the Switchover Timer on the primary RLP 0 Port 0 DLCI 17 being backed up F ProtEnab Y moo On Node 2 configure the following as well as other parameters necessary for oper ation 1 Port Configuration A C A from Main Menu for the primary RLP 0 RLP Port 0 O Additional Parameters D Configure DLCI Parameters DLCI ID 18 DLCI Backup Configuration A Backup Group Number 0 B Enable Backup Protocol N E For Backup use Only N 2 Port Configuration A C A from Main Menu for the backup RLP 0 RLP Port 4 F Logical DCE Y Oneend of the backup must be logical DTE andthe other DCE Con
421. rame num bering is 0 7 for modulo 8 and 0 127 for modulo 128 Maximum LAPB Window Size is X 25 value K the maximum number of sequentially numbered I frames that can be waiting for acknowledgment If this number is exceeded no more frames will be transmitted until an acknowledgment is received A larger value allows faster throughput N2 Retransmit Count is X 25 value N2 the maximum number of times the node will attempt to send an I frame after a Retransmit Period expiration A larger value for this parameter increases the probability of an eventual correct transfer between DTE and DCE but a smaller value permits faster detection of a permanent error condition T1 Retransmit Period is the length of time before re transmission of an I frame if the previous trans mission is not acknowledged If the period expires the SmartSwitch software will reset the timer and transmit a supervisory frame demanding immediate acknowledgment Also the Maximum Retransmissions see that entry counter will be incremented The default value of 2000 ms allows avoidance of unnecessary retransmission of frames that have merely been delayed T2 Wait Ack Period is the length of time the node will delay acknowledgment ofa received I frame if there is no outgoing I frame to be sent If during this period the node receives an I frame for transmission the acknowledgment will be sent with it and the delay timer will be reset T3 Link Alive Period is the length of
422. rameters To configure a CUG press E and when prompted enter e CUG Index 0 99 the default is 0 which is simply areference to the CUG e CUG number 1 16383 the default is 1 that will be associated with the index e any other requested information See Table 8 1 To delete a CUG press F and enter the index of the CUG to be deleted Configuring X 25 8 3 Pressing G will display a list of all CUGs configured for this port along with their associated indices Configuring a Network Trunk 8 4 A network trunk is a link between SmartSwitch 1800 FRM FRX nodes over X 25 Other ports in the node can be assigned to a trunk group which will cause those ports to be disabled if the network trunk is not operational and enabled when the trunk becomes operational One network trunk in a node can be assigned to another network trunk s group however disabling enabling a network trunk will not affect another network trunk in that trunk s group Node Name nod eyz X 25 Port Parameters screen 5 of 6 RLP 0 Port 1 Link State Linkup I O UNIVERSAL Network Trunk A dd to Trunk Group Ddete from Trunk Group Add a Range to Trunk Group DdeteaRange from Trunk Group Ports Associated with Network Trunk 0 N N N N Option Figure 8 3 X 25 Port Trunk Parameters If Network Trunk is N the rest of the above screen has no relevance NL You can add or delete one or more ports as described in menu entries B E in Figu
423. re 8 3 To add or delete a range of sequentially numbered ports of the same port type press D or E and enter when prompted the port type first port and last port The screen will be re displayed with the Y N status changed for each affected port CE Adding or deleting a range has no affect on any port types within that range other than the type specified NL To add ordelete a single port multiple ports that are not in sequence or multiple ports of different types press B or C and enter a port number The screen will be re dis played with the Y N status changed for the port Repeat this process for each port you want to add or delete SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Configuring a Dial Port X25 Port Parameters screen6 of 6 A Dial Sup port B Inactivity Timer minutes C Disconnect Timer sec D LineSetup Timer sec Option Figure 6 4 X 25 Dial Port Parameters Physical X 25 Port Parameters Configuring X 25 If the port will be connected to an auto dial modem configure the parameters on the following screen Node Nameznodexyz System Memory Dial In The following table lists the port parameters Some will or will not be displayed depending on whether the physical interface is DSU Table 8 1 Physical X 25 Port Parameters Parameter Port Type Physical PortInterface Blocked Port Flag Line Speed Maximum LAPB Window Size N2 Retransmit Count T1 Retransmit Period msec T2 Wait
424. re 7 1 assume that Node 1 is aremote site and Node 2 is a central site Also assume that Node 1 will be the initiating node On that node the primary DLCI is on port 2 and the backup is on port 0 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Example 1 f 0 4 17 RLP Port DLCI 0 0 18 Example 2 Other Device Example 3 Other Device Figure 7 1 Frame Relay Backup Examples Although each example shows a connection between a SmartSwitch 1800 and an FRX6000 connections can be between any two devices Na7C inthe family of SmartSwitch 1800 Frame Relay Module FRM FRX4000 and FR X6000 Example 1 In Example 1 the primary link is between Node 1 Port 2 DLCI 16 and Node 2 RLP 0 Port 0 DLCI 18 The DLCIs should be configured as described below The param eters are described later in this chapter Then if the primary link goes down a con nection will automatically be established between Node 1 Port 0 DLCI 17 and Node 2 RLP 0 Port 4 DLCI 17 On Node 1 configure the following as well as other parameters necessary for oper ation this section deals only with the frame relay backup function 1 Port Configuration A C A from Main Menu for the primary RLP 0 RLP Port 2 O Additional Parameters D Configure DLCI Parameters DLCI ID 16 DLCI Backup Configuration A Backup Group Number 10 or any unused number except 0 B Enable Backup Protocol N E For Backup Use Only N FRM Configuring F
425. reach the server if this route is used DNA Do Not Age identifies whetheraging is enabled Aging allows deletion of entries from the table after a specified period Routes configured as static see Configuring Static IPX Routes on page 15 16 will not age DNA TRUE Interfaces with 0 specified in their IPX Interface records for the SAP Age Timer will also be TRUE AII others will be FALSE Intf Interface is the IP interface SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 RLP Statistics CS MOL CE RLP Statistics Report RLP 0 Report Interval sec 5 Start Time 4 21 1997 09 41 49 CDSTATISTICS NAME A B Cc D E F ARTE Percentage of Buffers in Use Number of Queued Messages Received frames S ec 10 Transmitted frames S ec 10 Rejected frames Sec 10 Retrans mitted Frames Sec 10 Chapter 21 Statistics Displays Although the SmartSwitch 1800 has no RLPs RLP RISC Line Processor functionality exists in the device Node Name node xyz DATE 4 21 1997 4 21 1997 4 21 1997 4 21 1997 4 21 1997 4 21 1997 TIME 09 45 19 09 45 19 09 45 19 09 45 19 09 45 19 09 45 19 F2 Next F4 Clear Max F9 Stop Remote F10 Reboot Remote Others Exit Figure 21 1 RLP Statistics Display Information in this Display Percentage of buffers in use is self explanatory E B L from Main Menu Pressing F4 will reset the MAX maximum values to the CURR current values Number of qu
426. relay interfaces Each SmartSwitch 1800 has one Ethernet or one Token Ring interface butnot both in the same device Required Configuration To run IPX in a SmartSwitch 1800 make sure the following are properly configured e Node parameters Chapter 4 This is general configuration that must be done no matter which protocols will be run in the node e Loaded protocols Chapter 5 IP RIP and the transport protocol frame relay or X 25 e LAN port page 6 5 that will connect to the LAN s e Frame relay Chapter 7 or X 25 Chapter 8 port s that will connect to a network or frame relay PVC e IPX parameters described in this chapter Configuring IPX Node Defaults Press E at the Configure IP LLC2 B RIDGE IPX Default Parameters Menu or A A E E from the Main Menu to configure default IPX node parameters Node Name nodexyz Configure IPXNode Defaults A Internal Network 0000001e B Gap 55msintervak 1 C Router Name ipx router 1 Option Figure 15 1 IPX Node Defaults Menu A A E E from Main Menu IPX Node Defaults Parameters Table 15 1 IPX Node Defaults Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Internal Network O ffffffff 8 hex digits 00000000 Gap 55 ms intervals 0 100 1 Router Name 1 47 characters Intemal Network identifies the node to the IPX network If fewer than 8 hex digits are entered leading zeros will be added Gap is the minimum delay between cons
427. ridge environments e Self learning of MAC addresses for core bridging e Forwarding of non routable LLC traffic such as NetBIOS DECnet AppleTalk LAT and VINES e Routing bridging of IP and IPX traffic e MAC address filtering e NetBIOS name filtering e Bandwidth allocation e Multivendor interoperability with other IEEE 802 1d devices Routing transmits each packet based on its level 3 address while bridging transmits each frame based on its level 2 address Athough some traffic can be either routed or bridged there is usually an advantage to doing one over the other For instance bridging is generally easier to configure however routing can be more versatile IP and IPX traffic can also be bridged Bridging can be enabled individually for IP or IPX if enabled for either all traffic of that type will be bridged Neither IP because of its ARP frames nor IPX because of its MAC addressing structure can be bridged successfully between Ethemet and AO C Token Ring LANs However they can be routed between different LAN types Incoming LLC2 traffic that is destined for a terminated MAC address will be for warded to the node s internal LLC2 processes Non terminated LLC2 frames and all other frames will be forwarded to the bridge Underthespanning tree concept bridges automatically maintain forwarding tables via exchange of messages with other bridges on the network and determination of single paths for traffic between en
428. ring LLC2 Interfaces LLC2 Interfaces records define the types and locations of the interfaces that will carry LLC2 traffic to or from a SmartS witch 1800 To display configured interfaces press C at the IP LLC2 B RIDGE IP X Interfaces Configuration Menu Node Name nodexyz Review Bridge Ports LLC 2 Interfaces Frame Relay Native LLC 2 Frame Relay 8025_SRB Frame Relay 8025_SRB Frame Relay 3 8023 TB PgUp PgDn F3 Exit F9 Stop Remote F10 Abort Figure 9 9 LLC2 Interfaces Display A C E C from Main Menu These interfaces can be used for either LLC2 or Bridging Also note that est the RLP column is irrelevant on the SmartSwitch 1800 AL To configure an interface press D at the LAN Interfaces Configuration Menu When prompted for an interface number which is merely a sequential number to identify the interface e If modifying an existing record enter the interface number 0 95 e If creating a new record press Enter which will automatically specify the next available sequential interface number The display depends on the interface type Examples are shown in the following two figures 9 26 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 CS NOUL Node Name nodexyz Bridge Port LLC 2 Interface Configuration BridgePort LLC2 Interface Number 0 Interface Type Blocked Port Flag Port Priority Path Cost Priority LAN Card Option Figure 9 10 Bridge Port LLC2 Interface Record Ethernet A
429. rmined by the For Backup Use Only Make sure the physical frame relay port is not reserved for Y parameter in the port record CAUTICN Also make sure the DLCI is not part of a frame relay DLCI backup group or frame relay PVC Descriptions of Parameters Specific to X 25 Interfaces IPXWAN Enabled determines whether Novell s IPXWAN protocol will be used on the interface IPXWAN specifies a method for IPX routers to communicate across W AN links The SmartSwitch 1800 implements IPXWAN running over RFC 1490 compliant frame relay and RFC1356 compliant X 25 Source Subscriber is a subscriber ID that defines an IPX interface in the node by associating itself with port 66 a number reserved for the IPX interface See the footnote following Table 15 8 Destination Subscriber is asubscriber ID associated with the physical X 25 port that will be used for the IPX interface See the footnote following Table 15 8 SVC Retry Timer is the frequency with which calls will be placed to try to establish a connection Configuring IPX 15 15 SVC Idle Timer is a period that an IPX connection can remain active with no traffic before the con nection is cleared Max VCs to Establish specifies a number of virtual circuits over which IPX traffic will be transmitted in par allel PVC Connection identifies this interface as one end of a PVC Descriptions of Parameters Specific to LAN Interfaces LAN Card Number identifies the inter
430. rol press Y Both nodes will now be under local control The local SmartSwitch 1800 and the remote device if it has a local video device will be logged out to the Port Status Display From there the operator must log in to perform menu operations If either the controlling or the controlled node detects that the remote control link failed during a remote session remote control will be terminated and each terminal s local main menu will be displayed 192 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Remote Control from an Async PAD Port Once the ANSI terminal is in Command mode described on page A 1 follow this procedure to take remote control of a SmartSwitch 1800 1 Enter the Remote Control ID of the node specified in its Node Defaults file fol lowed with no spaces by the letter d and the Remote Control Password of the node also specified in its Node Defaults file An example of a correct entry for a Remote Control ID of 1234 and a password of remote is 1234dremote 2 When the remote node accepts your entry you will be asked Are you a PAD user Type y Enter 3 When prompted enter the pass word of the controlled node The display at the controlled node will say Under remote control Keyboard blocked by id n The Main Menu at the controlling node will act as the Main Menu of the controlled node and the displayed remote ID is the ID of the controlled node m Placing a call through the SmartSwitch 1800 is des
431. ross referenced with the CUG Index in the SmartSwitch software Preferential CUG Flag specifies whether the port has a preferential CUG if the port belongs to any CUGs Preferential CUG is adefault CUG for the port Any calls that do not specify a CUG will default to this one if Preferential CUG Flag is Y A new port has CUG 0 specified here Incoming Access Allowed determines whether this port will be allowed to receive calls from outside its CUGs Outgoing Access Allowed determines whether this port will be allowed to make calls outside its CUGs Add Change CUG To configure a CUG select this entry and when prompted enter e CUG Index 0 99 the default is 0 which is areference to the CUG e CUG number 1 16383 the default is 1 that will be associated with the index e any other requested information See Table 8 1 on page 8 6 Display All CUGs Selecting this item will display a list of all configured CUGs Delete CUG To delete a CUG select this item and enter the index see Add Change CUG of the CUG to be deleted Configuring Subscriber IDs This operation configures the called and calling addresses that will be used in call setup To complete the connection the software must recognize where the call is coming from calling address and where it is going called address To display alist of current Subscriber IDs addresses press A at the Connections and Routing Paths Menu or A D A from the Main Me
432. rovides ring voltage to the telephone when itis called by a remote unit The frequency of ringing voltage is variable and is a divide by 1 2 or 3 of the main AC line frequency Country Code is a telephone dialing prefix code that identifies the country in which the SmartSwitch is installed Table 13 2 contains a list of country codes Table 13 2 International Dialing Country Codes usa 45 remi 355 SmmMaino 38 rei 55 mn Si mem 2m Ehm 95 Kem 9 Sem 3 colombia 57 kwa 955 ferian a Ens 20 Maa 35 mms 25 E Sawad sos mexico s2 Tasmania 61 Frane 35 Nenen Aries 599 Uganda 25 continued on next page SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Configuring Voice Table 13 2 International Dialing Country Codes continued oti 55 Peu i Zar 25 ings Speed Map Dial Digits specifies the number of digits that are used for speed dial and auto dial numbers A speed dial number is a short substitute for a longer number and an auto dial number will be dialed automatically when the receiver is taken off hook Voice Rates Minimum specifies the minimum operating rate of all voice channels when congestion occurs Voice Rates Maximum specifies the maximum operating digitization rate of all voice channels User Dialed Extended Dial Digits specifies the number of extended dial digits that must be entered by the user of attached equipment as part of a
433. rs a dial tone 6 The caller dials 447777 7 Node3 translates speed dial number 44to long digits 000414 connects to PBX C through Node 4 Port 4 and sends along the user dialed extended digits 7777 after a 1 second delay 8 PBX C connects the caller to phone 7777 which rings Variable Length Dialing The Smart Switch 1800 supports variable length dialing using the Dial Timer parameter in Voice Port configuration page 13 8 Variable length dialing allows the user to place a call without entering the configured number of digits for the speed dial number Variable length dialing can be disabled by setting the Dial Timer to zero When this parameter is set to a value greater than zero the timer is started when the SmartSwitch receives the first dial digit from the attached equipment and the digitis not the long form calling Long Dial Prefix also configured in the Voice Port record Ifthe timer decrements to zero with no new digit entries the SmartS witch will assume that dialing is complete and will pad the digit entries with leading zeros to the length of the configured Dial Digits see page 13 3 For example if the configured number of dial digits is four and the user enters 33 and lets the dial timer expire the 33 will be converted to 0033 This number willthen be used to perform a look up in the map table rather than the SmartSwitch using the actual digits dialed by the user Note that regardless of the Dial Timer setting the fol
434. rse video outgoing frames will be displayed in reverse video Type the frame type IP IPX Bridge or Unknown Len length of the frame Data source MAC address destination MAC address frame type and first 76 bytes of the frame in hex Note that pressing F7 will allow specification of an event sequence number to be displayed in case that number is not currently on the screen It must however be in the buffer The capture buffer can hold the first 76 bytes of each packet up to 1000 packets Displaying Frame Relay Backup Status Status Displays To display operational states of backup and backed up frame relay DLCIs press E at the Protocol Status Displays Menu or C F E from the Main Menu then select from the following list and enter when prompted the RLP port or group number A Display States for all Backup DLCIs on a Port B Display States for all Primary DLCIs on a Port C Display States for all Backup DLCIs in a Group Possible States e Active The DLCI is capable of passing data e Backup Wait Primary DLCI only The DLCI is down or undergoing IPL but the switchover timer has not yet expired e Backed Up Primary DLCI only The DLCI has been backed up and data will be routed over the backup DLCI e Restore Wait Backup DLCI only The primary DLCI is now up but the switchback timer has not yet expired The state will return to Active if the Primary DLCI goes down again
435. rt an X 25 call will be made from the local port to the remote subscriber port Autocall Retry Time is the time between autocallretries Autocall Retry Count 1s the maximum number of times an autocall will be sent Note that a value of 0 allows indefinite retries Istatus affects the line and PU the same way Blocked Port Flag affects the port If configured as Inactive the PU will be disabled until either an on line enable is performed see page 19 15 ora VARY ACT see page D 4 is sent from a NetView manager device LPDA Resource ID identifies a logical unit LU on the PU LPDA requires both a PU name and an LU ID The Resource ID value must match the NetView LOCADDR LLC2 Connection specifies whether SDLC LLC2 conversion will be done on the PU connection either locally or at a remote node viaan X25 logical or physical port be configured as Y otherwise the PU will not re activate properly after the session unless an on line update F7 is per CAUIICN formed in the logical port record L2DatMode determines whether transmission can be in one alternate or two simultaneous direc tions at the same time Y If SDLC LLC2 conversion will be done LLC2 Connection must LLC2 Parameters Local SAP Address is the remote service access point SAP address used to connect the PU to the host This parameter is relevant only in a connection to a 3174 or AS 400 type setup where a specific source SAP address is required I
436. rvice representative 2 The remote node will checkto make sure there is enough disk space to accept the file if not the connection will becleared and a corresponding message displayed If there is enough disk space the file will be transferred and stored in the remote node under a temporary file name until the node verifies that the file is the expected size If it is not the temporary file will be deleted 3 Ifthe temporary file is the expected size the old file will be deleted and the new file renamed As the update progresses you can press F4 at any time to abort the transfer and clear the connection Once the update is complete the sending node will clear the connection Ondine Operations 19 5 Backing Up and Restoring Files Backing Up and Restoring a Database Press C at the Operations Menu or B C from the Main Menu to display the fol lowing list of backup and restore operations Back up the Current Database to a Remote FRX6000 Back up the Current Database to a Remote FRX4000 SS1800 Restore the Backed Up Database to a Remote FRX4000 SS1800 Back up the Database to a Local Directory Restore the Database from a Local Directory mocou n Remote Backup and Restore Items A C Items A and B are used to back up a remote node s database to a local node that has control of the remote node Both operations require first taking remote control B A A from the Main Menu of thenode whose database will beb
437. s Menu or A A E F C from the Main Menu To configure an application press D at the Configure Filter Definitions and Applications Menu When prompted enter e Interface number 0 63 The default is 0 This identifies the virtual interface e Filter Category 0 RIP 1 SAP 2 Packet 3 RIP Router The default is 0 e Direction i inbound or o outbound The default is 0 e Any other requested information referring to Table 15 6 IPX Filter Applications Interface Number Fiter Category Direction Permit Filter Application 1 Filter Application 2 Filter Application 3 Filter Application 4 Filter Application 5 Filter Application 6 Filter Application 7 Filter Application 8 Filter Application 9 Filter Application 10 A B C D E F G H I J K w Page 2 Option 2 0 RIP I Inb ound bd coccccococcoc Figure 15 3 Typical IPX Filter Applications Record A A E F D from Main Menu Up to 100 filters can be configured displayed over 9 pages screens When finished configuring filter definitions and applications perform an on line update to make the changes effective immediately Press E at the Filter Definitions and Applications Configuration Menu The changes will be sent to the software 15 8 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 IPX Filter Applications Parameters Table 15 6 IPX Filter Applications Parameters Valid Values Default Value Y N N
438. s 19 13 Tests IP Ping Connectivity Test The IP Ping function sends packets to an IP host to determine whether the host is reachable Press F at the Operations Menu to display the following Node Name node_xyz IP Ping Connectivity Test A IP Address 100 100 100 100 B Inter Packet Time secs 1 Option Figure 19 3 IP Ping Connectivity Test Menu B F from Main Menu To begin the test 1 Press A andenter an IP address of the host that will receive and echo the pings 2 Make any desired change to the Inter Packet Time within the range of 1 15 seconds This is an interval between transmission of packets 3 When the parameters are configured the way you want them press F4 and the node will begin sending pings As each ping is returned from the host a message will be displayed noting the packet size and IP address of the host 4 To stop sending pings press F3 Test statistics will be displayed Press F3 again to exit the test menu 19 14 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 It should be noted that pinging a SmartSwitch 1800 interface will verify only connec tivity to that SmartSwitch Using the example in Figure 19 4 if the operator at device A wants to ping device B s he must ping device B s IP address To ping Node 1 the operator at device A must ping the IP address of interface 1 To ping Node B the operator must ping interface 3 To locate a connectivity problem between A and B the
439. s an example of a typical bandwidth allocation group configuration Table 7 2 Bandwidth Allocation Example EE c _ _ Used For Excess Use Excess Burst 2 n Ports amp T 20 4 IPX 20 13 Y This configuration ensures that SNA traffic which is very time sensitive will be given top priority and will all be transmitted within the guaranteed 3096 of the band width eliminating the risk of discarded packets Sequenced arrival of packets is not critical among the first three groups so those types of traffic can be configured to allow transmission above the Committed Information Rate CIR described on page 7 18 Traffic above CIR is transmitted with the Discard Eligibility bit set which allows packets to be discarded if necessary SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Configuring Frame Relay Ports Once the necessary Node Chapter 4 and RLP Chapter 5 parameters have been con figured press A at the Port Configuration Menu or A C A from the Main Menu When prompted enter a port number or press Enter to accept the default of 0 Valid port numbers depend on the model of SmartSwitch 1800 see port locations on page 6 1 The display for an existing port will show the configured parameter values while the display for a new port will show default database values See Table 7 3 on page 7 14 and Table 7 4 on page 7 15 The following figure is an example of an existing port Node Name node_xyz Frame
440. s been received for at least one of the link addresses configured for the HPAD subscriber The link is ready to establish an X 25 con nection with the remote TPAD Action None Call Clr LCN n cc sn dc lt sn Severity 4 Meaning Self explanatory See Appendix B for a list of cause codes cc and diagnostic codes dc Action Depends on the cause If necessary contact Cabletron Systems Technical Support See page 22 4 End of IPL Severity 4 22 9 22 10 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 Meaning Self explanatory Action None PVC is Up Severity 4 Meaning Self explanatory Action None PVC Reset Severity 4 Meaning A Reset was sent on the PVC Action None Received Reset LCN n cc n dc n Severity 4 Meaning A Reset was received on the designated LCN with the cause code cc and diagnostic code dc See Appendix B fora list of codes Action None Received Reset Confirm Severity 4 Meaning A Reset Confirmation was received Action None PAD Link Failed Severity 2 Meaning Self explanatory Action Check the async PAD port and its cables for proper operation and secure connection Beginning of Congestion Severity 4 Meaning The level of Maximum Congestion specified in Node Defaults has been exceeded and no more events will be put into the event buffer until the Minimum Congestion level also specified in Node Defaults
441. s checked by the software when a frame is received If the MAC address in an incoming frame matches a configured Source MAC Address Mask the frame will be passed through the node for transmission out the frame relay interface On Line Temporary Changes determines whether changes made will affect the Database or System Memory values Database values existin the software and are recorded as System Memory values when the SmartS witch 1800 is booted If On Line Temporary Changes is set to N the SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Database value will change If Y the System Memory value will change Pressing F7 after changing either set of values will propagate the change to the other set This must be done at each screen and affects only those parameters on that screen Connections Parameters Configuring SNA Sq is simply a sequence number to allow selection of a line in the display HSAP is the service access point SAP address used to connect to the host This must match the SSAP source SAP in a frame recei ved from the local LAN or the DSAP desti nation SAP in a frame from the remote link station Local Subscriber ID is the subscriber address assigned to the local end of the SNA connection If config uring an LLC2 to SDLC link this address must match the Remote Subscriber ID con figured in the SNA port record for the SDLC device If configuring an LLC2 to LLC2 connection this address must match the Remote Subscrib
442. s included with each SmartSwitch 1800 The cable end with the connector plugs into the Smart Switch and the end with bare wire connects to a telco PTT type punch block The cable is color coded as described in the following table Table C 1 RJ45 Cable Connections Pin Color Usage Description Gray SB Return for M Signal Orange M Control Signal from PBX Black TR Voice from PBX Transmit Ring Red RR Voice to PBX Receive Ring two wire connection Green RT Voice to PBX Receive Tip two wire connecti on Yellow TT Voice from PBX Transmit Tip Blue E Control Signal to PBX Brown SG Return for E Signal The RJ45 cable can also be used to provide the two wire connection For these appli cations only the red and green wires pins 4 and 5 are active the other wires should be insulated with electrical tape to prevent unwanted connections C 12 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 E amp M Wiring In atwo wire E amp M application connect red and green wires to the PB X s RT and RR pair respectively The RT and RR pair carry voice or fax analog signals between the SmartSwitch 1800 and the PB X Ina four wire E amp M application connect red and green wires to the PBX s RT and RR pair and black and yellow wires to the PB X s TR and TT pair respectively The RT and RR pair carry voice or fax analog signals from the SmartSwitch 1800 to the PB X The TR and TT pair carry voice or fax analog signals from the PBX E amp M tie trunk to th
443. s list e Source MAC Address Mask 40000000 This is the source MAC address the S martSwitch 1800 will use to send frames to the AS 400 The last four digits are 0000 for the first 57 Host SAPs service access points used to connect to the host For subsequent SAPs the last four digits will be incre mented to 0001 0002 etc Each Host SAP address must match the S ource SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 SAP address in a frame received from the local LAN Host SAP 04 SAP addresses can be04 fe hex in multiples of four e Local Subscriber 990 This is the Remote Subscriber ID of Host 2 Remote Subscriber 1010 This is the Local Subscriber ID of Host 2 e Type LLC2 e LLC2 Host 2 e Host MAC Address 4000000000470 This is the AS 400 targeted address and is the same as the Host MAC Address configured on Host 0 e Session Type Terminated This host will terminate the frame relay LLC2 session to the above MAC address Routing Subscriber ID 101 This ID must end in an asterisk and contain all the digits of the Local Subscriber ID shown later in this list Host SAP 04 SAP addresses can be04 fe hex in multiples of four Local Subscriber 990 This is the Remote Subscriber ID of Host 2 Remote Subscriber 1010 This is the Local Subscriber ID of Host 2 e Type LLC2 m Remote SS1800 Interface 2 Frame Relay Host 2 Originated Originated Host 0 Terminated Interface
444. s low level N NRZ off which means that 1 represents nochange in level and0 is a change Unless there is a site specific configuration needing NRZI Non Retum to Zero Inverted always use NRZ for all SNA modes NRZ off NRZI on Packet Size is the maximum packet size that will be transmitted on the port Configuring SNA 9 9 Disable Request Disconnect prevents if enabled the HPAD from sending a Disconnect Request to the host if the HPAD TPAD connection is broken LPDA Support specifies the version if any of Link Problem Determination Aid that can be used by a host program e g NetView or VTAM or controller program e g NCP to test status andtocontrol the line and remote interface Configurable values are 0 None 1 Version 1 and 2 Version 2 Idle Fill Character specifies a character that will be inserted into the stream when the SNA link is idle Inactivity Timer determines how long the SmartSwitch 1800 will wait with no activity on the HPAD port before it will declare the port down L1 Duplex determines level 1 signal operation on RS 232 ports If Full RTS CTS DCD are always high and are raised by the appropriate side If Half e When the DTE is ready to transmit it asserts RTS waits for CTS to become high then starts transmitting When transmission is finished the DTE drops RTS and the DCE should drop CTS DCD is low during this period e When the DCE is ready to transmit it checks to see t
445. s means press hit strike the key once Pressing the Enter key afterwards is not necessary Ctrl followed by one ortwo otherkey designations must be struck simultaneously with the other keys shown If a statement ends with a reference to a key for example then press Enter the period is not part of the data to be entered If a period should be entered it will be shown as The same applies to all other punctuation When instructed to for example press A B from the Main Menu this means press A then B not A comma B Screen Displays Screen Displays are provided to show the general appearance of actual screens They are only examples the information shown is not always representative of an operational system vi SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Table of Contents Section Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Section Il Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Getting Started Product Overview ah i Orie aici oie ARRA VARI RH RP QM ER ania ae ae hun E NC I RN T T Tuer IBledfT Eo p Ca S T Operator niei Oe qseestn dae onn berba Ora S Getting Started Quick Start Port Assignment Worksheet Loggin into the Main Menu Reviewing Boot DAG Sie ia acea rts terimisctbbictiim idoti nia hus Moving Throush the MOD auos app ppe ee ERE CR oca E IAEA Soltis tbe Date and DIIS ce deechd tie eta b RH d Op LR b Gades ed C hanoemne the Login PassWord ue reed rege eel Rex e obi iU
446. s on both the port and the connected device 318 Rev Port Usage exceeded T n C n Severity 4 Meaning The port statistic Receive Port Util Utilization has exceeded the threshold T n that was set by the user C n is the current value Percent of Receive Port utilization is the ratio of non flag characters to total characters being received by the port Action If this happens frequently you may need to add ports or reroute some traffic 319 Trn Port Usage exceeded T n C n Severity 4 Meaning The port statistic Transmit Port Util Utilization has exceeded the threshold T n that was set by the user C n is the current value Percent of Transmit Port Utilization is the ratio of non flag characters to total characters being received by the port Action If this happens frequently you may need to add ports or reroute some traffic 400 Link Enabled Severity 2 Meaning The port has been enabled from the On Line Port Operations Menu Action None 401 Link Disabled Severity 2 Meaning The port has been disabled from the On Line Port Operations Menu Action None 402 Link Disconnected Severity 2 Meaning For frame relay or X 25 this means that the linkis disconnected and level 2 cannot be established For SNA TPAD this means that an XID command frame has been issued by the TPAD but either there has been no response or the received XID data does not match the XID da
447. s that call processing was successful and the con nection is in the data transmission state Call setup means that the attached device is waiting for Call Accept Clearing means that the attached device is in Call Clear state waiting for Clear Confirmation Resetting means that a Reset has been sent to the remote device and the attached device is waiting for a Reset Confirmation Port down is self explanatory Connected means that a connection has been established Not conect means that a connection has not been established or has been broken CS Nec A frame relay DLCI displaying this state might have a backup that is now in operation To determine this press F3 to return to the Status Displays menu then press F E B Display States for all Primary DLCls on a Port and enter the port number If the DLCI is displayed as Backed Up note the backup DLCI then press F3 three times then C at the Status Displays menu and verify that the backup DLCIis in Data trans state e Undefined means that the port is in some unknown state e Trans is the number of transmitted frames e Recd is the number of received frames e Disc is the number of discarded frames SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 e RLP is always 0 except for a remote control file transfer or alarm connection in which case this number is always 253 e P is the port number 0 7 are physical ports 8 63
448. se broadcast frames areused by Novell to hold information regarding the licensing of the file server executables 21 21 21 22 Pkts Tx is the total number of RIP and S AP packets transmitted on the local interface Tx Completions is the total number of successfully transmitted RIP and SAP packets that originated at the local node Pkts Rcv is the total number of RIP and S AP packets received on the local interface Tx Pkts Filtered is the number of packets denied transmission because of a filter configured on the interface Rcv Pkts Filtered is the number of packets denied reception because of a filter configured on the interface Pkts Forwarded is self explanatory Echo Requests Rev is the number of Echo Requests received on the interface Echo Replies Rev is the number of replies to Echo Requests received on the interface Err Type Pkts Rcv is the number of Novell error packets received on the interface Pkts Discarded is the number of packets discarded because the interface was down Pkts 2 Large Rcv is the number of packets received that exceeded the Maximum Transmission Units configured for the interface These packets are discarded Major Minor Version are the version numbers of the IP X stack Rcv Header Error is the number of IPX packets received with incorrect header information The header should be 30 bytes and contain network node and socket addresses for source a
449. se recorded in acall packet provides a high level indication of why the call was cleared and where the error occurred e g error by the source user or intemal network error For example when the diagnostic code indicates that a pro tocol error occurred the clearing cause might indicate that the error was committed by the destination user i e remote procedure error From DCE Hex Dec 00 00 01 01 02 02 03 03 04 04 05 05 09 09 0B 11 oD 13 11 17 13 19 15 21 19 25 21 33 29 41 39 63 From DTE Hex Dec Abbr Description 80 128 DTE DTE originated 81 129 OCC Number busy 82 130 none Password error remote control file transfer or alarm routing 83 131 INV Invalid facility request 84 132 Remote control attempted while non interrupable operation in progress 85 133 NC Network congestion 89 137 DER Outoforder 8B 139 NA Access barred 8D 141 PAD Notobtainable 91 145 RPE Remote procedure error 93 147 ERR Local procedure error 95 149 ROO RPOA out of order 99 153 RNA Reverse charge acceptance not subscribed Ai 161 ID Incompatible destination A9 169 FNA Fast select acceptance not subscribed B9 185 SA Ship absent Reset Causes AnSVC orPVC may be reset when an error occurs during datatransmission The reset causes transmission to be re synchronized and informs the user that some data might have been lost The reset cause sent ina Reset packet provides a high level indication of why the call was reset From
450. se that is forwarded Make and break periods are the times contact is made for each digit and broken between digits For example if the default ratio of 34 66 is configured assume someone dials the number 3 To do this s he rotates the dial to 3 then releases the dial Contact is then broken for 66 ms made for 33 ms number 2 broken for 66 ms made for 33 ms number 1 broken for 66 ms then made continuously For reference the 34 66 default ratio is compatible with telephony systems in the U S and several countries in Europe Configuring Voice 13 15 DTMF ON Duration specifies if Forwarded Output Digits is All or Ext and Forwarded Digit Type is DTMF the length of a tone that will be used to produce a single DTMF digit DTMF OFF Duration specifies if Forwarded Output Digits is All or Ext and Forwarded Digit Type is DTMF the length of silence between DTMF tones in a dial digit string Tone Type determines whether the multi frequency tone will be dual tone DT MBF or single t one MF Reviewing and Configuring Voice Interfaces 13 16 Voice ports connect the SmartSwitch 1800 to telephony equipment Connections to the frame relay network are made over Voice Interfaces which are assigned to DLCIs on physical frame relay ports A Voice Interface record contains node numbers that identify the local S martSwitch 1800 and the device at the remote end of the frame relay connection When a call is received the dialing scheme
451. sec 0 0 Date 06 12 1997 Committed Data In Out 5000 4800 Time 14 24 50 Exxcess Data In Out 0 0 Frames Revd 10000 Disc 0 Frames Xmit 1000 Conf Act Actual Conf Ad Actual Percentage bit sec BAG Percentage bitec 50 50 48000 2 25 25 25000 50 50 40000 3 25 25 23000 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 12 0 0 0 0 14 0 0 0 0 16 0 0 Figure 21 6 Frame Relay Utilization Statistics Display E H from Main Menu 2146 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Information in this Display Voice Statistics CIR In Out Committed Information Rates configured in the Port record Bc In Out Committed Burst Sizes configured in the Port record Be In Out Excess Burst Sizes configured in the Port record Committed Data In Out incoming outgoing data that is within CIR Excess Data In Out incoming outgoing data that is above CIR but within B Frames Revd total number of frames received onthe port since the last IPL of the node or enabling of the port Disc total number of frames discarded on the port since the last IPL of the node or enabling of the port Frames Xmit total number of frames transmitted on the port since the last IPL of the node or enabling of the port BAG Bandwidth Allocation Group Conf Act Percentage configured and actual percentages of bandwidth used by traffic assigned to each group Actual bits sec current bandwidth usage by traffic assigned to each group
452. sical port or spread over several physical ports Some things to know about logical ports are e Encapsulation can be via either T1 617 Annex G or T1 617 RFC1490 You should know the pros and cons ofusing each The explanation of Encapsulation Method on page 8 16 offers some help e Both level 2 and level 3 windows can be configured Configuration and oper ation is the same for either encapsulation method Required Configuration To run a physical port as X25 make sure the following are properly configured e Node parameters Chapter 4 This is general configuration that must be done no matter which protocols will be run in the node e Loaded protocols Chapter 5 X 25 and any others that will be trans mitted over the X 25 link e X25 port s that will connect to the user device s and network See page 8 2 e SVC Subscriber ID s page 8 21 which identifiy user devices to each other and the S martSwitch 1800 Before configuring a logical X 25 port make sure these are properly configured e Protocol s Chapter 5 that will be transmitted over the logical port e Physical frame relay port Chapter 7 on which the logical port will reside Configuring a Physical X 25 Port Once the necessary Node Chapter 4 and Protocol Chapter 5 parameters have been configured press A at the Port Configuration Menu or A C A from the Main Menu When prompted enter a port number or press Enter to accept the default of 0
453. smitted assuming RIP updates have been configured 1 Receive Only RIP messages will be accepted but not transmitted 2 Disabled No RIP messages will be accepted or transmitted RIP Flash Updates is the frequency with which RIP messages will be sent to every neighbor node con taining any changes to the routing table that occurred since the last full update see next entry RIP Full Updates is the frequency with which updates of the entire routing table will be sent to every neighbor node via one or more RIP messages Priority prioritizes this interface for intra nodal traffic the higher the number the higher the priority This priority has no effect on traffic exiting a node Priorities are configured on all logical interfaces that use a physical frame relay port The device processor in the node uses these priorities to help determine the order in which it will process protocols When configuring priorities be careful to consider the types of traffic being routed on other connections in the node CAU TICN Bandwidth Allocation Group assigns the IP interface to one of sixteen groups whose parameters regulate bandwidth usage See Configuring Bandwidth Allocation Groups on page 7 6 14 10 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Interface Type specifies the physical interface over which this IP interface will run Descriptions of Parameters Specific to Frame Relay Interfaces Source Port DLCI identifies the physica
454. sparent Bridge frames and 802 5 SRB Source Route Bridge frames use the same NLPID and OUI over frame relay The difference between the two is the PIDs All FRX bridged protocols with the exception of 802 5 SRB are bridged as 802 3 TB frames i e PID of 0007 Also note that 802 5 SRB frames over frame relay in RFC1490 format are known in IBM terminology as BAN Type 1 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Status Displays frames Besides the encapsulation information the main difference between BAN and BNN LLC2 frames is that BAN sends the MAC addresses across the WAN BAN is usually used for connectivity to AS 400 hosts only Test Frame Examples LLC2 802 5 SRB BAN 0016 0027 0300800080C 200091040444400000008C0000000222282700004F3 03 Control 00 PAD 80 NLPID 00 80 C2 OUI 00 09 PID 10 PAD 40 Frame Control 444400000008 DMAC C000000002222 SMAC 8270 RIF routing control field 2 bytes 00 DSAP 04 SSAP F3 Test BF XID 7F SABME 73 UA 53 DISC 1F DM 97 FRMR LLC2 802 3 TB bridged 0016 0025 0300800080C 2000722220000001002000000444400030004F3 03 Control 00 PAD 80 NLPID 00 80 C2 OUI 00 07 PID 222200000010 DMAC 020000004444 SMAC 0003 Frame length 00 DSAP 04 SSAP F3 Test BF XID 7F SABME 73 UA 53 DISC 1F DM 97 FRMR Bridged Protocol Data Unit BPDU frame see 802 1d Spanning Tree Algorithm 0016 0043 0300800080C 2000E0
455. specified PUs to an active state Command V NET ACT ID linename A U C puname Options A activate all PUs on the line U activate all PUs on the line whose ISTATUS ACTIVE C activate all PUs except those that have never been activated NEVAC Of those activate all whose ISTATUS ACTIVE VARY INACT Function Changes the desired status of specified PUs to an inactive state Command V NET INACT IDz linename R F puname Options l de activate all PUs on the line immediately R de activate then re activate all PUs on the line immediately F reset all PUs on the line to an inactive state If appropriate a de activate command will be sent Modify Commands MODIFY CONFIG Function Modifies one or more configuration parameters for a specified PU or for a specified line if a PU is not specified There are two MODIFY CONFIG commands F NET CONFIG ID nnnn will update the System Memory value s in the SmartSwitch 1800 record for the SNA Port or LLC2 Host depending on the parameter The changes will be in effect until an on line database update or re IPL of the node is performed or an F NET CONFIG COMMIT see below is sent F NET CONFIG COMMIT will update the SmartSwitch record s Database value s with all changes made since the last COMMIT on line update of the record or node IPL Command F NET CONFIG IDz linename keyword zvalue puname Lkeyword value Keywords when the line is being mo
456. splays addresses and operational states of all current LLC2 sessions G IP Status Displays A IP Routing Table Display displays interfaces destinations network masks and flags B IP ARP Table Display displays ARP IP addresses MAC addresses and aging timers C IP Interfaces Display displays interface names MTU values network names masks IP and remote addresses and flags H Voice lInterfaces Display displays configured Voice interfaces D Events Chapter 22 Displays event alarm messages as they occur E Statistics Chapter 21 A Configure RLP Port Thresholds allows creation of a threshold for a statistic that when crossed will cause an alarm to be generated B Display RLP Port Frame Statistics displays the supported statistics for the specified component showing current values as well as the highest values reached by each statistic since the node was last booted or since maximum values were last cleared Display IP Statistics displays the supported statistics including current values and cumulative values since maximum values were last cleared Display ICMP Statistics displays the supported statistics including current values and cumulative values since maximum values were last cleared Display IP Interface Statistics displays the supported statistics including current values and cumulative values since maximum values were last cleared Display IPX Interface Statistics displays
457. sponse to the Status command indicating that no VC is currently set up on the port TRANSFER nnnn COM indicates a called DTE reselection by the PAD to nnnn SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 SmartSwitch 1800 Asynchronous PAD is the default welcome message displayed when the terminal is switched on and DSR and DCD become active When the node boots the software looks for a file named BANNER TXT which does not exist when the software is sent to the customer If the file is not present the default banner is dis played Any text editor can be used to create BANNER TXT which can consist of up to 256 bytes of ASCII and Esc characters The Esc characters can be used to activate ANSI screen functions for line drawings enhanced characters etc Copy the file to the OMNI4000 directory then reboot the node and the new banner will be in effect Error Codes Sent to Async PAD Port Async Terminal Operations Clearing Causes OCC Number Busy NC Network Congestion INV Invalid Facility NA Access Barred ERR Local Procedure Error RPE Remote Procedure Error NP Not Obtainable DER Out of Order PAD Invitation to Clear DTE DTE Originated Reset Causes DTE DTE Originated DER Out of Order RPE Remote Procedure Error ERR Local Procedure Error NC Network Congestion DO DTE Operational NO Network Operati onal A 5 Cause Codes Clearing Causes Appendix B Cause and Diagnostic Codes The clearing cau
458. st in the software and are recorded as System Memory values when the node is booted If the port type is the same in both sets of values both sets will be displayed Any change you make will be recorded as a Database value and will be copiedtothe System Memory side only if you press F7 Note that changes will not be actually be saved to the database until you press F3 to exit the record SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Node Defaults Parameters The parameters on the first two Node Defaults screens are listed in Table 4 1 and the NetView parameters on the third screen are listed in Table 4 2 on page 4 6 Descrip tions of most parameters follow each table Table4 1 Node Defaults Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Node Name up to 8 characters none Remote Control ID 0 15 digits none Remote Control Pwd 0 15 characters remote File Transfer ID 0 15 digits none File Transfer Pwd 0 15 characters ftran 0 15 digits none 0 15 characters alarms Primary Alarm Output ID 1 15 digit addre none Primary Alarm Output Pwd 0 15 characters alarms Secondary Alarm Output ID 1 15 digit addre none Secondary Alarm Output Pwd 0 15 characters alarms Y N 1 50 40 Min Congestion 1 50 96 Periodic Status Timer 0 30 min Line Idle Timer 0 65535 sec Alarm Autocall Timer 5 3600 sec Alarm Max Retries 0 99 0 no max 4 Remember that the software sees uppercase as different from lowercase A value of 0 means t
459. st number is 2 e Ethernet LLC2 Interface Chapter 9 which defines an interface to the Ethernet LAN Forthis example assume the interface numberisO It can be 0 95 but as with the hosts identification can be easier if the interface on the LAN side has the same number as the LAN card number which is always 0 in a SmartSwitch 1800 e Frame relay terminated LLC2 Interface Chapter 9 which defines an LLC2 ter mination point at the frame relay interface Be sure to configure the format as 8025 SRB or 8023 TB since the AS 400 needs to see the source MAC address which is not passed in the third format Native LLC2 For this example assume the interface number is 0 Note that the remote SmartSwitch 1800 must have a corresponding originated LLC2 Interface Local 881800 Interface 2 Interface 0 Frame Relay Ethernet Host 0 Host 2 Terminated Originated Terminated Figure 3 4 Local SmartSwitch 1800 in Configuration Example 3 Some sample LLC2 parameter values to configure on the local SmartSwitch 1800 are e Virtual LAN ID 007 hex e LLC2 Host 0 Host MAC Address 4000000000470 This is the AS 400 targeted address The 9th and 10th digits of the MAC address make up the host number e Session Type Originated This host will initiate the LLC2 session to the above MAC address Routing Subscriber ID 99 This ID must end in an asterisk and contain allthe digits of the Local Subscriber ID shown later in thi
460. t is the number of packets received trans mitted via a multicast address over the interface Broadcast In Out is the number of packets received transmitted via a broadcast address over the interface Frm Dropped In Out is the number of incoming outgoing frames that were dropped Q Dropped In is the number of incoming Q packets that were dropped Dropped Timeout is the number of transmitted frames that did not return due to atimeout or reception of another frame Errors In is the number of errors received over the interface Ethernet Specific Statistics Alignment Errors is the number of frames with FCS frame check sequence errors due to non integral lengths Xmt w 1 Coll is the number of frames that were transmitted after one collision with a frame transmitted from another node Overrun Errors is the number of frames that were not accepted due to DMA direct memory access overrun errors Xmt w mul Coll is the number of frames that were transmitted after multiple collisions Xmt Deferral is the number of frames that wereheldup due to traffic from other directions then transmitted later Xmt CD Heartbeat is the number of frames that were transmitted containing a CD collision detection signal Not Xmt Coll is the number of frames that were not transmitted due to colli sions Frm w lostCS is the number of frames that experienced a loss of the CS carrier sense signal at the r
461. t defines the service provided by an asynchronous PAD to connect a character mode terminal to an X 25 network XPAD is an integral to a SmartS witch 1800 transparent SNA PAD It can be used to network any SNA device that can be networked using any of the other SNA PAD types It can be considered a fully transparent PAD for synchronous protocols however it is not intended for this use because special application programs would have to be resident on the host Glossary glo 11 of Beginning Sync Char 10 6 of Beginning Sync Chars 11 6 of Leading Digits to Delete 13 15 of Trailing Pad Characters 10 6 of Trailing Pad Chars 11 6 1st 2nd etc Path Configured 8 26 9 16 10 10 11 10 12 17 A Abbreviated Address configuring Abort F10 2 6 Access Community Table 17 3 Ack 11 5 Activate Connection w o poll 10 6 Add Change CUG 8 20 Address 17 5 IP 14 1 subscriber 8 22 translation X 25 8 27 Alarm Autocall Timer 4 6 Alarm Max Retries 4 6 Alarms See Events Ancillary Device Control 12 4 Answer Non Configured 10 6 ARP table displaying 20 26 ASCII character table E 1 ASCII terminal See Async terminal Assemble Full Message 12 14 Async Console initialization reloading 19 15 Async PAD configuring 12 1 login parameters 12 7 Profile 12 2 Type 12 14 Async port configuring 12 8 Async terminal commands A 2 operations A 1 placing a call from A 2 service signals A 3 Auto Dial 13 13 Auto Dial Number 13 13
462. t menu level operations from unauthorized access Delete Record initiates the deletion of the displayed record A record for this port number containing all the default values will remain in the database Deleting a port record for an existing port will immediately disable the port CAUTICN Clear Max Stats on statistics displays clears the maximum cumulative values from the display restarting them at the current values F5 Copy Record copies a Port record s database values to another port s record which can be convenient if several records in a node will have identical or almost identical configurations After you perform this operation the copied to record will be displayed with the new database values The original record is automatically saved Press F7 to update the system memory values CE You cannot copy a physical port s record to a logical port or vice versa NL F6 Move Record copies a Port record s database values to another port s record then deletes the original record After you perform this operation the moved to record will be displayed with the new database values The original record is automatically saved Press F7 to update the system memory values CE You cannot move a physical port s record to a logical port or vice versa ARPTE F7 On line change in Node Defaults or Physical Logical Port configuration copies Database values to System Memory Database and System Memory
463. t not neces sarily literally they can use wildcards Node Name n odexyz Trans ktion Template Maintenance Port 3 Direction I Temphte ID 223 G19972U111154321 Temphte Name tempexamp Called Address P User Data D Calling Address L12345C23U 234 Protocol ID P Facilities P Figure 8 10 Address Translation Template Screen A C C B from Main Menu Translation Template Parameters Table 84 Translation Template Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Template Name 0 31 characters Called Address PR L X G U 2 Calling Address PR L X G U 2 User Data PR L X G U T Protocol ID P 0 8 characters Facilities P R 0 2 18 characters 1 Used simply for ease of identification 2 These determine the translation formula P Pass through unchanged R Remove entire field L Replace with literal digit X Replace with original called address G Replace with original callin g address U Replace with original user data T Replace with ASCII text F replacing all or part of a field see Replacing field type over the next few pages All wild cards are valid in the translation template allowing one template to function for many calls 8 28 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 The SmartSwitch 1800 routes traffic based on the user data field if the U operator is present in the SVC routing table The gateway also allows the U operator and can include user data field operations Replacing C
464. t number 0 7 for physical ports 8 63 for logical ports or 65 to monitor LLC2 sessions Valid numbers for physical ports depend on the model of SmartSwitch 1800 see port locations on page 6 1 While remotely controlling a node you cannot monitor the line to which you are connected NCHL A message like the following will appear Display Selection is mode Hexadecimal LCN All for RLP 0 Port 2 Level 3 Datalength 25 Data Link Mgmt FR1490 Classified Interpreted Selected Packets are QData Call Clear Restart Reset Int Diag Unk only SDLC Station Address Filter ff Options are F H L M S D Q C R T A 2 3 Y W E P and F3 to exit Press F to start The Options act as follows A Enables disables display of all no packets C Enables disables display of X 25 Call Request Clear packets D Enables disables display of Data packets on an X 25 port or non LMI DLCI information on a frame relay port On a frame relay port the C R FECN 20 7 BECN and DE bits will be displayed separately then the remainder of each frame will be displayed as data Allows specification of the length of frame relay data to display Stops the display from scrolling or restarts if stopped Toggles the data format between ASCII and hexadecimal Monitors a specific LCN or DLCI If packets are being exchanged the display will scroll them To return to monitoring all LCNs DLCIs select L and enter 0 when prompted for an LCN DLCI Monitors a different l
465. t of6 meaning that every six polling cycles the DTE will send a Full Status Enquiry tothe DCE asking for the status of the DLCIs on the link The interval between N1 polls is governed by the frame relay port parameter T1 LinkIntegrity Timer If N1 is setto 6 and T1 is set to 10 the status of DLCIs will be reported every 60 seconds If you are using DLCI backup you may have to lower these parameters thereby learnng the DLCI status sooner to avoid application timeouts on switchovers The tradeoff on this approach is more management overhead on the link so itis generally better to increase the applications timeout parameters Data Exchanges Data packet Q 922 UI frame entries include the following reading from the left e Timestamp if turned on e Tor R indicating whether the frame was transmitted or received by the port being traced e Four digit DLCI e Identification of any of these bits that are set B Backward Explicit Congestion Notification BECN F Forward Explicit Congestion Notification FECN D Discard Eligibility Indicator DE C R Command Response e Four digit packet length starting from the frame relay Q 922 control byte 20 13 20 14 The type of link management used has no bearing on the format of the Q 922 UI frame AGTE Trace Example The following is an example of a frame relay port trace of Modulo 8 X 25 logical port link activation X 25 encapsulated in frame relay per RFC1490 00
466. ta configured for the TP AD subscriber For SNA HP AD this means that no XID or SNRM command frame has been received for any link address con figured for the HPAD subscriber 22 8 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 System Events 403 404 405 406 407 408 Action Check the hardware at both ends to make sure the devices are oper ational and cables are securely connected For SNA also check the configuration records to make sure they match the HPAD TPAD Link Up Severity 2 Meaning The level 2 link is up Action None X 25 Link Failed Severity 2 Meaning The link has failed some modem controls are not present and the physical link is down Action Check the modem and cables for secure connections and proper Operation Restart with cc n de n Severity 4 Meaning A Restart has been issued with the cause code cc and diagnostic code dc shown See Appendix B Action Depends on the cause If necessary contact Cabletron Systems Technical Support See page 22 4 Operational Severity 2 Meaning For all ports except those noted below this means that the link is up For SNA TPAD this means that the XID exchange has been per formed and the XID data received in the response frame matches the XID data configured for the TPAD subscriber The link is ready to establish an X 25 connection with the remote HPAD For SNA HPAD this means that an XID or SNRM command frame ha
467. tation Address 01 FE hex This address identifies the PU you are configuring and must match the ADDR parameter set in the macro PU in the VTAM configuration The station address is usually set to C1 for point to point SDLC lines and in series C1 C2 C3 etc for mul tidrop lines SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Configuring SNA After entering a station address a screen similar to the following will be displayed Node Name nodexyz SDLC PU Subscriber Parameters screen 1 of 2 Port 0 Station Address C1 PUName Local Subscriber ID Remote Su bscriber ID Maxdata Max I Frm bytes frame Autocall Autocall Retry Time Autocall Retry Count Istatus LPDA Resource ID LLC2 Connection Configure LLC2 Parameters L2DatMode A B D E F G H I J K L Option name 110001010100 100001000001 265 Y 60 0 Active 0 N Two way Alternate Figure 9 3 SDLC PU Subscriber Parameters Screen An SNA TPAD subscriber can specify only one remote device which can be an HPAD or an X 25 connection to the host An HPAD subscriber can NIL specify up to 16 remote devices any of which can be a TPAD or an X 25 connection to the host An XPAD subscriber can specify only one remote device which must be another XPAD If SDLC LLC2 conversion will be done on the PU connection specify Y for item J in Fi gure 9 3 then press K to configure the LLC2 parameters listed in Table 9 2 If the PU is not
468. tch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 The third screen may be the last you need to configure for this port At that screen e If you want to configure one or more closed user groups press N See Con figuring Closed User Groups below e If this will beone end of a network trunk press O See Configuring a Network Trunk on page 84 e If this port will be connected to a dial modem press P See Configuring a Dial Port on page 8 5 e If noneofthe above applies press F3 twice to return to X 25 Port screen 1 then perform the next desired operation You cannot configure a port to be both a Network trunk and a Dial port MOL Configuring Closed User Groups Closed User Group CUG is a privacy feature that allows creation of up to 100 groups of users per port Members of a CUG can communicate with other members but access to and from network users outside that CUG may be denied determined by the settings configured for Outgoing Access Allowed and Incoming Access Allowed The CUG index number is included in call packets and is cross referenced with the CUG Index in the Smart Switch 1800 software Node Name nodexyz X 25 Port Parameters screen4 of 6 RLP 0 Port 1 Link State Linkup O U NIV ERSAL Sys ten Memory N A Preferential CUG Hag B Preferential CUG 0 C Incoming A cess Allowed N D Outgoing Access Allowed N E Add Change CUG F Delete CUG G Display all CUGs Option Figure 8 2 X 25 Port CUG Pa
469. te acc dx cn hase Ll0 BSC Interactive Device Parameters isesseeses semen 10 12 Chapter 11 Configuring BSC Batch Introduction 11 1 Required Configuration 11 1 Configuring BSC Batch Potts Ma BSC Batch Port Parameters Hr e Configunng Subscriber Addresses sirais nienean 118 Subscriber Parameletrs cacen entere err de hber Ln Sepe ea odia 11 9 Chapter 12 Configuring Async Ports Introduction 12 1 Required Configuration 124 Configuring Async PAD Profili 122 PAD Profile Parameters u Configuring Async PAD Los Parameteig pi E tal 12 7 Login Parameters x Lees Configuring Async Port Taconis 12 8 Async PAD Port Parameters E Configuring Subscriber FP itn MERO seinen cos 12 15 Subscriber Parameters 12 16 Configuring Abbreviated Adiresi 12 17 Configuring Async PVCs E E E D2e es Async PVC OEE E O A NA 12 19 Chapter 13 Configuring Voice Introduction 13 1 Required Configuration ee 13 2 Voice Configuration Menis rorem 13 2 Configuring Voice System Level Parameters Reviewing and Configunng the ore Dial al Map T Table eee Speed Dial Map Parameters Configuring Voice Ports Voice Port Parameters Reviewing and Configuring Vase nietas s Voice Interface Parameters Chapter 14 Configuring IP deme Introduction ms lel IP Addressing mm Using
470. te eda CH ear 12 3 12 2 Asyne PAD Login Parameters cessere eee erue L267 12 9 Asme Port Parime uius ossa uu aa dt 12 4 SVC Subscriber Paranieters iiee rm tete neues 12 16 125 Asme PVC Parimet anco ouo eerie i ace dote paiaded dade Li 13 1 Voce System Level Parameters auo edo vesee bak siae 13 3 13 2 loteinational Dialing Country COGO ueste rta tere idee oa 13 4 13 3 Speed Dial Map v aep I iiir iio PT ILS DA Vorne DOCE TNM ei ua 4 cratered eet eR uie ded 13 5 E amp M Switch Settings KE s 13 6 Voice Interface Consi mitis Pausan m f Nols 4 IP Node Defaults Pardsmelets 2i ecosesenc Fuse Dena E61 natia 14 4 14 2 Frame Relay IP Interface Parameters ssssee 14 7 143 X25 UP bileirace Parenter seg co cese exo a 14 8 14 4 Ethernet Token Ring IP Interface Parameters 14 9 14 5 IP Routine Pacomeleb aiaoscesebeteta ee te ebat PR ve avion vk e bg E a 15 1 IPX Node Defaults Parameters uisus cre ren tr rn n en err I5 2 PARP Euler Par Sti ic iie on bebe HR Et RR rENETS 15 5 15 3 IPASAP Filtet Panimot erranaren en donas LOD 15 4 TPX Packet Filte Param ete ts ssc iiec erts re Eb IHR niae ER ERR RE 15 6 155 IPA RIP Router Pilter Parameters uius ican nec to or E RE P deep 15 7 15 6 IPX Filter Applications Parameters seRSO 15 9 15 7 IPX Frame Relay Interface Parameters 15 10 15 8 IPXX 25 Interface Parameters 5 5 nee mme Ll 1 9 IPXLAN Intertace Parameters asesor r
471. ter 8 on the physical frame relay port that connects to the network Note that logical ports are numbered 8 63 because 0 7 are the physical ports e Voiceinterface Chapter 13 e SVC Subscriber Chapter 7 Frame Relay Chapter 8 X25 Chapter 9 SNA Chapter 10 BSC Interactive Chapter 11 BSC Batch Chapter 12 Async and Chapter 13 Voice which assign static addresses used to route the call request packets of the physical access ports to the logical port and vice versa Subscriber addresses are based on the X 121 Called Address field e Optional SVC subscriber records static routes for any attached X 25 DTEs These are needed to identify the attached DTEs X 121 Calling Addresses If an X 25 Call Request is received from the WAN link the SmartSwitch 1800 needs to know where to route the call 3 2 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Frame Relay PVC Passthrough 3174 Control Unit Running Frame Relay PVC ssigo0 IP amp SNA Frame Relay Switch or DCE FRAD Frame Relay PVC Figure 3 2 Configuration Example 2 Make sure the following are configured in each SmartS witch 1800 e Protocols Chapter 5 to load the frame relay protocol e Physical framerelay port Chapter 6 and Chapter 7 Configure the SmartS witch 1800 port to the 3174 aslogical DCE and the port to the frame relay switch as logical DTE e Frame relay PVC Chapter 7 which links the two frame relay ports in the SmartSwitch
472. tes sins max Mec eo ocak wt EE ted Sc Rr 21 14 21 12 ICMP Statistics Display rt tercie emer 21 15 21 15 IP Interface Statistics Display sce ets eerte zartreidet vesc 2118 21 14 IPX Statistics Display ttr ttd anurans ate e 22 1 Event Reporting Configuration Example sss 22 2 C 1 Store and Forward Dialing Example 1 ene sententias 12 C 2 Store and Foiwatd Dialing Example 2 siuconcsh serra rtm 3 C 3 Yanable Lengrb Dialing Exaile usa eso oe Certe bu cid s tereoikis LO C 4 Trunk qud Station KE ODDOOBOTLS decus prt n HELM E HD UE ERO FREV MR C 9 C 5 Intor PB A TO E cece ese recta ias TD C 6 AC I5 Example M I C 7 RITS Ut SB PIS a dac tered asses ripas em eer e a C 8 EXM COMO COIS P Md C 9 E amp M Signaling DIS suse ninien d de pn Vr ett etos eO D 1 Net View Access Options Menu Li usuccrueu cr cenae n ace rax ree Dad List of Tables 1 1 Models of SimartS With 1800 iiuasuesesee starten enhn tu Rina reperum LS 2 1 Pon EE HOO ee oput DAD dixe tabu E RUM M RO cM Made 2 2 2 2 Date and Time Parameters 0ccsccscsscessssccesccvecssccsssscsscsecscenesaee 278 3 1 MAC Address ConversiOD iin cce ecce me cop rtt errare rarus GOO 4 1 Node Defaults Parameters eere renes LAI 4 2 NetView Parameters ecce eese ee sente rere senses teses assesses 40 5 1 Protocol Parameters iaceo ue isis ent mra mra e ies stay rads cuir iis eed RUM e ttn 5 21 6
473. that match the fifth sixth and seventh characters of the Template ID matches the first two characters from the called address that have not already been changed 12 and matches the entire string of remaining characters Therefore the translation result is 12341234567800 Calling address The characters entered here are not necessarily the exact char acters of original calling address but rather the characters digits or wildcards of the template ID that match the original calling address Type G followed with no spaces by the desired characters 1 9 A F indicating which positions of the 15 digits in the calling address are to replace the selected portion of the packet U Original user data Note that the user data field is divided into four bytes of pro tocol identifier followed by twelve bytes of real user data the only part that can be changed here is the real user data The characters entered here are not the actual characters of user data but the characters di gits or wildcards of the template ID that match the original user data that part not already translated Type U followed with no spaces by the desired characters 1 9 A C indicating which positions of the twelve digits in the original user data are to replace the selected portion of the packet 8 29 gm If you are replacing called or calling address with original user data all the replacing characters must be digits Also the user data must be
474. the Node as an a IP Gateway ieee Lae Reguied Onis DERDOD o uecca pede bb a Configuring IP Node C NNNM 14 3 IP Node Defaults PaEGUISIGER a esee res e ronem ibcesiacceiunkl ses diri v D LIUIUS 14 4 IP Inter ace Diritielerg o creer cie eri rarae alec Dind Configuring Static IP Boutes uinci onto eot roro enar trea e pes rie 14 14 IP Routing Paraiieiers cient uere de rabaice ue hone DASS Chapter 15 Configuring IPX Introduction is o l Required Configuration ducudia ek RM eade Pat a aet natn Vane d adno PX Nod Detain M Late IPX Node Defaults Parameters asesor 12372 Configuring IP X Filters BR Configuring IPX Filter Definitions NT Configuring IPX Filter ApS EE LOWS IPX Filter Applications TEOSE aaen nineties 15 9 Onno Uris PATA E NE Tr EI IPX Interiace PaAnm a S ennncenranieatanaenasn OL Parameter Porph oir een 15 13 Conbsums Statio IPX BOUles u o ous opns Rr tO E eel Ro ewe oo et EOD IPX RIP Statie Route Paramelers ues e err obe pbttviuk aito 15 17 IPX SAP Static Route Parameters osuere rina en 19 716 Chapter 16 Configuring Bridging Introduction id m e er ES Required Configuration a Minas DEZ Configuring Default Node Wide Bridging ng Pav ditt acariens 16 3 Bridge Node Default Parameters si pronun 164 Configuring Bridge Filters HH LOO Configuring Filter Definitions Hues LOO How Filter Masks Work
475. the called address field in the template is X12345U12 A packet with called address 311012345678 and user data 99 is received The packet matches Template ID 3110 U therefore a translation occurs as follows User data 99 from the packet is appended to the called address 311012345678 The translated called address is 31101234567899 8 30 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Testing a Translation Template Press C at the X 25 Address Translation Templates Menu A C C C from the Main Menu to testa translation template you have created When prompted enter Port default is 0 Valid port numbers depend on the model of SmartSwitch 1800 see port locations on page 6 1 Direction incoming or O outgoing Default is 1 Called address to be translated Calling address to be translated Facility length facility user data The user data includes four bytes for pro tocol ID which must be entered as a hex string To specify only user data at the above prompt enter 00 for a facility length nothing for a facility then the desired user data including the 4 byte protocol ID After you enter this information the SmartSwitch 1800 creates a test packet and sends it through the translation process and displays the results as shown in the following example Configuring X 25 Packet Translation Test Direction Incoming 10010B7712345673333333000100000035353535 Port 0 Original Packet CalledA
476. the current value Action If this happens frequently check the line for noise and check for configuration errors on both the port and the connected device Rev Frm Sec exceeded T n C n Severity 4 Meaning The port statistic Received Frames Sec 100 has exceeded the threshold T n that was set by the user C n is the current value Action If this happens frequently you may need to reroute some traffic SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 312 Tran Frm Sec exceeded T n C n Severity 4 Meaning The port statistic Transmitted Frames Sec 100 has exceeded the threshold T n that was set by the user C n is the current value Action If this happens frequently you may need to reroute some traffic 313 RTrn Frm Sec exceeded T n C n Severity 4 Meaning The port statistic Retran Retransmitted Frames Sec 100 has exceeded the threshold T n that was set by the user C n is the current value Action If this happens frequently check the line for noise and check for configuration errors on both the port and the connected device 314 FCS Rej Sec exceeded T n C n Severity 4 Meaning The port statistic FCS Frame Check Sequence Errors Sec 100 has exceeded the threshold T n that was set by the user C n is the current value A value consistently greater than zero indicates line problems Action If this happens frequ
477. the distances can be multiplied by three RTS Control if Constant means that RTS will always be asserted and if External means that the CS U DS U will control RTS Lowest Highest Incoming Two Way Outgoing Channel are the ranges of logical channel numbers LCNs that subscribers can use for calls through this port The valid values for each parameter are determined as follows Channel Valid Values Lowest Incoming 1 through Highest Incoming Highest Incoming Greater than equal to Lowest Incoming Lowest 2 Way Greater than Highest Incoming Highest 2 Way Greater than equal to Lowest 2 Way Lowest Outgoing Greater than Highest 2 Way Highest Outgoing Lowest Outgoing through 4095 Changing any parameter to a value that violates this order automatically changes any other values now in violation specifying the first value s within the valid range If any pair is notused its constraints apply to the next higher or lower pair whichever is appropriate in the above list Flow Control Negotiation is an optional X 25 facility that permits negotiation of the flow control parameters packet and window sizes for either direction of data trans mission on a per call basis If this parameter is set to N the default packet and window sizes will be used If set to Y a packet and or window size included in a call packet will be used If either is not included the default for that parameter will be used Throughput Class Negotiation is an optiona
478. the protocol SNAP or Type ID to which the filter will apply Configuring Bridging 16 9 Table 16 6 Bridge NetBIOS Filter Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value Filter Name 1 31 characters none Source NetBIOS Name 1 36 characters none Destination NetBIOS Name 1 36 characters none Filter Name helps the user identify the filter The name is not used by the software Source NetBIOS Name should be obtained from a system administrator Destination NetBIOS Name should be obtained from a system administrator Configuring Bridge Filter Applications Bridge Filter Applications determine how filters will be used at the interface To review existing applications press H at the Filter Definitions and Applications Con figuration Menu or A A E F H from the Main Menu To configure an appli cation press I at the Filter Definitions and Applications Configuration Menu When prompted enter e Bridge Port Number 0 95 The default is 0 This number simply identifies the interface e Filter Type 4 Generic 5 MAC Default 6 LLC2 SAP 7 Protocol 8 Bridged native NetBIOS A MAC filter will be applied to LLC 2 traffic whether or not bridging CS is enabled in Bridge Node Defaults Other filter types will be NTE applied only if bridging is enabled e Direction i inbound or o outbound The default is o e Any other requested information referring to Table 16 7 16 10 SmartSwit
479. the remote end This ID is normally assigned by a system administrator Note that the LAN ID on an originated LLC2 interface must match the LAN ID on the corresponding termi nated interface Be aware that when configuring these records LAN IDs must be entered in hex Also note that other than the matching IDs on each originated terminated interface pair each LAN ID must be unique within the network on which the SmartSwitch 1800 will operate LLC2 Function Intemally LLC2 connects to interfaces via the Bridge protocol LLC2 Host and Interface records act as both origination and termination points for LLC2 For example if you are configuring SDLC to LLC2 conversion to be transmitted over frame relay to a Token Ring host the following is the logical LLC2 record flow SNA Port PU record page 9 4 with the parameter LLC2 Connection setto Yes This acts as the both the LLC2 Host and LLC2 Interface termination record In addition you must configure an originated Host forthe target MAC address and an interface for the physical connection Terminated LLC Host records always make the calls Originated LLC Host records always expect to receive calls Only one Originated and one Terminated LLC Host record can be configured for each MAC address SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 RFC 1490 Format An RFC1490 format used for SNA traffic is configured in the frame relay LLC2 Interface Bridge Port record The options in order of lowest ov
480. the spanning tree will eliminate dual paths for bridged traffic only a loop can be created causing a node failure Bandwidth Allocation Group assigns the interface to one of sixteen groups whose parameters regulate bandwidth usage See Configuring Bandwidth Allocation Groups on page 7 6 Host MAC Address 1s the MAC address of the host or workstation to which the remote device needs to connect Configuring SNA 9 29 Session Type if Originated means that LLC2 connections from the configured Host MAC Address can use this interface If Terminated connections to the configured address can use this interface LAN ID identifies the ring number used by a frame relay compliant source route bridge at the other end of this PVC The value is normally assigned by a system administrator Each LAN ID must be unique within the network on which this node will operate CAUTICN SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Chapter 10 Configuring BSC Interactive Introduction The SmartSwitch 1800 supports ports configured for BSC binary synchronous com munication Interacti ve which connects IBM 3270 hosts to remote CUs control units via HPAD TPAD communication over frame relay or X 25 BSC Interactive support includes e Full duplex line control e Point to point and multipoint operation on BSC Interactive ports e Autocall from BSC Interactive TPAD port e Each BSC Interactive HPAD supports up to 16 remote TPADs simultaneously e
481. themet Active Disabled 4294967296 4294967296 1 Token Ring Active Listening 4675561234 4675561234 2 Frm Nat LLC2 Active Learning 4561230000 4562222100 3 Frm 8023 TB Active Blocking 4561231100 4561231100 PgUp PgDn F2 Morelnfo F3 Exit Figure 20 12 Bridge Port Status Display C F D A from Main Menu Bridge ID is in the form Priority MAC Address where Priority is the hex Ee value of the Bridge Priority configured in the Bridge Port record Nd If there are more Bridge ports than will fit on one screen pressing PgUp or PgDn will display other screens Pressing F2 at the screen in Figure 20 12 will display a screen of Bridge Port Sta tistics for the ports on the above screen Information on the Bridge Port Status Display e Type Format identifies the interface type Ethernet Token Ring or frame relay and ifframe relay frame format Nati ve LLC2 8025_SRB or 8023_TB as configured in the Port record e Status Active or Inactive is the operational state of the underlying physical port The status will be Inactiveonly if the Blocked Port Flag see page 7 16 is enabled e Bridge State can be any of the following Note that a Bridge can be in an enabled state even if the physical portis inactive Disabled the Bridge port has been disabled by operator action The port can leave this state through an operator re enable or node IPL e Listening the Bridge port is transitioning to the Learni
482. time after which the node will poll its counterpart if there is no data transfer Logical DCE defines the port as if Y logical DCE or if N DTE The port must be configured as the opposite of the device at the other end of the connection Logical and physical DCE DTE are independent of each other e g a port can be a physical DCE and logical DTE Generate Clock specifies whether the port will generate the clock necessary to synchronize traffic over the link If the port is a physical DCE determined by the port s I O cable interface configure Generate Clock as Y since the physical DCE generates clock If the port is DTE configure Generate Clock as N Rcv Clock TT from DTE allows the clock to be looped back from the DTE using the TT Terminal Timing signal which can be helpful on high speed lines Generally if the local interface is physical DCE and the line speed is above 256 Kbps this parameter should be setto Y Make sure the remote DTE is configured to provide the terminal timing SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Configuring X 25 CSU DSU Operating Mode determines whether the attached modem connection can be normal or limited distance LDM where the distance depends on the wire gauge number of splice points and line speed For example 26 gauge wire and a line speed of 64K bps allows a distance of 15000 feet Lowering the speed to 56K increases the allowable distance to 18400 feet If 19 gauge wire is used
483. tion operating state performance etc that is reported to automatic and specified destina tions within the network the SmartSwitch 1800 is on This term is synonymous with al arm i Four wire is a voice circuit with a separate pair of wires for inbound and outbound signals Fragment is an IP datagram that is a piece of a larger datagram the larger one having been seg mented to allow it to pass through a network that did not support the larger datagram See Fragmentation Fragmentation is the breaking up of IP datagrams into smaller segments to allow the datagrams to pass through a network that does not support the full size If IP fragments the data grams they will be reassembled atthe final destination if another protocol fragments them for example to pass through an X 25 network they will be reassembled atthe other side of that network Frame is a unit of data transmitted between OSI level 2 entities and containing its own control information for addressing and error checking SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Glossary Frame relay is transmission of data in a format that combines level 2 and level 3 functionality but provides connection information only for level 2 FRX is a Cabletron product line FRX4000 FRX6000 that can connect to and interact with a SmartSwitch 1800 The full names for these products are Netlink FRX4000 and Netlink FRX6000 FXO is a voice configuration that interfaces wit
484. to the right of the colon contains the data in a data packet Data exceeding the screen width is displayed on the next line 20 10 X 25 Port Trace Example The following is an example of an X 25 port LAPB trace of Modulo 128 link acti vation 01 01 03 01 01 03 03 01 01 SABME P UA F l N R 0 N S 0 0005 1000F B0700 l N R 1 N S 0 0005 1000F B8700 RR N H 1 RR PN R 1 RR FN R 1 RR PN R 1 RR FN R 1 SDLC HPAD Port Trace Example The following is an example of an SDLC HPAD level 2 port trace Controller Address 03 Modulo 8 Link Activation and SNA PU and LU Destination Address Field 02 activation Note that this controller is but 1 on a 3 drop multipoint line The other 2 are addressed 01 and 02 and are in Normal Response Mode already activated and exchanging Receiver Ready s 01 01 02 02 03 03 01 01 02 02 03 03 03 01 01 02 02 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 01 01 02 02 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 RR RR RR RR P N R 3 Receiver Ready Poll for controller 01 P means Poll bit is set FN R 1 Receiver Ready Response from controller01 F means Final bit set nothing to send P N R 5 or done F N R 7 SNRM P UA RR RR RR RR RR RR l RR RR RR RR RR l RR l l l l RR RR RR RR RR l F P N R 3 F N R 1 P N R 5 F N R 7 P N R 0 F N R 0 N R 0 N S 0 0020 2D00000037826B80001102010500000007DB0000 SNA P NR 3 ACTPU RU REQ F N R 1
485. tor B LAN Capture Status and Control Menu C LAN Capture Review F Protocol Status A IPXRIP Table Display B IPXSAP Table Display C SDLC PU Status D Bridge Status Displays A Bridge Port Status Display B Bridge Forwarding Table Display E Frame Relay Backup Status A Display States for all Backup DLCIs on a Port B Display States for all Primary DLCIs on a Port C Display States for all Backup DLCIs in a Group F LLC Session Status G IP Status Displays A IP Routing Table Display B IP APP Table Display C IP Interfaces Display H Voice llnterfaces Display Events F 3 F4 Statistics Configure RLP Port Thresholds Display RLP Port Frame Statistics Display IP Statistics Display ICMP Statistics Display IP Interface Statistics Display IPX Interface Statistics Display LAN Card Interface Statistics Display Frame Relay Utilization Statistics Display Voice Statistics A Display Voice Application Statistics B Display Voice Connection Statistics Reports A Create Configuration Report B View Configuration Report C View Initialization Report D View Previous Initialization Report rEromnmmoou SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Glossary 802 3 is an IEEE standard for LANs that defines the physical layer as coax or unshielded twisted pair and the MAC medium access control layer as CSMA CD carner sense multiple access with collision detection 802 5 is an IEEE standard for LANs that defines the physical layer as shielde
486. ts MAP Forward Delay 4 25 sec intervals Forwarded Output Digits Ext The sequence of steps in placing a call are as follows 1 The user attached to Node Port 4 dials 33 When no additional digits have been entered for three seconds Dial Timer 3 the system assumes dialing is complete Because the configured number of speed dial digits is four Dial Digits 4 the dial string is padded with leading zeros Therefore the speed dial number 0033 is used to find the destination in the map table The speed dial map entry at 0033 is retrieved and the call is placed to Node 2 Port 4 After a 1 2 second pause Forward Delay 2 times 25 sec the secondary dial string 5555 is output Forwarded Output Digits EXT When the same configuration parameters are specified the following steps describe the sequence of events that occur when the user dials a three digit dial string 1 2 The user attached to Node 1 Port 4 dials 333 When no additional digits have been entered for three seconds Dial Timer 3 the system assumes dialing is complete Because the configured number of speed dial digits is four Dial Digits 4 the dial string is padded with a leading zero So the speed dial number 0333 is used to find the destination in the map table The speed dial map entry at 0333 is retrieved and the call is placed to Node 3 Port 5 After a two second pause Forward Delay 2 sec th
487. uffers until the buffers reach Max Congestion or the collecting node begins accepting events again 22 2 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Event Generation As soon as a message generating event occurs a Call Request is automatically sent to the Primary Alarm Output ID and the Secondary Alarm Output ID if configured The event is stored in the originating node s buffer until the event connection is activated All events are transmitted in raw data format to the collecting node which constructs event messages and sends them to the display device s An internal timer limits the time events are kept inthe system buffer ifthe system fails to bring the event connection up If the timer expires the buffer is cleared The event connection remains active until the event system detects that there are no events occurring during the time period set for the Line Idle Timer After the event connection is cleared the event system will repeat the above procedures if any events occur Displaying Events To display any local events on the screen as they occur press D at the Main Menu Event messages will continue to be sent to any destinations specified by the param eters described earlier in this chapter While this feature is activated you cannot perform other operations on the Cer screen Also if the Primary Alarm Output device is unreachable no local NOTE events will be displayed A display at a collecting node looks like the exampl
488. ugh the SmartSwitch supports bandwidth allocation routers and FRADs that ini tiate frame relay passthrough do not Be sure you fully understand the needs of the users of the node before assigning allocation groups this feature can show adverse effects if configured incorrectly GUIEN Be sure to configure the same bandwidth allocation values at both ends of a connection between SmartSwitch 1800s To configure a bandwidth allocation group press H at the Node Configuration Menu or A A H from the Main Menu A screen similar to the following will be dis played 7 6 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 d NodeName node xyz Bandwidth A location Group screen 1 of 4 Dynamic Optimization Group 1 Percentage Group 1 Excess Priority Group 1 Use Excess Burst Group 2 Percentage Group 2 Excess Priority Group 2 Use Excess Burst Group 3 Percentage Group 3 Excess Priority Group 3 Use Excess Burst Group 4 Percentage Group 4 Excess Priority MR OMR OME OME OF Group 4 Use Excess Burst Page 2 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N Option Figure 7 2 Bandwidth Allocation Group M enu AL ALIH from Main Menu Pressing N will display Page 2 which contains parameters for groups 5 8 Page 3 contains groups 9 12 and Page 4 contains groups 13 16 Bandwidth Allocation Group Parameters Explanations of the parameters follow the table Table 7 1 Bandwidth Allocation Group Parameters Parameter Valid Values De
489. ult CUG for the port Any calls that do not specify a CUG will default to this one if Preferential CUG Flag is Y A new port has CUG 0 specified here Incoming Access Allowed determines whether this port will be allowed to receive calls from outside its CUGs Outgoing Access Allowed determines whether this port will be allowed to make calls outside its CUGs Dial Port Parameters Dial Support specifies whether this port is connected to a dial modem and if so whether connec tions will be initiated through dial in or dial out calls Signaling differences prevent configuration for both dial in and dial out on the same port A dial out port will establish a link only when an outgoing X 25 call is placed at which time the port will raise DTR and the attached modem will dial a stored number to aremote modem toestablish an X 25 connection A dial in port will establish a link only when a call is received If this port is configured as a network trunk the value for Dial Support must be None Inactivity Timer will be started as soon as there are no active connections on a dial port It has no function on a non dial port If no new connections are established before the period Configuring X 25 8 11 expires the port will be disabled until the next call is placed if a dial out port or the Disconnect Timer expires see next entry if a dial in port Disconnect Timer is the length of time adial in port will remain disabled after exp
490. umbered Interface allows the point to point frame relay interface to be configured without specifying a source IP address If Y the address of the lowestIP interface number not the lowest address but the number in the range 0 256 that identifies the interface in the Smart Switch is used as a default source IP address It does not matter what type that interface is All un numbered interfaces on the SmartS witch use the same default address If anew interface with a lower number is added that interface s address will become the new default source IP address but only after the next IPL of the SmartSwitch Naturally this feature works only if there is at least one numbered interface in the device If there are none all un numbered interfaces remain disabled Once a num bered interface is added all un numbered interfaces will become active Source IP Address is the IP address of the end to end sender The valid range of values guarantees that you cannot configure all 0s or all 1s fora network ID node ID or subnet ID See page 14 1 Configuring IP Routing 14 11 14 12 Network Mask is used during routing to determine the portion of the address associated with the network and subnetwork if any All bits associated with the network subnet should be set to 1 and must be contiguous Descriptions of Parameters Specific to X 25 Interfaces Destination IP Address is the IP address of the end to end receiver for point to
491. urge Capture F7 Start Capture Figure 20 8 LAN Capture Status and Control Menu C E B from Main Menu Information in this Display e Protocols shows whetheror not each LAN protocol is loaded See Chapter 5 e Recording will be Active or Not Active depending on whether or not a capture is currently occurring e Buffer willbe Allocated if Recording is Active or Not Allocated if Recording is Not Active If Allocated the percentage of buffer filled and the number of events will also be shown e LANO identifies the LAN interface type shows whether or not a capture is occurring on the interface and identifies the traffic type s to be monitored Each of the configurable parameters items A F will toggle through the valid settings when selected Note however that the changes will not be displayed on the LANO line above until you press F1 to refresh the display Status Displays 20 17 Possible parameter settings are Parameter Values LAN Card 0 None Trace IP On Off Trace IPX On Off Trace Bridge On Off Trace Unknown On Off When Full Stop Wrap IP IPX and Bridge can be set to On only if the protocols are loaded in the SmartS witch If When Full is Stop the capture will stop automatically when the buffer is full If When Full is Wrap the monitor will continue to capture data overwriting data in the buffer as necessary The first data in will be the first overwritten The function keys work
492. used by the local node to delay sending an acknowledgment of a received Information LPDU Delaying acknowledgments for as long as possible minimizes the number of acknowledgments that must be sent since more than one received frame can be acknowledged with one trans mission Thetimer will be started when the LPDU is received and reset when the acknowledgment is sent If the timer expires before the acknowledgment is sent it should be sent as soon as possible is the Inactivity Timer used by the local node to detect an inoperative condition in either the remote link station or the transmission medium The timer will be started if T1 has been reset for one of the reasons listed under T1 earlier and additional LPDUS have been sent by the remote link station and there are no outstanding acknowledgments or responses from the local node 9 24 N3 Tw N2 If the local node does not receive an LPDU before Ti expires the node will send an LPDU with the P bit set to B 1 to solicit the remote station s status Recovery will then proceed as described under T1 earlier is the number of Information LPDUs that will be received before the local node sends an acknowledgment This parameter is used in conjunction with T2 to allow stations to reduce traffic A counter is initialized to N3 and will be decremented by one each time a valid sequential Information LPDU is received When the counter reaches 0 an acknowledgment will be sent N3 will
493. ut 0 Dropped Timeout 0 Xmit w 1 Coll Xmit w mul Coll Xmt CD Heartbeat Fm w Lost CS Underruns coococcccococc cococccoccococcc F4 Clear Cumuhtive Statistics Others Exit Figure 21 10 LAN Interface Statistics Display E G from Main Menu This example shows an Ethernet interface A Token Ring interface display is similar Statistics for both are listed later Information in this Display e Hardware Status will be one of these 9 9 o Not Installed Failed Startup Diagnostics Failed due to Configuration Problem Not Operational due to Hardware Fault Operating Marginally due to Soft Faults Fully Operational e MAC Status can be either both neither of these Statistics Displays Bound the MAC and protocol dri vers are linked to enable communication between them Open the OpenAdapter function which activates the adapters network connection is enabled 21 11 21 12 Packet Filters setin commands from the protocol specifies the types of packets that can be received on this interface more than one category can be specified Directed and Multicast or Group and Fuctional Broadcast Promiscuous any packet on the LAN AnySource Packet any source routing packet on the LAN Packets In Out is the number of packets received transmitted over the interface Bytes In Out is the number of bytes received transmitted over the interface Multi Cast In Ou
494. valid user data version mismatch Call cleared because of call looping or Local or remote subscriber not defined Call cleared because port is quiesced or MACYS AP combo in use Out of memory for control block Out of resources no more control block available Out of resources cannot generate S MAC SSAP entry Out of resources cannot get free idblknum Hash entry for connection already exists Out of resources no memory for hash entry Out of resources no more concatanations available dlger logic error MAC Driver Deleted Received DISCONNECT Received FRMR Due to configuration change Received DISCONNECT No code cleanup problem Timer Ti expired Timer T1 expired SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Cause and Diagnostic Codes 93 94 F4 147 148 244 Timer TConn expired Invalid LPDU Connection rejected transient condition BS Appendix C Voice Configuration Reference Information Voice Port Operation Users of equipment attached to a SmartSwitch 1800 Voice port can dial a long form number or use any of the numbers defined in the S martSwitch s speed dial map table Once the speed dial table has been configured you should make the table available to the voice and fax users You can also configure the SmartSwitch to automatically dial a speed dial number Both the long and short numbers access a configured specific destination When a user entered speed dial or long form number is used the call can ac
495. values are described on page 4 2 for Node Defaults and page 6 3 for Ports F9 Stop Remote terminates a remote control connection gives you the option of rebooting the remote node and returns control to the local operator F10 Abort or Reboot Remote Abort initiates areboot of alocal node Reboot Remote initiates a reboot of a remote node under local control You must then press F9 to exit remote control Before aborting or rebooting a node notify all users that the node will be going down CAUITICN Getting Started 2 7 2 8 ESC Quit abandons the changes you have made since the last save via F3 or F7 and returns you to the previous menu Character Select Option or Change Field Select Option appears if an option has not yet been selected Change Field Press the letter corresponding to the field you want to change then type in the new information and press Enter PgUp PgDn all ows you to display multiple screens one at a time for a record if the record has more than one Function Keys on an ASCII Terminal Standard PC keyboard function keys are represented as follows on an ASCII terminal keyboard Note that O under Maps to is an escape character followed by an uppercase letter O PC ASCII Keyboard Keyboard Maps to F1 PF1 OP F2 PF2 OQ F3 PF3 OR F4 PF4 OS F5 5 Ou F6 6 Ov F7 7 Ow F9 L comma OI F10 penod On PgUp
496. vice can be configured to support RIP Version 1 Version 2 Multicast or Version 2 Broadcast Updates in any of the three versions can be received however only updates of the configured version will be transmitted If you will be using RIP version 1 you do not need to configure a version since version 1 is the default in the database If you will be using another version press A at the Configure IP LLC2 BRIDGE IPX Default Parameters Menu or A A E A from the Main Menu Node Name nodexyz IP Node Defaults Menu A RIP VersionNumber Option Figure 14 1 IP Node Defaults Menu AL ALIELLA from Main Menu After changing the RIP version press A C E G from the Main Menu to update the node with the change Configuring IP Routing 14 3 IP Node Defaults Parameters Table 14 1 IP Node Defaults Parameters Parameter Valid Values Default Value RIP Version RIPv1 RIPv2 RIPv1 Compatibility RIPv1 RIP Version determines the version of RIP that will be supported in the SmartSwitch 1800 RIPv1 and RIPv2 are incompatible with each other on the same network however each is compatible with RIPv1 Compatibility If transitioning a network from RIP Version 1 to Version 2 reconfigure each device to RIPv1 Compatibility until all devices are con figured for RIPv1 Compatibility Each device can then be configured for RIPv2 Configuring IP Interfaces An IP interface allows the Internet Protocol to be executed over a
497. vice only if it is available Problems with the secondary device will not stop delivery to the primary device If specifying an async port to a printer be sure to configure the Async PAD CS Profile see page 12 2 to match the line speed of the printer Do not con Neill figure the port for Autobaud Primary Alarm Output Pwd is a password that will be used with the Primary Alarm Output ID If that ID is a col lecting node the local S martSwitch s Primary Alarm Output Pwd Password must match the collecting node s Collecting Node Pwd 4 4 SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Secondary Alarm Output ID is used for acollecting node to send alarms to a second location other than that spec ified by the Primary Alarm Output ID This parameter has no function on non collecting nodes Secondary Alarm Output Pwd is a password that will be used if the Secondary Alarm Output ID is an address that is also associated with a password If so both passwords must match Collecting Node is a SmartSwitch 1800 or other Cabletron frame relay access device to which alarms are sent from other Cabletron frame relay access devices Any SmartS witch 1800 9W004 FRX4000 or FRX6000 can be a collecting node which nodes send their alarms to a collecting node is determined by the Primary Alarm Output IDs and pass words of the other nodes these must match the Collecting Node ID and pass word of their collecting node The number of nodes that can rep
498. vices there are noissues with the 5494 as it isa PU2 0 2 1 node 5294s and 5394s can only be directly connected to S martSwitch 1800 devices via SDLC or X 25 with speeds up to 64 kbps 5494s can be connected via SDLC or frame relay with speeds to 128 kbps or by Token Ring or Ethernet 802 3 3x74s SDLC over Frame Relay to SNA Host 3X74 Local Remote SS 1800 SS 1800 Figure 3 6 Configuration Example 4 Make sure the following are configured in the local SmartSwitch 1800 e Protocols Chapter 5 to load frame relay SNA and LLC2 and Bridging required with LLC2 e Virtual LAN ID page 9 17 which is necessary for LLC2 functionality Introduction to Database Configuration 3 7 3 8 Key Points e Physical frame relay port Chapter 6 and Chapter 7 e Physical SNA port Chapter 6 and Chapter 9 The link station SDLC LLC2 conversion point is also defined in this record under SNA PU Parameters These parameters act as both LLC2 Originated Host and Originated Interface records e Terminated LLC2 Host Chapter 9 which points to the frame relay interface Note that the remote SmartSwitch 1800 must have an Originated LLC2 Host e Terminated LLC2 Interface Chapter 9 which defines an LLC2 termination point at the frame relay interface Note that the remote SmartSwitch 1800 must have an Originated LLC2 Interface e SVC Subscriber Chapter 7 to route the incoming connection request from the frame relay LLC2 Terminat
499. went from the Learning state to the Forwarding state OutCfgDrop is the number of Configuration BPDUS that were dropped due to a lack of resources InCfgBPDU is the number of received Configuration BPDUs OutOctets is the number of transmitted octets InFrames is the number of received frames OutTcnDrops is the number of TCN BPDUS that were dropped due to a lack of resources InTcnBPDU is the number of received TCN BPDUs InOctets is the number of received octets SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 LAN Interface Statistics Displays To dispay LAN Interface statistics press G at the Statistics Menu When prompted enter e LAN Card Number Press Enter accepting the default and only valid value of 0 e Report Interval 5 65535 Default is 5 Node Name nod e_xyz LAN Card Statistics Dis play Card Number 0 Type Ethemet MTU 1500 Report Interval sec 5 Current Time 6 05 97 10 32 45 Hard ware Status Fully Operational MAC Status Bound Open Packet Filters Directed Multicast or Grou p Functional Broadcast STATISTIC CURR CUMULATIVE STATISTIC CURR CUMULATIVE Packets In 21 269134 Packets Out 21 269420 Bytes In 8161 139690157 BytesOut 8161 139822450 Multi Cast In Broadcast In Frm Dropp ed In Q DroppedIn Errors In Alignment Errors Overrun Errors Xmt Deferral Not Xmt Coll Late Collision CS NOL Multi CastOut 0 0 Broadcast Out 0 Frm Dropped O
500. with the secondary IP address This count is the number of hops subnet gateways in the overall path over the internet associated with this interface usually zero During routing the interface with the lowest count will be selected RIP Support specifies the level of RIP support for the secondary IP address Enabled All RIP messages will be accepted and messages of the version configured in IP Node Defaults A A E A from the Main Menu see page 14 3 will be transmitted Rcv Only RIP messages will be accepted but not transmitted Disabled No RIP messages will be accepted or transmitted Configuring Static IP Routes Routing of IP traffic is handled dynamically by such protocols as RIP as well as via static routes configured in the SmartS witch 1800 Static routes are generally used for fixed paths with predictable traffic loads such as inter nodal management To display configured static routes press F at the Connections and Routing Paths Menu or A D F from the Main Menu To configure a route press G at the Connections and Routing Paths Menu When prompted enter a Route Number 0 32767 Default is 0 This is simply an identifier Node Name nod exyz IP Static Routing Configuration Route Number 1 Router 255 255 255 255 Metric Count 1 Route Type Network Route Destination 0 0 0 0 Destination Mask 255 255 255 255 Option Figure 14 4 IP Routing Record AL D G from Main Menu 14
501. ws the DLCI to be used only by X 25 Each protocol in would require its own X 25 virtual circuit and level 3 windows Modulo is the number of values used in X 25 level 2 sequenced packets The actual packet numbering is 0 7 for modulo 8 and 0 127 for modulo 128 Maximum LAPB Window Size is the maximum number of sequentially numbered I frames that can be waiting for acknowledgment by the next station in the path If this number is exceeded no frames will be transmitted until an acknowledgment is received A larger value allows faster throughput but increases the number of frames that may have to be retransmitted if there is a problem N2 Retransmit Count is the maximum number of times the node will attempt to send an I frame after a Retransmit Period expiration A larger value for this parameter increases the proba bility of an eventual correct transfer between DTE and DCE but a smaller value permits faster detection of a permanent error condition T1 Retransmit Period is the length of time before transmission of an I frame if the previous transmission is not acknowledged If the period expires the software will reset the timer and transmit asupervisory frame demanding immediate acknowledgment Also the Maximum Retransmissions see that entry counter will be incremented The default value of 3000 ms allows avoidance of unnecessary retransmission of frames that have merely been delayed T2 Wait Ack Period is the length oftime t
502. xplanation Flow Control Negotiation Y N Throughput Class Negotiation Y N Local Charging Prevention Y N Reverse Charge Acceptance Y N Fast Select Acceptance Y N Y N Outgoing Calls Barred Y N Maximum Packet Size 128 4096 continued onnextpage Configuring X 25 8 13 8 14 Table 8 2 Logical Port Parameters Parameter Default Packet Size Maximum Window Size Default Window Size Maximum Throughput Class Default Calling Address T20 Restart Timer sec T21 Incoming Call Timer sec T22 Reset Timer sec T23 Clear Timer sec DTE Restart Retry Count DTE Reset Retry Count DTE Clear Retry Count CUG Parameters Preferential CUG Flag Preferential CUG Incoming Access Allowed Outgoing Access Allowed Display All CUGs Delete CUG Valid Values Default Value 16 4096 128 2 7 7 1 2 see explanation 0 15 characters 1 600 1 600 1 600 1 600 0 99 0 99 0 99 Y N 0 99 Y N Y N See explanation See explanation See explanation Once this parameter has been selected for the first time 1 becomes the default value 2 1 7ifmodulo 8 1 127 if modulo 128 Changing this parameter will disable the link only if the new value changes the modulus 3 Omeansthe parameter is not used Maximum Packet Size values are 128 256 512 1024 2048 amp 4096 Default Packet Size values are all of the above plus 16 32 amp 64 If X 25 will be run over this port do not configure a size greater than 2048 If 4
503. xpressed in hertz Hz Banner is the display area at the top of a screen that generally features product name revision etc BPDU stands for Bridge Protocol Data Unit also called a Hello message Bridges peri odically send BPDUs to update each other on their status bps stands for bits per second which is a rate of data transmission Bridge is a device that links two local area networks LANs receiving data from one LAN and forwarding it to the other Broadcast is a method of delivering the same data to all hosts in a network Buffer is a storage device or routine used to compensate for a difference in the rate of data flow or time of occurrence when transmitting data between devices Call is a request for connection between two DTES each using a logical channels across the DTE DCE interface Checksum is an arithmetic sum used to verify the integrity of bits of data A bad checksum means that the data is corrupted An IP checksum is calculated only for the IP header and is re calculated each time the datagram is transmitted Cluster controller is a device that controls input output of a group of devices terminals printers PCs etc attached to it and linking these devices to a mainframe SmartSwitch 1800 4 0 User Guide Rev 01 Glossary Composite is the input output port of a local multiplexer that transmits and receives the multi plexed voice and data from a remote multiplexer Co
504. youto delete all dynamic entries New entries will Nc lL then be added as frames containing MAC addresses are received on Bridge ports that are in Learning or Forwarding state Information in this Display e MAC Address source or destination address received in a frame e BrPort the Bridge port used for forwarding traffic to the associated MAC address e Flags e Static The entry is fixed in the software Dynamic Theentry was added when the address was received e LLC2 The address is used for terminated LLC2 traffic All SNA frames identified by SAP multiples of 4 will be handled by LLC2 rather than bridged directly NCHL Configured The LLC2 address has been explicitly configured for a Host record e Native The addresses is accessible via a native LLC2 interface e Discovery Pending The MAC address was the destination address in the received frame and the FRX software is trying to find the correct Bridge port for that address Therefore the port will be identified as Unk or unknown until it is discovered Don t Forward Frames to the address will not be forwarded Addresses with this flag are destined for the local bridge or are reserved functional addresses defined in the 802 1d specification and IBM Token Ring archi tecture Status Displays 20 25 IP Status Displays IP Routing Table To display a list of active IP routes press A at the IP Status Displays Menu or C F

Cabletron Systems SPECTRUM 1800 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents